Y0720c1609.pdf

FACTORY AUTOMATION

Low Voltage Circuit Breakers General Catalog

Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

INDEX

10. Low Voltage Products Website

1

Introduction and Features of WS-V Series………………………………………………………………… 2 1. Outline of Circuit Breakers……………………………………………………………………………… 10 1) Product Line-up… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10 2) Instructions for Application………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 12

2. Detailed Specifications… ……………………………………………………………………………… 13

2

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.............................. 14

5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers......................... 35

1) NF-C (Economy class)...........................................................14 2) NF-S (Standard class)............................................................16 3) NF-L/NF-H/NF-R (High-performance class)...........................20 4) NF-U (Ultra current-limiting class)..........................................23

1) MDU Breakers........................................................................35

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers........................... 24

3

1) NV-C (Economy class)...........................................................24 2) NV-S (Standard class)............................................................26 3) NV-H/NV-R (High-performance class)...................................28

3 Motor Protection Breakers.................................... 30 1) NF-MB....................................................................................30

4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers............................. 31

6 Miniature Circuit Breakers.................................... 44 1) BH..........................................................................................44 2) BV...........................................................................................46

7 Circuit Protectors.................................................. 49 1) CP..........................................................................................49

8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers...............................52 1) Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series).................52

9 Earth Leakage Relays............................................ 54 1) Earth Leakage Relays............................................................54

1) UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers........................31 2) UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers......................34

4

3. Special-purpose Breakers… …………………………………………………………………………… 57 1) Mag Only (Instantaneous Tripping Circuit Breakers).............................................................................................................................. 58 2) DC MCCBs and DSN Switches.............................................................................................................................................................. 58 3) 400Hz MCCBs........................................................................................................................................................................................ 58

4. Selection… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 59 1 Construction and Operation................................. 60

5 6

1) Construction of MCCB............................................................60 2) Construction of ELCB.............................................................62

2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB.............................. 63 1) Selecting Procedure...............................................................63 2) Features and Performance.....................................................64 3) Current-carrying Capacity and Operating Temperature.........66 4) Application of Circuit Breaker According to Breaking Capacity........68 5) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Electric Lamp or Heater Circuit......69 6) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Motor Branch Circuit.............71 7) Selection of Motor Protection Breaker....................................73

8) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit......................74 9) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Transformer Primary Side....75 10) Combination for Selective Breaking.....................................79 11) Combinations for Cascade Breaking....................................81 12) International Standard Conformance List.............................83

3 Selection of ELCB.................................................. 86 1) Electric Shock Protection.......................................................86 2) ELCB Grounding Method.......................................................87 3) Rated Voltage and Number of Poles......................................88 4) Earth Fault Protection Coordination and Combination of Devices........89

5. Installation and Connection… ………………………………………………………………………… 91

7 8 9

1) Connection Types................................................................................................................................................................................... 92 2) Connecting Parts.................................................................................................................................................................................... 94 3) Standard Tightening Torque................................................................................................................................................................... 95 4) Crimp Terminal Type.............................................................................................................................................................................. 96 5) Busbar.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 98 6) Insulation Distance on Power Source Side............................................................................................................................................ 99 WS-V Series Next-generation MCCB and ELCB, AE-SW Series ACB, DIN Series MCB 7) Effect of Installation Orientation........................................................................................................................................................... 100 8) Connection of Line and Load............................................................................................................................................................... 100

6. Accessories………………………………………………………………………………………………… 101 1 Internal Accessories............................................ 102

2 External Accessories.......................................... 117

1) Internal Accessories ............................................................102 2) Kinds of Internal Accessories ..............................................103 3) Operations and Ratings of Switches ...................................103 4) Maximum Number of Internal Accessories .........................104 5) Cassette Type Accessories . ...............................................109 6) Shunt Trip (SHT) .................................................................111 7) Undervoltage Trip (UVT) .....................................................112 8) Lead Wire Drawing . ............................................................114 9) Lead Wire Terminal Block ...................................................114 10) Test Button Module (TBM) ................................................115 11) Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) ...................................................116

1) F-type Operating Handle (Breaker Mount Type)..................117 2) V-type Operating Handle (Door Mount Type).......................119 3) Terminal Covers...................................................................121 4) Insulating Barriers................................................................124 5) Handle Lock Devices, Lock Covers, Auxiliary Handles, Card Holders......127 6) Mechanical Interlocks (MI)...................................................129 7) Boxes for Circuit Breakers and Boxed Circuit Breakers.......130 8) Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers and Electrical Operation Device......133 9) Distribution Board Mounting Parts, Lock Covers and Handle Caps.......136 10) IEC 35-mm Rail Mounting Adapters...................................137

7. Characteristics and Dimensions… …………………………………………………………………… 139 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers............................ 140

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers........................... 198

• NF30-CS................................................................................140 • NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV....................................................142 • NF125-CV/SV/HV..................................................................144 • NF125-UV..............................................................................146 • NF250-CV/SV/HV..................................................................148 • NF250-UV..............................................................................150 • NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV..................................................152 • NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV......................................154 • NF400-CW/SW......................................................................156 • NF400-SEW/HEW/REW........................................................158 • NF400-UEW...........................................................................160 • NF630-CW/SW......................................................................162 • NF630-SEW/HEW/REW........................................................164 • NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW...............................................166 • NF800-SDW...........................................................................168 • NF800-UEW...........................................................................170 • NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW.................................................172 • NF1250-SDW.........................................................................174 • NF1600-SEW.........................................................................176 • NF1600-SDW.........................................................................178

• NF50-SVFU, NV50-SVFU......................................................198 • NF100-CVFU, NV100-CVFU.................................................200 • NF125-SVU/HVU, NV125-SVU/HVU.....................................202 • NF225-CWU...........................................................................204 • NF250-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU.....................................206 • NF400-SWU/HWU.................................................................208 • NF630-SWU/HWU.................................................................210

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers......................... 180 • NV32-SV, NV-63CV/SV/HV...................................................180 • NV125-CV/SV/HV..................................................................182 • NV250-CV/SV/HV..................................................................184 • NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-SEV/HEV......................................186 • NV400-CW/SW......................................................................188 • NV400-SEW/HEW/REW........................................................190 • NV630-CW/SW......................................................................192 • NV630-SEW/HEW.................................................................194 • NV800-SEW/HEW.................................................................196

4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers....................... 212

1 2

• NF250-SEV/HEV with MDU...................................................212 • NF400-SEP/HEP with MDU...................................................214 • NF630-SEP/HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP/HEP with MDU.....216

5 Miniature Circuit Breakers, Residual Current Circuit Breakers, Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection and Isolating Switch................................................... 218 • BH,BH-P.................................................................................218 • BH-D6, BH-D10......................................................................219 • BH-DN....................................................................................220 • BV-D.......................................................................................221 • BV-DN....................................................................................222 • KB-D.......................................................................................223

3 4

6 Circuit Protectors................................................. 224 • CP30-BA................................................................................224

7 Electrical Operated Cicuit Breakers................... 225

5

8. Handling and Maintenance……………………………………………………………………………… 231 1) Storage and Transportation.................................................................................................................................................................. 232 2) Standard Working Conditions............................................................................................................................................................... 232 3) Mounting and Connections ................................................................................................................................................................. 232 4) Maintenance and Inspections............................................................................................................................................................... 234 5) Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................................... 236

6

9. Appendix…………………………………………………………………………………………………… 239 1) Handle Operation Angle Dimensions................................................................................................................................................... 240 2) MCCB Trip Button, Instantaneous Adjustment Dial Drilling and Terminal Cover Mounting Hole Dimensions...................................... 241 3) ELCB Button and Switch Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................. 242 4) List of Product Weights........................................................................................................................................................................ 243 5) Switching the Adjustable Items............................................................................................................................................................. 244 6) Breaker Mounting Screw Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................. 247 7) List of Mold Surface Temperature-rise Values...................................................................................................................................... 248 8) Ordering Information............................................................................................................................................................................ 249 9) Melshort 2............................................................................................................................................................................................. 251 10) Low Voltage Products Website........................................................................................................................................................... 252

7 8 9

1

Since we, Mitsubishi Electric, launched the first low-voltage circuit breakers in Japan in 1933, low-voltage circuit breakers has satisfied the needs of the age and led the industry market for more than half a century all over the world. By bringing together our years of experience and technologies, we would like to introduce “WS-V Series” circuit breakers with superior aspects such as the higher breaking capacity, design for easy use, standardization of accessory parts, compliance to the up to date international standards and so on. We believe “WS-V Series” circuit breakers will fulfill every customer’s needs with its high performance and we will continue to develop and manufacture superior products that contribute to a better life for all people.

2

3

High-Performance

Technologies based on long year experience are brought together to realize more improved performance The new circuit breaking technology “Expanded ISTAC” has improved the current-limiting performance and upgraded the overall breaking capacity. Expansion of the conductor under the stator shortens the contact parting time of the mover as compared to the conventional ISTAC structure. The current-limiting performance has been improved remarkably. (The maximum peak current value has been reduced by approx. 10%.) Example of breaking capacity improvement

New circuit breaking technology (Expanded ISTAC) Grid

Previous Model NF250-SW

New Model NF250-SV

50kA /25kA

85kA /85kA

(at 230VAC)

Arc

Movable conductor Current C

(at 230VAC)

Current

Reaction circuit

Increased reaction force of movable conductor

Fixed conductor

Current B

Breaking capacity of 5 models is 20% to 50% higher than the W & WS Series

.

Breaking capacity comparison with a conventional model 20 % UP

250-RG

Model Name

Improvement of breaking capacity on 250AF-C/S/H models (Fixed) & 125.250AF-R models (Thermal/Adjustable).

50 % UP

250-H

20 % UP

250-S

WS-V Series WS Series

38.8% UP

250-C

20 % UP

125-RG 20

40

60

80

100

kA at 400VAC lcu

4

120

140

160

The new electronic circuit breakers (with display) and MDU breakers can display various measurement items This will enable energy management through “visualization”, which leads to energy saving. The display is on the circuit breaker body and shows circuit information. Detailed setting can be done on the display. The display turns red during alarms. Display

Electronic Circuit Breaker (with display)

Current in each phase

Alarm

Measuring Display Unit Breaker

Intelligent Communications through CC-Link Measuring data can be transmitted to Personal Computer through CC-Link.

LAN(Ethernet)

EcoWebServer

Electronic multi-measuring instrument

Measuring Display Unit Breaker

Energy measurement unit (EMU3 Series)

Energy measurement unit (EcoMonitorPro)

Air Circuit Breaker (AE-SW Series)

MELSEC-Q Series programmable controller

5

Standardizaion

Compact design for easy to use The thermal adjustable circuit breakers and electronic circuit breakers are smaller. NF250-SGW

NF250-SGV

Volume ratio 79% (Compared with our conventional models)

(Conventional model : 105 × 165 × 86mm)

(New model : 105 × 165 × 68mm)

250AF circuit breakers’ fixed types (NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV), thermal adjustable types (NF250-SGV, NF250-HGV, NF250-RGV), and electronic types (NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV) are the same size, leading to the reduction and standardization of panel design.

Types of internal accessories are reduced from 3 types to 1 type Standardization of internal accessories contributes to the reduction of stock and delivery time. For 32/63AF

Conventional models Three types

For 125AF For 250AF

New models

One type

For 32 to 250AF Applicable accessories AL

AX

AL+AX

SHT

UVT

32AF and 63AF circuit breakers can now be used in both AC and DC circuits without specifying when ordering. This will lead to prevention of ordering mistakes. The earth leakage circuit breakers can now be equipped with a voltage shunt trip device (SHT). 6

High Quality

Innovative manufacturing using a robot-cell production line This manufacturing innovation takes the pursuit of increased productivity, shortened manufacturing lead-time and improved quality to the upper limits.

Robot-cell Production Line

Individual unit production management system A multi-model, single-unit flow production system is utilized the ultimate multi-cycle production method. The production line is controlled using barcodes to manage the model information for each unit. Small-lot, flexible production that’s one step ahead! Manual Adjustment Work Timely Resupply

Component Barcode

Barcode Reader

7

Environment

Use of Various Recyclable Materials The circuit breakers are made of thermo-plastic materials that are easy to recycle. (Some models are partially made of thermoset materials.) The major plastic parts bear material identifications so that they can be recycled.

Nonuse of Hazardous Substances Eco-friendly design is used for all circuit breakers, and they do not use hazardous substances. The circuit breakers comply with RoHS regulation.

Energy Saving at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Fukuyama Works Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Fukuyama Works uses energy saving support devices such as MDU breakers and EcoServer to save energy through “visualization” of energy. Along with “visualization”, Fukuyama Works also installed high-efficiency equipments to further promote energy saving. Through energy saving activity, Fukuyama Works has successfully reduced its electrical power consumption rate by 27% in 2007 (compared with 1990).

8

Global

Global Networks of Sales Offices and Production Bases Our sales networks are designed to comfort customers internationally through the worldwide distributors. Constantly contactable distributors enable us to accommodate customer’s needs for smooth supply. Sales Office:62 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DALIAN INDUSTRY PRODUCTS CO.,LTD

:19 branch office representative office :43 (available in 56 countries) :2 Production Base

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FUKUYAMA WORKS

9

1 Outline of Circuit Breakers Product Line-up

Outline of Circuit Breakers

1

Frame (A)

Classification

40 50 60 63

NF30-CS

NF63-CV

NF-S

NF32-SV

NF63-SV

Economy class

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

20 30 32

NF-C

Standard class

NF-H/L

High-performance class

NF63-HV

NV63-CV

NV125-CV

Ultra current-limiting class

NV-C

Economy class

NV-S

NV32-SV

Standard class

NV-H/R

Motor Protection Breakers UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers Measuring Display Unit Breakers

NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV125-HV NV125-HEV

NV63-SV NV63-HV

High-performance class

MB30-CS

NF-MB

NF32-SV (*1)

160

NF125-SV NF125-SGV NF160-SGV NF125-SEV NF125-HV NF125-LGV NF160-LGV NF125-HEV NF125-HGV NF160-HGV NF125-RGV NF125-UV

NF-R/U

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

70 100 125 NF125-CV

NF63-CV (*1) NF63-SV (*1)

UL 489 Listed MCCB

NF50-SVFU

UL 489 Listed ELCB

NV50-SVFU

NF125-SV (*1) NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU NV125-HVU

MDU Breakers

Miniature Circuit Breakers

BH-DN

BH-D6

BH-D10

Residual Current Circuit Breaker

BV-D

Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload Protection

BV-DN

Isolating Switch

KB-D

Circuit Protectors Air Circuit Breakers

AE-SW

Related Components

Earth Leakage Relays

BH BH-P

CP30-BA CP-S

NV-ZBA, NV-ZSA, NV-ZHA, NV-ZLA

Note *1 When placing an order, specify “MB.” WS-V Series (New models)

NF-C

NV-C

NF-S

Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF-H NF-L

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV-S NV-H

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers UL 489 Listed MCCB UL 489 Listed ELCB

10

NV-R

NF-R

NF-U

Motor Protection Breakers NF-MB

Measuring Display Unit Breakers MDU Breakers

1 Outline of Circuit Breakers

400

600 630

NF400-CW

NF630-CW

800

1000

1250

1600

2000

2500

3200

4000

5000

6300

1

NF800-CEW

NF250-SV NF250-SGV NF400-SW NF800-SDW NF630-SW NF250-SEV NF400-SEW NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF250-HV NF250-LGV NF250-HEV NF250-HGV NF400-HEW NF630-HEW NF800-HEW NF250-RGV NF800-REW NF400-REW NF630-REW NF800-UEW NF250-UV NF400-UEW NV250-CV

NV400-CW

NV250-SV NV250-SEV NV250-HV NV250-HEV

NV630-SW NV400-SW NV800-SEW NV400-SEW NV630-SEW NV400-HEW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW NV400-REW

NF1000-SEW

NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

AE1000-SW

AE1250-SW

Outline of Circuit Breakers

225 250 NF250-CV

NV630-CW

NF250-SV (*1) NF225-CWU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU

NF400-SWU NF630-SWU NF400-HWU NF630-HWU

NV250-SVU NV250-HVU NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU

NF400-SEP with MDU NF630-SEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU

AE630-SW

BH-DN

BH-D6

AE1600-SW AE2000-SW AE2500-SW AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA AE5000-SW AE6300-SW AE4000-SW AE2000-SWA

Miniature Circuit Breakers BH-D10

BH

BH-P

Residual Current Circuit Breaker

Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overload Protection

Isolating Switch

BV-D

BV-DN

KB-D

Circuit Protectors CP30-BA CP-S

Air Circuit Breakers AE-SW

Related Components Earth Leakage Relays

11

Instructions for Application 1. Safety Precautions

Outline of Circuit Breakers

1

d Carefully read the safety precautions prior to use the [Explanation of warning symbols] circuit breaker correctly. Incorrect handling of the product will result in a DANGER d Important safety instructions are given below. Strictly hazardous situation, such as death or serious injury. observe the instructions. Incorrect handling of the product may result in a CAUTION d Be sure to communicate these safety precautions to the hazardous situation according to circumstances. end user. DANGER  Do not touch the terminal area. Doing so can cause an electric shock.  The earth leakage circuit breakers are designed to operate when the difference between leaving current and returning current exceeds the specified value. In the case shown in this figure, earth leakage is not detected. Therefore, never touch the two bare live parts. The circuit breaker will not operate upon occurrence of an electric shock.

Instructions for use

CAUTION

Earth leakage circuit breaker

 When the circuit breaker automatically breaks a circuit, turn on the handle after removing the cause. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a fire. [Earth leakage circuit breaker]  Ground the earth terminal of electrical equipment. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a fire.  Press the test button to check the operation once a month or so. If the earth leakage circuit breaker is not turned off, it is out of order. Consult an electrician.

Instructions for maintenance

Instructions for installation

CAUTION  The electrical work shall be performed by qualified personnel (electrical workers).  Before performing wiring work, turn off the upstream circuit breaker, and ensure that no current is flowing through the circuit breaker to be wired. Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard.  When connecting any wire, tighten the terminal screw to the torque specified in the instruction manual. Failure to do so may cause a fire.  When the model comes with insulating barriers as standard accessories, install the insulating barriers without fail.  Do not install the circuit breaker in an abnormal environment with high temperature, high moisture, dust, corrosive gas, vibration or shock. Doing so may cause a fire or make the circuit breaker inoperative.  Protect the circuit breaker so that foreign particles, such as dust, concrete powder and iron powder, and rain water will not enter the circuit breaker. Failure to do so may make the circuit breaker inoperative. [Earth leakage circuit breaker]  When using an earth leakage circuit breaker for use only in single-phase 3-wire or 3-phase 4-wire systems, connect the neutral wire to the neutral phase without fail. If they are not connected, the circuit breaker may not operate in the case of open phase or overcurrent, thereby resulting in a fire.  Connect the circuit breaker to a power supply appropriate to the rating of its body. Failure to do so may make the circuit breaker inoperative or damage it.  Tighten securely the lead wire in the open phase to the neutral wire on the load side. If the wires are not connected, the open phase of the neutral wire cannot be detected.  When there are two terminal screws for the neutral pole, tighten the screws alternately. Failure to do so may loosen the screws, thereby causing a fire.

CAUTION  The circuit breakers shall be maintained by persons with specialized knowledge.  Before maintaining, turn off the upstream circuit breaker, and ensure that no current is flowing through the circuit breaker to be maintained. Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard.  Retighten the terminals periodically. Failure to do so may cause a fire.

Instructions for disposal

CAUTION  When disposing of the product, treat it as industrial waste.

2. Instructions for Application (1) Please note that the specifications for the products in this catalog are subject to change without prior notice. (2) The products in this catalog are designed and manufactured as general-purpose products for general industrial uses. If you intend to use them for a special purpose, such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medical or passenger vehicle equipment or systems, please contact our sales representative. (3) We are not responsible for compensation for damage caused by any reason not attributable to us, opportunity loss or lost earnings of customer caused by trouble of our product, damage, secondary damage, accidents or damage to any product other than our product caused by special circumstances or any other operation.

12

2

Detailed Specifications 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1) NF-C (Economy class)……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2) NF-S (Standard class)…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3) NF-L/NF-H/NF-R (High-performance class)……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4) NF-U (Ultra current-limiting class)…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

14 14 16 20 23

24

1) NV-C (Economy class)… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 24 2) NV-S (Standard class)…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 26 3) NV-H/NV-R (High-performance class)… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 28

3 Motor Protection Breakers

30

1) NF-MB… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 30

4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

31

1) UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 31 2) UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 34

5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

35

1) MDU Breakers………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 35

6 Miniature Circuit Breakers

44

1) BH… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 44 2) BV… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 46

7 Circuit Protectors

49

1) CP… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 49

8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers

52

1) Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series)… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 52

9 Earth Leakage Relays

54

1) Earth Leakage Relays………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 54

13

2

Detailed Specifications

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-C (Economy class) Frame (A) Model

30 NF30-CS

50

60 NF63-CV

63

100

125 NF125-CV

Image

Cassette-type Installation and connections accessories

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

50 (60) 63 Rated current In (A) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 125 3 5 10 15 20 30 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500 600 600 600 600 600 690V − − − − − − 500V − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/4 7.5/4 440V − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5 415V 1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 10/5 10/5 IEC 60947-2 AC EN 60947-2 400V 1.5/1.5 5/5 5/5 5/5 10/5 10/5 (Icu/Ics) 380V 1.5/1.5 5/5 5/5 5/5 10/5 10/5 230V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15 200V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 30/15 30/15 DC 250V − 2.5/2.5 (*7) 2.5/2.5 (*7) 2.5/2.5 (*7) 7.5/4 (*4) 7.5/4 (*4) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 4 8 8 8 8 8 Current (*1) AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible Suitability for isolation − Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Reverse connection − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 Number of operating cycles With current (440VAC) 6,000 (AC415V) 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 Utilization category A A A A A A Pollution degree 2 3 3 3 3 3 EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ca a a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 50 75 60 90 60 90 c b 96 130 130 130 130 130 b c 52 68 68 68 68 68 ca 67 90 90 90 90 90 Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.9 0.6 0.9 Front connection (F) Page dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) − − − − d d Rear (B) 92 dRound stud (assembled in) dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud Plug-in (PM) − d d d d d Alarm switch (AL) d (*5) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6) Auxiliary switch (AX) d(*5) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) − d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6) Undervoltage trip (UVT) − d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d(*6) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 − − − − − − Closed (S) d d d d d d (I) 130 − Enclosure Dustproof d d d d d Waterproof (W) − − − − − − d d d d d Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 − − − − − − d d Panel mounting − d d d d d Mechanical 129 interlock (MI) (*10) Breaker mounting − d d d d d LC d d d d d d Handle lock 127 HL d d d d d d device HL-S − d d d d d (F) − d d d d d External 117 operating handle (V) − d d d d d Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d d d d d − Rear stud (B-ST) d d d d d 94 Plug-in (PM) − d d d d d IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − − d d d d CE marking TÜV approval Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL)  (NK, LR, ABS)      Automatic tripping device Hydraulic magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Trip button − (*2) Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Page of Characteristics and dimensions 140 142 144 External accessories

1 Detailed Specifications

2

Notes:

*1 *2 *3 *4



*5 *6

*7 *8 *9

14

*10

The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC. It is attached with the alarm switch. In case of a current rating of 100A, it does not specify NK rating. Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively. The standard lead drawing is performd laterally. Load drawing is also available. The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT). Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown on the right. Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped). Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame.

Line

Line

3-pole

Load

4-pole

Load

2 Detailed Specifications

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-C (Economy class) 250

400 NF400-CW

600

250 300 350 400

500 600

NF250-CV

(100) 125 150 175 200 225 (*3) 2 3 600 − 10/8 15/12 25/19 25/19 25/19 36/27 36/27 15/12 (*4) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 8,000 4,000 A 3 N/A 105 165 68 92 1.3 1.5 dScrew terminal d dBar stud d d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d d − TÜV approval Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped

250 2

3 600 − 10/8 15/12 25/19 25/19 25/19 36/27 36/27 15/12 (*4) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 8,000 4,000 A 3 N/A 105 165 68 92 1.3 1.5 dScrew terminal d dBar stud d d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d d − TÜV approval Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped 148

2

3 690 − 15/8 25/13 36/18 36/18 40/20 50/25 50/25 20/10 (*4) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A 3 N/A 140 257 103 134 4.4 5.0 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud d d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d d − − d d d(*8) d d − d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped 156

630 NF630-CW

630

2

3 690 − 18/9 36/18 36/18 36/18 40/20 50/25 50/25 20/10 (*4) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A 3 N/A 140 257 103 134 5.2 6.0 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud d d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d d − − d d d(*8) d d − d d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped

2

3 690 − 18/9 36/18 36/18 36/18 40/20 50/25 50/25 20/10 (*4) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A 3 N/A 140 257 103 134 5.2 6.0 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud d d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d d − − d d d(*8) d d − d d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped 162

800 NF800-CEW

Adjustable 400 450 500 600 700 800 3 690 − 18/9 36/18 36/18 36/18 40/20 50/25 50/25 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 4,000 500 B 3 A 210 275 103 155 10.9 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud d d(*6) d(*6) d(*6) d d d(*9) − d d d(*8) d d − d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 166

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

15

2 1 Detailed Specifications

225

2

Detailed Specifications

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-S (Standard class) Frame (A) Model

30

32

50

60 NF63-SV

NF32-SV

63

Image

Cassette-type Installation and accessories connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V 500V 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 AC EN 60947-2 400V (Icu/Ics) 380V 230V 200V DC 250V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current (*1) Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Without current Number of operating cycles With current (440VAC) Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) Undervoltage trip (UVT) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock 127 HL device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 Rear stud (B-ST) 94 Plug-in (PM) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions External accessories

1 Detailed Specifications

2

3 4 (5) 6 10 15 16 20 25 (30) 2 3 600 − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 2.5/2.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 130 68 90 0.45 0.65 dScrew terminal − dBar stud d d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d − d d − d − d d d d d d d d d d d Self-declaration Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped

32 2

3

600 − 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 2.5/2.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 130 68 90 0.45 0.65 dScrew terminal − dRound stud d d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d − d d − d − d d d d d d d d d d d Self-declaration Recognition in process  Thermal-magnetic Equipped

3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 2 3 4 600 − 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 7.5/7.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 100 130 68 90 0.5 0.7 0.9 dScrew terminal − dRound stud d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d d − − d − d − − d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process −  Thermal-magnetic Equipped

142

Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC. *2 In case of a current rating of 100A, it does not specify NK rating. *3 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively. (In case of NF250-SV, three and four poles can be used for up to 500 and 600VDC) *4 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT). *5 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown on the right. *6 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. *7 Not isolation compatible. excluding 400 to 800A frame.

16

(60)

63

2

3 4 600 − 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 7.5/7.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 100 130 68 90 0.55 0.75 1.0 dScrew terminal − dRound stud d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d d − − d − d − − d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process −  Thermal-magnetic Equipped 142

2

3 4 600 − 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 7.5/7.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 100 130 68 90 0.55 0.75 1.0 dScrew terminal − dRound stud d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d d − − d − d − − d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process −  Thermal-magnetic Equipped

Line

Line

3-pole

Load

4-pole

Load

2 Detailed Specifications

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-S (Standard class) 125 NF125-SV

(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 125 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 2 3 4 2 3 4 690 690 8/8 8/8 18/18 18/18 25/25 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 40/40 (*3) 40/40 (*3) 8 8 AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A 3 3 N/A N/A 60 90 120 60 90 120 130 130 68 68 90 90 0.7 1.0 1.3 0.7 1.0 1.3 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d d dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d d d d − − − − d d − − d d − − − − d d − − d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − −   Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 144

125 NF125-SGV

125 NF125-SEV

160 NF160-SGV

16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 16-32 32-63 63-125 125-160 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 690 690 690 8/8 8/8 8/8 30/30 30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 20/20 (300V) (*3) − 20/20 (300V) (*3) 8 8 8 AC/DC compatible AC AC/DC compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible Possible 50,000 25,000 40,000 30,000 10,000 15,000 A A A 3 3 3 N/A A N/A 105 140 105 140 105 140 165 165 165 68 68 68 92 92 92 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.7 2.2 1.4 1.6 2.0 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d d d d dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d d d d − − d − − − d d d − − − d d d − − − d d d d d d d d d d − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process − − −  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped Equipped 152 154 152

225

250 NF250-SV

(100) 125 150 160 250 175 200 225 (*2) 2 3 4 2 3 4 690 690 8/8 8/8 30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 20/20 (300V) (*3) 20/20 (300V) (*3) 8 8 AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1) Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A 3 3 N/A N/A 105 140 105 140 165 165 68 68 92 92 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d d d d dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d (*4) d d d d d − − − − d d − − d d − − d d d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − TÜV approval Self-declaration TÜV approval Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − −   Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 148

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

17

2 1 Detailed Specifications

100

2

Detailed Specifications

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-S (Standard class) Frame (A) Model

250 NF250-SGV

250 NF250-SEV

400 NF400-SW

400 NF400-SEW

600

630 NF630-SW

Image

Cassette-type Installation and connections accessories

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated current In (A) 125-160 140-200 175-250 Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) Number of poles 2 3 4 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690V 8/8 500V 30/30 440V 36/36 415V 36/36 IEC 60947-2 AC EN 60947-2 400V 36/36 (Icu/Ics) 380V 36/36 230V 85/85 200V 85/85 DC 250V 20/20 (300V) (*2) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 Current AC/DC compatible Suitability for isolation Compatible Reverse connection Possible Without current 25,000 Number of operating cycles With current (440VAC) 10,000 Utilization category A Rated short time with stand current Icw (kA) at 0.25s − Pollution degree 3 EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A ca a a 105 140 c b 165 b c 68 ca 92 Mass of front-face type (kg) 1.4 1.6 2.0 Front connection (F) Page d Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) d Rear (B) 92 dBar stud Plug-in (PM) d Alarm switch (AL) d (*3) d Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*3) d 102 Shunt trip (SHT) d (*3) d Undervoltage trip (UVT) d (*3) d With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 − Closed (S) − d (I) 130 − Enclosure Dustproof d − Waterproof (W) d Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 d d Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting d LC d Handle lock 127 HL d device HL-S d (F) d External 117 operating handle (V) d Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d Rear stud (B-ST) d 94 Plug-in (PM) d IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − CE marking Self-declaration CCC recognition Recognition in process Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) − Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Trip button Equipped Page of Characteristics and dimensions 152 External accessories

1 Detailed Specifications

2

250 300 Adjustable 200 225 500 600 630 350 400 250 300 350 400 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 690 690 690 690 690 8/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 36/36 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 36/36 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 36/36 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 − 40/40 (*2) − 40/40 (*2) 40/40 (*2) 8 8 8 8 8 AC AC/DC compatible AC AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible 25,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 10,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 A A B A A − − 5 − − 3 3 3 3 3 A N/A A N/A N/A 105 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 140 185 165 257 257 257 257 68 103 103 103 103 92 155 155 155 155 1.7 2.2 4.6 5.2 6.8 6.0 7.6 5.4 6.2 8.0 5.4 6.2 8.0 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal − − − − − − − − − − − d d dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d d d d d d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − (*5) − − d d − − − − − d − − − − − d d d d d − − − − − d d d d d d d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d d d d d d d d d d − − − − − d d d d d − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process − − − − −  (LR, ABS, GL) q q q q Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped 154 156 158 162 80-160 125-250

Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC. *2 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively. *3 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT). *4 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown on the right. *5 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped) AS for flush plate type, an outline differs from a standard. *6 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. *7 Not isolation compatible. excluding 400 to 800A frame.

18

Line

Line

3-pole

Load

4-pole

Load

2 Detailed Specifications

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-S (Standard class)

Adjustable 300 350 400 500 600 630 3 4 690 10/10 30/30 42/42 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 B 7.6 3 A 140 185 257 103 155 6.5 8.3 dBusbar terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud d d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d (*5) − − d − d d (*6) d d d d − d d d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process − q Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 164

800 NF800-SEW

800 NF800-SDW

Adjustable 400 450 (700) 800 500 600 700 800 3 4 2 690 690 10/10 − 30/30 − 42/42 − 50/50 − 50/50 − 50/50 − 85/85 − 85/85 − − 40/40 8 8 AC DC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 4,000 4,000 500 500 B A 9.6 − 3 3 A N/A 210 280 210 275 275 103 103 155 155 10.9 14.2 9.0 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − − dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d (*3) d d d (*3) d d d (*3) d d d d d d d d − d (*5) − − − d d − d d d (*6) d(*6) d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − q Electronic (effective value detection) Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 166 168

1000 NF1000-SEW

1250 NF1250-SEW

Adjustable 500 600 700 800 900 1000 3 4 690 25/13 65/33 85/43 85/43 85/43 85/43 125/63 125/63 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 3,000 500 B 20 at 0.1 3 A 210 280 406 140 190 23.5 30.7 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − d d d d d d d d d d d d (*5) − − − − − d (*6) d − − d − d d − d − d − Self-declaration Recognition in process − q Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 172

Adjustable 600 700 800 1000 1200 1250 3 4 690 25/13 65/33 85/43 85/43 85/43 85/43 125/63 125/63 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 3,000 500 B 20 at 0.1 3 A 210 280 406 140 190 23.5 30.7 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − d d d d d d d d d d d d (*5) − − − − − d (*6) d − − d − d d − d − d − Self-declaration Recognition in process − q Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 172

1200 NF1250-SDW

1000 1250 2 690 − − − − − − − − 40/20 8 DC Compatible Possible 3,000 500 A − 3 N/A 210 406 140 190 22.0 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud d d d d d d − − − − d (*6) d − − d − d − d − d − Self-declaration − − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 174

1600 NF1600-SEW

Adjustable 800 1000 1200 1400 1500 1600 3 4 690 25/13 65/33 85/43 85/43 85/43 85/43 125/63 125/63 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 3,000 500 B 20 at 0.1 3 A 210 280 406 140 190 34.5 41.2 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − dBar stud dBar stud − d d d d d d d d d d d (*5) − − − d (*6) d − − d − d d − − − − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 176

1600 NF1600-SDW

1600 2 690 − − − − − − − − 40/20 8 DC Compatible Possible 3,000 500 B − 3 A 210 406 140 190 32.0 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d d d d d − − − − d (*6) d − − d − d − − − − − Self-declaration − − magnetic Equipped 178

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

19

2 1 Detailed Specifications

630 NF630-SEW

2

Detailed Specifications

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF-L / NF-H / NF-R (High-performance class) Frame (A) Model

50

60 NF63-HV

63

60

(63)

100 NF125-HV

125

125 NF125-LGV

125 NF125-HGV

125 NF125-RGV

15 16 20 30 32 40 125 50 60 63 75 80 100 2 3 4 2 3 4 690 690 10/8 10/8 30/23 30/23 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 − − 8 8 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A 3 3 N/A N/A 90 120 90 120 130 130 68 68 90 90 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.8 1.0 1.3 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d d dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d − − − − d d − − d d − − d d d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − q q Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 144

16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 2 3 4 690 8/8 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 90/90 90/90 20/20 (300V) (*2) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 50,000 30,000 A 3 N/A 105 140 165 68 92 1.4 1.6 2.0 d d dBar stud d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d − − d − d − d d d d d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  (LR, ABS, GL) − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 152

16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 35-50 45-63 56-80 70-100 90-125 2 3 4 690 10/8 50/38 65/65 70/70 75/75 75/75 100/100 100/100 40/40 (300V) (*2) 8 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible 50,000 30,000 A 3 N/A 105 140 165 68 92 1.4 1.6 2.0 d d dBar stud d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d − − − d − d d d d d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  (LR, ABS, GL) − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 152

16-20 20-25 25-32 32-40 40-50 50-63 63-80 80-100 100-125 2 3 690 – – 125/125 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 50,000 30,000 A 3 N/A 105 165 68 92 1.5 1.8 dScrew terminal d dBar stud d d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d (*3) d − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d − Self-declaration Recognition in process  (LR, ABS, GL) Thermal-magnetic Equipped 152

Image

10 15 16 20 25 30 32 40 50 2 3 4 690 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 25/19 25/19 7.5/7.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible (*1) Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 100 130 68 90 0.5 0.7 0.9 dScrew terminal d dRound stud d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d − − d − d − − d − d d − d d d d d d Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 d d Rear stud (B-ST) d 94 Plug-in (PM) d d IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 − d CE marking Self-declaration CCC recognition Recognition in process Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) − q Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Trip button Equipped Page of Characteristics and dimensions

Cassette-type Installation and accessories connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V 500V 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 AC EN 60947-2 400V (Icu/Ics) 380V 230V 200V DC 250V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Without current Number of operating cycles With current (440VAC) Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) Undervoltage trip (UVT) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*4) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock 127 HL device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) External accessories

1 Detailed Specifications

2

2

3 4 690 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 25/19 25/19 7.5/7.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible (*1) Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 100 130 68 90 0.55 0.75 1.0 dScrew terminal d dRound stud d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d − − d − d − − d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process − q Thermal-magnetic Equipped 142

2

3 4 690 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 25/19 25/19 7.5/7.5 (*5) 8 AC/DC compatible (*1) Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A 3 N/A 50 75 100 130 68 90 0.55 0.75 1.0 dScrew terminal d dRound stud d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d − − d − d − − d − d d − d d d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process − q Thermal-magnetic Equipped

Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC. *2 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. If wired as shown on the right, three and four poles can be used for up to 500 and 600VDC, respectively. *3 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT). *4 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame. *5 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown on the right.

20

Line

Line

3-pole

Load

4-pole

Load

2 Detailed Specifications

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-L / NF-H / NF-R (High-performance class)

16-32 32-63 63-125 3

4

690 10/8 50/38 65/65 70/70 75/75 75/75 100/100 100/100 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 25,000 10,000 A 3 A 105 140 165 68 92 1.7 2.2 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal d d dBar stud dBar stud d d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d − − d − d d d d − d d d d d d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process −  (LR, ABS, GL) Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 154

160 NF160-LGV

160 NF160-HGV

225

250 NF250-HV

250 NF250-LGV

250 NF250-HGV

250 NF250-RGV

125-160 140-200 125-160 140-200 125-160 160-200 125 150 160 250 175-250 175-250 200-250 175 200 225 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 8/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 8/8 10/8 − 36/36 50/38 50/38 50/38 36/36 50/38 − 50/50 65/65 65/65 65/65 50/50 65/65 125/125 50/50 70/70 70/70 70/70 50/50 70/70 150/150 50/50 75/75 75/75 75/75 50/50 75/75 150/150 50/50 75/75 75/75 75/75 50/50 75/75 150/150 90/90 100/100 100/100 100/100 90/90 100/100 150/150 90/90 100/100 100/100 100/100 90/90 100/100 150/150 20/20 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) 20/20 (300V) (*2) 40/40 (300V) (*2) − 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible (*1) AC/DC compatible AC/DC compatible AC Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible 40,000 40,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 A A A A A A A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 140 105 165 165 165 165 165 165 165 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 92 92 92 92 92 92 92 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.6 2.0 1.5 1.8 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal d d d d d d d d d dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d d d d d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d (*3) d d d d d d d d d − − − − − − − − − − − − − − d d − − − − − − − d d d d d d − − − − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process − −  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) q q  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL)  (LR, ABS, GL) Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped 152 152 148 152 152 152 125-160

125-160

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

21

2 1 Detailed Specifications

125 NF125-HEV

2

Detailed Specifications

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-H / NF-R (High-performance class) Frame (A) Model

250 NF250-HEV

400 NF400-HEW

630 NF400-REW

NF630-HEW

800 NF630-REW

NF800-HEW

NF800-REW

Image

Cassette-type Installation and accessories connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V 500V 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 AC EN 60947-2 400V (Icu/Ics) 380V 230V 200V DC 250V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Without current Number of operating cycles With current (440VAC) Utilization category Rated short time with stand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) Undervoltage trip (UVT) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*4) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock 127 HL device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 Rear stud (B-ST) 94 Plug-in (PM) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions External accessories

1 Detailed Specifications

2

Adjustable 200 225 Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 3 4 3 4 3 690 690 690 10/8 35/18 − 50/38 50/50 70/35 65/65 65/65 125/63 70/70 70/70 125/63 75/75 70/70 125/63 75/75 70/70 125/63 100/100 100/100 150/75 100/100 100/100 150/75 − − − 8 8 8 AC AC AC Compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible Possible 25,000 6,000 6,000 10,000 1,000 1,000 A B B − 5 5 3 3 3 A A A 105 140 140 185 140 165 257 257 68 103 103 92 155 155 1.7 2.2 6.0 7.6 6.0 dScrew terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − − d d dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d d d d d d d d d d (*2) d (*2) − − − − − − d − − − d d d (*3) d (*3) d d d d d − − d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process − −  (LR, ABS, GL) q q Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped Equipped Equipped 154 158 158 80-160 125-250

Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 300 350 400 500 600 630 400 500 600 630 3 4 3 690 690 35/18 − 50/50 70/35 65/65 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 100/100 150/75 100/100 150/75 − − 8 8 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 6,000 6,000 1,000 1,000 B B 7.6 7.6 3 3 A A 140 185 140 257 257 103 103 155 155 6.5 8.3 6.0 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − − dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d d d d d d d (*2) d (*2) − − − − − − d (*3) d (*3) d d d − d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − q q Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped Equipped 164 164

Notes: *1 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT). *2 Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if other output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped). *3 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. *4 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame.

Adjustable 400 450 Adjustable 400 450 500 600 700 800 500 600 700 800 3 4 3 690 690 15/15 − 50/50 70/35 65/65 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 70/70 125/63 100/100 150/75 100/100 150/75 − − 8 8 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 4,000 4,000 500 500 B B 9.6 9.6 3 3 A A 210 280 210 275 275 103 103 155 155 10.9 14.2 10.9 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − − dBar stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d (*1) d d (*1) d d d d d d d (*2) d (*2) − − − − − − d (*3) d (*3) d d d − d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − q q Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped Equipped 166 166 Line

Line

3-pole

22

Load

4-pole

Load

2 Detailed Specifications

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF-U (Ultra current-limiting class)

15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 3 690 10/10 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 25,000 10,000 A − 3 N/A

2

90

1.35

250 NF250-UV

191 68 90 1.5 dScrew terminal dBar stud dBar stud d d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d − − − − d d − d d d d d d − d − Self-declaration − q Thermal-magnetic Equipped 146

125 150 175 200 225 250 4

2

120

3 690 15/15 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 25,000 10,000 A − 3 N/A 105

1.9

− d d d d

−

−

2.5

240 68 92 2.7 dScrew terminal dBar stud dBar stud d d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d − − − − d d − d d d d d d − d − Self-declaration − q Thermal-magnetic Equipped 150

4

140

3.7

− d d d d

−

−

400 NF400-UEW

800 NF800-UEW

Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400 3 4 690 − 170/170 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 B 5 3 A 140 280 297 322 200 252 16.2 25.4 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d d d (*2) − − − d (*3) d − − d d d − d d − − − Self-declaration − − q Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 160

Adjustable 400 450 500 600 700 800 3 4 690 35/35 170/170 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 200/200 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 4,000 500 B 9.6 3 A 210 280 322 200 252 27.6 33.7 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d d d (*2) − − − d (*3) d − − d d d − d − − − Self-declaration − − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 170

2 1 Detailed Specifications

125 NF125-UV

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

23

2

Detailed Specifications

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV-C (Economy class) Harmonic Surge Ready Frame (A) Model

50

60 NV63-CV

63

100

125 NV125-CV

Image

2

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C Number of poles

(5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 2 3 1f2W

Time-delay High-speed type type

Rated current sensitivity

AC

(mA)

Cassette-type accessories

Installation and connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

at I∆n at 5I∆n Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) (*3) Internal non-operating (s) (or more) Earth leakage indication system 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 400V EN 60947-2 AC 230V (Icu/Ics) 200V 100V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection (below 230VAC) Without current Number of operating cycles With current Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt trip (SHT) 102 Undervoltage trip (UVT) Earth leakage alarm switch (EAL) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Test button module (TBM) 115 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock 127 HL device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 Rear stud (B-ST) 94 Plug-in (PM) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions External accessories

2 Detailed Specifications

Phase line (*1) Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2)

Max. operating time (s)

100-240

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 30,100/200/500 30 selectable 0.1 0.04 − − − Mechanical type (button) − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 − 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 6 AC Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 2 A 75 130 68 90 0.7 0.75 dScrew terminal − dRound stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration − Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

(60) 3

1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-240

100-440 30,100/200/500 30 selectable 0.1 0.04 − − − Mechanical type (button) − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 − 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 6 AC Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 2 A 75 130 68 90 0.7 0.75 dScrew terminal − dRound stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration − Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 180

Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage circuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. When wiring to singlephase 3-wire, connect the neutral line to the central pole. *2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *3 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit breaker operates between 0.15 and 0.45 seconds, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively. *4 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side below 250A frame (excluding UVT). *5 Standard type is SLT equipped.

24

63

2



(60) 63 (75) 80 100

125

2

3

3

3

1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 10/5 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 30/15 6 AC Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 2 A 90 130 68 90 1.0 dScrew terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 10/5 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 30/15 6 AC Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 2 A 90 130 68 90 1.0 dScrew terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

100-240

100-440 30,100/200/500 30 selectable 0.1 0.04 − − − Mechanical type (button) − 2.5/2.5 − 2.5/2.5 − 5/5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 6 AC Compatible Possible 10,000 6,000 A 2 A 75 130 68 90 0.7 0.75 dScrew terminal − dRound stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration − Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

182 *6 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. *7 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 630A frame. *8 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.

2 Detailed Specifications

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV-C (Economy class) Harmonic Surge Ready 250 NV250-CV

400 NV400-CW

600

630 NV630-CW

125 150 175 200 225

250

250 300 350 400

500 600

(630)

3

3

3

3

3

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 15/12 25/19 25/19 36/27 36/27 36/27 6 AC Compatible Possible 8,000 4,000 A 2 A 105 165 68 92 1.7 dScrew terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − d d d d d d d d d d − − TÜV approval Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 15/12 25/19 25/19 36/27 36/27 36/27 6 AC Compatible Possible 8,000 4,000 A 2 A 105 165 68 92 1.7 dScrew terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) − d d (*5) − − − d d d d d d d d d d − − TÜV approval Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 25/13 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 50/25 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A 3 A 140 257 103 134 6.1 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d − d d (*5) − − − d (*6) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 188

200-440

200-440

184 Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

4.

Rated operational voltage 100-240V 100-440V 200-440V

−

−

− − (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 36/18 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A 3 A 140 257 103 155 6.9 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d − d d (*5) − − − d (*6) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

− − (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 36/18 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A 3 A 140 257 103 155 6.9 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*4) d (*4) d (*4) d − d d (*5) − − − d (*6) d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

2 2 Detailed Specifications

225

192 Applicable circuit voltage 100/110/200/220/230/240V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V

Available voltage range 85-264V 85-484V 170-484V

25

2

Detailed Specifications

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV-S (Standard class) Harmonic Surge Ready Frame (A) Model

30

32

50

NV32-SV

60 NV63-SV

63

(60)

63

3

3

100

125 NV125-SV

125 NV125-SEV

Image

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C Number of poles

(5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 3

Phase line (*1)

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

Time-delay High-speed type type

Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) Rated current sensitivity

AC

(mA)

Cassette-type accessories

Installation and connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

at I∆n Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆n Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) (*4) Internal non-operating (s) (or more) Earth leakage indication system 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 400V EN 60947-2 AC 230V (Icu/Ics) 200V 100V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection (below 230VAC) Without current Number of operating cycles With current Utilization category Rated short time withstand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt trip (SHT) 102 Undervoltage trip (UVT) Earth leakage alarm switch (EAL) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Test button module (TBM) 115 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*8) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock 127 HL device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 Rear stud (B-ST) 94 Plug-in (PM) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions External accessories

2 Detailed Specifications

2

3

(5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 3

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 − − − Mechanical type (button) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 15/15 6 AC Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A − 2 A 75 130 68 90 0.75 dScrew terminal − dRound stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − d d (*6) − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 − − − Mechanical type (button) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 15/15 6 AC Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A − 2 A 75 130 68 90 0.8 dScrew terminal − dRound stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − d d (*6) − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 180

100-440 30,100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 − − − Mechanical type (button) 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 15/15 15/15 6 AC Compatible Possible 15,000 8,000 A − 2 A 75 130 68 90 0.8 dScrew terminal − dRound stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − d d (*6) − − − − d d d d d d d d d − d Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped

(32)

100-440 100-440 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 selectable selectable 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.04 − − − − − − Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5 5/5 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 6 6 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 10,000 10,000 6,000 6,000 A A − − 2 2 A A 75 75 130 130 68 68 90 90 0.75 0.75 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − dRound stud dRound stud − − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − − d d d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − d d Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 180

Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage cirsuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. When wiring to singlephase 3-wire, connect the neutral line to the central pole. *2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *3 In case of time delay type, rated current is produced with 20 amp. or more. *4 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit breaker operates between 0.15 and 0.45 seconds, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.

26



(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 125 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (*3) 3 4 3 4 3f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f2W 1f2W 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 selectable selectable 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 25/25 25/25 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 − 50/50 − 6 6 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A − − 2 2 A A 90 120 90 120 130 130 68 68 90 90 1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − − d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d − − d d d d d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 182

63-125 3

4

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 36/36 36/36 36/36 85/85 85/85 85/85 6 AC Compatible Possible 25,000 10,000 A − 2 A 105 140 165 68 92 1.9 2.5 d − dBar stud − d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d − d d (*6) − d − d − d d d − d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognized − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 186

*5 Cassette type accessories are field mountable type. It can respend to adhesion attachment of a breaker as standard below 250A frame. (excluding UVT.) *6 Standard type is SLT equipped. *7 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker. *8 Not isolation compatible, excluding 400 to 800A frame. *9 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.

2 Detailed Specifications

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV-S (Standard class) Harmonic Surge Ready 250

250 NV250-SEV

400 NV400-SW

250

125-250

250 300 350 400

3

3

3

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 36/36 36/36 36/36 85/85 85/85 85/85 6 AC Compatible Possible 25,000 10,000 A − 2 A 105 165 68 92 1.9 d − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − d d (*6) d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognized − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 186

100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 42/42 45/45 45/45 85/85 85/85 85/85 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 A − 3 A 140 257 103 155 6.4 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − − − d (*7) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Thermal-magnetic Equipped 188

NV250-SV

125 150 175 200 225 3 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 100-440 (30),100/200/500 (30),100/200/500 selectable selectable 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 6 6 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A − − 2 2 A A 105 105 165 165 68 68 92 92 1.9 1.9 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − − d d d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 184

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 3. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

400 NV400-SEW

4.

Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400 3 4 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f4W 1f2W 100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 42/42 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 B 5 3 A 140 185 257 103 155 6.2 8.2 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − − d − d d (*7) d d − d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 190

600

630 NV630-SW

500 600

(630)

3

3

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

200-440

200-440

−

−

− − − − 100/200/500selectable 100/200/500selectable 0.45/1.0/2.0selectable 0.45/1.0/2.0selectable 0.1/0.5/1.0 0.1/0.5/1.0 Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 42/42 42/42 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 − − 8 8 AC AC Compatible Compatible Possible Possible 6,000 6,000 1,000 1,000 A A − − 3 3 A A 140 140 257 257 103 103 155 155 6.9 6.9 dBusbar terminal dBusbar terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d d − − d d d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − d (*7) d (*7) d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 192

Rated operational voltage 100-440V 200-440V

630 NV630-SEW

800 NV800-SEW

Adjustable 300 350 Adjustable 400 450 400 500 600 630 500 600 700 800 3 4 3 3f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f3W, 3f4W 1f2W 1f2W 100-440 200-440 −

−

− − (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 42/42 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 85/85 8 AC Compatible Possible 6,000 1,000 B 7.6 3 A 140 185 257 103 155 7.1 8.9 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − − d − d d (*7) d d − d d d d d d d − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 194

− − 100/200/500selectable 0.45/1.0/2.0selectable 0.1/0.5/1.0 Mechanical type (button) 42/42 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 − 8 AC Compatible Possible 4,000 500 A 9.6 3 A 210 275 103 155 15.3 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − − − d (*7) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 196

Applicable circuit voltage 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V

Available voltage range 85-484V 170-484V

27

2 2 Detailed Specifications

225

2

Detailed Specifications

2

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV-H / NV-R (High-performance class) Harmonic Surge Ready Frame (A) Model

50

60 NV63-HV

63

(60)

63

3

3

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100

125 NV125-HV

125 NV125-HEV

225

250

250 NV250-HEV

250

125-250

3

3

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

NV250-HV

Image

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C Number of poles

(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 3

Phase line (*1)

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

Time-delay High-speed type type

Rated operational voltage Ue (V) (*2) Rated current sensitivity

AC

(mA)

Cassette-type accessories

Installation and connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

at I∆n at 5I∆n Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) (*4) Internal non-operating (s) (or more) Earth leakage indication system 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 400V EN 60947-2 AC 230V (Icu/Ics) 200V 100V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection (below 230VAC) Without current Number of operating cycles With current Utilization category Rated short time withstand current Icu (kA) at 0.25s Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt trip (SHT) 102 Undervoltage trip (UVT) Earth leakage alarm switch (EAL) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Test button module (TBM) 115 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock 127 HL device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 Rear stud (B-ST) 94 Plug-in (PM) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions External accessories

2 Detailed Specifications

2

Max. operating time (s)

100-440 100-440 100-440 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 selectable selectable selectable 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.04 0.04 − − − − − − − − − Mechanical type (button) 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 25/19 25/19 25/19 25/19 25/19 25/19 25/19 25/19 25/19 6 6 6 AC AC AC Compatible Compatible Compatible − − − 15,000 15,000 15,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 A A A − − − 2 2 2 A A A 75 75 75 130 130 130 68 68 68 90 90 90 0.75 0.8 0.8 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − − dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud − − − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − − − d d d d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − − − − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − d d d Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process − − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped Equipped 180

(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 125 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 (*3) 3 4 3 4 3f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f2W 1f2W 100-440 200-440 100-440 200-440 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 selectable selectable 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 50/38 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 100/75 − 100/75 − 6 6 AC AC Compatible Compatible − − 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A − − 2 2 A A 90 120 90 120 130 130 68 68 90 90 1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − − d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d − − d d d d d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − d d d d d d − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 182

Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage cirsuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. When wiring to singlephase 3-wire, connect the neutral line to the central pole. *2 In case of time delay type, rated voltage is 200-440VAC. *3 In case of time delay type, rated current is prodused with 20 amp. or more. *4 When the operating time are 0.45, 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, the Earth Leakage circuit breaker operates between 0.15 and 0.45 seconds, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.

28



63-125 3

4

3f3W, 3f4W 1f2W 100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 65/65 70/70 75/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 6 AC Compatible − 25,000 10,000 A − 2 A 105 140 165 68 92 1.9 2.5 d − dBar stud − d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d d (*5) d − d d (*6) − − d − d d d − d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognized − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 186

125 150 175 200 225 3 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440 100-440 30,100/200/500 30,100/200/500 selectable selectable 0.1 0.1 0.04 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 65/65 65/65 70/70 70/70 75/75 75/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100 100/100 6 6 AC AC Compatible Compatible − − 25,000 25,000 10,000 10,000 A A − − 2 2 A A 105 105 165 165 68 68 92 92 1.8 1.8 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − dBar stud dBar stud − − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − − d d d (*6) d (*6) − − − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − Self-declaration Self-declaration Recognition in process Recognition in process − − Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 184

100-440 (30),100/200/500 selectable 0.1 0.04 (100/200/500selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 65/65 70/70 75/75 100/100 100/100 100/100 6 AC Compatible − 25,000 10,000 A − 2 A 105 165 68 92 1.9 d − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) − d d (*6) − d d d d d d d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognized − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 186

*5 Cassette type accessories are field mountable type. It can respend to adhesion attachment of a breaker as standard. (excluding UVT.) *6 Standard type is SLT equipped. *7 Not isolation compatible. *8 AC100V does not acquire the CCC certification.

2 Detailed Specifications

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV-H / NV-R (High-performance class) Harmonic Surge Ready 400 NV400-HEW

3 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

630 NV630-HEW

800 NV800-HEW

Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400

Adjustable 300 350 400 500 600 630

Adjustable 400 450 500 600 700 800

4

3

3

3

3f4W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W

100-440

100-440

100-440

100-440

(30), 100/200/500 selectable

(30), 100/200/500 selectable

−

−

0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 65/65 70/70 70/70 100/100 100/100 100/100 8 AC Compatible − 6,000 1,000 B 5 3 A 140 185 257 103 155 6.6 8.2 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − − d − d d (*7) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 190

0.1 0.04 (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 125/63 125/63 125/63 150/75 150/75 150/75 8 AC Compatible − 6,000 1,000 B 5 3 A 140 257 103 155 6.6 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − d d d (*7) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 190

− − (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 65/65 70/70 70/70 100/100 100/100 100/100 8 AC Compatible − 6,000 1,000 B 7.6 3 A 140 257 103 155 7.1 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − d d d (*7) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 194

− − (100/200/500 selectable) (0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable) (0.1/0.5/1.0) Mechanical type (button) 65/65 70/70 70/70 100/100 100/100 100/100 8 AC Compatible − 4,000 500 B 9.6 3 A 210 275 103 155 15.3 dBusbar terminal − dBar stud − d (*5) d (*5) d (*5) d − d d (*6) − d d d (*7) d d − d d d d d d − − Self-declaration Recognition in process − Electronic (effective value detection) Equipped 196

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. The setting is set to 500mA and delivered when not specifying the rated current sensitivity and the time of time-delay type of operation to 2.0 seconds. 3. Specify “FP-LT” when using a flush plate product with a leadwire terminal block. 4. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead-wire terminal block. 5. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells.

6.

Rated operational voltage 100-440V 200-440V

Applicable circuit voltage 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V

2 2 Detailed Specifications

Adjustable 200 225 250 300 350 400

400 NV400-REW

Available voltage range 85-484V 175-484V

29

2

Detailed Specifications

Motor Protection Breakers

3

NF-MB

Please specify MB

Frame (A) Model

30 A

Rated current In (A) Rated motor capacity (kW) Rated ambient temperture 40°C (45°C for marine use)

Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

Cassette-type Installation and accessories connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

440V 415V AC 400V 380V 230V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Without current Number of operating cycles With current (440VAC) Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Front connection (F) Page Solderless (BOX) terminal (SL) Rear (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) (UVT) Undervoltage trip With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Closed (S) (I) 130 Enclosure Dustproof Waterproof (W) Electrical operation device (NFM) 133 Mechanical Panel mounting 129 interlock (MI) (*2) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock HL 127 device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC, PTC) 121 (B-ST) Rear stud 94 Plug-in (PM) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Marine use approval (NK, LR, ABS, GL) Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions External accessories

3 Detailed Specifications

2

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

32

50

NF32-SV 25 16 12 10 8 7.1 5 4

200/220V 400/440V kW kW 5.5 11 3.7 7.5 − 5.5 2.2 − − 3.7 1.5 − − 2.2 0.75 1.5

A 32

NF63-CV 200/220V 400/440V kW kW 7.5 15

A 45 40 32 25 16 12 10 8

200/220V 400/440V kW kW 11 22 − 18.5 7.5 15 5.5 11 3.7 7.5 − 5.5 2.2 − − 3.7

30

A 7.1 5 4

200/220V 400/440V kW kW 1.5 − − 2.2 0.75 1.5

A 100 90 71 63 45 (40) 32 (25) (16) (12.5)

200/220V 400/440V kW kW − 55 22 45 18.5 37 15 30 11 22 − 18.5 7.5 15 5.5 11 3.7 7.5 − 5.5

225 NF250-SV A 225 200 175 150 125

200/220V 400/440V kW kW 55 110 − − 45 90 37 75 30 −

3 3 3 3 3 3 500 500 500 500 500 500 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 25/25 36/36 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 7.5/7.5 30/30 36/36 5/5 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 30/30 36/36 5/5 5/5 5/5 7.5/7.5 30/30 36/36 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 7.5/7.5 15/15 50/50 85/85 8 8 8 8 8 8 AC AC AC AC AC AC Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible 10,000 10,000 10,000 15,000 25,000 25,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 10,000 A A A A A A 3 3 3 3 3 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 75 75 75 75 90 105 130 130 130 130 130 165 68 68 68 68 68 68 90 90 90 90 90 92 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.7 1.0 1.6 dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal dScrew terminal − − − − d d dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dRound stud dBar stud dBar stud d d d d d d d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d (*1) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − d (*3) d (*3) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − d d d d Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration Self-declaration TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process q q q q q q Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped 142 142 144 148

Notes: *1 The cassette type design makes it easy for customer to install. Available for installation on side (excluding UVT). *2 Not isolation compatible. *3 Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.



100 NF125-SV

NF63-SV

Remarks: 1. The motor circuit breakers do not have an applicable rated motor capacity. Select a motor circuit breaker based on the total load current of the motor. 2. Products with rating parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 3. Specify “P-LT” when using a plug-in product with a lead wire terminal block. 4. The circuit breaker has the rated short circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells. 5. Please refer to “Table 4-17”, of Page 73 for details.

2

Detailed Specifications

4

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers Frame (A) Model

50 NF50-SVFU

100 NF100-CVFU

125 NF125-SVU

NF125-HVU

Image

4 Detailed Specifications

2

Front (F)

External accessories (*2) Cassette-type Installation and accessories (*2) connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

15 20 30 40 50 60 Rated current In (A) (*4) (3) 5 10 15 20 30 60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 15 20 30 40 50 60 125 125 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100 40 50 100 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100 Rated ambient temperture 40°C (IEC 30°C) Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 240 240 480 480 600Y/347 600Y/347 Rated AC (V) voltage DC (V) − − − − − − 600Y/347V − − − − 18 18 480V − − 30 30 50 50 UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V − − − − − − 240V 14 14 50 50 100 100 120V − − − − − − DC 60V − − − − − − Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 440 600 690 690 690 690 690V − − 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5 500V − 7.5/4 18/9 18/9 25/13 25/13 440V 7.5/4 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 IEC 60947-2 AC 415V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 EN 60947-2 400V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 (Icu/Ics) 380V 10/5 10/5 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 230V 15/8 15/8 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 250V − − − − − − DC − − 60V − − − − Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 8 8 8 8 8 Current (*1) AC AC AC AC AC AC Suitability for isolation Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Reverse connection − Possible Possible Possible Possible Possible Utilization category A A A A A A Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3 3 N/A N/A EMC environment condition (environment A or B) N/A N/A N/A N/A ca a a 36 54 50 75 90 90 90 90 c b 120 150 160 160 160 160 b c 68 68 68 68 68 68 ca 90 90 90 90 90 90 Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.3 0.45 0.55 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page d d d d d d Solderless terminal (SL) − d d d d d (BAR) 92 − Bar d (*5) d d d d Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) − d (*5, 6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) d (*6) Alarm switch (AL) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) Auxiliary switch (AX) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) (UVT) Undervoltage trip d d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) d (*7) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 d d d d d d Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 − − − − − − (HL) d d d d d d Handle lock 127 device (HL-S) d d d d d d (F) d d d d d d External 117 operating handle (V) d d d d d d d d d d d d Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) − (*3) IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 Standard accessory Standard accessory − − − − CE marking TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval CCC recognition Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Automatic tripping device Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Page of Characteristics and dimensions 198 200 202 202

Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC. *2 These accessories differ from the general and CE/CCC products in specifications. Please consult us for details. *3 The standard structure conforms to IP20 (finger protection). *4 The rated ambient temperature for NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU and NF125-HVU is specified at 40°C also by IEC. *5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers. *6 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal (SL/ AMP-N) are available. In this case, a busbar terminal is not provided on the load side. *7 These cassette type circuit breakers can be installed by the customer. They can be installed with their side faces in close contact (except NF50-SVFU and UVT).

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells. 3. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase circuits.

Line

Line



3-pole

Load

US UL Standard 489 UL File No.E167691 Body UL File No.E108284 Accessories Canada CSA Standard C22.2 No.5

31

4-po

2

Detailed Specifications

4

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers Frame (A) Model

225 NF225-CWU

250 NF250-SVU

NF250-HVU

Image

Front (F)

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated current In (A) (*5) Rated ambient temperture 40°C (IEC 30°C) Number of poles Rated AC (V) voltage DC (V) 600Y/347V 480V UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V 240V 120V DC 60V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V 500V 440V IEC 60947-2 AC 415V EN 60947-2 400V (Icu/Ics) 380V 230V 250V (*3) DC 60V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current (*1) Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page Solderless terminal (SL) (BAR) 92 Bar Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) (UVT) Undervoltage trip With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 (HL) Handle lock 127 device (HL-S) (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions

Cassette-type Installation and External accessories (*2) accessories (*2) connections

4 Detailed Specifications

2

125 150 175 125 150 175 250 250 200 225 200 225 3 3 3 3 480 480 600Y/347 600Y/347 − − − − − − 18 18 35 35 50 50 − − − − 65 65 100 100 − − − − − − − − 690 690 690 690 8/4 8/4 10/5 10/5 25/13 25/13 36/18 36/18 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 36/18 36/18 50/25 50/25 65/33 65/33 100/50 100/50 − − − − − − − − 8 8 8 8 AC AC AC AC Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible Possible Possible Possible Possible A A A A 3 3 3 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A 105 105 105 105 185 185 185 185 68 68 68 68 92 92 92 92 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 d d d d d d d d d d d d d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d(*7) d d d d − − − − d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − (*4) − (*4) − (*4) − (*4) − − − − TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped 206 206

125 150 175 200 225 3 240 − − − − 35 − − 600 − 10/5 15/8 18/9 18/9 18/9 35/18 10/5 − 6 AC/DC compatible Compatible Possible A 3 N/A 105 165 68 92 1.5 d − d − d d d d d d(*6) d d d d d − (*4) − TÜV approval Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Equipped 204

Notes: *1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible with both AC and DC. *2 These accessories differ from the general products in specifications. Please consult us for details. *3 When using a 3-pole circuit breaker, use two poles. When wired as shown right, NF225-CWU can be used at up to 400 V DC. *4 Since NF225-CWU comes with a protective cover, it has an IP20 (finger protection) structure as standard. Other models have IP20 (finger protection) structures as standard. *5 The rated ambient temperature for NF250-SVU and NF250-HVU is specified at 40°C also by IEC. *6 Not isolation compatible. *7 These cassette type circuit breakers can be installed by the customer. They can be installed with their side faces in close contact (except UVT). *8 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal (SL/ AMP-N) are available. In this case, a busbar terminal is not provided on the load side.

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells. 3. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase circuits.

Line

Line



3-pole

US UL Standard 489 UL File No.E167691 Body UL File No.E108284 Accessories Canada CSA Standard C22.2 No.5

32

Load

4-pole

L

2 Detailed Specifications

4 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers Frame (A) Model

400

630

NF400-SWU

NF400-HWU

NF630-SWU

NF630-HWU

250 300 350 400

250 300 350 400

500 600 630

500 600 630

3 600Y/347 − 20 35 − 65 − − 690 10/10(5/5)(*4) 30/30(25/25)(*4) 42/42(36/36)(*4) 45/45(36/36)(*4) 45/45(36/36)(*4) 50/50(42/42)(*4) 85/85(65/65)(*4 ) − − 8 AC Compatible Possible A 3 N/A 140 257 103 155 5.7 − d d(*5) d(*5) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d d d(*1)(*2) d(*6) − d d d − − TÜV approval Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Equipped 208

3 600Y/347 − 25 65 − 100 − − 690 15/10 42/42 65/65 70/70 70/70 70/70 100/100 − − 8 AC Compatible Possible A 3 N/A 140 257 103 155 5.7 − − d(*5) − d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d d d(*1)(*2) d(*6) − d d d − − TÜV approval Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Equipped 208

3 600Y/347 − 20 35 − 85 − − 690 10/10 30/30 42/42 45/45 45/45 50/50 85/85 − − 8 AC Compatible Possible A 3 N/A 210 275 103 155 9.6 − d(*7) d(*5) d(*5) d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d d d(*1)(*2) d(*6) − d d d − − TÜV approval Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Equipped 210

3 600Y/347 − 25 65 − 100 − − 690 15/10 42/42 65/65 70/70 70/70 70/70 100/100 − − 8 AC Compatible Possible A 3 N/A 210 275 103 155 9.6 − − d(*5) − d(*3) d(*3) d(*3) d d d(*1)(*2) d(*6) − d d d − − TÜV approval Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Equipped 210

Image

External accessories

Front (F)

Cassette-type Installation and accessories connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Notes: *1 Not isolation compatible. *2 Not acquire the TÜV certification. *3 Cassette type accessories are field mountable type. It can respend to adhesion attachment of a breaker as standard below 250A frame. (excluding UVT.) *4 The values in parentheses apply to the circuit breakers with solderless terminals. *5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers. *6 Please consult us. (Models which are not UL or TUV certified but can be locked in the ON and OFF positions are available.) *7 Not available for 630A.



2 4 Detailed Specifications

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C Number of poles Rated AC (V) voltage DC (V) 600Y/347V 480V UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02 AC 480Y/277V 240V 120V DC 60V Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V 500V 440V IEC 60947-2 AC 415V EN 60947-2 400V (Icu/Ics) 380V 230V 250V DC 60V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b c b ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page Solderless terminal (SL) (BAR) 92 Bar Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) (UVT) Undervoltage trip With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 (HL) Handle lock 127 device (HL-S) (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions

Remarks: 1. The circuit breaker has the rated short-circuit breaking capacity specified in the shaded cells. 2. The 3-pole circuit breakers can be used on single-phase circuits.



US UL Standard 489 UL File No.E167691 Body UL File No.E108284 Accessories Canada CSA Standard C22.2 No.5

33

2

Detailed Specifications

4

UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (Harmonic Surge Ready) Frame (A) Model

50 NV50-SVFU

100 NV100-CVFU

125

250

NV125-SVU

NV125-HVU

NV250-SVU

NV250-HVU

Image

High-speed type

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C Number of poles Phase line (*1) UL 489 Rated operational IEC 60947-2 voltage AC V EN 60947-2 Rated current sensitivity In mA

Front (F)

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Pickup current, UL 1053 Max. operating time (s) at 5ln (*4) Earth leakage indication system 480V UL 489 240V AC CSA C22.2 No.5-02 120V 440V IEC 60947-2 400V EN 60947-2 AC 230V (Icu/Ics) 100V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Suitability for isolation Reverse connection (below 240VAC) Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (kg) Screw terminal (AMP-N) Page Solderless terminal (SL) (BAR) 92 Bar Power supply solderless load bar (SL/BAR) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) 102 Shunt trip (SHT) (UVT) Undervoltage trip With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Test button module (TBM) 115 Mechanical interlock (MI) 129 (HL) Handle lock 127 device (HL-S) (F) External 117 operating handle (V) Terminal Large terminal cover (TC-L) 121 cover Small terminal cover (TC-S) 122 IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters 137 CE marking CCC recognition Automatic tripping device Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions

Cassette-type Installation and External accessories (*2) accessories (*2) connections

4 Detailed Specifications

2

(5) (10) 15 20 30 40 50 2 3 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 120-240 100-240

100-440

60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100 3 3f3W, 1f2W 120-240 100-440

100-440

30, 50, 100/200/500 selectable 75% of ln 75% of ln 0.04 0.04 Display window Mechanical type (button) − − 14 14 14 14 − 7.5/4 10/5 − 10/5 10/5 15/8 15/8 15/8 15/8 15/8 15/8 4 6 6 Compatible Compatible − Possible A A 2 2 A A 36 54 75 120 150 68 68 90 90 0.4 0.5 0.9 d d − d − d(*5) − d(*5, *6) − d(*8) d(*8) − d(*8) d(*8) − d(*8) d(*8) − d d(*8) − d d − d(*9) − − d d d d d d d d d d − (*3) d(*3) Standard accessory Standard accessory TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 198 200 30 50

30 50 100

Notes: *1 If using a 3-pole earth leakage circuit breaker as a 1-pole 2-phase device, connect the left and right poles and not the central pole. *2 These are different from general models in specifications. Consult us for the details. *3 The standard structure conforms to IP20 (finger protection). *4 The maximum operating time is 0.1 according to UL 1053. *5 The circuit breakers with busbar terminals have insulation barriers. *6 Circuit breakers for power supply solderless load screw terminal (SL/ AMP-N) are available. In this case, a bar terminal is not provided on the load side. *7 Circuit breakers for 100 V AC do not have obtained CCC certificate. *8 These cassette type accessories can be installed by the customer. They can be installed with their side faces in close contact with circuit breakers (except NV50-SVFU and UVT). *9 Standard type is SLT equipped.

15 20 30 (40) 15 20 30 (40) 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 125 250 250 50 60 75 100 50 60 75 100 200 225 200 225 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 3f3W, 1f2W 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480 100-440

30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 selectable selectable 75% of ln 75% of ln 0.04 0.04 Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 30 30 50 50 50 50 30/15 30/15 30/15 30/15 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 6 6 Compatible Compatible Possible Possible A A 2 2 A A 90 90 160 160 68 68 90 90 1.2 1.2 d d d d d d d(*6) d(*6) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d d d(*9) d(*9) − − d d d d d d d d d d − (*3) − (*3) − − TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 202

100-440

100-440

30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 selectable selectable 75% of ln 75% of ln 0.04 0.04 Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 50 50 100 100 100 100 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 100/50 100/50 6 6 Compatible Compatible Possible Possible A A 2 2 A A 90 90 160 160 68 68 90 90 1.2 1.2 d d d d d d d(*6) d(*6) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d d d(*9) d(*9) − − d d d d d d d d d d − (*3) − (*3) − − TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 202

100-440

100-440

30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 selectable selectable 75% of ln 75% of ln 0.04 0.04 Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 35 35 65 65 65 65 36/18 36/18 36/18 36/18 65/33 65/33 65/33 65/33 6 6 Compatible Compatible Possible Possible A A 2 2 A A 105 105 185 185 68 68 92 92 1.8 1.8 d d d d d d d(*6) d(*6) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d d d(*9) d(*9) − − d d d d d d d d d d − (*3) − (*3) − − TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 206

100-440

100-440

30, 50, 100/200/500 30, 50, 100/200/500 selectable selectable 75% of ln 75% of ln 0.04 0.04 Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) 50 50 100 100 100 100 50/25 50/25 50/25 50/25 100/50 100/50 100/50 100/50 6 6 Compatible Compatible Possible Possible A A 2 2 A A 105 105 185 185 68 68 92 92 1.8 1.8 d d d d d d d(*6) d(*6) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d d d(*9) d(*9) − − d d d d d d d d d d − (*3) − (*3) − − TÜV approval TÜV approval Recognition in process Recognition in process Thermal-magnetic Thermal-magnetic Equipped Equipped 206

Remarks: 1. Products with rated current parenthesized are produced when an order is placed. 2.  Rated operational voltage Applicable circuit voltage Available voltage range 120-240V (UL) 120-240-480V (UL) 240V (UL) 100-230V (IEC) 100-240V (IEC) 100-230-400-440V (IEC) 100-440V (IEC) 230-400-440V (IEC)

120/240V 120/240/480V 240V 100/110/200/220/230V 100/110/200/220/230/240V 100/110/200/220/ 230/240/254/265/ 380/400/415/440V 230/240/254/265/ 380/400/415/440V

66-264V 66-528V 132-264V 85-253V 85-264V 85-484V 195-484V

US UL Standard 489 UL File No.E167691 Body UL File No.E108284 Accessories Canada CSA Standard C22.2 No.144 C22.2 No.5

34

2

Detailed Specifications

5

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

MDU Breakers Frame (A) Model

250 400 630 800 NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU NF400-SEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU NF630-SEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU

Image

Phase line

External accessories (*2)

Cassette-type accessories

Installation and connections

Overall dimensions (mm)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V 500V 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 AC 400V (Icu/Ics) 380V 230V 200V 100V Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Current Suitability for isolation Reverse connection (below 240VAC) Without current Number of operating cycles With current Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) ca a a c b b c ca Mass of front-face type (Breaker mounting) (kg) MDU installation Front (F) Page Rear (*3) (B) 92 Plug-in (PM) Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt trip (SHT) 102 (UVT) Undervoltage trip MDU transform AL, AX, AL + AX (MG) With lead-wire terminal block (SLT) 114 Alarm contact Pre-alarm (PAL) 116 output (*5) Trip-indicator (TI) Electrical operation device (*6) (NFM) 133 Panel mounting Mechanical 129 interlock (MI) (*7) Breaker mounting LC Handle lock HL 127 device HL-S (F) External 117 operating handle (V) TC-L TC-S Terminal 121 cover TTC BTC Rear stud (B-ST) 94 Automatic tripping device MDU measurement specifications Trip button Page of Characteristics and dimensions

Adjustable 125-250A Adjustable 200 225 250 Adjustable 300 350 400 Adjustable 400 450 500 500 (12.5A Step) 300 350 400 500 600 630 600 700 800 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f3W, 3f4W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 1f2W 690 690 690 690 8/8 10/8 10/10 10/10 10/10 15/15 10/10 15/15 18/18 30/23 30/30 50/50 30/30 50/50 30/30 50/50 36/36 50/50 42/42 65/65 42/42 65/65 42/42 65/65 36/36 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 36/36 75/75 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 36/36 75/75 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 − − − − − − − − 8 8 8 8 AC AC AC AC Compatible Compatible Compatible Compatible − − − − 25,000 6,000 6,000 4,000 10,000 1,000 1,000 500 A B B B 3 3 3 3 A A A A 105 140 105 140 140 185 140 185 210 280 210 280 210 280 210 280 165 257 275 275 68 103 103 103 92 155 155 155 1.8 2.3 1.8 2.3 6.2 8 6.2 8 10.7 13.8 10.7 13.8 11.1 14.4 11.1 14.4 Breaker mounting, Panel mounting (*1) Breaker mounting, Panel mounting (*2) d d d d d d d d d d d d d d − − − − d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4) d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4) d d d d d d d d(*4) d d(*4) d d(*4) d(*4) d(*4) d d d d d d d d PAL 1a d PAL 1a d PAL 1a d PAL 1a − d PAL 1a, OAL 1a d PAL 1a, OAL 1a d PAL 1a, OAL 1a Available only for the MDU panel mounting type Available only for the MDU panel mounting type. Disavailable alarm contact output. d d d d − − Available only for the MDU panel mounting type d(*9) d(*9) − − − d d d d d Available only for the MDU panel mounting type Available only for the MDU panel mounting type Available only for the MDU panel mounting type Available only for the MDU panel mounting type d(*8) d d(*8) d − d(*8) d d(*8) d d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) d(*8) Available only for the MDU panel mounting type and line side d(*8) d d(*8) d − − − d d(*8) d d Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) Electronic (effective value detection) See. 36 Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped 212 214 216 216

Notes: *1 In the case of panel mounting, the panel holder plate, the screws and the MDU connection cable (2m) are packed as standard. The MDU connection cable of 0.5m, 3m, 5m and 10m can be specified when ordering. And dimension of the front panel drilling of the breaker is different between breaker mounting and panel mounting. *2 In the case of panel mounting, the panel holder plate, the nuts and the MDU connection cable (2m) are packed as standard. The MDU connection cable of 0.5m, 3m, 5m and 10m can be specified when ordering. *3 For 250AF breakers, the studs are packed as standard. For 400/630/800AF breakers, please specify the installation angle of the studs because it is installed to the breaker before shipping. *4 It can be installed to the breaker by each customer. *5 In the case of the breaker with alarm contact output, the module (terminal) is attached to the right side of the breaker and the control power (AC/DC 100-240V 50-60Hz 5VA) is needed. The Output function for alarm output of PAL can set “Self-holding” or “Auto-reset”. Default setup is “Auto-reset”. *6 For 250AF of electrical operation device, AL is used for the trip indication as standard. The breaker with alarm output contact is not available. *7 Not isolation compatible. *8 In the case of breaker mounting, the terminal cover is special type for MDU breaker. *9 Available only for the MDU panel mounting type.

35

2 5 Detailed Specifications

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperture 40°C Number of poles

2

Detailed Specifications

5

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

Measuring Display Unit Breakers (Circuit Breakers with Measuring Display Unit)

5 Detailed Specifications

2

dThree major features of Measuring Display Unit Breakers 1. Saving of space and labor for installation 2. Improved and diversified functions 3. Provision of total cost advantages Measuring Display Unit Breakers with built-in VT and CT and Measuring Display Unit realize measurement, display and transmission of electric circuit information in small space with less installation and wiring work and provide total cost advantages. The Measuring Display Unit Breakers full of functions in small bodies are suitable for monitoring and protection of electric circuits and maintenance of equipment. A wide variety of models applicable to various networks supports the customers’ energy saving activities through detailed energy control as energy saving supporting devices.

dSimply realizing measurement and monitoring of electric circuits for supporting various types of energy saving control

The circuit breakers measure and display the load current, line voltage, electric power, electric energy, harmonic current, leak current and power factor to realize detailed energy control. They support customers’ energy saving control.

WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers Applicable models

Examples of installation of measuring display unit Breaker mounting Panel mounting

NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU

dThe measuring display unit can be installed on the body or panel.

Note: The size of holes in the face board of the circuit breaker body varies depending on whether the measuring display unit is installed on the body or the panel.

rModel list

rMeasuring Display Unit cable list

Model type

Type name

Type name

Cable length

CC-Link communication

MDU-DP-C

MDU-DP-CB-2M

2m

Electric energy pulse output

MDU-DP-P

MDU-DP-CB-3M

3m

No transmission

MDU-DP-N

MDU-DP-CB-5M

5m

MDU-DP-CB-10M

10m

W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers

Examples of installation of measuring display unit Breaker mounting Panel mounting

Applicable models NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU, NF630-HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP with MDU, NF800-HEP with MDU

dThe measuring display unit can be installed on the body or panel.

rModel list Model type

Type name

Remarks

CC-Link communication

MDU-AC 

• The model names do not include .

Electric energy pulse output MDU-AP  No transmission

MDU-AN 

• When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the body, specify the A frame type in . For example, when the circuit breaker NF400-SEP with MDU and the Measuring Display Unit with CC-Link communication are combined, the model name is MDU-AC400. If 630A frame or 800A frame is used, specify 630 or 800 in . • When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the panel, specify the cable length (0.5 m, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m or 10 m) in . For example, when the Measuring Display Unit with CC-Link communication is installed on the panel with a 3-m cable, the model name is MDU-AC-PANEL 3M.

36

2 Detailed Specifications 5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

dSpecifications for Measuring Display Unit (1) The measurement and display items vary depending on the model or frame A. (For the measurement accuracy, please refer to page 39.) Table 2-1 Display Measurement and memory items (accuracy) (*1) (*2) Each phase Present value General (average value) (*5) Phase with max. value Load current Present value of demand Each phase (±1.0%) (*4) Phase with max. value Max. demand value among all phases Time of occurrence of max. demand value among all phases Between each lines Present value Line voltage General (average value) (*5) (±1.0%) Max. value among all lines Time of occurrence of max. value among all lines Fundamental wave of each phase Present value Each order of each phase General of each phase (*6) Max. value of fundamental wave among all phases Time of occurrence of max. value of fundamental wave among all phases Max. value in each order of each phase Harmonic current Time of occurrence of max. value in each order of each phase (±2.5%) General of each phase (*6) Demand value (*4) General max. value among all phases Time of occurrence of general max. value among all phases General distortion factor of each phase Content in each order of each phase Present value Electric power Present value (±1.5%) Demand value (*4) Max. value Time of occurrence of max. value Present value Present value Reactive power Demand value (*4) Max. value (±2.5%) Time of occurrence of max. value Integrated value Electric energy Amount for last 1 hour (±2.0%) Max. value of amount for 1 hour (*7) Time of occurrence of max. value of amount for 1 hour Integrated value Reactive energy Amount for last 1 hour (±3.0%) Max. value of amount for 1 hour (*7) Time of occurrence of max. value of amount for 1 hour Fault current (accuracy: ±15%) Cause of fault (*8) Cause of fault Present value Power factor Max. value (±5.0%) Time of occurrence of max. value Frequency (±2.5%) Present value PAL, OVER, Alarm of circuit breaker IDM_AL, ILA_AL, IUB_AL, (*9) Neutral line open phase alarm Tripping state of circuit breaker (AL) ON/OFF state of circuit breaker (AX) State of Number of times of tripping of circuit breaker circuit breaker Number of times of opening and closing of circuit breaker Time setting

With CC-Link Storage communication (*3) Communication

  −                                          

− − − − −   − −   − − −     −   − − − −   − −    −    −     −   −

               −      − −                     − 



−



 − − − − 

− − −   

−     

Demand time limit setting (*4)







IDM_AL (current demand alarm)







ILA_AL (current open phase alarm)







IUB_AL (unbalanced current alarm)







Neutral line open phase alarm







Phase switching setting Alarm retention (self-retention or automatic reset) setting Phase and wire type Electric energy arbitrary setting Reactive energy arbitrary setting Display direction

     

     

     

Default settings

Remarks

2 5 Detailed Specifications

Model

Notes:

Applicable models NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU

Value accumulated from previous reset to present

Value accumulated from previous reset to present Information on fault after previous reset or last fault, and cause of fault (continuously monitored)

The PAL functions are enabled when the MDU breaker with PAL module (option) is used. The neutral line open phase alarm is given only on the display. On installation of alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) On installation of auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) On installation of alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) On installation of auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) Initial setting and resetting after power failure are necessary (no power failure compensation) By default, the demand time limit is 2 min. It can be set in the range from 0 to 15 min in 1-min steps. By default, the function is off. The parameters can be set in the following ranges. Function: ON/OFF Pickup current: 50 to 100% (1% step) Demand time limit: 1 to 10 min (1-min step), 15, 20, 25 and 30 min By default, the function is off. The parameters can be set in the following ranges. Function: ON/OFF Pickup current: 10%, fixed (no setting) Operating time: 30 sec (no setting) By default, the function is off. The parameters can be set in the following ranges. Function: ON/OFF Pickup current: 30%, fixed (no setting) Operating time: 30 sec (no setting) 30 When the single-phase 3-wire type is set, the function is turned on. Rated operating overvoltage: 135 V AC (no setting) Operating time: 1 sec (no setting) Default: No phase switching Default: Automatic reset Default: 3-phase 3-wire Default: Vertical One of vertical, horizontal 1 and horizontal 2 can be selected.

*1 The term “each phase” used for load current and harmonic current refers to phase 1, 2, 3 or N. However, the phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers. The term “between each phase” used for line voltage refers to between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 1, 1 and N, 2 and N or 3 and N. However, voltage between phases 1 and N, 2 and N and 3 and N is applicable only on 4-pole circuit breakers. These circuit breakers measure the values every 0.25 sec. Therefore, even when a low order circuit breaker operates, operating current may not be measured. *2 Each maximum value is the largest value among values obtained from the start of operation (after the previous reset) to the present. *3 The integrated value of electric energy and the integrated value of reactive energy are stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 30 minutes, the fault current and the cause are stored upon occurrence of fault, the set values are stored when they are set, and other values are stored every 30 minutes in the nonvolatile E2PROM. *4 The demand time limit cannot be set individually. It is common to the items. *5 The average values of load current and line voltage are calculated as shown below when the phase and wire type is specified. Phase and wire type Single-phase 2-wire Single-phase 3-wire 3-phase 3-wire 3-phase 4-wire

Average present value Average present value Average present value Average present value phase 3 current)/3

of of of of

current current = phase 3 current current = (phase 1 current + phase 3 current)/2 current = (phase 1 current + phase 2 current +

Average present value of voltage Average present value of voltage = voltage between phases 2 and Average present value of voltage = (voltage between phases 1 and 2 + voltage between phases 2 and 3)/2 Average present value of voltage = (voltage between phases 1 and 2 + voltage between phases 2 and 3 + voltage between phases 3 and 1 phases)/3

*6 Sum of values of harmonic components in third to 19th orders except fundamental wave component *7 The reverse power is not measured. *8 If the upper limit of the fault current measurement range (rated current 125 to 250 A (adjustable): 4000 A, rated current 50, 60, 75, 100, 125 A (fixed): 2000 A)) is exceeded when overload or short circuit fault occurs, the cause of the fault may not be displayed, and the fault current may not be measured. For fault current, display of cause of fault and measurement of fault current are enabled when the AL for transmission with the Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed. *9 When the alarm retention mode has been set to Automatic reset, the alarm display on the Measuring Display Unit will be reset automatically. When the alarm retention mode is Self-retention, the alarm display will be self-retained. In the self-retention mode, the display can be reset through the alarm reset operation (collective reset). OVER will be automatically reset regardless of the mode setting.

37

2

Detailed Specifications

5

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

dSpecifications for Measuring Display Unit (1) The measurement and display items vary depending on the model or frame A. (For the measurement accuracy, please refer to page 40.)

Applicable models NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU, NF630-HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP with MDU, NF800-HEP with MDU

Table 2-2 Model Measurement and memory items (accuracy) (*3)

5 Detailed Specifications

2

Electric energy With CC-Link MDU Storage with pulse output communication Pulse output Display (*1) Communication (*1)

Remarks

Present value of each phase Demand value of each phase Average present value (*11) Max. demand value (general value) (*4) Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute)

    –

– – –  

– – – – –

    

Present value between each phases Average present value (*11) Max. value (general value) (*4) Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute)

   –

– –  

– – – –

   

Current value in 3rd, 5th, 7th … 19th orders of each phase Max. value in 3rd, 5th, 7th … 19th orders (general value) (*4) Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute)

  –

–  

– – –

  

Current value of general harmonics of each phase (*10) Demand value of general harmonics of each phase (*10) Max. demand value (general value) (*4) Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute)

   –

– –  

– – – –

   

Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable (Same as the present value when 0 min is specified)

Electric power (±2.5%)

Current value (also reverse power is measured) Demand value (also reverse power is measured) Max. demand value Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute)

   –

– –  

– – – –

   

Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable (Same as the present value when 0 min is specified)

Electric energy (±2.5%)

Electric energy (integrated value) (*5) Electric energy per time (*5) Max. value of electric energy per time (*5) Time of occurrence of max. value (year, month, day, hour, minute)

   –

 –  

 – – –

   

Value accumulated from previous reset to present Amount for 1 hour from hour to hour on built-in clock

Cause of fault

Fault current (accuracy: ±15%) (*11)

 

 

– –

 

Information on fault after previous reset or last fault, and cause of fault (continuously monitored)

Power factor (±5%)

Present value



–

–



 LED on

–

–



Load current (±2.5%)

Line voltage (±2.5%)

Harmonic current (±2.5%)

Time limit: 0 to 15 min, changeable (Same as the present value when 0 min is specified) Max. demand value after previous reset

Max. value after previous reset (not demand value)

Max. value after previous reset (not demand value)

Max. demand value after previous reset

Max. demand value after previous reset

Max. demand value after previous reset

Alarm of circuit breaker

PAL, OVER (*6) (*11)

State of circuit breaker

Tripping state of circuit breaker (AL) ON/OFF state of circuit breaker (AX)

– –

– –

– –

 

When alarm switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed When auxiliary switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed

Time setting

–

–

–



Initial setting and resetting after power failure are necessary (no power failure compensation).

Demand time limit setting (*7)





–



Default: 2 min Setting in 1-min steps in range from 0 to 15 min

PAL pickup current setting * Setting on circuit breaker body The Measuring Display Unit does not have the setting function.





–



Default: 100% Setting in 5% steps in range from 70 to 100% Default setting on breaker body is 70% unless otherwise specified.

Pulse unit setting





–

–

Default: 1 kWh/pulse Setting to 1 kWh, 10 kWh, 100 kWh, 1000 kWh or 10000 kWh

Default settings

Phase switching setting





–



Default: No phase switching

Alarm retention (self-retention or automatic reset) setting





–



Default: Automatic reset

Notes: *1 The electric energy (integrated value) is stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 2 hours, the fault current and the cause are stored upon occurrence of fault, the demand time limit, EPAL sensitivity current, PAL pickup current, pulse unit, alarm retention and phase switching settings are stored when they are set, and other values are stored every 2 hours in the nonvolatile E2PROM. Each maximum value is the largest value among values obtained from the start of operation (after the previous reset) to the present. *2 Every time the electric energy is integrated in the pulse unit (the unit can be set to 1 kWh, 10 kWh, 100 kWh, 1000 kWh or 10000 kWh), a pulse is output. Counting can be performed with a PLC. *3 The term “each phase” used for load current and harmonic current refers to phase 1, 2, 3 or N. However, the phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers. The term “between each phase” used for line voltage refers to between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3, 3 and 1, 1 and N, 2 and N or 3 and N. However, voltage between phases 1 and N, 2 and N and 3 and N is applicable only on 4-pole circuit breakers. The electric energy data is 6-digit data of up to 999999 kWh. The voltage and harmonic current are 3-digit data, and others are 4-digit. These circuit breakers measure the values every 0.25 sec. Therefore, even when a low order circuit breaker operates, operating current may not be measured. *4 Each general value indicates the value only of the phase with the maximum value. *5 The electric energy is not measured in the case of reverse power flow. *6 When the alarm retention mode has been set to Automatic reset, the PAL alarm LED display on the Measuring Display Unit front panel will be reset automatically. When the alarm retention mode is Self-retention, the alarm display will be self-retained. In the self-retention mode, the display can be reset through alarm reset operation (collective reset). OVER will be automatically reset regardless of the mode setting. *7 The demand time limit cannot be set individually. It is common to the items. *8 Sum of values of harmonic components in third to 19th orders except fundamental wave component. *9 The average present value of load current is the average value of current among phases 1, 2 and 3 (the current of the phase N is not included even in the case of a 4-pole circuit breaker). When the circuit breaker is used on a single-phase 3-wire circuit, the calculated value is displayed. However, ignore it. The average present value of line voltage is the average value of voltages between phases 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and 3 and 1 (the voltages between phases 1 and N, 2 and N and 3 and N are not included in the case of a 4-pole circuit breaker). *10 Setting at the pre-alarm current Ip (which can be set in the range from 70 to 100% of the rated current In in 5% steps) on the circuit breaker body. The Measuring Display Unit does not have the setting function. *11 The operating time of PAL is shown below. PAL

38

Same as pre-alarm operating time Tp on circuit breaker body

2 Detailed Specifications 5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

dSpecifications for Measuring Display Unit (2)

Applicable models NF250-SEV with MDU, NF250-HEV with MDU

Table 2-3

Tolerances

Demand time limit setting range Voltage circuit (1f2W, 3f3W) Voltage circuit (1f3W) Rated Voltage circuit (3f4W) input Current circuit Frequency (1) Wh (integrated value) Power failure (2) Max. value compensation (3) Setting data Clock Clock accuracy External dimensions (unit: mm) Control power supply Other functions

Specification 250 ms (harmonic current: 2 s) Current and voltage: ±1.0% (to rating input) Electric power: ±1.5% (to rating input) Reactive power: ±2.5% (to rating input) Harmonic current: ±2.5% (to rating input) Power factor: ±5% Frequency: ±2.5% Electric energy: ±2.0% (voltage 100 V to 440 V, range from 5 to 100% of current rating, power factor 1) Reactive energy: ±3.0% (voltage 100 V to 440 V, range from 10 to 100% of current rating, power factor 0) Fault current: ±15% (*1) 0 to 15 min (1-min steps)

2 5 Detailed Specifications

Item Data updating cycle

440 V (only 4-pole breakers applicable to 3f4W) Load current/harmonic current: 250 A 50 Hz/60 Hz (automatic discrimination of frequency) Stored in EEPROM (nonvolatile memory) * Wh and varh are stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 30 min. * Max. value is stored every 30 min. Setting data are stored when they are set. No power failure compensation Approx. 1 min/month See Characteristics and Dimensions. Compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz (allowable voltage range: 85% to 110%), 12 VA (*2) Function for switching phases to be measured to 1-3 and 3-1 PAL alarm, self-retention/automatic reset setting function (*3) Function for counting number of times of opening and closing of circuit breaker body (*4)

Notes: *1 The measurement of fault current of load is enabled when the AL switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed in the Measuring Display Unit Breaker body. *2 When the MDU unit control power is turned on, a rush current transitionally flows (maximum rush current: 2A, energizing time: 1ms (240V AC) *3 The PAL functions are enabled when the MDU breaker with PAL module (option) is used. *4 The function is enabled when the AX switch for transmission with Measuring Display Unit (option) is installed in the Measuring Display Unit Breaker body.

dNetwork Specifications for Measuring Display Unit [Electric energy pulse output]

[CC-Link communication]

Table 2-4

Table 2-5

Item Output elements Contact capacity Output pulse unit Output pulse width Max. wiring length

Specification Solid state relay (SSR), no voltage a contact (Ca and Cb terminals: no polarity) Compatible with 24V DC and 100 to 200 V AC, 20 mA 1, 10, 100, 1000 and 10000 kWh/pulse (settable) 0.35 to 0.45 s 100m

Item Communication speed Communication method Synchronization method Encoding method Transmission format Number of occupied stations

Number of connected units

Station number CC-Link version

Specification 10M/5M/2.5M/625k/156kbps Broadcast polling method Frame synchronization method NRZI Conforming to HDLC Remote device occupying 1 station Meet the following conditions. When a system consists only of Measuring Display Units, up to 42 units can be connected. Condition 1 for number of connected units  (1×a) + (2×b) + (3×c) + (4×d)  q 64 a: Number of units occupying 1 station b: Number of units occupying 2 stations c: Number of units occupying 3 stations d: Number of units occupying 4 stations Condition 2 for number of connected units  (16×A) + (54×B) + (88×C)  q 2304 A: Number of units at 1 remote I/O station q 64 B: Number of units at remote device station q 42 C: Number of units at local station q 26 Setting in range from 1 to 64 (Set the station number without fail.) CC-Link Ver.1.10 Master station

Max. total extension cable length and cable length between stations

Remote I/O Remote I/O Local station Local station station or remote station or remote or intelligent or intelligent device station device station device station device station

Cable length between stations Max. total extension cable length Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (with use of 110-ohm terminal resistance) Communication speed Cable length between stations Max. total extension cable length

Connecting cable

156kbps

625kbps

1200m

900m

2.5Mbps 5Mbps 0.2 m or more 400m

160m

10Mbps 100m

Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (shielded 3-core twisted pair cables) * Cables applicable to Ver. 1.10 supplied by different manufacturers can be used simultaneously.

Note: For more information, visit the website of CC-Link Partner Association (HYPERLINK “http://www.cc-Link.org/”).

39

2

Detailed Specifications

5

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

dSpecifications for Measuring dDisplay Unit (2)

Applicable models NF400-SEP with MDU, NF400-HEP with MDU, NF630-SEP with MDU, NF630-HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP with MDU, NF800-HEP with MDU

Table 2-6 Item Data updating cycle Tolerances

5 Detailed Specifications

2

Specification 250 ms (harmonic current: 2 s) Current, voltage and Electric power: ±2.5% (to rating input) Power factor: ±5% Electric energy: ±2.5% (voltage 100 V to 440 V, range from 5 to 100% of current rating, power factor 1) Fault current: ±15% 0 to 15 min (1-min steps)

Demand time limit setting range Voltage circuit (1f2W, 3f3W) 440 V (only 4-pole breakers applicable to 3f4W) Voltage circuit (1f3W) Rated Voltage circuit (3f4W) input Load current/harmonic current: 100 A/225 A/400 A/600 A/800 A (Automatic discrimination. Determined based on A frame of circuit breaker. Current circuit 100 A when rated current of 225 A frame is 100 A or less) Leakage current: 500 mA 50 Hz/60 Hz (automatic discrimination of frequency) Frequency (1) Wh (integrated value) Stored in EEPROM (nonvolatile memory) * Wh is stored upon occurrence of power failure and every 2 hours Power failure (2) Max. value compensation (3) Setting data * The max. value is stored every 2 hours. The setting data is stored when it is set. No power failure compensation Clock Approx. 1 min/month Clock accuracy W×D×H: 90×75×30 External dimensions (unit: mm) Compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz (allowable voltage range: 85% to 110%), 12 VA (*1) Control power supply Function for switching phases to be measured to 1-3 and 3-1 Other functions ECA/PAL alarm, self-retention/automatic reset setting function Note: *1 When the MDU unit control power is turned on, a rush current transitionally flows (maximum rush current: 2A, energizing time: 1ms (240V AC)

dNetwork Specifications for Measuring Display Unit [Electric energy pulse output]

[CC-Link communication]

Table 2-7

Table 2-8

Item Output elements Contact capacity Output pulse unit Output pulse width Max. wiring length

Specification Solid state relay (SSR), no voltage a contact (Ca and Cb terminals: no polarity) Compatible with 24V DC and 100 to 200 V AC, 20 mA 1, 10, 100, 1000 and 10000 kWh/pulse (settable) 0.35 to 0.45 s 100m

Item Communication speed Communication method Synchronization method Encoding method Transmission format Number of occupied stations

Number of connected units

Station number CC-Link version

Specification 10M/5M/2.5M/625k/156kbps Broadcast polling method Frame synchronization method NRZI Conforming to HDLC Remote device occupying 1 station Meet the following conditions. When a system consists only of Measuring Display Units, up to 42 units can be connected. Condition 1 for number of connected units  (1×a) + (2×b) + (3×c) + (4×d)  q 64 a: Number of units occupying 1 station b: Number of units occupying 2 stations c: Number of units occupying 3 stations d: Number of units occupying 4 stations Condition 2 for number of connected units  (16×A) + (54×B) + (88×C)  q 2304 A: Number of units at 1 remote I/O station q 64 B: Number of units at remote device station q 42 C: Number of units at local station q 26 Setting in range from 1 to 64 (Set the station number without fail.) CC-Link Ver. 1.10 Master station

Remote I/O Remote I/O Local station Local station station or remote station or remote or intelligent or intelligent device station device station device station device station

Cable length between stations CMax. total extension cable length Max. total extension cable length and cable length between stations

Connecting cable

Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (with use of 110-ohm terminal resistance) Communication speed Cable length between stations Max. total extension cable length

156kbps

625kbps

1200m

900m

2.5Mbps 5Mbps 0.2 m or more 400m

160m

10Mbps 100m

When the Measuring Display Unit is installed on the panel, the terminal block on the panel mounting plate and the terminal block on the Measuring Display Unit are connected with a CC-Link cable having a one-way length of 15 cm and an entire length of 30 cm. When connecting the unit in consideration of the following three points. (1) The one-way length of the CC-Link cable, 15 cm, is included in the distance (1) between stations. (2) The entire length of the CC-Link cable, 30 cm, is included in the maximum (1) transmission distance (total extension distance). Cables applicable to CC-Link Ver. 1.10 (shielded 3-core twisted pair cables) * Cables applicable to Ver. 1.10 supplied by different manufacturers can be used simultaneously.

Note: For more information, visit the website of CC-Link Partner Association (HYPERLINK “http://www.cc-Link.org/”).

40

2 Detailed Specifications 5 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

dCautions when Using Measuring Display Unit Breakers (common instructions) Measuring accuracy

How to use Measuring Display Unit Breaker on single-phase 2-wire circuity

(1) Connect the breaker as shown in the right figure. Connection on single-phase 2-wire circuit The phase 1 on the load side is charged. Insulate it. As measurement data, use the current of the phases 2 and 3 and the voltage between the 1 2 3 phases 2 and 3. Line side Although the current of the phase 1 and the voltage between the phases 1 and 2 and the phases 3 and 1 are measured, ignore the measurements. The Measuring Display Unit is designed for 3-phase 3-wire and single-phase and 3-wire circuits. On W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the average values of load current and line voltage are calculated from the values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 (between the Load side phases). Ignore these measurement values. ATTENTION: Live part Also when the breaker is used on a single-phase 3-wire circuit, ignore these values. Load When using any WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker, set the phase and wire type.

Phase sequence of Measuring Display Unit Breaker

The phase sequence of Measuring Display Unit Breaker can be set by using the phase switching function as shown below. When the breaker is installed vertically with the power supply side upward (see the right figure), the phase sequence is set as stated below. No phase switching: 1, 2, 3 and N from the left (default) With phase switching: 3, 2, 1, and N from the left Set the phase sequence in accordance with the installation and wiring methods. Notes (1) The phase N is provided only on 4-pole circuit breakers. Notes (2) Note that the position of the phase N is unchanged Notes (2) regardless of the phase switching setting.

Reverse connection of Measuring Display Unit Breaker

The Measuring Display Unit Breakers cannot be connected with the power supply and load sides set reversely.

1

2

3

N

*Phase N is provided only on 4-pole breakers. 3 2 1 N

Line side

Load side No phase switching (default)

With phase switching

Busbar 1 2 3 Load side

Line side

Line side

1

1

2

2

3

3

Measurement phase Phase switching setting: No phase switching

Load side

Measurement phase Phase switching setting: With phase switching

Installation of Measuring Display Unit Breaker in close contact

The Measuring Display Unit Breakers must not be installed in close contact. (1) In the case of 400, 630 or 800A frame, install the breaker body securing a wiring space of 30 mm or more on the right side of the breaker to connect the connecting cables and fitting the connecting cable connectors. (2) In the case of WS-V Series Measuring display Unit Breaker, install the breaker body securing a wiring space of 40 mm or more on the right side of the breaker to connect the connecting cables.

41

2 5 Detailed Specifications

(1) The accuracy of measurement of current or voltage is indicated as the percentage of error to the rated current or voltage for measurement by the Measuring Display Unit. The measurement rated current is the maximum rated current of each ampere frame. For W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the accuracy is the max. rated current × ±2.5%. For WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the accuracy is the max. rated current × ±1%. (For example, when the rated current of NF630-SEP with Measuring Display Unit is 350 A, the measurement rated current is 630 A, and the current accuracy is 630 A × ±2.5% = ±15 A.) * The measurement rated voltage is 440 V. (Common to all A frames) When the current is less than 1.0% of the measurement rated current in the case of WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers or less than 2.0% of the measurement rated current in the case of W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers or when the voltage is less than 5.0% of the measurement rated voltage in the case of WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers or less than 2.0% of the measurement rated current in the case of W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers, the current or voltage is cut off, and zero is displayed. (2) When the current is cut off, the current is displayed as 0 A. However, if the current is 0.4% or more of the measurement rated current, the electric energy is measured. (3) The accuracy of power factor is the percentage to electrical angle of 90°. A power factor of 50% or less is displayed as a reference value. (4) The accuracy of electric energy is ±2.0% of the true value in the case of WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers and ±2.5% of the true value in the case of W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers in the range of measurement rated voltage (100 V to 440 V) × current (measurement rated current of 5 to 100%).

2

Detailed Specifications

5

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

dCautions when using Measuring Display Unit Breaker (For Measuring Display Unit) Transmission method

5 Detailed Specifications

2

(1) One of No transmission, With pulse output and With CC-Link communication should be specified. (2) W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker with CC-Link communication cannot be manufactured for installing the Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body. (3) When With transmission is selected, data which can be transmitted depends on the function of the Measuring Display Unit Breaker body. The transmission options cannot be installed or changed later. Specify the options when issuing the initial order. (4) For the maximum number of connected units and transmission distance for each transmission type, see the following tables. <WS-V Measuring Display Unit Breakers> Tables 2-4 and 2-5 <W & WS Measuring Display Unit Breakers> Tables 2-7 and 2-8

Installation of Measuring Display Unit

(1) When the installation of Measuring Display Unit on panel has been specified, the breaker will come with the panel mounting parts, mounting screws and 2-m connecting cable (standard). (The 0.5-, 3-, 5- or 10-m connecting cable can be specified.) (2) If the installation position of the Measuring Display Unit is changed from the panel to the body or vice versa, the Measuring Display Unit and the breaker body must be returned to the manufacturer for modification.

Measuring Display Unit Breaker with CC-Link communication (W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breakers)

(1) If you intend to use the circuit breaker with its pane out on the face board, specify the installation on panel.

dChange of display direction for breaker mounting <WS-V Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker> (1) When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body installed in the horizontal direction, the direction of the display can be changed according to the installation direction. (2) The display direction is set on the display unit. Line side

Line side

Load side

Line side

Load side

Load side Default display direction

Installation with line side on left

Installation with line side on right

<W & WS Series Measuring Display Unit Breaker> (1) When installing the Measuring Display Unit on the breaker body installed in the horizontal direction, the direction of the display of Measuring Display Unit can be changed for ease in reading according to the installation direction. (2) Remove the screws on the rear panel of the Measuring Display Unit, and change the direction according to the installation direction. Display of Measuring Display Unit

Installation with power supply side on left

Display of Measuring Display Unit

Measuring Display Unit display mounting screws

Installation with power supply side on right Default direction of Measuring Display Unit display

42

5 Detailed Specifications

MEMO

2

43

2

Detailed Specifications

Miniature Circuit Breakers

6

BH

Model

BH-P

70

100

100

70

100

100

Number of poles

1

2

3

1

2

3

Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 40°C

70

70, 100

70, 100

70

70, 100

70, 100

Frame (A)

Image

6 Detailed Specifications

2 AC

230/400

230/400

DC

125

125

Rated voltage (V)

Rated short cirsuit capacity (kA)

AC230/400V

3

−

3

−

AC400V

−

3

−

3

IEC 60898-1 −

DC125V

1

Instantaneous tripping

ca c

a Dimensions (mm)

1 Type C (5 In <, 10 In)

b

a

25

75

25

50

95

74

c

57.5

60.5

ca Mass (kg)

50

b

77.5 0.16

0.32

75

79 0.48

0.13

Clamp terminal

0.26

0.38

Plug-in (line) Clamp (load)

Connection (*1)

Automatic tripping device

Optional accessories

Approved by

Thermal, magnetic

Terminal cover

d

Mounting plate

d

−

Terminal base

−

d

Lock cover

d

d

−

Notes: *1 If reguired solderless terminal can be supplied. (BH : Line and Load side, BH-P : Load side only)

44

LR, GL, NK

−

−

−

LR, BV, AB, GL, NK

−

2 Detailed Specifications

6 Miniature Circuit Breakers

BH-D6

Model

BH-D10

BH-DN

Image

1

Instantaneous tripping

2

Type B, C, D

Rated insulation voltage Ui [V]

2

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40

–

6

10

230/400V

6

–

–

400V

–

6

–

a

ca c

54

b

b

Type C*2

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

6, 10, 16, 20

–

4.5

10

–

–

–

10

20,000

10,000 36

18

36

87

20,000 54

72

87

18 88

c

44

44

44

ca

70

70

70

Thermal-magnetic

Thermal-magnetic

Thermal-magnetic

IEC35mm rail

IEC35mm rail

IEC35mm rail

1 to 25mm2

1 to 25mm2

1 to 10mm2

Type of overcurrent release Mounting Applicable wire size Weight [kg]

0.15

0.3

0.45

Alarm switch (AL) Mass Auxiliary switch (AX) optional accessories Shunt trip (SHT) Terminal connection Based on standard CE marking

0.55

0.25

0.15

0.3

0.45

0.55

0.12

d

d

–

d

d

–

d

d

–

Solderless

Solderless

Solderless

IEC 60898-1

IEC 60898-1

IEC 60898-1

EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration

EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration

EN 60898-1 : Self-declaration

GB 10963.1

GB 10963.1

GB 10963.1

CCC

2

–

10,000 72

2 (1+N)*1 230

8,000 36

4(3+N)*1

*2

440

8,000 18

3

Type B, C, D

6

With current

Dimensions [mm] a

Type B, C

230V

Without current

Number of operating cycles

1

*2

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

AC IEC 60898-1 (Icn)

*2

440

Rated current In [A] at ambient temperature 30°C Rated shortcircuit capacity [kA]

4(3+N)*1 2(1+N)*1

3

6 Detailed Specifications

Number of poles [P]

Notes: *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device). *2 Type B (3 In <,  5 In), Type C (5 In <,  10 In), Type D (10 In <,  20 In)

BH-D10 (For DC)

Model

Image

Number of poles [P]

1

2 Type B, C*3

Instantaneous tripping Rated insulation voltage Ui [V]

250

Rated current In [A] at ambient temperature 30°C

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

Rated short- IEC 60898-2 circuit capacity [kA] (Icn)

DC

125V

10

–

250V

–

10

Without current

Number of operating cycles

8,000

With current

Dimensions [mm] a

ca c b

a

4,000 18

36

b

87

c

44

ca

70

Type of overcurrent release

Thermal-magnetic

Mounting

IEC35mm rail 1 to 25mm2

Applicable wire size Weight [kg]

0.15

0.3

Alarm switch (AL)

d

Mass Auxiliary switch (AX) optional accessories Shunt trip (SHT) Terminal connection Based on standard CE marking CCC

d d Solderless IEC 60898-2 EN 60898-2 : Self-declaration GB 10963.2

Notes: *3 Type B: (5 In <,  7 In), Type C: (7 In <,  15 In)

45

2

Detailed Specifications

Miniature Circuit Breakers

6

RCBO

RCCB BV-D

Model

Image

Image

2(1+N)*1

Number of poles [P]

4(3+N)*1 *3

Rated current [A] at ambient temperature 30°C

2

230

230/400

Rated current sensitivity Inn [mA]

6 Detailed Specifications

ca c b

a

72

b

85

c

44

ca

70

b

0.2

Rated making and breaking capacity Im [A]

500(In 25,40A), 630(In63A) 6

Rated residual making and breaking capacity Inm [A]

500(In 25,40A), 630(In63A) 8,000

With current

8,000

Type of overcurrent release

0.2

CE marking CCC

With current

Thermal-magnetic IEC35mm rail 1 to 16mm2

Weight [kg]

0.19

Solderless

Terminal connection

IEC 61008-2-2

Based on standard

GB 16916.22

20,000 20,000 (In 6,10,16,20A) 15,000 (In 25A) 10,000 (In 32,40A)

Applicable wire size

EN 61008-2-2 : Self-declaration

70

Thermal, magnetic

Mounting 0.35

Terminal connection Based on standard

Automatic tripping device

Type of overcurrent release

1 to 25mm2

Weight [kg]

44

Without current

IEC35mm rail

Applicable wire size

88

c

0.19

Number of operating cycles

–

Mounting

36

Mass [kg]

6

Without current

a b ca

0.35

Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc [kA]

Number of operating cycles

ca c

4.5 Type C*2

Tripping characteristics Dimensions a [mm]

Mass [kg]

Rated conditional residual short-circuit current Inc [kA]

0.04 Type AC

Breaking capacity [kA] sym. (IEC 61009)

6 36

230 30, 100, 300

Pulsating current sensitivity

Type AC

Rated conditional short-circuit current [kA]

Rated voltage [VAC] Max. operating time at 5Inn [s]

0.04

Pulsating current sensitivity

6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40

Rated current sensitivity Inn [mA]

30, 300

Max. operating time at 5Inn [s]

2(1+N)*1

Number of poles [P] Rated current [A] at ambient temperature 30°C

25, 40, 63

Rated voltage [VAC]

Dimensions a [mm]

BV-DN

Model

Solderless IEC 61009-2-2

CE marking

EN 61009-2-2 : Self-declaration

CCC

GB 16917.22

Notes: *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device). *2 Type C: (5 In <,  10 In) *3 For use to three phase 4-wire type. When using, it be sure to connect the neutral wire to the neutral phase. Not available for use to three phase 3-wire type.

Isolating switch KB-D

Model

Image

Number of poles [P]

1

2

Utilization category Rated current [A] at ambient temperature 30°C 230

400

Short time withstand current [A]

20 3 In, 1s

Short-circuit making capacity [A] Dimensions [mm] a

ca c b

20 3 In a

18

36

b

87

c

44

ca Mass [kg]

0.18

Without current

CE marking CCC

46

0.27

0.36

0.3

0.4

3,000 IEC35mm rail 1 to 25mm2

Applicable wire size Terminal connection

72

20,000

With current

Weight [kg]

54

70 0.09

Mounting

Based on standard

4(3+N)

32, 63, 80

Rated voltage [VAC]

Number of operating cycles

3 AC22A class

0.1

0.2 Solderless IEC 60947-3 EN 60947-3 : Self-declaration GB 14048.3

2 Detailed Specifications

6 Miniature Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Miniature Circuit Breakers Functions of Accessories Internal accessory

Function

AL

Alarm switch

Electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker.

AX

Auxiliary switch

Electrically indicates the On/Off status of the circuit breaker. Electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote location. Permissible working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or 70 to 125% of the DC rated voltage.

Shunt trip

Equipping of Accessories Model

BH-D6

BH-D10

AL





AX





SHT





Accessory

BH, BH-P, BH-DN, BV-DN, KB-D, BV-D

–

: Accessory equipped –: Accessory not equipped

Specifications Type

Contact

Configuration Contact capacity

Function

AL

AX

AL+AX

AX+AX

AL-05DLS

AX-05DLS

ALAX-05DLS

AX2-05DLS

1C

1C

2C

2C

400VAC, 2A

230VAC, 5A

120VDC, 0.4A

48VDC, 1.5A

24VDC, 4A

Line

–

–

AX

AX

Load

AL

AX

AL

AX

Connection

Clamp terminal

Compliance standard

IEC 60947-5-1

Type

SHT SHTA400-05DLS

Cut-off switch

SHTD048-05DLS Equipped

Voltage

110-400VAC

24-48VDC

Input power requirement

110VAC 60VA 230VAC 250VA 400VAC 750VA

24VDC 75VA 48VDC 300VA

Operating time [ms]

< 20

Connection

Solderless terminal

Compliance standard

IEC 60947-2

2 6 Detailed Specifications

SHT

* Secure a sufficient input power supply so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage). * The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until the time the main contact of the breaker starts to open.

47

2

Detailed Specifications

Miniature Circuit Breakers

6

Combinations of Accessories AL

AX

2AX

ALAX Accessory connection combinations

SHT

AX+SHT

AL+SHT

2AX+SHT

ALAX+SHT

Breaker

AL

AX

AL+AX

AX+AX

SHT

Outline Drawing AL-05DLS

AX-05DLS

ALAX-05DLS AX2-05DLS

SHTA400-05DLS SHTD048-05DLS

87

45

95

45

44.5

47.5

Solderless terminal

44.5

M3.5 screw

92

92

45

44.5

Type ALAX-05DLS

45

6 Detailed Specifications

2

M3.5 screw M3.5 screw 17

9

44

17

9

70max

17

9

44

44

18

70max

44

17

M5 screw

70max

70max

Connection of Line and Load Side AL-05DLS

AX-05DLS

Line

96

98

ALAX-05DLS

95

Load

AL

95 ALc 96 ALb 98 ALa

14

12

AX2-05DLS

Line

Line

11

AX

11 AXc 12 AXb 14 AXa

Line

12

14

11

96

98

95

AX

11 AXc 12 AXb 14 AXa

12

14

11

AL

95 ALc 96 ALb 98 ALa

24

22

21

Load

Load

AX

11 AXc 12 AXb 14 AXa

AX

21 AXc 22 AXb 24 AXa

Load

Installation of Accessories (AX, AL, SHT) ( 1) Installation 1 Off

(2) Removal 2 Hook

3 Insert

4 Click

48

1

2

2

Detailed Specifications

Circuit Protectors

7

30

Frame (A) CP30-BA

Model

CP-S

Image

1

2

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) Rated current (A) UL 1077 CSA C22.2 No.235 (*11)

Rated voltage (V)

1

2

2.5

2.5 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.75 1 2 2.5 3 5 7 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

250 65

125

AC

2.5kA at 250V 2.5kA at 65V

250

–

65

–

1.5kA at 250V

–

–

2.5kA at 125V

–

1kA at 65V

250

250

AC

250

1.5kA at 230V 2.5kA at 120V

DC

2.5kA at 60V

2.5kA at 120V

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

–

AC

2.5/2.5kA at 230V 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V

–

–

d

– (*1)

– (*8)

d

Rated short time current (for switch only type)

–

Rated ambient temperature (°C) Operating characteristics

–

– AC250V 50/60Hz AC125V 50/60Hz DC65V DC125V 25 (T25)

40 (T40) Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (*2)

: hydraulic-magnetic [HM]

S-type (IEC 60934)

Trip-free behaviour

Trip-free (IEC 60934) 0.08 Retractable small terminal cover (TC-S)

0.06

0.12

0.18

–

Inertial delay (ID)

d (Medium, Slow type: AC only)

d (Medium, Slow, Fast type: AC only)

Alarm switch (AL)

d (1c)

d (1c) (*7)

Auxiliary switch (AX)

d (1c)

d (1c)

d (for relay type) (*3)

d (for parallel and relay type: AC only)

Shunt trip (SHT) Large terminal cover (TC-L) Back facing wiring termnal (BT) Lock cover (LC) Accessory terminal cover (TC) Main body Alarm switch / Auxiliary switch

Main body mounting method International standard

Notes: *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 *11

0.23

: hydraulic-magnetic [HM]

dStandard IP20 (front, terminal covers closed) [Certified of TUV]

Flushpanel mounting brackets (FP)

CE Marking

0.16

0.02s 0.02s 0.02s 0.02s

Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Medium type (M), (MD) Slow type (S), (SD) Fast type (F), (FD)

Method of operation Mass (kg)

1500A 2500A 1000A 1000A

Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD)

Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Medium type (M), (MD) Slow type (S), (SD) Fast type (F)

Mode of tripping

1kA at 60V

–

DC

Reverse connection

Connection

1kA at 120V (1kA at 60V) (*7)

1kA at 60V

250

AC-DC common use

Accessories

–

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit IEC 60934 capacity (kA) EN 60934 (Icn)

2

3

250

0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 AC (V) DC (V)

DC

EN 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

3

250

7 Detailed Specifications

Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

d (*6)

–

d

–

d (*4), (*6)

–

–

–

d

d (*6)

–

20A or less : Screw terminal M4 30A : Screw termnal M5

Male tub terminal 6.3mm (#250) [Screw terminal M4 (series type only)]

Screw terminal M3.5

Male tub terminal 2.8mm (#110)

Srface, IEC rail mounting Flush panel mounting (option)

Panel mounting

UL(cURus), CCC (*5) EN 60934 : TUV approval EN 60947-2 : Self-declaration (*5)

UL(UR) (*9), (*10)

EN 60934 : TUV approval (*10)

– Operating characteris is Medium type (M) only. The rated current, 0.3A, 2A, 3A and 7A are not applied.

The 3-pole products are for AC use only. Contact us for operating characteristics other than those mentioned above. In poles equipped with a shunt tripping mechanism, the overcurrent tripping element is not operative (switched shunt tripping). For back-face wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with 30A, or 20A or less. UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products. It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV. In case of DC use, only DC65V is available. Specify if for DC use when ordering. Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.) Connection is male tub terminal only. CP30-BA only.

Remarks: 1. Products for non-standard conditions are special order. (Low temperature, 1st and 2nd-degree moisture fungal treatment, corrosion-resistant) 2. Although a buzzing sound may occur when an instantaneous type becomes 80% or more of the rated current for AC use, performance is not effected. Please take this point into consideration when selecting units for use in quiet environments. 3. Please use in environments free of high temperatures, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact. Also, do not use it in a circuit with inrush current or harmonics. Problems may result.

49

Detailed Specifications

2

Circuit Protectors

7

Internal circuits and examples of application Serial type

Serial type with auxiliary switch

7 Detailed Specifications

2

dRatings of alarm switches (AL) and auxiliary switches (AX)

Operating characteristics Available Instantaneous type High speed type Medium speed type Low speed type shunt model trip I F FD M MD S SD

Internal circuit

Serial type with alarm switch

Relay type shunt trip (with SHT) SHT

CP30-BA

d

d

−

d

d

d

d

−

CP-S

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

−

CP30-BA

d

d

−

d

d

d

d

−

CP-S

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

−

CP30-BA

d

d

−

d

d

d

d

−

CP-S

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

−

CP30-BA

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

d

CP-S

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

d

Parallel type shunt trip (with SHT) SHT

(1) For CP30-BA AC DC Current (A) Current (A) Voltage Voltage (V) (V) Resistive load Inductive load Resistive load Inductive load (250) (1) (0.5) 50 1 0.5 For Ratings of Max. 125 3 1 30 2 1 items other general load Min. 0.1A/15VAC 0.1A/15VDC than those shaded in For minute Max. 125 0.5 − 30 0.5 − Table 1 load Min. 1mA/24VDC, 2mA/12VDC, 5mA/6VDC (250) (1) (0.5) (50) (1) (0.5) For Ratings general Max. 125 3 (1) 30 (2), 0.5 (1) of items load Min. 0.1A/15VAC 0.1A/15VDC shaded in 125 (0.5), 0.1 − 30 (0.5), 0.1 − Table 1 For minute Max. load Min. 1mA/24VDC, 2mA/12VDC, 5mA/6VDC Remarks: 1. The switches having the ratings in parentheses are manufactured at the Remarks: 1. customer’s request. (Specify the voltage). Such switches do not conform to UL Remarks: 1. (cURus), CCC or CE Marking requirements. Classification

(2) For CP-S AC DC Current (A) Current (A) Voltage (V) Resistive load Inductive load Resistive load Inductive load 250 3 2 250 0.2 0.2 125 5 3 125 0.4 0.4 − − − 30 4 3 − − − 14 5 4 Remarks: 1. When using these switches to a circuit with a minute load (125 V AC, 0.1 A or Remarks: 1. 30 V DC, 0.1 A or less), designate the application as minute load. Voltage (V)

CP-S

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

d

CP-S

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

−

Relay type current trip

dRatings of shunt trip (SHT) coils Parallel type current trip

(1) For CP30-BA CP-S

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

Ratings

−

Rated operating voltage (V) Compatible with 100 to 200 V AC and 100 V DC 100-200 24-48 Compatible with 24 to 48 V DC

Switch type CP-S

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Coil resistance, resistance and impedance (at25°C) Voltage (V) Impedance for AC (W) DC resistance for DC (W) 24-48 − 160 100-200 2400 2100 Remarks: 1. The allowable range is 70 to 110% of the rated voltage for AC and 75 to 120% Remarks: 1. of the rated voltage for DC. Remarks: 2. The time rating is 10 seconds or less. Configure the circuit on which voltage Remarks: 1. will not be applied for more than 10 seconds.

−

Internal accessories Auxiliary switch (AX)

(2) For CP-S Ratings

Operates in conjunction with the main circuit operating mechanism to electrically retrieve the ON/OFF status of protector.

Rated operating voltage (V) Compatible with 100 to 120 V AC (50/60Hz) 100 200 Compatible with 200 to 240 V AC (50/60Hz) 24, 48, 100 DC24, DC48, DC100

Alarm switch (AL)

Remarks (1) When the handle of CP30-BA is constrained in the ON status, it Remarks (1) does not issue the alarm signal even if it is tripped. Remarks (2) The alarm switch will be reset when the body is reset or turned on.

Shunt trip (SHT)

Switch status CP30-BA, CP-S

Protector status Off or trip AX

Inertial delay device

AXa (open) / ALa (closed) AXb (open) / ALb (closed) AXc / ALc

Off or ON

The inertial delay device is designed to avoid unnecessary operation caused by inrush current of transformer or lamp load. The device can withstand unrepeated one pulse of crest value 20 times higher than the rated current (pulse time = 8 ms). It can be added to circuits having high, medium and low speed operating characteristics. (It cannot be added to instantaneous or DC types.)

AL ON AX

AXa (closed) / ALa (open) AXb (closed) / ALb (open) AXc / ALc

Trip AL

Table 1 List of numbers of internal accessories which can be fitted 1P

AX More than one 1P 2P 3P 3P

1P

AL 2P 3P

AL+AX 1P

CP30-BA

−

−

CP-S

−

−

Remark: 1. All accessories should be fitted on the internal accessory terminal block.

50

10 sec or less

dOperation of auxiliary switch and alarm switch

A parallel relay type protector, which can break the circuit instantaneously when receiving an external signal

AX 2P 3P

Time rating

Coil resistance, resistance and impedance (at25°C) Voltage (V) Impedance for AC (W) DC resistance for DC (W) 24 − 110 48 − 110 100 1100 400 200 1100 − Remarks: 1. The allowable range is 70 to 110% of the rated voltage for AC and 75 to 120% Remarks: 1. of the rated voltage for DC. Remarks: 2. The time rating is 10 seconds or less. Configure the circuit on which voltage Remarks: 1. will not be applied for more than 10 seconds.

Operates in conjunction with the main circuit operating mechanism to electrically retrieve the tripping status of protector.

Type name

Time rating 10 sec or less

2P

3P

SHT 1P 2P 3P

AL AX AL or AX SHT AL+AX+SHT AL+SHT or AX+SHT 1P 2P 3P 3P

−

−

2 Detailed Specifications

7 Circuit Protectors

Installation and connection Installation method

With screws

On IEC rails

With embedded fittings

On panel

Appearance

Circuit protectors with AL, AX and/or SHT cannot be installed by this method. CP30-BA

d

d

d

−

CP-S

−

−

−

d

2

The operating characteristics of electromagnetic (instantaneous) type circuit protectors are not affected by the installation posture. However, when installing a fluid electromagnetic (high, medium or low speed) type circuit protector, pay attention to the installation angle because the operating current value is changed under the influence of the gravity applied to the iron core in the oil dash pot. Generally, it is recommended to use the circuit protectors in the vertical direction.

7 Detailed Specifications

Installation posture 100%

Reference for change

115%

ON

ON

95%

ON

ON

90%

120% ON ON 115% ON

ON ON

95%

100%

No change in this direction

Electric wires which can be connected and applicable screw terminals CP30-BA Classification

Body

Shape of terminal Threaded terminal (standard specification)

Cross recessed or slotted Alarm and auxiliary switch terminals

Wire retaining screw (square washer)

Cross recessed or slotted

20 A or less

30A

M4

M5

M3.5

Electric wire size used (mm2)

Applicable screw terminals

0.25-1.65

R1.25-4 R1.25-5

1.04-2.63

R2-4 R2-5

2.63-6.64

R5.5-4 R5.5-5

6.64-10.52

*8-5NS (made by JST)

0.25-1.65

R1.25-3.5

1.04-2.63

R2-3.5

Tightening torque (N • m) M4

1-1.4

M5 1.8-2.2

0.7-0.9

*Use the screw terminal 8-5NS made by JST.

51

Detailed Specifications

2

8

Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers

Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series) Frame (A) Model

630 AE630-SW

1000 AE1000-SW

1250 AE1250-SW

1600 AE1600-SW

2000 AE2000-SWA

2000 AE2000-SW

2500 AE2500-SW

3200 AE3200-SW

4000 AE4000-SWA

Image

2

AE1600-SW (Drawout type)

Number of poles Rated insulation voltage V Current carrying capacity of neutral pole A IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 AC690V BS JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1 Ann.2 AC600V NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS, DNV, CCS AC240-500V Ics = % Icu Rated short-time withstand current (kA symmetrical RMS) 1 second Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Without current Number of operating cycles With current

Rated breaking capacity (ka symmetrical RMS)

8 Detailed Specifications

Rated current (CT rating) In (A) Rated current setting Ir (A) (adjustable) (Rated ambient temperature 40°C) (For marine use 45°C)

(690 V AC)

Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) Fixed 3-pole product type 4-pole product Outline dimension (mm) Height (H) x width (W) x depth (D) Drawout 3-pole product type 4-pole product Fixed 3-pole product type 4-pole product Weight (kg) Drawout 3-pole product (Without Accessory) type 4-pole product Cradle 3-pole product only 4-pole product CE Marking CCC recognition ( Certified) Marine approval Automatic tripping device

dSee the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.

630 (*1) 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 (*1) 2500 3200 315-346.5-378-409.5- 500-550-600- 625-687.5-750800-880-960- 1000-1100-1200- 1000-1100-1200- 1250-1375-1500- 1600-1760-1920441-472.5-504-535.5- 650-700-750- 812.5-875-937.5- 1040-1120-1200- 1300-1400-1500- 1300-1400-1500- 1625-1750-1875- 2080-2240-2400567-598.5-630 800-850-9001000-1062.5- 1280-1360-1440- 1600-1700-1800- 1600-1700-1800- 2000-2125-2250- 2560-2720-28803040-3200 2375-2500 1900-2000 (*1) 1900-2000 950-1000 1125-1187.5-1250 1520-1600 (*1) 3, 4 (*2) 1000 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 65 75 65 75 65 85 100% 65 75 Compatible Possible 25000 20000 5000 1500 1500 1000 B 3 A 410×340×290 410×475×290 410×425×290 410×605×290 430×300×368 430×435×368 430×385×368 430×565×368 40 41 42 47 60 61 63 50 51 52 57 72 73 75 63 64 65 70 92 93 95 77 78 79 84 113 114 116 26 31 35 36 30 35 43 44 Self-declaration  Certified (NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS, DNV, CCS) Electronic (effective value detection)

4000 2000-2200-24002600-2800-30003200-3400-36003800-4000

4000

500

430×439×368 430×569×368 81 99 108 136 49 61

dWhen the MCR is provided, the breaking capacity may be changed. See the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622. dSee the catalog of Low-voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details of the accessories. Notes: *1 AE630-SW and AE2000-SW having low rating types are available. See the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details. *2 The 4-pole products do not have obtained the marine approval. *3 4 (HN) means the neutral poles current capacity is 50% of the rated current, for 4poles. 4 (FN) means the neutral poles current capacity is 100% of the rated current, for 4poles. *4 ( ) shows the value for 4P FN type. *5 Marine approval value is 138kA.

Features d Higher reliability by High operating durability (Mechanical) d Increase of rated short-time withstand current Combination of the Electronic trip relay (ETR) with MCR (*1) enables increase of the choice coordination range. d Applicability to increase and decrease of load and improvement of protection coordination The electronic tripping system enables detailed setting of tripping characteristics. The system uses RMS detection resistant to distorted waves. d More improved Electronic trip relay (ETR) and transmission functions To flexibly meet various requirements, functions suitable for purposes can be selected effectively. In addition, improved measuring functions are provided, so that the circuit breakers are applicable to CC-Link, PROFIBUS-DP and MODBUS transmission and helpful in establishing various electrical circuit measurement monitoring systems and energy-saving systems in combination with measuring display unit breakers. Notes: *1 MCR is an abbreviation for marking current release. It has INST characteristic only when the circuit breaker in the OFF state turns ON (closes). The circuit breaker will lose the INST characteristic after closing, and it will have LTD and STD characteristics.

52

d Various connections Various connections for panel structures are available. (See the following figure.) Connections Connections Model

Horizontal (standard)

Vertical (*1) (VT)

(Standard)

FIX-VT

(Standard)

(DR-VT)

Front (FT)

Vertical terminal Front terminal adapter adapter (VTA) (FTA)

Fixed type (FIX) (FIX-VTA)

(FIX-FTA)

(DR-VTA)

(DR-FTA)

Drawout type (DR) (DR-FT)

Notes: *1 For AE2000-SWA, AE4000-SWA, AE4000-SW, AE5000-SW and s: *1 AE6300-SW models, vertical terminal only is available.

2 Detailed Specifications 8 Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers

Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers (AE-SW Series) Frame (A) Model

4000 AE4000-SW

5000 AE5000-SW

6300 AE6300-SW

Image (Reference)

4000

5000

6300

2000-2200-2400-2600-2800-3000-3200-34003600-3800-4000

2500-2750-3000-3250-3500-3750-4000-42504500-4750-5000

3150-3465-3780-4095-4410-4725-5040-5355-56705985-6300

3, 4 (HN, FN) (*3) 1000 2500 (5000) (*4) 85 85 130 (*5) 100% 100 Compatible Possible 10000 (3P) /5000 (4P) 1000 B 3 A 414×873×290 414×1003×290 480×875×368 480×1005×368 160 180 233 256 118 133 Self-declaration  Certified (NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS) Electronic (effective value detection)

2000 (4000) (*4)

Rated breaking capacity (ka symmetrical RMS)

Rated current (CT rating) In (A) Rated current setting Ir (A) (adjustable) (Rated ambient temperature 40°C) (For marine use 45°C) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage V Current carrying capacity of neutral pole A IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 AC690V BS JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1 Ann.2 AC600V AC240-500V NK, LR, GL, BV, ABS Ics = % Icu Rated short-time withstand current (kA symmetrical RMS) 1 second Suitability for isolation Reverse connection Without current Number of operating cycles With current (690 V AC)

Utilization category Pollution degree EMC environment condition (environment A or B) Fixed 3-pole product type 4-pole product Outline dimension (mm) Height (H) x width (W) x depth (D) Drawout 3-pole product type 4-pole product Fixed 3-pole product type 4-pole product Weight (kg) Drawout 3-pole product (without Accessory) type 4-pole product Cradle 3-pole product only 4-pole product CE Marking CCC recognition ( Certified) Marine approval Automatic tripping device

160 180 233 256 118 133

3150 (6300) (*4)

160 180 240 263 125 140

Electronic trip relay (ETR) Type code Additional function Extension module(EX1)

● Main setting module

● Optional setting module ● Power supply

Display(DP1) Display onto panel board(DP2) VT unit(VT)

Network BIF-CC BIF-PR BIF-MD

P1: AC DC100-240V G1: Ground fault protection WS1, WB1, WM1, AE630-1600-SW, WF1 AE2000-3200-SW, N5: Neutral pole 50% protection P2: DC24-60V AE4000-SW Wire system (when EX1 is specified) P3: AC100-240V / DC100-125V E1: Earth leakage protection WS2, WB2, WM2, AE2000-SWA, with output contact 3φ3W AP: 2nd Additional Pre-alarm WF2 AE4000-SWA, P4: DC24-60V with output contact 3φ4W NA: Without optional setting EX1 AE5000-SW Normal connection P5: DC100-240V WS3,WB3,WM3, AE6300-SW Reverse connection with output contact (SSR) ● ETR Auxiliary Equipment WF3 Normal connection: Upper terminal is connected Temperature alarm(TAL) to power supply. WS : General use MCR switch(MCR-SW) Reverse connection: Lower terminal is connected WM : Generator protection use to power supply. WB : INST/MCR only For the details of the characteristics, alarm contact output and expanded functions *The display is optional. WF : Protective coordination use of the ETR, see the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622. •

53

2 8 Detailed Specifications

dSee the catalog of Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers, Y-0622, for the details.

AE6300-SW (Drawout type)

2

Detailed Specifications

Earth Leakage Relays

9

Earth Leakage Relays Electrical self-hold type

Model

2

Hole diameter mm 15 30 40 Model name of ZCT combined (*5) 60 80 100

NV-ZBA ZT15B ZT30B ZT40B – – –

– – – ZT60B ZT80B ZT100B

Interchangeable leakage relays (*1) Harmonic surge ready Electrical self-hold type NV-ZSA NV-ZHA ZT15B – ZT15B ZT30B – ZT30B ZT40B – ZT40B – ZT60B ZT60B – ZT80B ZT80B – ZT100B ZT100B

Mechanical self-hold type

Harmonic surge ready Mechanical self-hold type NV-ZLA ZT15B ZT30B ZT40B ZT60B ZT80B ZT100B

Phase line type

3f4W, 3f3W, 1f3W, 1f2W JIS

120 • 240 selectable

120 • 240 selectable 240 • 415 selectable

UL/JIS (*2) UL/CE (*3)

–

–

Max. operating time (s)

30 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 selectable selectable 0.1

30 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 selectable selectable 0.1

Rated sensitivity current mA

100 • 200 • 500 selectable

100 • 200 • 500 selectable (200 • 500 • 1000 selectable)

0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1

0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1

–

–

120 • 240 selectable 240 • 440 selectable

120 • 240 selectable 240 • 440 selectable 480

–

–

30 50 0.1 100 • 200 • 500 selectable 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable – • 0.1 • 0.5 30 • 50 • 100 selectable 0.04

30 50 0.1 100 • 200 • 500 selectable 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable – • 0.1 • 0.5 30 • 50 • 100 selectable 0.04

100 • 300 • 500 selectable 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable

100 • 300 • 500 selectable 300 • 500 • 1000 selectable

0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.1 • 0.5 Electric type (LED)

0.45 • 1.0 selectable 0.1 • 0.5 Mechanical type (button) Push button (conbined with earth leakage indicator) 1a1c 5

Control voltage AC V

High speed type JIS Delay type

Rated sensitivity current mA

Operating time (s) (*4) Inertial non-operating time (s) or longer than (s) High Rated sensitivity current mA speed Max. operating time (s) type High UL/JIS speed Rated sensitivity current mA • Max. operating time (s) (*4) Delay type Inertial non-operating time (s) or longer than (s) High Rated sensitivity current mA speed Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆n type UL/CE

Delay type

Rated sensitivity current mA

Max. operating time (s) at 2I∆n (*4) Inertial non-operating time (s) at 2I∆n Earth leakage indication Resetting method

Built-in contact

–

–

–

–

Electric type (LED) Push button or control power switch off

Configuration Continuous current capacity A

1c 5 cosf=1

Contact capacity A

Front Rear Standard attachment (Front connection) Mass kg Relay Terminal cover External accessories Mounting hook for IEC 35mm rail (DIN rail) Fixture Max. consumption VA Connection

Conforming standard

9 Detailed Specifications

Image

US UL standard (UR certified)

120VAC 240VAC 24VDC

5 5 5

cosf=0.4 L/R=0.007 2 2 2

Mechanical type (button) Push button (conbined with earth leakage indicator) 1a1c 5 cosf=1 120VAC 240VAC 415VAC 30VDC 100VDC 200VDC

5 3 2 4 0.4 0.2

Push button or control power switch off 1a1c 5 cosf=0.4 cosf=1 L/R=0.007 120VAC 5 2 240VAC 5 2 24VDC 5 2 Use auxiliary relay for AC415V contact.

cosf=0.4 L/R=0.007 3 2 1 3 0.4 0.2

dClamp terminal –

dClamp terminal dClamp terminal

0.3 d (TC-ZBA) d (DIN-ZBA)

0.4 d (TC-ZSA) –

5 3 1 3

cosf=0.4 L/R=0.007 3 2 1 3

dClamp terminal dClamp terminal

dClamp terminal dClamp terminal

0.4 d (TC-ZSA) (*6) –

0.4 d (TC-ZSA) (*6) –

UL1053 Recognized component (File No.E196562) LR103083(Certified No.) Declaration for conformity IEC 60947-2 AnnexB EN 60947-2 AnnexB

UL1053 Recognized component (File No.E196562) LR103083(Certified No.) Declaration for conformity IEC 60947-2 AnnexB EN 60947-2 AnnexB

Mounting screw

3 –

–

Canada CSA standard

–

–

European CE marking

–

–

Notes: *1 Interchangeable leakage relays can be easily combined with other relays and our ZCT. However, products with 30mA sensitivity (excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can only be used in combination with ZT15B, ZT30B and ZT40B. *2 Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and JIS standards are indicated together. For JIS voltage indications, 100-200V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover is 240-440V changeover, and 460V and 480V are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/JIS”. *3 Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and CE standards are indicated together. For CE voltage indications, 120-230V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeoever is 240-440V selectable, which are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/CE”. *4 When operating times are 0.3 and 0.45sec, 0.8 and 1.0sec and 1.6sec, the relay operates between 0.15 and 0.45sec, 0.6 and 1.0sec and 1.2 and 2.0sec, respectively. *5 Can be combined with an interchangeable ZCT equipped with a primary conductor. Refer to the next page for details. *6 Not UL-certified.

54

cosf=1 120VAC 240VAC 480VAC 30VDC

Remarks: 1. Relays with rates shown in parentheses are specialorder. 2. The relay complies with CE marking conformity declaration only when used with CE marking type MCCB with a voltage tripping device to interrupt current during ground fault. 3. NV-ZBA/ZSA

Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage 120V 80-126V 100 • 110V • 120V 240V 160-252V 200 • 220 • 240V 415V 320-484V 400 • 415 • 440V



4.NV-ZHA/ZLA Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage 120V 80-132V 100 • 110 • 120V 240V 160-264V 200 • 220 • 230 • 240V 440V 304-484V 380 • 400 • 415 • 440V 480V 368-528V 460 • 480V

2 Detailed Specifications

9 Earth Leakage Relays

Interchangeable ZCT ZT15B

ZT30B

ZT40B

ZT60B

ZT80B

ZT100B

Aperture diameter (mm)

15

30

40

60

80

100

Mass (kg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

2.0

2.6

3.3

185

Type

Rated short time current

50 (peak value) a

48

68

85

140

160

b

52

52

52

90

90

90

c

70

90

100

150

169

190

c

b

e

Dimensions (mm)

d a

d

25

50

50

100

100

100

e

40

40

40

70

70

70

2

ZCT aperture diameter (mm) Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire

1f2w

Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable

1f3w 3f3w 3f4w

15

30

40

60

80

100

Max. 600V rated wire size in mm2 (current in amperes) 14 (88)

60 (217)

150 (395)

325 (650)

600 (992)

800 (1185)

2 (33)

38 (190)

60 (260)

250 (655)

400 (870)

600 (1140)

Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire

8 (61)

38 (162)

100 (298)

250 (556)

500 (842)

725 (1095)

Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable

2 (33)

22 (135)

60 (260)

200 (560)

325 (760)

600 (1140)

Polyvinyl-chloride insulated wire

8 (61)

38 (162)

100 (298)

150 (395)

325 (650)

600 (992)

14 (105)

38 (190)

100 (365)

250 (655)

400 (870)

Cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable

9 Detailed Specifications

ZCT aperture diameter and wire size

–

Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors ZTA600A

Type

ZTA1200A

Number of poles

ZTA2000A

3

Rated voltage (VAC)

600

Rated short time current (kA)

100 (peak value)

b ba

a

c ca

a

227

227

360

b

256

298

250

ba

366

444

594

c

42

78

79

ca

125

176

214

ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors 600

Frame (A)

1200

2000

ZSA

Type

ZHA

Interchangeable ELR and interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors

3

Rated voltage (VAC)

600

Rated short time current (kA)

100 (peak value)

b ba

a

c ca

a

227

227

360

490

b

256

298

250

320

ba

366

444

594

868

c

42

78

79

111

ca

125

176

214

290

6.5

11

27

54

Max. operating time (s)

Inertial non-operating time (s)

0.1

—

Mass (kg)

High-speed type

Control voltage (VAC)

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

ZBA

120 • 240 (*1)

100 • 200 • 500 (*1)

ZSA

120 • 240 (*1) 240 • 415 (*1)

100 • 200 • 500 (*1)

ZBA

120 • 240 (*1)

100 • 200 • 500 (*1)

0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 (*1)

0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1

ZSA

120 • 240 (*1) 240 • 415 (*1)

100 • 200 • 500 (*1) (200 • 500 • 1000 (*1))

0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 (*1)

0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1

100 • 200 • 500 (*1)

0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 (*1)

– • 0.1 • 0.5

ZHA

120 • 240 (*1) 240 • 440 (*1)

100 • 300 • 500 (*1) 300 • 500 • 1000 (*1)

0.45 • 1.0 (*1) (at 2l∆n)

0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)

120 • 240 (*1) 240 • 440 (*1) 480

100 • 200 • 500 (*1)

0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 (*1)

– • 0.1 • 0.5

ZLA

100 • 300 • 500 (*1) 300 • 500 • 1000 (*1)

0.45 • 1.0 (*1) (at 2l∆n)

0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)

Time-delay type

(

NV-ZSA3200 NV-ZHA3200 NV-ZLA3200

ZLA Number of poles

Specification of ELRs

3200 NV-ZBA3200

ZBA

)

High-speed • Time-delay type

Note: *1 Selectable.

55

9 Detailed Specifications

MEMO

2

56

3

Special-purpose Breakers

1) Mag Only (Instantaneous Tripping Circuit Breakers)… …………………………………………………………………………………………… 58 2) DC MCCBs and DSN Switches……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 58 3) 400Hz MCCBs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 58

57

3 Special-purpose Breakers 1

Mag only, DC, DSN and 400Hz

1. Mag Only (Instantaneous Tripping Circuit Breakers) Fixed

3

Adjustable

NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV NF250-CV/SV/HV NF400-CW/SW NF630-CW/SW

AC, DC AC, DC AC, DC

NF800-SEW

AC

NF800-SDW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW

DC

NF1600-SEW

AC

Rated current x 10 (AC) (DC)

AC, DC

High: Rated current x 10 Low: Rated current x 2 High: 8000A Low: 3200A High: Rated current x 10 Low: Rated current x 2 High: Rated current x 10 Low: Rated current x 2 High: 8000A Low: 3200A

AC

NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW

DC

Remarks: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C, S and H series breakers. 2. For more details, contact your dealer.



2. DC MCCBs and DSN Switches

1 Special-purpose Breakers

3

Wiring diagram for DC usage.

Breaking is more difficult with direct currents because the current value never reaches zero. While ordinary DC breakers are suitable for low voltages, special-voltage DC breakers are recommended for voltages in excess of 250VDC. Breakers for 550V are all 4-pole models. The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the S Series breakers with the same designations. Model Number of poles Rated voltage (VDC) Rated breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

Wiring diagram for DC use. Remark: 1. The tripping characteristics will change if the wiring differs from the one shown here.

NF63-SV 3 4 400 550

NF125-SV 3 4 440 550

NF250-SV 3 4 500 600

NF400-SW 3 4 500 600

NF630-SW 3 4 500 600

NF800-SDW 3 4 500 600

NF1250-SDW 3 4 500 600

NF1600-SDW 3 4 500 600

2/2

10/10

20/20

40/40

40/40

40/40

40/20

40/20

Remark: 1. Time constant: 10ms or below.

•

DC side These breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonard system DC side breakers. They protect the thyristor from short circuiting when there is a power or Model Number of poles Rated voltage (VDC) Rated breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) Instantaneous trip current min.)

NF125-SV 2 3 250 440 40/40

communication failure (Mag Only breakers can also be used for this purpose). Use these breakers in combination with fast fuses for even greater protection.

NF250-SV 2 3 300 500

NF400-SW 2 3 250 480

20/20

20/20

20/20

20/20

20/20

20/20

900A

1000A

1400A

2500A

3200A

10/10

3 times rated current 3 times rated current

•

DSN switches These are standard MCCBs without the automatic tripping element. The tripping capacity is about six times the rated current. Model Rated current (A) Number of poles Rated voltage (AC/DC) Max. switching current (AC/DC) Model Rated current (A) Number of poles Rated voltage (AC/DC) Max. switching current (AC/DC)

DSN63-CV 63 2

3 500/250 378/155

DSN125-CV 125 2 3 500/250 750/310

Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 400Hz circuits. When standard MCCBs are used in high-frequency circuits (eq. 400Hz), the instantaneous characteristics are shifted higher. The 400Hz MCCB is recommended for use in 400Hz circuits. Model

NF125-SV NF125-HV 16, 20, 32, 40, 16, 20, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100 2 3 4 2 3 4

Number of poles Rated insulation voltage (V) 690V 8/8 10/8 18/18 30/23 Rated breaking capacity 500V (kA) 440V 25/25 50/38 IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) 400V 30/30 50/38 230V 50/50 100/75 Note: *1 Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix)

58

NF800-SDW 2 3 250 480

NF1250-SDW 2 3 250 480

NF1600-SDW 2 3 250 480

The appearance, size, drilling plan and available accessories are all identical to similar standard S and C Series MCCBs. DSN250-CV 250 2 3 500/250 1500/625

DSN400-CW 400 2 3 600/250 2400/1000

DSN630-CW 630 3 600/250 3780/1575

DSN800-CW 800 3 600/250 4800/2000

DSN32-SV DSN63-SV DSN125-SV DSN125-SGV DSN160-SGV DSN250-SV DSN250-SGV DSN400-SW DSN630-SW DSN800-SW DSN1000-SW DSN1250-SW DSN1600-SW 32 63 125 125 160 250 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 500/250 500/250 690/250 690/300 690/300 690/250 690/300 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 192/80 378/155 750/310 750/315 960/400 1500/625 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000 6000/2500 7500/3125 9600/4000

3. 400Hz MCCBs

Rated current (A)

NF630-SW 2 3 250 480

•

Specifications The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the standard S and H Series breakers of the same designation.

NF250-SV 125, 150 175, 200 2 3 4

NF250-HV 125, 150 175, 200 2 3 4

NF400-SW 225, 250 300, 350 2 3 4

8/8 30/30 36/36 36/36 85/85

10/8 50/38 65/65 75/75 100/100

10/10 30/30 42/42 45/45 85/85

NF400-SEW NF630-SW (*1) NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW 300-500 400-600 600-800 800-1200 200-350 400, 500 adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 690 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 25/13 25/13 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 65/33 65/33 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 85/43 85/43 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/43 85/43 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 125/63 125/63

Selection 1 Construction and Operation

4 60

1) Construction of MCCB……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 60 2) Construction of ELCB……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 62

2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

63

1) Selecting Procedure… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 63 2) Features and Performance………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 64 3) Current-carrying Capacity and Operating Temperature………………………………………………………………………………………… 66 4) Application of Circuit Breaker According to Breaking Capacity………………………………………………………………………………… 68 5) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Electric Lamp or Heater Circuit… …………………………………………………………………………… 69 6) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Motor Branch Circuit…………………………………………………………………………………………… 71 7) Selection of Motor Protection Breaker… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 73 8) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 74 9) Selection of Circuit Breaker for Transformer Primary Side… ………………………………………………………………………………… 75 10) Combination for Selective Breaking… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 79 11) Combination for Cascade Breaking……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 81 12) International Standard Conformance List… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 83

3 Selection of ELCB

86

1) Electric Shock Protection… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 86 2) ELCB Grounding Method… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 87 3) Rated Voltage and Number of Poles……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 88 4) Earth Fault Protection Coordination and Combination of Devices… ………………………………………………………………………… 89

59

4 Selection

1

Construction and Operation

1. Construction of MCCB Arc-Extinguishing Device

Adjustable Instantaneous Tripping Current On electronic molded case circuit breakers, the instantaneous tripping current can be adjusted only by turning the knob. Therefore, optimum characteristics for load can be obtained.

MCCBs feature excellent arcextinguishing performance by virtue of the optimum combination of grid gap, shape, and material. Magnetic flux

8 10 6 4

12 16

II(×225A) Example of adjusting knob

Molded case (Base)

Molded case (Cover)

Grid

Arc

Magnetic force

Arc extinction

Contact

Switching Mechanism Overcurrent Tripping Device Detects overcurrent and trips the circuit breaker.

Ra movpid eme n

t

1 Selection

4

The contacts open and close rapidly, regardless of the moving speed of the handle, minimizing contact wear and ensuring safety.

Link-mechanism operation

Terminal

Fig. 4.1 Construction Trip Button (Push to Trip) Enables tripping mechanically from outside, for confirming the operation of the accessory switches and the manual resetting function.

Handle 1. Trip indication The automatically tripped condition is indicated by the handle in the center position between ON and OFF, the yellow (or white) line cannot be seen in this position. 2. Resetting Resetting after tripping is performed by first moving the handle to the OFF position to engage the mechanism, then returning the handle to ON to reclose the circuit. 3. Trip-Free Even if the handle is held at ON, the breaker will trip if an overcurrent flows.

ON

OFF

Trip

Handle indication 4. Contact On Mechanism Even in the worst case in which welding occurs owing to an overcurrent, the breaker will trip and the handle will maintain to ON, indicating the energizing state.

4-pole Breaker • The 4-pole breaker is designed for 3-phase 4-wire circuits. A neutral pole without an overcurrent tripping U(1) V(2) W(3) N element is provided at the right end. The construction and operation are the same as class S, H and U breakers. (Electronic molded case circuit breakers with frame size of 1600A or less have overcurrent tripping elements on the neutral poles.) • Since the four poles are simultaneously opened and closed, the user will not fail in turning on the neutral pole or carelessly open the pole. (The standard construction is designed to close the neutral pole earlier and open it later than the voltage pole.) Fig. 4.2 4-pole Breaker

60

(NF250-SV)

4 Selection 1 Construction and Operation

Automatic Tripping Devices Thermal-Magnetic Type

(

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV, NF125-CV/SV/HV, NF250-CV/SV/HV NF400-CW/SW, NF630-CW/SW, NF800-SDW, etc. Armature Trip bar Bimetal

)

1. Time-Delay Operation An overcurrent heats and warps the bimetal to actuate the trip bar. 2. Instantaneous Operation If the overcurrent is excessive, the amature is attracted and the trip bar actuated.

Heater

Fig. 4.3

Thermal-Magnetic Type (NF1250-SDW) 1. Time-Delay Operation An overcurrent heats and warps the bimetal to actuate the trip bar. 2. Instantaneous Operation If the overcurrent is excessive, magnetization of the stationary core is strong enough to attract the armature and actuate the trip bar.

Trip bar

Latch Bimetal Armature Stationary core

4

Fig. 4.4

Heater

1. Time-Delay Operation At an overcurrent flow, the magnetic force of the coil overcomes the spring, the core closes to the pole piece, attracts the armature, and actuates the trip bar. The delay is obtained by the viscosity of silicon oil. 2. Instantaneous Operation If the overcurrent is excessive, the armature is instantly attracted, without the influence of the moving core.

Armature Pole piece Trip bar Damping spring Coil Silicon oil

Pipe

Moving core

Fig. 4.5

Principle of Electronic Trip Relay (ETR) Operation

(

(NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV, etc.) NF400-SEW~NF800-CEW NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW, etc. Breaking mechanism Trip coil

CPU

WDT

Trigger circuit

Input and output Load-side terminal

Test input

Characteristics setting part

Fig. 4.6.1

CT CT

Over-current indication LED

Rectifying circuit

A/D convertor

Microcomputer

CT CT

Characteristics S/W

CT

Microcomputer

Rectifying circuit

CT CT

)

Power-source side terminal Breaking mechanism Trip coil Custom C

Power-source side terminal

CT

Trigger circuit

CV A/D convertor

PSS

SSW LSW

CPU

WDT

PSW Input and

WDT: Watchdog timer circuit

1 Selection

Hydraulic-Magnetic Type (NF30-CS etc.)

Over-current indication LED Pre-alarm indication LED Pre-alarm output (Option)

WDT: output Watchdog timer Characteristics circuit Load-side setting part terminal Load-current indication LED (70%) Test input

Fig. 4.6.2

1. The current flowing in each phase is monitored by a current transformer (CT). 2. Each phase of the transformed current undergoes full-phase rectification in the rectifier circuit. 3. After rectification, each of the currents are converted by a peakconversion and an effective-value conversion circuit. 4. The largest phase is selected from the converted currents. 5. Each time-delay circuit generates a time delay corresponding to the largest phase. 6. The trigger circuit outputs a trigger signal. 7. The trip coil is excited, operating the switching mechanism.

Number of tripping devices Descriptions (e.g. 2P1E and 2P0E) are not given in the number of poles fields of some models. For these models, the same number of overcurrent tripping devices as the number of poles is provided in the circuit breakers. 2 poles: 2P2E, 3 poles: 3P3E, 4 poles: 4P4E or 4P3E (Some 4-pole models do not have overcurrent tripping devices for the neutral poles.)

61

4 Selection

1

Construction and Operation

2. Construction of ELCB Arc-Extinguishing Device ELCBs feature excellent arc-extinguishing performance by virtue Magnetic force of the optimum combination of grid gap, shape, and material.

Switching Mechanism The contacts open and close rapidly, regardless of the moving speed of the handle, minimizing contact wear and ensuring safety.

Magnetic flux

Window Frame

Grid

Since the handle, trip button, test button, leakage display button and nameplate are located in one area, it is easy to cut the panel.

Arc

Arc extinction

Sensitivity Switching Device The rated sensitivity current can be easily changed. A 3-stage switching device for 100, 200 and 500 mA and a 2-stage switching device for 200 and 500 mA are available.

Trip Button (Push to Trip) Enables tripping mechanically from outside, for confirming the operation of the accessory switches and the manual resetting function.

Leakage Display Target type with display button. The display is automatically reset by the handle.

4

Test Button

Overcurrent Tripping Device

The button has excellent durability and performance to withstand inspection at start.

The use of the proven mechanism of ELCBs ensures reliable detection of overcurrent.

The semiconductor circuit unit, which is the most important part of the device, is an electronic type using highly reliable ICs. For improvement of the function for removing harmonic and surge components, two filters are provided to prevent unnecessary operations. The ZCT detects any minute current. It is covered with a magnetic shield and never operates unnecessarily owing to motor starting current.

Fig. 4.7 Construction

Rated operational voltage 100-240V 100-440V 200-440V 100-200-415V 200-415V

Applicable circuit voltage Available voltage range 100/110/200/220/230/240V 80 to 264V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 80 to 484V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 160 to 484V 100/110/200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 80 to 484V 200/220/240/254/265/380/400/415/440V 160 to 484V

Operation 1. When an earth fault occurs, voltage is induced on the secondary side of the ZCT. 2. Factors of unnecessary operations, i.e. surge and noise components, are removed from the induced voltage. 3. The signal level is discriminated, and, when the level exceeds the specified level, the electromagnetic device is excited to trip the circuit breaker body.

Test button High voltage

Transformer

Low voltage

ZCT M 3

Overload and short-circuit

The use of the proven mechanism of ELCBs ensures reliable detection of overcurrent and earth fault to break the circuit.

Magnetic device

1 Selection

Leakage Tripping Device

EB

Revision to EN and GB Standards Products for European markets must conform to the CE Marking Directives. To affix the CE mark to a product, it is necessary that the product conforms to European Standard (EN Standard). Products for China must conform to Chinese GB Standard to affix the CCC mark. The third edition (2003) of EN Standard for circuit breakers, EN 60947-2, and GB Standard GB 14048.2 (2008) prescribe that the functions of earth leakage circuit breakers should normally work even in open phase condition. Products based on the previous EN Standard (second edition) have not been approved since June, 2006. Products based on the previous GB Standard (2001) have not been approved since January, 2011. qWS-V Series Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (conforming to CE and CCC Standards) and UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers with earth leakage protection conform to the third edition of EN 60947-2 and GB 14048.2 2008 as 3-phase power supply earth leakage circuit breakers.

62

Senstivity selector

ED

Leakage display M: Motor ZCT: Zero-phase-sequence current transformer

Fig. 4.8 Circuit configuration of ELCB Fig. 4.8 (NV63-SV)

R S T Earth fault detecting electronic circuit

Fig. 4.9 Circuit diagram in 3-phase power supply ELCB

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

1. Selecting Procedure MCCB (NF) Circuit used Applicable standard

Phase and wire type, voltage, DC or AC, frequency, standard

Applicable phase and wire type 2 poles: 1-phase 2-wire 3 poles: 1-phase 2-wire, 1-phase 3-wire, 3-phase 3-wire 4 poles: 3-phase 4-wire Specification list (pages 12 to 33) List of received certifications (page 84)

Determination of rated current

Kind and size of electric wire Kind and working conditions of load Selection conditions in internal standard and electrical equipment technical standards

Relationship between temperature and electric wire (page 66) Selection of circuit breaker for motor branch circuit (page 71) Selection of circuit breaker for electric lamp or electric heater circuit (page 69) Selection of motor protection breaker (page 73) Selection of circuit breaker for inverter circuit (page 74) Selection of circuit breaker on transformer primary side (page 75)

Determination of interrupting capacity

Transformer capacity Electric wire thickness and length

Application based on breaking capacity (page 68) Table of combinations for cascade breaking (page 81)

Examination of coordination

Selective breaking

Operating characteristic curve (pages 140 to 216) Table of combinations for selective breaking (page 79)

Determination of model Use

Circuit Breakers for special purpose (pages 58)

Installation method

Connection and molded case circuit breaker

Installation and connection (pages 92 to 100) Boxed Circuit Breakers (page 130)

Accessories

Internal accessories and external accessories Electric operation

Internal accessories (pages 102 to 116) External accessories (pages 117 to 137) Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers (pages 133 to 135)

Circuit used Applicable standard

Phase and wire type, voltage, DC or AC, frequency, standard

Specification list (pages 22 to 32) List of received certifications (page 84)

Determination of rated current

Kind and size of electric wire Kind and working conditions of load Selection conditions in internal standard and electrical equipment technical standards

Relationship between temperature and electric wire (page 66) Selection of circuit breaker for motor branch circuit (page 71) Selection of circuit breaker for electric lamp or electric heater circuit (page 69) Selection of circuit breaker for inverter circuit (page 74) Selection of circuit breaker on transformer primary side (page 75)

Determination of interrupting capacity

Transformer capacity Electric wire thickness and length

Application based on breaking capacity (page 68) Table of combinations for cascade breaking (page 81)

2 Selection

4

ELCB (NV)

Determination of Purpose of protection rated sensitivity Obligation of installation current

Purpose of protection (page 86) Selection of rated sensitivity current of circuit breaker for inverter circuit (page 74) Method of switching between rated voltage and rated sensitivity current (page 246)

Examination of coordination

Operating characteristic curve (pages 180 to 203) Table of combinations for selective breaking (page 79) Combinations of ground fault protection coordination and devices (page 89)

Selective breaking Ground fault protection coordination

Determination of model Use

Circuit Breakers for special purpose (pages 58)

Installation method

Connection and molded case circuit breaker

Installation and connection (pages 92 to 100)

Accessories

Internal accessories and external accessories Electric operation

Internal accessories (pages 102 to 116) External accessories (pages 117 to 137) Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers (pages 133 to 135)

Boxed Circuit Breakers (page 130)

63

4 Selection

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

2

2. Features and Performance Features of MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breakers (NF) Table 4-1 Overcurrent trip operating time (IEC 60947-2) Rated current of circuit breaker (A) 63 or less Over 63

Occurrence of short-circuit

Operating time for 130% current Within 1 hr. Within 2 hrs.

Operation of tripping device

Relay time

Start of opening of contact

Mechanism delay time

Arc time

Max. total interrupting time

Since the relay time is normally 2 to 5 ms, if large current flows for more than this time, the circuit breaker operates instantaneously.

Fig. 4.10 Instantaneous operating time

Long time limit tripping (adjustable) Max Min

Operating time

Min Max. total interrupting time

Short time limit tripping (adjustable) Instantaneous tripping (adjustable) Max. total interrupting time

Recoverable time

Relay time Time delay tripping

Completion of breaking

Contact parting time

Max Operating time

2 Selection

4

qTime-delay trip function This function conforms to the allowable current and time characteristics of electric wire and prevents operation caused by the staring current of a load device. When the overcurrent is large, the operating time is short, and when the overcurrent is small, the operating time is long. In the case of electronic type The electronic time-delay trip function includes a long time limit trip function conforming to the allowable current and time characteristics of conductor and a short time limit trip function for selective breaking for branch NFB. The short time limit function operates after a delay of some cycles (0.06 to 0.3 s) at overcurrent exceeding the short time limit tripping current. These functions can be adjusted by the knob. wInstantaneous trip function This function breaks the circuit immediately when shortcircuit current flows. A circuit breaker on which the instantaneous tripping current is adjustable has the advantage that coordination in operation with other protective devices, such as electromagnetic switches and low-voltage air circuit breakers, can be easily obtained. The instantaneous operating time (total interrupting time) can be divided as shown in Fig. 4-10. eOperating characteristic curve The operating characteristic curve indicates the relationship between magnitude of overcurrent and operating time. The maximum-minimum operating characteristic curve indicates that the operating time is in the range. Figs. 4-11 and 4-12 show examples of operating characteristic curves.

Instantaneous tripping Current

Fig. 4.11 Example of operating characteristic curve

Long time limit tripping

Short time limit tripping

Relay time Instantaneous tripping

Current

Fig. 4.12 Example of operating characteristic curve of electronic type

Motor Protection Breakers The motor protection breakers are circuit breakers to be used to protect general induction motors. They prevent motors being burnt not only by short-circuit current of circuits, but also by overcurrent caused by overload operation and locking of motors. The Motor Protection Breakers are finely classified according to rated current so that the breakers can be applied to various types of motors. Although their time-delay trip and instantaneous trip functions are almost the same as those of MCCB, they are designed to operate within 2 seconds to 30 seconds at 600% of the rated current in consideration of protection from motor starting current and locked current.

64

There are many kinds of motors, and the motors have various allowable characteristics for overcurrent. Therefore, when applying a motor breaker, it is necessary to compare the allowable characteristics and the operating characteristics of the motor breaker. Note that, particularly, submersible motors may not be protected by ordinary motor breakers because their allowable locked time is short. When the motor starting current is large and the starting time is long and when the frequency of intermittent operation is high, motor breakers are unsuitable. In such a case, the use of a combination of an electromagnetic switch and MCCB (combination starter) is recommended.

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

Characteristics of MCCB for DC circuits When a 2-pole MCCB (250 V DC or less) is used on a DC circuit, connect the poles in series. When a 3- or 4-pole MCCB is used, refer to page 60 (for special DC voltage) or pages 14 to 21 (for DC). If the breaker is not connected as specified, its tripping characteristics and breaking performance will change, and it cannot be used.

Current-limiting characteristic Current

The current limiting refers to reduction of estimated short-circuit current depending on the circuit to prevent flow of the larger short-circuit current. The use of a class S, H or R which has excellent current-limiting characteristic or class U enables to reduce the passing energy at shortcircuiting and protect the devices in the electric circuit from electromagnetic force and thermal stress.

Conventional short-circuit current waveform

Max. peak current Passing current Time

Short-circuit current max. peak value

NF125-SV/HV (30A) NF125-SV/HV (20A) NF125-SV/HV (15A)

10 8 6

NF63-SV/HV

4 2

1

2

4

6 8 10

20

40 60 80 100

Short-circuit current r.m.s. (kA) sym.

Fig. 4.13 Passing current peak value characteristic of classes S and H (415 VAC)

Short-circuit current max. peak value

100 80 60

NF800-UEW NF400-UEW

40 NF250-UV NF125-UV

20 10 8 6 4

20 10 8 6

NF800-UEW

4

NF400-UEW

2 1 0.8 0.6

2

0.2

1

0.1

1

2

4

6 8 10

20

40 60 80100

200

NF250-UV

4

0.4 NF125-UV

1

2

4

6 8 10

20

40 60 80100

Short-circuit current r.m.s. (kA) sym.

Short-circuit current r.m.s. (kA) sym.

Fig. 4.14 Passing current peak value characteristic of classes U (415 VAC)

Fig. 4.15 Passing I²t characteristic of class U (415 VAC)

200

2 Selection

Max. peak current Ip (kA)

20

NF250-HV NF250-SV NF125-SV/HV (125A) NF125-SV/HV (40 to 100A)

Max. peak current Ip (kA)

200

40

1

(×106) 40

400

Max. passing energy I2 t (A2 · s)

(AC415V)

100 80 60

Performance Short-circuit breaking performance

Opening/closing performance

Short-circuit current corresponding to the rated interrupting capacity is interrupted. Outline of short-circuit test (IEC 60947-2) qRated limit short-circuit interrupting capacity (Icu) Operating duty: O – 3 min – CO wRated service short-circuit interrupting capacity (Ics) Operating duty: O – 3 min – CO – 3 min – CO Upper limit of temperature rise of terminal after breaking: 80K or less O duty: The circuit breaker in the ON status carries and interrupts short-circuit current. CO duty: A shorted circuit is formed, and the circuit breaker is turned on to carry and interrupt short-circuit current.

Table 4-2 shows the durability against opening and closing. See the durability against opening and closing as reference when using a circuit breaker as a switchgear. The durability against tripping by SHT (shunt tripping device), UVT (undervoltage tripping device) and trip button is 10% of the total durability against opening and closing. Note: Opening and closing operations are regarded as one time. If a circuit breaker is regularly used to trip, the life of the circuit breaker will be significantly reduced. Table 4-2 D  urability of MCCB against opening and closing (IEC 60947-2) Rated current (A) 100 or less

Frequency of opening Durability against opening and closing (times) With Without and closing (times/hour) Total current flow current flow

120

1500

8500

10000

101 to 315

120

1000

7000

8000

316 to 630

60

1000

4000

5000

631 to 2500

20

500

2500

3000

2501 or more

10

500

1500

2000

65

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

3. Current-carrying Capacity and Operating Temperature Operating current vs. ambient temperature Rated current of circuit breakers is adjusted for the rated ambient temperature. This is because circuit breakers are often installed in a casing as a switchboard or a control board, and temperature of the installed place of the breaker becomes higher than ambient temperature of the wires. If temperature of the installation site of circuit breakers greatly differ from the rated ambient temperature, it is necessary to correct rated current according to the temperature correction curve (shown in the Paragraph of characteristics and outside shape in the catalog). Load current can be increased up to the rated current corrected according to ambient temperature. However, set current rating with enough allowance while taking fluctuation of power voltage and load current into consideration so that maximum operating current may not exceed the rated current.

(1) Cautionary instructions for using heat resistive wire

2 Selection

4

For using insulated wires of higher heat resistance than that of 600 V PVC insulated wire (allowable temperature 60°C), it is necessary to take the following points into consideration. For circuit breakers, size of test wire is stipulated by each test current in IEC60947-1 If size of connection wire is thinner than the test wire size, temperature of the breaker terminals increases and overcurrent tripping operation characteristic may change in some cases. (Operating time becomes shorter usually.) At motor load, for example, influence of change in operation characteristic by difference in size of connection wire is insignificant and can be disregarded because the load current is far lower than the rated current of the circuit breaker. Table 4-3 Size of test wire Range of test current (A) 0 < ≤ 8 8 12 12 15 15 20 20 25 25 32 32 50 50 65 65 85 85 100 100 115 115 130 130 115 150 175 175 200 200 225 225 250 250 275 275 300 300 350 350 400

66

Conductor size (mm2) 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10 16 25 35 35 50 50 70 95 95 120 150 185 185 240

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

(2) Connection of aluminum conductors • When aluminum conductors are connected, be careful to prevent the contact resistance (due to the oxidized film of aluminum) from being increased. • The surface of the connection point of the aluminum conductors shall be properly treated by plating (zinc displacement-Copper-Silver) or by joint compound. If the treatment is done only by joint compound, reliability is low, this should be limited to when plating is impossible (eg. at site). • For aluminum cables, use compression terminals that are exclusively for aluminum cables. • The compression portion of the terminal shall be provided with taping, and the aluminum wire shall not be exposed to the atmosphere. Taping

Circuit breaker

Aluminum cable Compression terminal for aluminum cable

(3) Maximum operating current of installation without clearance between breakers In case of installation without clearance between breakers, because malfunction failures can result by heat of breaker, use the operating current not to exceed the below value. Table 4-4 Model BH BH-P CP30-BA CP-B CP-S NF30-CS NF32-SV NF63-CV NV32-SV NF63-SV NF63-HV NV63-SV NF125-CV NF125-SGV NF125-SEV NV125-CV NF125-SV NF125-LGV NF125-HEV NV125-SV NF125-HV NF125-HGV NV125-HV NF125-RGV NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV NF250-CV NF250-LGV NV250-CV NF250-SV NF250-SGV NV250-SV NF250-HV NF250-HGV NF250-RGV NV250-HV NF400-CW NF400-REW NF630-CW NF630-REW NF800-CEW NF800-REW

Maximum operating current

NV63-CV NV63-HV 80% of rated current

NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NF400-UEW NV400-REW NF630-SW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NV630-CW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW

90% of rated current

NF800-SDW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW NF800-UEW

67

2 Selection

4

Fig. 4.16 Example of connection of aluminum conductor

4 Selection

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

2

4. Application of Circuit Breaker According to Breaking Capacity MCCB (NF)

(

Table 4-5 230VAC 30 or less 20 or less

Frame (A)

3ph trans. capacity (kVA) 1ph trans. capacity (kVA) Breaking capacity (kA) (sym)

2.5

7.5

30 • 32

NF30-CS NF30-FAU (*1)

NF32-SV

50 • 60 • 63

NF50-FAU (*1)

NF63-CV

)

100 75

50 to 75 30 to 50 5

Class C, FAU Series Classes S, H and R The correlation between transformers and interrupting capacities is intended for short-circuiting just under the secondary voltage of 3-phase standard transformer, 210 V or 420 V, or the voltage of single-phase 3-wire transformer, 210 V.

10

150 to 300 100 to 150 15

NF63-SV

100 • 125

25

500 to 1500 200 to 300 30

35 36

50

100

125

150 170 200

NF125-SEV NF125-HEV

NF125-RGV NF125-UV NF125-HV NF250-SV NF250-HV NF250-UV NF250-RGV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV NF400-SW/SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW NF630-SW/SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW

NF125-SV

NF250-CV

400 600 • 630 800

85

NF63-HV

NF125-CV

225 • 250

2000 to 3000 −

NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW

1000 to 4000

*1 The breaking capacity of NF30-FAU and NF50-FAU having a rated current of 5 A is 1.5 kA.

Table 4-6 440VAC

Frame (A)

1.5

50 to 100 2.5

30 • 32

NF30-CS NF32-SV

50 • 60 • 63

NF63-CV

150 to 300 7.5

10

1500 to 2000

500 to 1000 20

25

30

35 36

50

2500 to 5000 65

NF125-HV NF125-SV NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-HV NF250-SV NF250-CV NF250-HEV NF250-SEV NF400-CW NF400-HEW NF400-SW/SEW NF630-CW NF630-SW/SEW NF630-HEW NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW

100 • 125

NF125-CV

225 • 250 400 600 • 630 800

85

125

200

NF125-UV

NF125-RV NF250-RV

NF250-UV

NF400-REW NF630-REW NF800-REW

NF400-UEW NF800-UEW

NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW

ELCB (NV)

Class C, FAU Series

30 or less 20 or less

3ph trans. capacity (kVA) 1ph trans. capacity (kVA) Breaking capacity (kA) (sym)

Classes S, H and R

correlation between transformers and interrupting current is intended for short-circuiting just under the secondary ( The ) voltage of 3-phase standard transformer, 210 V or 420 V, or the voltage of single-phase 3-wire transformer, 210 V.

Table 4-7 230VAC

Frame (A)

15

NF63-HV

NF63-SV

1000 to 4000

1.5

50 to 75 30 to 50

2.5

5

7.5

100 75 10

500 to 1500

150 to 300 100 to 150 200 to 300 15

25

30

2000 to 3000 −

35 36

50

85

100

125

NV32-SV

30 • 32

NV30-FAU (*1)

50 • 60 • 63

NV50-FAU (*1)

NV63-CV

100 • 125

NV63-HV

NV63-SV

NV125-SV NV125-HV NV125-HEV NV125-SEV NV250-SV NV250-HV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV NV400-SW/SEW NV400-HEW NV630-SW/SEW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW

NV125-CV NV250-CV

225 • 250 400 600 • 630 800

NV400-CW NV630-CW NV800-SEW

NV400-REW

*1 The interrupting current of NF30-FAU and NF50-FAU having a rated current of 5 A is 1.5 kA.

Table 4-8 440VAC Trans. capacity (kVA) Breaking capacity (kA) (sym) 30 • 32 50 • 60 • 63 Frame (A)

2 Selection

4

30 or less

Trans. capacity (kVA) Breaking capacity (kA) (sym)

68

100 • 125

30 or less

50 to 100 2.5

5

NV32-SV NV63-CV

NV63-SV

500 to 1000

150 to 300 7.5

10

15

25

30

1500 to 2000 35 36

50

2500 to 5000 65 70 85

NV63-HV

NV125-CV

NV125-SV

225 • 250

NV250-CV

400 600 • 630 800

NV400-CW NV630-CW NV800-SEW

NV125-HV NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SV NV250-HV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV NV400-HEW NV400-SW/SEW NV630-SW/SEW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW

NV400-REW

125

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB In some lighting apparatuses, the service life of circuit breakers may be reduced by the influence of inrush current applied when the lamps are turned on. Periodically check for abnormal temperature rise of the circuit breaker in such an apparatus.

5. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Electric Lamp or Heater Circuit The maximum working current is 0.8 times the rated current of each circuit breaker.

MCCB (NF) Table 4-9 230VAC Breaking capacity (kA) 230 V AC (Icu sym) 2.5

NF30-CS BH-P

5

7.5

BH-P (110/220V)

10

15

25 30 36

50

85

NF32-SV NF63-SV

BH-P (110/220V)

125 150 170 200

NF125-HV

NF125-SV

NF63-HV

100

NF125-RGV NF125-UV

NF63-CV NF125-SV NF125-SEV

NF125-CV

NF125-HV NF125-SEV

NF250-SV NF250-SEV

NF250-CV

NF125-HV NF125-HEV

NF250-HV NF250-RGV NF250-UV NF250-HEV

NF400-SW NF400 NF400 NF400-REW NF400-SEW -HEW -UEW

NF400-CW

NF630-SW NF630 NF630-REW NF800 NF630-SEW -HEW NF800 -UEW NF800-REW NF800-SEW -HEW

NF630-CW NF800-CEW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

Table 4-10 440VAC Breaking capacity (kA) 440 V AC (Icu sym)

NF30-CS

2.5

5

7.5

10

25 30 36

NF32-SV

NF32-SV

NF63-SV NF63-HV NF63-CV

NF63-CV

NF125-SV

NF125-SV

1.5

NF125-SV NF125-SEV NF125-HV NF125-SEV

Max. working Rated current of circuit current (A) breaker (A) 12 15 16 20 24 30 32 40 40 50 48 60 60 75 80 100 100 125 120 150 140 175 160 200 180 225 200 250 240 300 280 350 320 400 400 500 480 600 560 700 640 800 800 1000 960 1200 1120 1400 1280 1600

NF125-CV

NF250-SV NF250SEV

NF250-CV

45

50

70

NF125-RGV NF125-HV NF125-RGV NF125-HEV NF125-HEV

NF250-HV NF250-HEV NF400NF400-SEW HEW NF630-SW NF630NF630-SEW HEW NF800NF800-SEW HEW

NF630-CW NF800-CEW

125 150

200

NF125-HV

NF400-SW

NF400-CW

85

NF250-RGV

NF400-REW

NF 125-UV

NF 250-UV

NF400-UEW

NF630-REW NF800-UEW NF800-REW

NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

69

4 2 Selection

Max. working Rated current of circuit current (A) breaker (A) 12 15 16 20 24 30 32 40 40 50 48 60 60 75 80 100 100 125 120 150 140 175 160 200 180 225 200 250 240 300 280 350 320 400 400 500 480 600 560 700 640 800 800 1000 960 1200 1120 1400 1280 1600

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

ELCB (NV) Table 4-11 230VAC Breaking capacity (kA) 230 V AC (Icu sym)

Max. working Rated current current (A) (A)

2 Selection

4

12

15

16

20

24

30

32

40

40

50

48

60

60

75

80

100

100

125

120

150

140

175

160

200

180

225

200

250

240

300

280

350

320

400

400

500

480

600

560

700

640

800

2.5

5

7.5

NV32-SV

10

15

25

30

36

50

NV32-SV

85

100

125

NV125-HV NV63-HV

NV63-CV

NV63-SV

NV125-SV

NV125-CV

NV125NV125-HV HV NV125-SEV NV125HEV

NV250HV NV250HEV

NV250-SV NV250-SEV

NV250-CV

NV400-CW

NV400-SW NV400 NV400-SEW -HEW

NV630-CW

NV630-SW NV630 NV630-SEW -HEW

NV400 -REW

NV800 -HEW

NV800-SEW

Table 4-12 440VAC Breaking capacity (kA) 440 V AC (Icu sym)

Max. working Rated current (A) current (A)

70

12

15

16

20

24

30

32

40

40

50

48

60

60

75

80

100

100

125

120

150

140

175

160

200

180

225

200

250

240

300

280

350

320

400

400

500

480

600

560

700

640

800

2.5

5

7.5

10

NV32-SV NV63-SV

NV63-CV

NV63-HV

25

30

NV125-SV

36

45

50

70

85

125

NV125-HV

NV63-CV NV125-HV NV125NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV125-HV HEV NV125-HEV NV125-SEV

NV125-CV

NV250-SV NV250-SEV

NV250-CV

NV400-CW

NV630-CW NV800-SEW

NV250-HV NV250-HEV

NV400SW NV400-SEW

NV400HEW

NV630-SW NV630 NV630-SEW -HEW NV800 -HEW

NV400-REW

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

6. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Motor Branch Circuit

(direct-to-line starting or Y-∆ starting) Motor is protected from overload by electromagnetic switch. Circuit breaker is installed to protect circuit from short-circuit.

MCCB (NF) Table 4-13 200/220VAC for 3-phase induction motor

Electromagnetic switch M

0.4 2.1 N10-N21

2.1 NF30-CS 5 NF32-SV 5

0.75 3.7 N10-N21

3.6 NF30-CS 10 NF32-SV 10 NF63-SV 10 NF63-HV 10

NF125-SV (15)

1.5 6.4 N10-N25 2.2 9.1 N10-N35 3.7 15 N18-N35 N25·N35· 5.5 22 N50·N65 7.5 29 N35·N50-N80 11 44 N50-N95 15 55 N65-N125

6.6 NF30-CS 15 NF32-SV 15 NF63-SV 15 NF63-HV 15 9 NF30-CS 20 NF32-SV 20 NF63-SV 20 NF63-HV 20 15 NF30-CS 30 NF32-SV 30 NF63-SV 30 NF63-HV 30

NF125-SV (15) NF125-SV 20 NF125-SV 30

NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV

22

NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50

NF125-SV 50

NF125-HV 50

NF125-UV 50

29 42 54

NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF63-HV 60

NF125-SV 60 NF125-CV 75 NF125-SV 75 NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 100

NF125-HV 60 NF125-HV 75 NF125-HV 100

NF125-UV 60 NF125-UV 75 NF125-UV 100

NF63-SV 5 NF63-HV (10)

NF125-SV (15)

Y-∆ starting Direct-to-line starting

22 5.5 22 NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50 NF125-SV — 29 7.5 29 NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF63-HV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV — 42 11 44 — NF125-CV 75 NF125-SV 54 15 55 — NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 67 18.5 67 N80-N125 NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 82 22 85 N95-N150 NF250-CV 150 105 30 110 N125-N220 NF250-CV 175 125 37 130 N150-N220 NF250-CV 225 150 45 164 N180-N400 NF400-CW 180 55 195 N220-N400 NF630-CW 75 267 N300·N400·(N600) 250 NF630-CW 90 320 N300·N400·(N600·N800) 330 NF800-CEW 110 385 N300·N400·(N600·N800) 330 NF800-CEW 500 132 470 (N600·N800) 500 160 580 (N600·N800) 600 200 720 (N800) Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NF250-CV is 36kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NF1000- to 1600-SEW is 125kA.

50 60 75 100 100

400 500 600 600 600

NF125-UV (15)

NF125-HV (15)

NF250-SV NF250-SV NF250-SV NF400-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF630-SW NF630-SEW

150 175 225 300 300 500 600 600

NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF250-HV NF250-HV NF250-HV NF400-HEW NF400-HEW NF400-HEW NF630-HEW NF630-HEW

NF125-UV (15)

(15) 15 20 30

50 60 75 100 100 150 175 225 250 300 400 500 600

NF125-UV (15) NF125-UV 20 NF125-UV 30

NF400-REW NF400-REW NF400-REW NF630-REW NF630-REW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000

NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF250-UV NF250-UV NF250-UV NF400-UEW NF400-UEW NF400-UEW NF800-UEW NF800-UEW

50 60 75 100 100 150 175 225 250 300 400 500 600

4 2 Selection

Direct-to-line starting

Breaking capacity (kA) 230 V AC (Icu sym) For 4-pole Electromagnetic motor contactor 150(*2) 2.5 7.5 15 25 30(*1) 50 85 100 200 Heater Type Output Fullload Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model nominal Model Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating Rating name (kW) current (A) (A) 0.7 0.1 0.7 NF125-HV (15) N10-N21 NF30-CS (3) NF32-SV (3) NF63-SV (3) NF63-HV (10) NF125-SV (15) NF125-UV (15) 1.3 0.2 1.2

Direct-to-line starting

Table 4-14 400/440VAC for 3-phase induction motor For 4-pole motor Output Fullload (kW) current (A) 0.2 0.6 0.4 1.1 0.75 1.9 1.5 3.2 2.2 4.6 3.7 7.5 5.5 11 7.5 15 11

22

15 18.5 22 30 37 45

28 34 42 55 65 82

Electromagnetic contactor Model N10-N21 N10-N21 N10-N21 N10-N21 N10-N21 N11-N35 N18-N35 N20-N35 • N50 N25 • N35 • N50 • N65 N35 • N50-N80 N50-N95 N50-N95 N65-N125 N80-N150 N95-N150

1.5

2.5

Breaking capacity (kA) 415 V AC (Icu sym) 10 25 30(*1) 50(*2)

7.5

Heater nominal (A)

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

0.7 1.3 1.7 3.6 5 6.6 11 15

NF30-CS NF30-CS NF30-CS NF30-CS NF30-CS NF30-CS NF30-CS NF30-CS

(3) (3) 5 10 10 20 30 30

NF32-SV NF32-SV NF32-SV NF32-SV NF32-SV NF32-SV NF32-SV NF32-SV

(3) (3) 5 10 10 20 30 30

NF63-SV NF63-SV NF63-SV NF63-SV NF63-SV NF63-SV NF63-SV NF63-SV

(3) (3) 5 10 10 20 30 30

NF63-HV NF63-HV NF63-HV NF63-HV NF63-HV NF63-HV NF63-HV NF63-HV

10 10 10 10 10 20 30 30

22

50 NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50

28 35 42 54 67 82

NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF63-HV NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV NF125-CV NF125-CV NF125-CV

60 60 75 100 100

Model

Rating

70

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV

(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) 20 30 30

NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV

(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) 20 30 30

Model

150(*3) Rating

NF125-SV 50 NF125-HV 50 NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF125-SV NF250-CV 125 NF250-SV

60 60 75 100 100 125

NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV NF125-HV

Model

Rating

200 Model

Rating

NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV

(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) 20 30 30

NF125-UV 50

60 60 75 100 100 NF250-HV 125

NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF125-UV NF250-UV

60 60 75 100 100 125

Y-∆ starting Direct-to-line starting

11 5.5 11 NF63-CV 30 NF63-SV 30 NF63-HV 30 NF125-SV 30 NF250-HV 30 NF125-UV 30 − 15 7.5 15 − NF63-CV 40 NF63-SV 40 NF63-HV 40 NF125-SV 40 NF250-HV 40 NF125-UV 40 22 11 22 − NF63-CV 50 NF63-SV 50 NF63-HV 50 NF125-SV 50 NF250-HV 50 NF125-UV 50 28 15 28 − NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF250-HV 60 NF125-UV 60 35 18.5 34 − NF63-CV 60 NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV 60 NF125-SV 60 NF250-HV 60 NF125-UV 60 42 22 42 − NF125-CV 75 NF125-SV 75 NF250-HV 75 NF125-UV 75 54 30 55 − NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 100 NF250-HV 100 NF125-UV 100 67 37 65 − NF125-CV 100 NF125-SV 100 NF250-HV 100 NF125-UV 100 82 45 82 − NF250-CV 150 NF250-SV 150 NF250-HV 150 NF250-UV 150 105 55 96 N125-N220 NF250-CV 175 NF250-SV 175 NF250-HV 175 NF250-UV 175 125 75 134 N150-N220 NF250-CV 225 NF250-SV 225 NF250-HV 225 NF250-UV 225 150 90 160 N180-N400 NF250-HEV 225 NF400-REW 225 NF400-UEW 225 NF250-SEV 225 180 110 192 N180-N400 NF400-SW 350 NF400-HEW 300 NF400-REW 300 NF400-UEW 300 250 132 233 N220-N400 NF400-SW 400 NF400-HEW 400 NF400-REW 400 NF400-UEW 400 160 290 N300 • N400 • (N600) 250 NF630-SW 500 NF630-HEW 500 NF630-REW 500 NF800-UEW 500 200 360 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NF630-SW 600 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 600 220 389 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) − NF630-SW 600 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 600 250 430 (N600 • N800) 500 NF630-SEW 700 NF630-HEW 600 NF630-REW 600 NF800-UEW 700 300 500 (N600 • N800) 500 NF800-SEW 700 NF800-HEW 700 NF800-REW 700 NF800-UEW 700 Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NF250-SV and NF250-SEV is 36kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NF400-SW is 45kA. *3 The breaking capacity of NF400- to 800-REW is 125kA. Remarks: 1. Circuit breakers are selected under the starting conditions shown in the right table. 2. Protection coordination is examined under the condition of cold start at 40°C. Starting conditions for selection 3. The ratings in parentheses apply to cases where thermal relays with saturating reactor are used. Direct-to-line Startup inrush current (× full-load current) 4. Although the inrush current upon switching to ∆ connection fluctuates depending on the residual magnetic flux at star starting time Motor capacity starting, ∆ connection closing phase or power supply transformer capacity, in most cases, the inrush current is less than Direct-to-line starting Y-∆ starting (600%) the values shown in the right table. 0.2 to 7.5kW 10s 12 times 16 times 5. The maximum starting current is the effective value of current (value after transient phenomena disappear) at the time 11 to 55   10 12  17  when the rotator starts to rotate. 6. It was assumed that the Y-∆ starting would be performed by the open transition method which is a general method but is 75 to 300  10 14  18  known to carry large transient inrush current.

71

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

ELCB (NV) Table 4-15 200/220VAC for 3-phase induction motor

Y-∆ starting Direct-to-line starting

Direct-to-line starting

Breaking capacity (kA) 230 V AC (Icu sym) For 4-pole Electromagnetic motor contactor 50 30(*2) 7.5 15(*1) 25 85 150 100 2.5 FullHeater Output load nominal Model Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating Model Rating current (A) (kW) (A) 0.1 0.7 0.7 NV125-SV (15) N10-N21 NV125-HV (15) NV30-CS (5) NV63-CV (5) NV32-SV (15) NV63-HV (15) 0.2 1.2 1.3 NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15) 0.4 2.1 N10-N21 2.1 NV30-CS 5 NV63-CV 5 NV32-SV (15) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV (15) NV125-HV (15) 0.75 3.7 N10-N21 3.6 NV30-CS 10 NV63-CV 10 NV32-SV (15) NV63-HV (15) NV125-SV 15 NV125-HV (15) 1.5 6.4 N10-N25 6.6 NV30-CS 15 NV63-CV 15 NV32-SV 15 NV63-HV 15 NV125-SV 20 NV125-HV 20 2.2 9.1 N10-N35 9 NV30-CS 20 NV63-CV 20 NV32-SV 20 NV63-HV 20 NV125-SV 30 NV125-HV 30 3.7 15 N18-N35 15 NV30-CS 30 NV63-CV 30 NV32-SV 30 NV63-HV 30 NV125-SV 50 NV63-CV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 NV125-HV 50 5.5 22 N25 • N35 • N50 • N65 22 NV125-SV 60 NV63-CV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV63-HV 60 NV125-HV 60 7.5 29 N35 • N50-N80 29 NV125-CV 75 NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75 11 44 N50-N95 42 NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100 15 55 N65-N125 54 NV125-SV 50 NV63-CV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 NV125-HV 50 5.5 22 22 − NV63-CV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV63-HV 60 NV125-CV 60 NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60 7.5 29 29 − NV125-CV 75 NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75 11 44 42 − NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100 15 55 54 − NV125-CV 100 NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100 18.5 67 N80-N125 67 NV250-CV 150 22 85 N95-N150 82 NV250-SV 150 NV250-HV 150 NV250-CV 175 30 110 N125-N220 105 NV250-SV 175 NV250-HV 175 NV250-CV 225 37 130 N150-N220 125 NV250-SV 225 NV250-HV 225 NV400-CW 400 NV400-SW 300 NV400-HEW 250 NV400-REW 250 45 164 N180-N400 150 NV630-CW 500 NV400-SW 300 NV400-HEW 300 NV400-REW 300 55 195 N220-N400 180 NV630-CW 600 NV400-SEW 400 NV400-HEW 400 NV400-REW 400 75 267 N300 • N400 • (N600) 250 90 320 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NV630-SEW 500 NV630-HEW 500 110 385 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NV630-SEW 600 NV630-HEW 600 Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NV32-SV is 10kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NV250-CV is 36kA.

Direct-to-line starting

Table 4-16 400/440VAC for 3-phase induction motor For 4-pole motor Output Fullload (kW) current (A) 0.2 0.6 0.4 1.1 0.75 1.9 1.5 3.2 2.2 4.6 3.7 7.5 5.5 11 7.5 15 11 22 15 28 18.5 34 22 42 30 55 37 65 45 82

Electromagnetic contactor

2.5

Model

Heater nominal (A)

N10-N21 N10-N21 N10-N21 N10-N21 N10-N21 N11-N35 N18-N35 N20-N35 • N50 N25 • N35 • N50 • N65 N35 • N50-N80 N50-N95 N50-N95 N65-N125 N80-N150 N95-N150

0.7 1.3 1.7 3.6 5 6.6 11 15 22 28 35 42 54 67 82

5

Breaking capacity (kA) 415 V AC (Icu sym) 10 25 30(*1)

7.5

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

Model

Rating

NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV NV63-CV

(5) (5) 5 10 10 20 30 30 50 60

NV32-SV NV32-SV NV32-SV NV32-SV NV32-SV NV32-SV NV32-SV NV32-SV

(5) (5) 5 10 10 20 30 30

NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV NV63-SV

(5) (5) 5 10 10 20 30 30 50 60

NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV63-HV NV125-CV NV125-CV NV125-CV NV125-CV

(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) 20 30 30 50 60 60 75 100 100

Model

Rating

Model

NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV125-SV NV250-CV 125 NV250-SV

50(*2)

70

Rating

Model

Rating

(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) 20 30 30 50 60 60 75 100 100 125

NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV NV125-HV

(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) 20 30 30 50 60 60 75 100 100

Model

125 Rating

Model

Rating

NV250-HV 125

11 NV63-CV 30 NV32-SV 30 NV63-SV 30 NV63-HV 30 NV125-SV 30 NV125-HV 30 5.5 11 − 15 NV63-CV 40 7.5 15 NV125-SV 40 NV125-HV 40 − NV63-SV 40 NV63-HV 40 22 NV63-CV 50 11 22 − NV125-SV 50 NV125-HV 50 NV63-SV 50 NV63-HV 50 28 NV63-CV 60 15 28 − NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60 NV63-SV 60 NV125-CV 60 35 18.5 34 − NV125-SV 60 NV125-HV 60 NV125-CV 60 42 22 42 − NV125-SV 75 NV125-HV 75 NV125-CV 75 54 30 55 − NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100 NV125-CV 100 67 37 65 − NV125-SV 100 NV125-HV 100 NV125-CV 100 82 45 82 NV250-CV 150 NV250-SV 150 − NV250-HV 150 105 55 96 N125-N220 NV250-CV 175 NV250-SV 175 NV250-HV 175 125 75 134 N150-N220 NV250-CV 225 NV250-SV 225 NV250-HV 225 150 90 160 N180-N400 225 NV250-HEW 225 NV400-REW 225 NV250-SEW 225 180 110 192 N180-N400 NV400-SW 350 NV400-HEW 300 NV400-REW 300 250 132 233 N220-N400 NV400-SW 400 NV400-HEW 400 NV400-REW 400 160 290 N300 • N400 • (N600) 250 NV630-SEW 500 NV630-HEW 500 200 360 N300 • N400 • (N600 • N800) 330 NV630-SEW 600 NV630-HEW 600 Notes *1 The breaking capacity of NV250-SV and NV250-SEV is 36kA. *2 The breaking capacity of NV400-SW is 45kA. Remark: 1. For the selecting conditions, please refer to the remarks on page 73.

Y-∆ starting Direct-to-line starting

2 Selection

4

Example of Y-∆ starting current waveform (crest value envelope) Pump load S phase current Steady load current crest value = 2×283A Inrush current crest value at switching to ∆ connection6680A

Operation in Y connection

72

Operation in ∆ connection

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

7. Selection of Motor Protection Breaker Motor Protection Breakers

In principle, the operating characteristic curve of a selected motor breaker must be lower than the heat characteristic of the motor. The following table shows the rated capacities of standard squired‑cage 3-phase motors (4-pole) made by Mitsubishi Electric. The starting conditions are shown in the table.

Table 4-17 for 3-phase induction motor NF32-SV

NF63-CV

NF63-SV

NF125-SV

NF250-SV

230V

7.5

7.5

15

50

85

415V

2.5

2.5

7.5

30

36

2

32 A or less: 2 40 A or more: 7

32 A or less: 2 40 A or more: 7

32 A or less: 2 40 A or more: 7

5

1200

1200

1200

1200

1100

Rated current

Rated current

Rated current

Rated current

Rated current

Model Motor Protection Breaker Rated breaking capacity (kA)

600% starting time limit (s) Startup inrush current limit (%) Example of rated capacity of motor (kW) 200/220V 400/440V

Model for combination with electromagnetic contactor

0.4 0.2

4

0.75 N10-N21

0.75

2 Selection

0.4

1.5

4

4

4

2.2

5

5

5

3.7

7.1 8

7.1 8

7.1 8

5.5

10 12

10 12

10 12

(12.5)

7.5

16

16

16

(16)

1.5

N11-N35 2.2 3.7

N18-N35 N20-N35 N50 N25 • N35 N50 • N65

5.5

11

25

25

25

(25)

7.5

15

32

32

32

32

11

18.5 22

40 45

40 45

(40) 45

15 18.5

30 37

63 71

22

45 55 55

90 100

N35 N50-N80 N50-N95 N65-N125

30 37 45

75 90

55

110

N80-N125 N90-N125 N125-N220 125 150 175 200 225

N150-N400 N180-N400 N220-N400

Remarks: 1. Fot the rated curent in parentheses, breakers will be manufactured to order. 2. The approximate values of inrush current at direct-to-line starting are shown below. Up to 7.5 kW: 1000% 11 kW or more: 1200% 75 kW or more: 1400% When the starting current is large and the starting power factor is low, a combination with an electromagnetic switch selected in accordance with “Table of selection of circuit breaker for motor branch circuit” shown on page 73 is suitable. Cautions (1) Note that any circuit breaker operates when the startup inrush current, starting current and starting time exceed the conditions shown in the above table. Particularly, high-efficiency motors generally have higher starting current and lower starting torque compared to general-purpose motors, and motor breakers cannot be used for such motors. (2) Note that a circuit breaker may operate when an electromagnetic contactor is opened or closed while a motor is running. (3) Select a motor breaker having rated current approx. 1.0 to 1.1 times higher than the full load current of motor.

73

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

8. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit Selection of Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit

Power supply

Since current containing harmonic components will flow, the rated current of circuit breaker must be approx. 1.4 times the inverter input current. NFB

R

U

Inverter

S

V

T

W

Motor

IM

Note The life cycle of the circuit breaker for the circuit on the inverter primary side will be reduced under the influence of transient inrush current. Install a switch.

Table 4-18 3-phase 200 V class Inverter input capacity Rated current of circuit breaker Inverter input capacity Rated current of circuit breaker kVA A kVA A 5.5 30 41 175 9 40 52 225 12 50 66 300 17 75 80 350 20 100 100 500 28 125 110 500 34 150 132 600

Selection of rated sensitivity current of Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker for Inverter Circuit Select the rated sensitivity current as stated below. Circuit breakers for harmonics and surge: Rated sensitivity current I∆n  10 × {Ig1 + Ign + Ig2 + Igm} General circuit breakers: Rated sensitivity current I∆n  10 × {Ig1 + Ign + 3 × (Ig2 + Igm)} Example 1

6mm 2×5m

NV

4

Noise filter

2 Selection

I 1

6mm 2×20m

Table 4-19-1 Examples of leakage current from line when IV cable is wired in close contact with ground (wiring in metallic conduit) (3-phase 220V 60Hz) Wire size mm2 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95

  Ig1, Ig2: Leakage current from line   Ign: Leakage current from noise filter on inverter input side     Igm: Leakage current from motor operating on commercial power supply 3-phase

Inverter

I n

Install MCCB or ELCB on the primary side (power supply side) of the inverter. If it is installed on the secondary side, it may cause electronic circuit trouble or overheating.

IM 220V 2.2kW I 2

Leakage current/km mA 135 140 169 176 203 205 241 247

I m

Table 4-19-2 Example of leakage current from 3-phase induction motor (220V 60Hz)

Example 2 50mm 2×5m NV

Noise filter

I 1

I n

Motor output (kW) 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37

50mm 2×20m

3-phase

Inverter

IM 220V 22kW I 2

I m

Example of selection 1 General breaker Breaker for harmonics and surge 5 5 Leakage current Ig1 135 ×   = 0.675 135 ×    = 0.675 1000 1000 Leakage current Ign 0 (without noise filter) 20 20 Leakage current Ig2 135 ×    = 2.7 135 ×   × 3 = 8.1 1000 1000 Leakage current Igm 0.18 × 3 = 0.54 0.18 Total leakage current Ig 11.465 3.555 Rated sensitivity 200 100 current (> Ig × 10)

Leakage current (mA) 0.2 0.29 0.32 0.42 0.55 0.63 0.72 0.8 0.96 1.1

Example of selection 2 Leakage current Leakage current Leakage current

Breaker for harmonics and surge General breaker 5 5 205 ×   = 1.025 205 ×   = 1.025 1000 1000 Ign 0 (without noise filter) 20 20 Ig2 205 ×   = 4.1 205 ×   = 12.3 1000 1000 Igm 0.72 × 3 = 2.16 0.72 Ig 15.485 5.845 Ig1

Leakage current Total leakage current Rated sensitivity current (> Ig × 10)

100

500

Remarks: 1. Circuit breakers for harmonics and surge can detect earth fault on the secondary side of inverter only when the operating frequency is 120 Hz or less. In the case of star connection by neutral point grounding method, the sensitivity current for earth fault on the inverter secondary side is degraded. In this case, for protective ground for load device, apply Class C grounding (10 Ω or less). 2. For general circuit breakers, the leakage current from the line between inverter and motor shall be calculated as three times the leakage current at the commercial frequency in consideration of harmonic content. 3. For the model names of circuit breakers for harmonics and surge, refer to the specification list in Section 2 of this document. Models not for harmonics and surge are general breakers.

74

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

9. Selection of Circuit Breaker for Transformer Primary Side Notes 1. The life cycle of the circuit breaker for the circuit on the transformer primary side will be significantly reduced under the influence of excited inrush current. Install a switch to open and close the circuit. 2. Select a circuit breaker based on the example of excited inrush current of each transformer. When using a circuit breaker for a transformer, check the magnitude of excited inrush current with the transformer manufacturer.

Single-phase 210-V Table 4-20-1 MCCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Crest Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) NF63-CV(*1) NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

50 60 75

NF125-SEV NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV

50 75 125 100 150 125

35

NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV

35

5

23.8

45

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV

60 100 50

37

7.5

35.7

45

NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV

150 125

37

10

47.6

43

NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV

200 125

37

15

71.4

43

20

95.2

43

30

143

37

50

238

35

75

357

30

100 150 200 300 500

476 714 952 1429 2381

27 24 21 17 −

NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF400-SW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF630-SW NF630-SEW(*1) NF1000-SEW NF800-SEW(*1) NF1250-SEW NF1000-SEW − − − −

400 300 200 400 200 200 500 300 500 400 600 800 − − − −

Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Crest Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) 30 NF63-CV(*1) 50 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 24 (50) NF125-CV(*2) 50 NF125-SV 50 NF63-CV(*1) 24 60(50) NF125-CV(*1)(*2) 75 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 24

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

60 100

225 125

23

NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV

100 150

NF400-SW NF400-SEW

350 200

23

34

NF400-SEW

200

23

34

NF630-SEW

300

23

NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF400-SEW(*1) NF630-SEW

200 125 300 200 300 300

29

NF800-SEW(*1)

400

22

NF630-SEW

400

28 24 22 18 17

NF1600-SEW

800 − − − −

20 19 19 16 −

NF800-SEW(*1) NF1600-SEW − − −

600 800 − − −

− − − −

Table 4-20-2 ELCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Crest capacity primary value of Rating Model current first wave kVA A A (multiple)

75 50

NV125-SEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

50 125 150 125

35

NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

225 125

23

35

NV400-SW NV400-SEW

350 200

23

34

NV400-SEW

200

23

−

34

NV630-SEW

300

23

− − − − − −

29 28 24 22 18 17

− − − − − −

22 20 19 19 16 −

100 50

NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV400-SW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV630-SEW

150 125 200 125 400 300 200 400 200 200 300

23.8

45

7.5

35.7

45

10

47.6

43

15

71.4

43

20

95.2

43

30

143

37

50

238

35

−

75 100 150 200 300 500

357 476 714 952 1429 2381

30 27 24 21 17 −

− − − − − −

Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Crest Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) 50 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 60 NV125-CV 24 50 NV125-SV 50 NV125-SEV 75 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 24 50 NV125-SEV 100 NV125-CV, NV125-SV 24 125 NV250-CV, NV250-SV

NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-SEV

NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV

5

Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Crest Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) 37 37 37

− − − − − −

NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

150 125

NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV630-SEW NV800-SEW NV630-SEW − − − − −

200 125 300 200 300 400 400 − − − − −

Notes *1 Examples of selection of high-instantaneous circuit breakers (special models) for primary side of transformer. *2 The circuit breakers with rating in parentheses are special models. Remarks: 1. For the circuit breakers whose rated current is adjustable, the rated current values are shown. 2. The crest value of the first wave of excited inrush current shall be calculated based on the multiple for the crest value of the first wave in the table, and the calculated value shall not exceed the lower limit crest value of instantaneous tripping current of circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are selected on condition that the transformer rated current value does not exceed 0.9 times the circuit breaker rated current. If the multiple for the crest value of the first wave is different from that shown in the table, a circuit breaker must be separately selected.

75

4 2 Selection

Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Crest capacity primary value of Rating Model current first wave kVA A A (multiple)

4 Selection

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

2

Single-phase 420-V Table 4-21-1 MCCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Peak primary capacity Rating value of Model current first wave kVA A A (multiple) NF63-CV(*1) 30 5 11.9 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 45 50 NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 50

2 Selection

4

Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) NF32-SV 15 37 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 15 NF125-SV 15 NF63-CV(*1) 40 37 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 60 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 60

Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) 15 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 24 40 NF125-SV 15 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 30 NF125-SV 24 30 (50) NF125-CV(*2) NF63-CV(*1) 30 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50 24 (50) NF125-CV(*2) NF125-SV 50 NF63-CV(*1) 50 23 NF125-CV(*1)(*2) 60(50) NF125-CV, NF125-SV 75

7.5

17.9

45

NF63-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV

50 75

10

23.8

43

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV

60 100

37

NF63-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

50 75

15

35.7

43

NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV

100 150 125

35

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

60 100

20

47.6

43

NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV

200 125

35

NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV

100 150 125

23

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

60 100

30

71.4

37

NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV

225 125

23

NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV

100 150

119

35

34

NF400-SW NF400-SEW

400 200

23

NF250-SEV

150

75

179

30

29

NF400-SEW

200

22

NF400-SW NF400-SEW

400 200

100

238

27

125 350 250 400 200 200 500 300 300 600 300

34

50

NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF630-SW NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW NF400-SEW(*1) NF630-SW NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW

28

NF400-SEW(*1) NF630-SEW

300 300

20

NF400-SEW

350

150

357

24

NF630-SEW(*1)

400

−

−

19

200 300 500

476 714 1190

21 17 −

NF800-SEW(*1) NF1250-SEW

600 800 −

22 18 17

600 800 −

19 16 −

NF400-SEW(*1) NF630-SEW NF800-SEW(*1) NF1250-SEW −

400 400 600 800 −

−

− NF800-SEW(*1) NF1600-SEW −

Table 4-21-2 ELCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Peak capacity primary value of Rating Model current first wave kVA A A (multiple) NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 50 5 11.9 NV125-CV 45 60 NV125-SV, NV125-HV 50

Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) NV32-SV 15 37 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15 NV125-SV 15

Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple) 15 NV32-SV 24 15 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15 NV125-SV 30 NV32-SV 24 30 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 30 NV125-SV 50 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 24 60 NV125-CV 50 NV125-SV 75 NV125-CV, NF125-SV 23 50 NV125-SEV 100 NV125-CV, NF125-SV 23 60 NV125-SEV

7.5

17.9

45

NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV

75

37

NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV

60 60

10

23.8

43

NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV

100 50

37

NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-SEV

75 50

15

35.7

43

20

47.6

43

100 50 150 125

71.4

37

34

NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

225 125

23

NV250-SV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

150 125

50

119

35

34

NV400-SW NV400-SEW

400 200

23

NV250-SEV

150

75

179

30

29

NV400-SEW

200

22

NV400-SW NV400-SEW

400 200

100

238

27

150 125 200 125 125 350 250 400 200 200 300 300 400

NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

30

NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW

28

NV630-SEW NV800-SEW

300 400

20

NV400-SEW

350

NV630-SEW NV800-SEW

400 400 − − −

35 35

150

357

24

−

−

24

−

−

19

200 300 500

476 714 1190

21 17 −

− − −

− − −

22 18 −

− − −

− − −

19 16 −

− − −

Notes *1 Examples of selection of high-instantaneous circuit breakers (special models) for primary side of transformer. *2 The circuit breakers with rating in parentheses are special models. Remarks: 1. For the circuit breakers whose rated current is adjustable, the rated current values are shown. 2. The peak value of the first wave of excited inrush current shall be calculated based on the multiple for the peak value of the first wave in the table, and the calculated value shall not exceed the lower limit peak value of instantaneous tripping current of circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are selected on condition that the transformer rated current value does not exceed 0.9 times the circuit breaker rated current. If the multiple for the peak value of the first wave is different from that shown in the table, a circuit breaker must be separately selected.

76

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

3-phase 210-V Table 4-21-3 MCCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple)

Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple)

26

NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-SV

20 20

18

NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-SV

20 20

26

NF63-CV(*1) NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV

30 50 50

18

NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-CV(*2) NF125-SV

30 (50) 30

26

NF63-CV(*1) NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV

40 60 60

18

NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-CV(*2) NF125-SV

50 (50) 50

15

41.2

24

NF63-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV

50 100

26

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

60 100

18

NF63-CV(*1) NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV

50 60 60

20

55.0

20

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV

75 100

26

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-SEV NF250-CV, NF250-SV

75 75 125

18

NF125-CV(*1) NF125-CV, NF125-SV

75 100

30

82.5

20

NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV

200 125

18

NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV

100 150

137

20

200 175

21

400 300 200 350 250

NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-SEV

206

NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF400-SW NF400-SEW

16

75

14

NF400-SW NF400-SEW

300 250

100

275

21

100 150 125 175 350 250 400 250 350 600 350

26

50

NF125-CV(*1) NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF400-SEW(*1) NF630-SW NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW

17

NF400-SEW

350

13

NF400-SW NF400-SEW

350 300

150

412

17

NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW

500

14

NF630-SEW

500

13

200 300 500

550 825 1375

16 16 −

NF800-SEW(*1) NF1600-SEW

700 1000 −

13 13 11

NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

700 1000 1600

12 12 11

NF630-SW NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1000-SEW NF1600-SEW

500 500 700 1000 1600

−

23 18

Table 4-21-4 ELCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Peak capacity primary value of Rating Model current first wave kVA A A (multiple)

Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple)

Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Peak Rating value of Model first wave A (multiple)

5

13.7

25

NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-SV, NV125-HV

20 20 20

26

NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-SV

20 20 20

18

NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-SV

20 20 20

7.5

20.6

25

NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-CV NV125-SV, NV125-HV

50 60 50

26

NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-CV NV125-SV

50 60 50

18

NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-SV

30 30 30

10

27.5

24

NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV

60 60

26

NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV

60 60

18

NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-CV NV125-SV

50 60 50

15

41.2

24

20

55.0

20

30

82.5

20 20

200 175

206

21

100 50 75 125 200 125 400 300 200 250 350

NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV

75

NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV125-SEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV400-SEW NV400-SW

60 60 100 75 150 125

137

100

275

21

100 50 100 75 150 125 175 350 250 400 250 350 400

NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV125-SEV

50

NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW

17

NV400-SEW

350

150

412

17

NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW

500

14

NV630-SEW NV800-SEW

200 300 500

550 825 1375

16 16 −

− − −

13 13 11

500 500 − − −

NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV630-SEW NV800-SEW NV800-SEW

300 250 350 300 500 500 700 − −

− − −

26 26 26 23 18

− − −

18 18 18 16 14 13 13 12 12 11

− −

Notes *1 Examples of selection of high-instantaneous circuit breakers (special models) for primary side of transformer. *2 The circuit breakers with rating in parentheses are special models. Remarks: 1. For the circuit breakers whose rated current is adjustable, the rated current values are shown. 2. The peak value of the first wave of excited inrush current shall be calculated based on the multiple for the peak value of the first wave in the table, and the calculated value shall not exceed the lower limit peak value of instantaneous tripping current of circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are selected on condition that the transformer rated current value does not exceed 0.9 times the circuit breaker rated current. If the multiple for the peak value of the first wave is different from that shown in the table, a circuit breaker must be separately selected.

77

4 2 Selection

Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Peak primary capacity Rating value of Model current first wave kVA A A (multiple) NF32-SV 20 5 13.7 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 25 20 NF125-SV, NF125-HV 20 NF63-CV(*1) 30 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 50 7.5 20.6 25 (50) NF125-CV(*2) NF125-SV, NF125-HV 50 NF63-CV(*1) 40 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 60 10 27.5 24 NF125-CV(*1) 50 NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 60

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

3-phase 420-V Table 4-21-5 MCCB

2 Selection

4

Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Transformer Rated Peak Peak Peak primary capacity Rating value of Rating value of Rating value of Model Model Model current first wave first wave first wave kVA A A A A (multiple) (multiple) (multiple) NF32-SV 10 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF30-CS 30 10 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 5 6.9 26 18 32 10 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF125-SV 10 15 NF125-SV, NF125-HV 15 NF32-SV 15 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV 15 15 7.5 10.3 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 26 18 15 32 NF125-SV NF125-SV 15 15 NF125-SV, NF125-HV 15 NF32-SV 20 NF32-SV NF32-SV 20 20 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 20 NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF63-CV, NF63-SV 13.7 10 26 18 20 20 31 (50) NF125-CV(*2) NF125-SV NF125-SV 20 20 NF125-SV, NF125-HV 20 NF63-CV(*1) 40 NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF63-CV(*1) 30 30 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 60 NF125-CV(*2) 15 20.6 26 18 NF63-CV, NF63-SV 50 (50) 31 NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 60 NF125-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV 50 30 NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV 50 NF63-CV(*1) 40 NF63-CV(*1) NF63-CV(*1) 40 40 NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 60 27.5 20 26 18 NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF63-CV, NF63-SV 60 50 26 NF125-CV(*1) 50 NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV 60 50 NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 60 NF63-CV(*1) 50 NF63-CV(*1) NF125-CV(*1) 60 50 30 41.2 26 18 NF125-CV(*1) 24 50 NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV 100 75 NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV 100 NF125-CV(*1) 100 NF125-CV(*1) 100 50 68.7 23 16 NF125-CV, NF125-SV 100 NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 22 150 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150 NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 125 NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 175 150 103 75 18 14 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 150 15 NF250-SEV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 125 125 NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV 200 200 137 100 17 13 NF250-CV, NF250-SV 175 15 NF250-SEV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV 175 175 NF400-CW 400 NF400-CW 400 NF400-SW 300 150 206 14 13 NF400-SW 250 NF400-SW 15 300 NF400-SEW 250 NF400-SEW 250 NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW 250 NF400-SW 350 NF400-SW 350 350/350 12 275 200 13 NF400-SW/SEW 14 NF400-SEW 350 NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW 350 NF630-CW 600 NF630-SW 500 500 412 300 13 12 NF630-SEW NF630-SW 10 500 NF630-SEW 500 NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW 500 NF800-SEW(*1) 800 800 687 500 11 11 NF800-SEW NF800-SEW 800 15 NF1250-SEW 800

Table 4-21-6 ELCB Example of transformer excited inrush current 1 Example of transformer excited inrush current 2 Example of transformer excited inrush current 3 Transformer Rated Peak Peak Peak primary capacity Rating value of Rating value of Rating value of Model Model Model current first wave first wave first wave kVA A A A A (multiple) (multiple) (multiple) NV32-SV(*1) 15(10) NV32-SV(*1) 15(10) 15(10) NV32-SV(*1) NV63-CV, NV63-SV(*1) 15(10) 5 26 NV63-CV, NV63-SV(*1) 15(10) 18 6.9 15(10) 32 NV63-CV, NV63-SV(*1) NV63-HV 15 NV125-SV 15 15 NV125-SV NV125-SV, NV125-HV 15 NV32-SV 15 NV32-SV 15 15 NV32-SV 7.5 26 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 15 10.3 NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 15 32 15 NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-SV 15 NV125-SV, NV125-HV 15 15 NV125-SV NV32-SV 20 NV32-SV 20 20 NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 20 10 26 18 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 20 13.7 20 31 NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-CV 50 NV125-SV 20 20 NV125-SV NV125-SV, NV125-HV 20 NV63-CV, NV63-SV 50 NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 30 60 NV32-SV 15 26 18 20.6 NV125-CV 60 NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 30 31 60 NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV125-SV 50 NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 30 50 NV125-SV 50 NV63-CV, NV63-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV 60 NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 60 20 26 18 27.5 60 26 NV125-CV NV125-CV, NV125-SV 60 NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 60 50 NV125-SV NV125-CV, NV125-SV 100 NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 100 30 26 18 41.2 75 24 NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-SEV 50 NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 50 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 150 NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 150 50 23 16 68.7 100 22 NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV250-SEV 125 NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 125 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 175 NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 150 75 18 14 103 150 15 NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV 125 NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 125 NV250-CV, NV250-SV 200 NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV 200 100 17 13 137 175 15 NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-SEV 175 NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV 175 NV400-CW 400 400 NV400-CW NV400-SW 300 150 14 13 206 NV400-SW 250 15 300 NV400-SW NV400-SEW 250 NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 250 250 NV400-SEW NV400-SW 350 NV400-SW 350 350 NV400-SW 200 13 12 275 14 NV400-SEW 350 NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW 350 350 NV400-SEW NV630-SEW 500 NV630-CW, NV630-SW 600 300 13 12 412 500 10 NV630-SEW NV800-SEW 500 NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW 500 500 11 11 687 − − − − 15 − − Notes *1 Examples of selection of high-instantaneous circuit breakers (special models) for primary side of transformer. *2 The circuit breakers with rating in parentheses are special models. Remarks: 1. For the circuit breakers whose rated current is adjustable, the rated current values are shown. 2. The peak value of the first wave of excited inrush current shall be calculated based on the multiple for the peak value of the first wave in the table, and the calculated value shall not exceed the lower limit peak value of instantaneous tripping current of circuit breaker. The circuit breakers are selected on condition that the transformer rated current value does not exceed 0.9 times the circuit breaker rated current. If the multiple for the peak value of the first wave is different from that shown in the table, a circuit breaker must be separately selected.

78

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

10. Combination for Selective Breaking Continuous power supply

Combinations of main circuit breaker for coordination and branch circuit breakers capable of selective breaking and the breaking capacity (sym kA) for selective breaking at the installation point of the branch circuit breaker are shown below.

NV32-SV

5

NV63-SV NF63-HV NV63-HV

7.5 10

NV125-SV

NF1600-SEW 125

7.5

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5

5

5

7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

7.5

7.5

5

5

NV32-SV

10

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

7.5

7.5

15

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

25

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5

10

10

20

20

25

25

25

25

25

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

2.5 2.5

10

10

10

10

10

10

22

NF63-SV NV63-SV NF63-HV NV63-HV

85 100 85 100 85 100 50

NF125-SV 25

–

–

5

5

NF125-SEV NV125-SV

50

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

18

18

18

18

50

85

NV125-SEV 36

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

15

15

15

15

36

NF125-SGV

85

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

18

18

18

18

NF125-LGV

50

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

15

15

15

15

42

NF125-LGV

90

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

18

18

18

18

85

50

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

18

18

18

18

18

18

50

100

–

–

2.5 2.5

10

25

25

35

35

35

35

100

NF125-HGV

65

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

15

15

15

15

42

NF125-HGV

100

–

–

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

15

15

18

18

18

18

85

NF160-SGV

36

–

–

–

–

6.4 6.4

10

10

10

10

10

10

25

NF160-SGV

85

–

–

–

–

6.4 6.4

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

NF160-LGV

50

–

–

–

–

6.4 6.4

10

10

15

15

15

15

25

NF160-LGV

90

–

–

–

–

6.4 6.4

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

NF160-HGV

65

–

–

–

–

6.4 6.4

10

10

15

15

15

15

25

NF160-HGV

100

–

–

–

–

6.4 6.4

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

85

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

NF250-SGV

85

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

NF250-LGV

90

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

100

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

100

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

50

85

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

13

13

13

13

20

85

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

13

13

13

13

20

100

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

13

13

13

13

20

150

–

–

–

–

–

–

13

13

13

13

20

85

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20

100

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20

7.5

7.5

15

15

25

7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

7.5

25

NV125-HV

NF250-SV NF250-SEV

36

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

22

NF250-SGV

36

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

25

NF250-LGV

50

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

15

15

15

15

25

NV250-SV NV250-SEV

NF250-HV NF250-HEV NV250-HV

65

–

–

–

–

–

–

10

10

10

10

10

10

22

NF125-HV NV125-HV

NF | S • L • H • NV | S • H

NV250-HEV NF250-HGV NF400-SW NV400-SW NF400-SEW NV400-SEW NF400-HEW NV400-HEW NF400-REW NV400-REW NF630-SEW NV630-SW

65 42 42 65

– – – –

– – – –

– – – –

– – – –

– – – –

– – – –

125

–

–

–

–

–

–

42

–

–

–

–

–

–

10 –

10 –

9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5

15 13 13 10

15 13 13 10

15 13 13 10

15

NV630-HEW NF63-CV NV63-CV NF125-CV NV125-CV NF250-CV NV250-CV NF400-CW NV400-CW NF630-CW

NF250-SEV NV250-SV NV250-SEV

NF250-HV NF250-HEV NV250-HV

13 13 13

NF400-SW

20

NV400-SW NF400-SEW

20

NV400-SEW NF400-HEW

20

10

10

10

13

20

–

–

–

–

20

NV400-HEW NF400-REW NV400-REW

9.5 9.5

NF630-SW –

–

NF630-SEW NV630-SW NV630-SEW

65 2.5 10 15 25

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 – – –

– – –

2.5 2.5 – – –

36

–

–

NF125-RGV

125

–

–

NF125-UV

200

–

–

NF250-RGV

125

–

–

–

NF250-UV

200

–

–

NF400-UEW

200

–

NF800-UEW

200

–

NV630-CW

NF250-SV

NF250-HGV

25

NV630-SEW NF630-HEW

10

NV250-HEV

NF630-SW

NF | R • U

NF1250-SEW

125

NF32-SV

NF125-SGV NF125-HV

NF | C • NV | C

NF1000-SEW

85 100

2.5

NV125-SEV

NF | S • L • H • NV | S • H

NF800-HEW

85

2.5

NF125-SV NF125-SEV

NF800-SEW

85

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

– – –

5 – –

5 – –

10

10

10

10

10

7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 –

–

10

10

10

– 7.5

2.5

15

10

7.5 13

15 20

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20

2.5 2.5

15

15

30

30

30

42

50

50

85

2.5 2.5

15

15

30

30

30

42

50

50

85

–

–

–

15

15

15

25

25

25

85

–

–

–

–

15

15

15

25

25

25

85

–

–

–

–

–

9.5 9.5

15

15

15

15

25

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

NF630-HEW

20

Note *1 Rated currents of branch breakers are 50A or less. Remarks: 1. It is considered that the instantaneous tripping characteristic values of main circuit breakers have been set to the maximum values. 2. For the selectivity in the overcurrent range, separately check the coordination on the operating characteristic curve.

NV630-HEW NF63-CV NV63-CV NF | C • NV | C

NF125-CV

15

–

–

36

–

–

–

–

–

–

50

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

13

13

13

13

20

50

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20

NF125-RGV

150

–

–

2.5 2.5

22

22

65

65

50

85

85

85

125

NF125-UV

200

–

–

2.5 2.5

22

22

65

65

50

85

85

85

125

NF250-RGV

150

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

18

50

50

50

125

NF250-UV

200

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

18

50

50

50

125

NF400-UEW

200

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

15

15

15

15

25

NF800-UEW

200

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

BH-P

2.5

–

2.5

–

–

2.5

2.5

NF250-CV NV250-CV NF400-CW NV400-CW NV630-CW

BH-D6 BH

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

30

NV125-CV

NF630-CW

NF | R • U

7.5

TYPE B BH-D6 TYPE C

2.5 2.5 7.5 7.5

1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

10

15

15

2.5 2.5

6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

6

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

79

4 2 Selection

NF63-SV

NF800-CEW

65

NF630-HEW

42

NF630-SEW

36

NF400-HEW

NF800-HEW

65

NF400-SEW

NF800-SEW

42

NF250-HEV

NF800-CEW

65

Circuit breaker NF250-SEV

NF630-HEW

42

NF125-HEV

NF630-SEW

65

sym.kA

Main Ra breaker sh ted ca ort-c ultim pa irc at city uit e of bre ea aki ch ng bre ak er Branch breaker Icu(kA) 50 100

NF125-SEV

NF400-HEW

36

NF1600-SEW

NF400-SEV

65

2.5

NF1250-SEW

NF250-HEV

Icu(kA) 36

NF32-SV

NF1000-SEW

NF250-SEV

r

NF125-HEV

breaker

sym.kA 230VAC (IEC 60947-2)

Circuit breaker NF125-SEV

Main breaker

Branch circuit breaker

Circuit in good condition

Table 4-22-1 Combination for selective breaking 440VAC (IEC 60947-2) Ra sh ted ca ort-c ultim pa irc at city uit e of bre ea aki ch ng bre ak e Branch

Main circuit breaker

4 Selection

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

2

Table 4-22-2 Combination for selective breakingwith AE-SW Series

NF32-SV NV32-SV NF63-SV NV63-SV NF63-HV NV63-HV NF125-SV NV125-SV NF125-SEV

2 Selection

AE4000-SWA

AE3200-SW

AE2500-SW

AE2000-SW

AE2000-SWA

AE1600-SW

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

65

65

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

NF32-SV

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

NV32-SV

10

9(10)

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

15

9(10)

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

15

25

9(25)

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

50

9(50)

45(50)

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

45(65) 50(65) 50(65) 50(65)

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

10

9(10)

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

25

7(25)

20(25)

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

NF63-SV NV63-SV NF63-HV NV63-HV NF125-SV NV125-SV NF125-SEV

20(36) 25(36) 30(36)

36

36

36

36

36

85

9(65)

85

85

85

85

9(36)

20(36)

36

36

36

36

36

36

NF125-SGV

85

16(65) 45(65)

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF125-LGV

50

9(50)

20(50) 36(50)

50

50

50

50

50

50

NF125-LGV

90

16(65) 45(65)

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

50

9(50)

30(50)

50

50

50

50

50

50

100

9(65)

50(65)

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF125-HGV

65

9(65)

20(65) 36(65)

65

65

65

65

65

65

NF125-HGV

100

16(65) 45(65)

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF160-SGV

36

9(36)

15(36) 25(36)

36

36

36

36

36

36

NF160-SGV

85

9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF160-LGV

50

9(50)

15(50) 25(50) 42(50) 42(50)

50

50

50

50

NF160-LGV

90

9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF160-HGV

65

9(65)

15(65) 25(65) 42(65) 42(65)

65

65

65

65

NF160-HGV

100

9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

36

50

NF250-SV NF250-SEV NV250-SV

36

7(36)

14(36) 19(36) 25(36) 25(36)

36

36

36

36

NV250-SEV NF250-SGV

36

7(36)

15(36) 25(36)

NF250-LGV

50

7(50)

15(50) 25(50) 42(50) 42(50)

36

36

36

36

36

36

50

50

50

50

NF250-HV NF250-HEV NV250-HV

65

7(65)

15(65) 25(65) 42(65) 42(65)

65

65

65

65

NV250-HEV NF250-HGV NV400-SW NF400-SEW NV400-SEW NF400-HEW NV400-HEW NF400-REW NV400-REW

65

7(65)

42

–

42

9(42)

65 125

9(65) 9(65)

15(65) 25(65) 42(65) 42(65) –

65

18(42) 24(42) 24(42) 33(42)

65

65

65

42

42

42

42

42

15(42) 18(42) 24(42) 24(42) 30(42) 39(42) 15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(65) 39(65) 15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 39(75)

65 80

NV125-SEV

NF125-HV NV125-HV

NF | S • L • H • NV | S • H

NF630-SEW NV630-SW

NV630-HEW NF800-SEW NV800-SEW NF800-HEW NV800-HEW NF63-CV NV63-CV NF125-CV NV125-CV NF250-CV NV250-CV NF400-CW

42

–

–

–

24(42) 24(42) 30(42) 37(42)

65 42

–

85

9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

85

85

90

9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

85

85

25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

85

85

9.4(65) 25(65) 40(65)

65

65

85

85

NF250-HV NF250-HEV NV250-HV

100

9(65)

NV250-HEV NF250-HGV

NF400-HEW NV400-HEW NF400-REW NV400-REW

42

NF630-SEW

42

NV630-SW

–

–

65

–

–

2.5

2.5

2.5

10 15

9(10) 9(15)

NF630-HEW

15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(65) 37(65) 48(65) 48(65)

10 15

18(42) 24(42) 24(42) 30(42) 37(42)

2.5 10 15

85

85

20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75)

85

85

9(65)

15(65) 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75)

85

85

100

9(65)

15(65) 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75)

85

85

150

9(65)

15(65) 20(65) 30(65) 30(65) 48(75) 70(75)

85

85

85

–

100

–

85

–

–

18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)

100

–

–

18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)

7.5

7.5

7.5

30

9(30)

36

9(36)

50

–

100 85

–

85

–

–

–

24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)

NF800-SEW

42

NV800-SEW NF800-HEW

2.5 10 15

2.5 10 15

2.5 10 15

2.5 10 15

2.5 10 15

NV800-HEW NF63-CV

2.5 10 15

NV63-CV NF125-CV NF | C • NV | C

NV125-CV NF250-CV NV250-CV NF400-CW

15(65) 18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 40(75) 60(75) 60(75)

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

15(30) 18(30) 24(30) 24(30)

30

30

30

30

15(36) 18(36) 24(36) 24(36)

36

36

36

36

50

50

50

24(50) 24(50) 30(50) 40(50)

50

50

18(50) 24(50) 24(50) 30(50) 40(50)

50

50

7.5

7.5

7.5

25

25

25

24(36) 24(36) 30(42)

36

36

36

50

–

–

18(36) 24(36) 24(36) 30(42)

36

36

36

NF800-CEW

50

–

–

85

85

85

85

NF125-RGV

150

65

65

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

65

85

85

85

85

NF125-UV

200

65

65

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF250-RGV

150

9(65)

65

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

65

65

85

85

85

85

NF250-UV

200

9(65)

65

65

65

65

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

NF400-UEW

200

9(65)

85

85

85

NF800-UEW

200

–

–

–

NF800-CEW

36

–

–

NF125-RGV

125

35(65)

65

65

65

65

NF125-UV

200

50(65)

65

65

65

NF250-RGV

125

9(65)

50(65)

65

NF250-UV

200

9(65)

65

65

NF400-UEW

200

9(65)

NF800-UEW

200

–

15(25) 18(25) –

25

25

25

15(65) 18(65) 29(65) 29(65) 48(75) –

42

NV630-HEW

18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(65) 37(65) 48(65) 48(65)

36

NV630-CW

20(65) 22(65) 42(65) 42(65) 50(85)

NF250-LGV

NV400-SEW

80

9(65)

NF250-SGV

NF400-SEW

65

85

NV250-SEV

NV630-SEW

–

NF630-CW

NV250-SV

NF630-SW

25

NV400-CW

NF250-SEV

NV400-SW

NV630-SEW NF630-HEW

NF250-SV

NF400-SW

NF630-SW

18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 37(75) 68(75) 68(75)

Notes *1 The values in the table represent the max. rated current for both Series AE-SW air circuit breakers and branch breakers, and the selective co-ordination applies when the air circuit breakers instantaneous pick up is set to maximum. *2 The numerals shown in parentheses are for AE-SW with MCR. (When set MCR.)

80

AE1250-SW

65 2.5

7(36)

NF400-SW

NF | R • U

AE1000-SW

AE4000-SWA

AE3200-SW

AE2500-SW

AE2000-SW

AE2000-SWA

AE1600-SW

AE1250-SW

AE1000-SW

65 2.5

36

NV125-HV

NF | C • NV | C

sym.kA Low-voltage air circuit breaker AE-SW

36

NF125-HV

4

230VAC (IEC 60947-2) R Main sh ated breaker ca ort- ulti pa cir ma cit cui te yo tb f e rea ac ki h b ng rea ke Branch r breaker Icu(kA)

NF125-SGV

NV125-SEV

NF | S • L • H • NV | S • H

2.5

sym.kA Low-voltage air circuit breaker AE-SW

AE630-SW

R Main sh ated breaker ca ort- ulti pa cir ma cit cui te yo tb f e rea ac ki h b ng rea ke Branch r breaker Icu(kA)

AE630-SW

440VAC (IEC 60947-2)

NV400-CW NF630-CW NV630-CW

NF | R • U

15(50) 20(50) 27(50) 27(50) 42(50) –

15(65) 18(65) 29(65) 29(65) 48(75) –

18(65) 24(65) 24(65) 30(75) 37(75) 68(75) 68(75)

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

11. Combinations for Cascade Breaking Main circuit breaker (Backup circuit breaker)

The following tables show the combinations of circuit breakers capable of cascade breaking and the cascade breaking capacities (symmetrical values, sym kA). The criteria conform to IEC 60947-2.

Branch circuit breaker (Backed up circuit breaker)

Short-circuit

Table 4-23-1 440VAC (IEC 60947-2)

sym.kA

NF250-CV, NV250-CV

NF400-CW, NV400-CW

NF630-CW, NV630-CW

NF800-CEW

42 65 125 42 65 125 42 − − − − − − − 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 − 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 − − − − − − −

65 125 85 − − − − − − 10 10 − − − −

15 5 − − −

25 − − 10 10

36 − − 10 10

36 125 200 125 − 35 125 35 − 50 125 35 − 50 125 50 − 50 125 50

200 200 200 − 50 − − 50 − 50 10 10 − − 50

10

20

30

30

30

30

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

15

15

15

14

14

14

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 125 50

50

−

−

25

−

36

36

50

50

36

36

50

−

36

50

42

50

35

35

35

35

35

35

30

35

35

30

−

−

−

−

125 200 125 200 50

35

36 50

− −

− −

50 −

− −

50 −

− −

50 −

50 −

− −

− −

50 −

− −

50 −

− −

50 −

50 −

− −

50 −

50 −

− −

50 −

50 −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

125 200 125 200 50 125 200 125 200 50

|

− −

S • NV |

50

−

−

−

−

65

−

−

65

−

−

−

−

65

−

65

65

−

65

65

−

65

65

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 125 200 200 85

65 36 50 65

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − 65 −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − 65 −

− − − −

− 50 65 −

− 50 65 −

− − − −

− 50 65 −

− 50 65 −

− − − −

− 50 65 −

− 50 65 −

− 50 65 −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

S • NF

125 200 125 200 200 − − 125 200 85 − − 125 200 85 − − 125 200 200

|

L • NF |

36

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

50

50

−

50

50

−

50

50

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 85

36 50

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− 65

− −

50 65

50 65

− −

50 65

50 65

− −

50 65

50 65

50 −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

125 200 85 85 125 200 200 200

H • NV |

H

65

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 200 200

65

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 200 200

42

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

65

65

−

65

65

−

65

65

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

42

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

65

65

−

65

65

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

200

2.5 10

14

14

14

14

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

5

−

−

−

35 125 35

50

5

−

NF |

C • NV

10

20

30

30

30

30

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

−

−

14

14

14 125 200 50 125 14

14

|

15

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

30

30

30

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

C

25

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

30

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

50

50

36

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

42

50

50

42

50

50

42

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

200

NF125-SV, NV125-SV

NF800-UEW

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1600-SEW

65 5 10 15 10

NF400-UEW

NF400-SW, NV400-SW

65 5 10 10 10

NF250-UV

NF250-HGV

50 5 10 15 10

NF250-RGV

NF250-HV, NV250-HV

36 5 10 15 10

NF125-UV

NF250-LGV

36 5 10 15 10

NF125-RGV, NV125-RGV

NF250-SGV

65 5 10 15 10

NF800-REW

NF250-SV, NV250-SV

50 5 10 15 10

NF800-HEW, NV800-HEW

NF160-HGV

36 5 10 15 10

NF800-SEW, NV800-SEW

NF160-LGV

65 14 14 20 20

NF630-REW

NF160-SGV

50 14 14 20 20

NF630-HEW, NV630-HEW

NF125-HGV

50 14 14 14 14

NF630-SW, NV630-SW

NF125-HV, NV125-HV

36 14 14 14 14

NF400-REW, NV400-REW

NF125-LGV

10 14 14 14

Icu(kA) 25

NF400-HEW, NV400-HEW

NF125-SGV

NF

NF32-SV NV32-SV NF63-SV NV63-SV NF63-HV NV63-HV NF125-SV NV125-SV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HV NV125-HV NF125-HGV NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV NF250-SV NV250-SV NF250-SGV NF250-LGV NF250-HV NV250-HV NF250-HGV NF400-SW NF400-SEW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NF630-SW NF630-SEW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NF63-CV NV63-CV NF125-CV NV125-CV NF250-CV NV250-CV NF400-CW NV400-CW NF630-CW NV630-CW

NF-R • NF-U

2.5 5 7.5 7.5

g kin rea it b rcu -ci r ort ke sh rea ate b im ch ult f ea ted ty o Ra paci ca

Branch breaker

NF-C • NV-C

85 85 85 200 85

200 200

125 200 50

Note Rated currents of main breakers are maximum values.

81

4 2 Selection

NF-S • NV-S • NF-H • NV-H

Main breaker

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

Table 4-23-2 230VAC (IEC 60947-2)

sym.kA

NF250-RGV

NF250-UV

125 200 85 125

−

125 200 125 200 200 125

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

125 200 125 200 200 125 125 200 125 200 200 200

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 125 200 200 125

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

125 200 125 200 200 − − 125 200 200 − − 125 200 200 − − 125 200 200

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 200 125

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

125 200 200 125 125 200 200 200

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 200 200

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 200 200

−

−

−

−

100

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

100

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

200

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 35

50

−

−

50

50

50

50

50

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

125 200 85 125 50

−

50

50

50

50

50

50

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

200

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

5

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

NF630-SW, NV630-SW

NF125-UV

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1600-SEW

NF800-HEW, NV800-HEW

NF800-SEW, NV800-SEW

NF630-HEW, NV630-HEW

NF400-REW, NV400-REW

−

−

NF400-SW, NV400-SW

30

−

NF250-HV, NV250-HV

NF125-HV, NV125-HV

30

−

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

−

−

−

−

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

85

−

−

−

−

− −

− −

100 −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

− − − −

85

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

85 90

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

100

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

100

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

85

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

85

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

7.5 35

50

50

50

50

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

−

−

−

30

35

85

85

85

85

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

36

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

50

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

2.5 30

42

42

42

42

50

85

50

−

85

85 90

− −

100 100 85 90 100

7.5 7.5 7.5

5

7.5 7.5 7.5

NF800-REW

50

−

25

NF630-REW

50

85

90 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 85 85 85 85 85 85

NF250-HGV

50

85

85 50 50 85 85

NF160-HGV

50

90 100 100 85

42 42 42 42

Note Rated currents of main breakers are maximum values.

82

NF125-RGV, NV125-RGV

BH

NF800-CEW

C

NF630-CW, NV630-CW

|

NF400-CW, NV400-CW

|

C • NV

NF250-CV, NV250-CV

NF

−

NF250-LGV

|

H

2 Selection

4

H • NV

200 200 200 50 − − 50 − − 125 − − 125 − −

NF250-SGV

|

150 35 35 85 85

NF250-SV, NV250-SV

|

L • NF

200 200 200 200 200

NF160-LGV

S • NF

150 125 125 125 125

NF160-SGV

|

50 − − − −

90 100 100 50

NF125-HGV

S • NV

50 − 14 − −

85 10 35 35 35

NF125-LGV

|

50 − 14 − −

90 100 85 10 10 10 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35

7.5 10 15 15

Icu(kA) 50

NF-R • NF-U

90 100 100 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 125 36 − − − − − − − − − − − 10 10 10 − − − − 25 35 35 35 14 14 14 14 14 14 − − − − 25 35 35 35 30 30 30 30 30 30 − − − − − − − − − − 25 35 35 35

85 10 35 35 35

NF125-SGV

NF

NF32-SV NV32-SV NF63-SV NV63-SV NF63-HV NV63-HV NF125-SV NV125-SV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HV NV125-HV NF125-HGV NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV NF250-SV NV250-SV NF250-SGV NF250-LGV NF250-HV NV250-HV NF250-HGV NF400-SW NF400-SEW NV400-SW NV400-SEW NF630-SW NF630-SEW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NF63-CV NV63-CV NF125-CV NV125-CV NF250-CV NV250-CV NF400-CW NV400-CW NF630-CW NV630-CW BH BH-P

NF125-SV, NV125-SV

g kin rea it b rcu -ci r ort ke sh rea ate b im ch ult f ea ted ty o Ra paci ca

Branch breaker

NF-C • NV-C

NF400-HEW, NV400-HEW

NF-S • NV-S • NF-H • NV-H

Main breaker

125 200

−

NF800-UEW

2

NF400-UEW

4 Selection

−

200 125 200 200

200 200

125 200 200 50 200 200

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

12. International Standard Comformance List 12.1 UL and CSA Approval Product

UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories) Standards: UL 489, UL 1077 UL is an organization in the US which establishes safety standards, i.e. UL Standards, conducts safety verification test based on the UL Standards, issues the certificates to approved products and allows the manufacturers to attach the certification mark to the products. The UL certification mark has been spread widely in the US. Some states and cities oblige manufacturers to receive the UL certification. When devices, control panels and machines are exported to the US, these products must be UL certified. UL certified products have received UL Recognition or UL Listing in conformity to UL Standards (UL 489, UL1077) and allowed to be used in control panels and machines to be exported to the US. : UL Recognition Refers to component certification for products designed to be built in other products and devices. UL recognized products can be used in control panels, machine tools and control units.

: UL Listing Refers to product certification for products which can be sold directly to end-users and used by end-users. These products can be used also as built-in components in control panels, machine tools and control units. Some models vary in external dimensions and terminal structure from standard models. Please refer to the page of UL listed products for details.

CSA (Canadian Standard Association) Standards: CSA C22.2 No.5-02

: Recognition for US and Canada UL and CSA recognition of components by testing body UL

: Listing for US and Canada UL and CSA recognition of components by testing body UL

12.2 CCC (China Compulsory Certification) Approval Product Low-voltage circuit breakers are designated as products to be compulsorily certified in China. To export such products to China and sell them in China, it is necessary to obtain the CCC certification.

12.3 Corresponding to EC (European Community) Directive Corresponding to LVD (Low Voltage Directive)

aWhen using a low voltage circuit breaker as a component and indicating conformity with the EC Directives The CE Marking is required when a low voltage circuit breaker is distributed as a single device in EU. However, when the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is unnecessary to affix the CE Mark to the low-voltage circuit breaker used as a built-in component. When the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is recommended to use a product certified by a third party shown in Item d (TÜV certified product) as a low voltage circuit breaker. sMeasures for export of low voltage circuit breaker as single unit When exporting a low-voltage circuit breaker as a single unit in EU, the circuit breaker is covered by the Low Voltage Directive. The certification of conformity with the Low Voltage Directive is self-declared as a rule. The applicable product standards are shown below. EN 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear-Part 2: Circuit-breakers EN 60934 Circuit-breakers for equipment (CBE) dModels certified by third party (TÜV certified products) When the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is recommended to use a low voltage circuit breaker certified by a third party (TÜV certified product) as a built-in component.

Corresponding to EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Directive

The Directive prescribes that products shall not emit high-intensity radio waves to the outside and shall not be affected by external electromagnetic waves. Molded case circuit breakers (electronic type) and earth leakage circuit breakers are covered by the EMC Directive.

Corresponding to Machinery Directive

Low voltage circuit breakers are components used in equipment, such as machine tools and control units, and are not covered by any machinery directive. When the CE Mark is indicated on a machine tool or a control unit, it is recommended to use a low voltage circuit breaker certified by a third party (TÜV certified product) as a built-in component.

83

4 2 Selection

The CSA Standards are product safety standards established by CSA. In Canada, the safety of electric products is regulated by the state laws, and some state laws prescribe that circuit breakers shall be certified by the CSA Standards. Therefore, when devices, control panels and machines are exported to Canada, these products must be CSA certified. UL certified products have received CSA certification from the testing body UL and allowed to be used in control panels and machines to be exported to Canada. UL has been authorized as a testing, certification and quality certification body by SCC, and CSA certified products tested by UL have been approved by the safety regulations in all states of Canada. It is allowed to attach the following certification marks to products certified by both UL and CSA. (It is also allowed to attach the separate marks for the US and Canada as before.)

4 Selection

2

Selection of MCCB and ELCB

dMolded Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Protection Breakers North American Safety Mark

Specifications

Class

Applicable Models and Assignments

Compulsory Mark

Third Party Mark

UL Stgandards

CSA Standards

CCC

CE

USA

Canada

China

Europe

TÜV Rheinland Germany

Classification Society (*1) NK

Japan

C

2 Selection

4

NF30-CS NF63-CV, NF125-CV NF250-CV NF400-CW, NF630-CW, NF800-CEW NF32-SV, NF63-SV, NF125-SV NF125-SEV

− − − − − −

− − − − − −

− − − − − −

− − − − − −

− − − − − −

     

NF250-SV

−

−

−

−

−



     −

(Self Declaration)

 −  − − −  (Except for 4P) −

(Self Declaration)

−



(Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration)

− − − − − − −

 − −   − 

(Self Declaration)

−

−

(Self Declaration)

−



(Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration)

− − −

  −

(Self Declaration)

−



    

   (Except for 250A) 

 − − − −





−

 (Self Declaration)  (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) 

− − − − − NF125-SGV, NF160-SGV, NF250-SGV, NF250-SEV  S NF400-SW, NF630-SW − − − − − NF400-SEW, NF630-SEW  NF800-SEW, NF800-SDW − − − − − NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW  − − − − − NF1600-SEW  − − − − − NF1250-SDW, NF1600-SDW − General − − − − − NF63-HV  − − − − − NF125-HV  − − − − − NF125-HEV  − − − − − NF250-HV  L/H/R NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV, NF160-LGV, NF250-LGV, − − − − −  NF250-HGV, NF250-HEV, NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV NF400-HEW, NF400-REW − − − − − NF630-HEW, NF630-REW  NF800-HEW, NF800-REW − − − − − NF125-UV − − − − − − U NF250-UV, NF400-UEW − − − − − − NF800-UEW − NF32-SV MB, NF63-CV MB, − − − − − Motor  NF63-SV MB, NF125-SV MB Protection − − − − −  NF250-SV MB − − − −   NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU − − − −  NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU  − − − −  UL 489 NF225-CWU (Except for 250A) UL − − − −  Listed  NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU − − − −  − NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU Note *1 Except for 4 poles breaker. Remark: 1. KC (Korea Certification) Mark and GOST-R (Russian Standards) approval products are prepared. Please inquire details.

 −

dEarth Leakage Circuit Breakers North American Safety Mark

Specifications

Class

Compulsory Mark

UL Stgandards

CSA Standards

CCC

CE

USA

Canada

China

Europe

Applicable Models and Assignments

Third Party Mark Classification Society TÜV NK Rheinland Germany Japan

−

NV63-CV, NV125-CV C

−

−

−

−

− − − NV250-CV − − − − − − − NV400-CW, NV630-CW − − − − − NV32-SV, NV63-SV − − − − − NV125-SV − − − − − NV250-SV S CE and CCC NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, − − − − − NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV800-SEW − − − − − NV63-HV − − − − − NV125-HV H/R − − − − − NV125-HEV, NV250-HV, NV250-HEV − − − − − NV400-HEW, NV400-REW, NV630-HEW, NV800-HEW − −  − − NV50-SVFU, NV100-CVFU UL 489 − −  − − UL NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU Listed − −  − − NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU Remark: 1. KC (Korea Certification) Mark and GOST-R (Russian Standards) approval products are prepared. Please inquire details.

dMiniature Circuit Breakers Specifications

Class

IEC

BH

General

DIN

84

Applicable Models

BH BH-P BH-D6 BH-D10 BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D

Compulsory Mark CCC CE China Europe

− −      

− − (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration)

 (Except for 2P)     

(Self Declaration)

−

−

 (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) 

 − − − 

− − − − −



(Self Declaration)

−

−

   −   

(Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) (Self Declaration) −   

− − − −   

− − − − − − −

4 Selection 2 Selection of MCCB and ELCB

dCircuit Protectors North American Safety Mark

Specifications

Class

Compulsory Mark

UL Stgandards

CSA Standards

CCC

CE

USA

Canada

China

Europe

Applicable Models and Assignments

Third Party Mark TÜV Rheinland Germany

Classification Society NK

Japan

General

CP

CP30-BA

−

−



−

−



CP-S

−

−

−

−

−

−

(EN 60934) (EN 60947-2) (Self-Declaration) −

(EN 60934) −

−

−

−

Remark: 1. KC (Korea Certification) Mark and GOST-R (Russian Standards) approval products are prepared. Please inquire details.

dAir Circuit Breakers North American Safety Mark Class

SW IEC SH

SW JEC SH

CCC

SW

Applicable Models

AE630-SW, AE1000-SW AE1250-SW, AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA, AE2000-SW AE2500-SW, AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA, AE4000-SW AE5000-SW, AE6300-SW AE630-SH, AE1000-SH AE1250-SH, AE1600-SH AE2000-SH, AE2500-SH AE3200-SH AE630-SW, AE1000-SW AE1250-SW, AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA, AE2000-SW AE2500-SW, AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA, AE4000-SW AE5000-SW, AE6300-SW AE630-SH, AE1000-SH AE1250-SH, AE1600-SH AE2000-SH, AE2500-SH AE3200-SH AE630-SW, AE1000-SW AE1250-SW, AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA, AE2000-SW AE2500-SW, AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA, AE4000-SW AE5000-SW, AE6300-SW

CSA Standards

CCC

CE

USA

Canada

China

Europe

Third Party Mark TÜV Rheinland Germany

Assignments

Compulsory Mark

IEC 60947-2 or JIS C 8201-2-1

−

−

−

−

−

−

(Self Declaration)

−

IEC 60947-2

−

−

−

−

−

−

(Self Declaration)

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−



(Self Declaration)

−

4

JEC 160

CCC

2 Selection

Specifications

UL Stgandards

Note *1 Except for four poles breaker. Remark: 1. GOST-R (Russian Standards) approval products are prepared. Please inquire details.

dMolded Case Circuit Breakers , Motor Protection Breakers, Air Circuit Breakers, Circuit Protectors and Miniature Circuit Breakers (Classification Society) Specifications

Applicable Models

Class

NF30-CS NF63-CV, NF125-CV NF250-CV NF400-CW, NF630-CW NF800-CEW NF32-SV, NF63-SV, NF125-SV NF250-SV NF400-SW, NF630-SW S NF400-SEW, NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF63-HV, NF125-HV NF250-HV H/R NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NF125-UV, NF250-UV U NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW NF32-SV MB, NF63-CV MB Motor NF63-SV MB, NF125-SV MB Protection NF250-SV MB AE630-SW, AE1000-SW AE1250-SW, AE1600-SW AE2000-SWA, AE2000-SW AE AE2500-SW, AE3200-SW AE4000-SWA AE4000-SW, AE5000-SW, AE6300-SW CP CP30-BA C

General

BH

BH-P

Classification societies (Note) ABS GL BV

CCS

DNV

Japan

United Kingdam

USA

Germany

France

China

Norway

      

      

      

−      

−      

− Scheduled to be certified Scheduled to be certified − − Scheduled to be certified Scheduled to be certified

−   −    −













− 

−  



− Scheduled to be certified Scheduled to be certified  (HEW) − Scheduled to be certified −

NK

LR

 

 

 

− 











−  −





















Scheduled to be certified

















 

 −

 −

 −

 −

− −

− −











−

−

Remark: 1. Four poles breakers does not acquire Classification Society approval.

85

4 Selection

3

Selection of ELCB

1. Electric Shock Protection

Time for which current flows (t)

The safety standards for current passing through the human body are determined based on physiological phenomena as shown below. In places where secondary accidents may be caused by electric shock: Area below the curve b In places where secondary accidents will not be caused by electric shock: Area below the curve c1

Current through body (IB)

4 3 Selection

Fig. 4.17 Influence of AC (15 Hz to 100 Hz) on human body (IEC/TS60479-1)

86

4 Selection 3 Selection of ELCB

2. ELCB Grounding Method Select the rated sensitivity current based on the grounding method, purpose of protection and protection ground resistance value of load device. If the line is excessively long, the circuit breaker may operate unnecessarily owing to leakage current. Calculate the leakage current referring to Table 4-25. In this case, it is common to select sensitivity current approx. 10 times as high as the leakage current. Table 4-24 Type of earthing system

TN system TN-S system

TN-C system L1 L2 L3 PEN

Typical arrangement

TT system

TN-C-S system L1 L2 L3 N PE

L1 L2 L3 PE N

PEN

IT system L1 L2 L3 N

L1 L2 L3

PE

PE

The touch voltage is limited to 50V. Zs  Ia  50 V Zs: fault loop impedance (Ω) Ia: current causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting device within the time as below (A) U0: nominal line to earth voltage (V)

Maximum disconnection times (sec) Branch circuits rated 32 A and less

- MCCBs Not ELCBs

120 V

230 V

400 V

TN system

0.8

0.4

0.2

0.1

5

TT system

0.3

0.2

0.07

0.04

1

- MCCBs - ELCBs

Over 400 V

- MCCBs - ELCBs (except in TN-C zone)

Wiring work Wire size 8 mm2 or less

A 4 m or more • Wiring on first floor ceiling of wooden building • Wiring on second and higher floors of wooden building • Aerial wiring (Except C and D)

B 10 cm or more

C 1.5 mm or more

• Wiring in RC building • Wiring with vinyl tube and exposed wiring in steel frames (Except C and D)

• Vinyl tube burying • Vinyl tube laying in close contact with steel frames in steel building

- Insulation monitoring devices + ELCBs

- ELCBs

Table 4-25 Leakage current when 600-V vinyl insulated wire is laid on 1-km ∆-connected 3-phase 3-wire 200-V line Distance from grounded part

4

Others

D In close contact • Wiring in metallic conduit • Wiring in metallic duct

Table 4-26 Leakage current conversion table Type of line

Magnification

Single-phase 100-V line

0.3

Single-phase 3-wire 200-V line

0.3

3-phase 415-V line

0.60 mA/km

1.29 mA/km

19.9 mA/km

100 mA/km

14

0.66

1.44

22.1

110

22

0.72

1.55

23.9

120

38

0.81

1.75

26.9

135

60

0.99

2.14

32.9

165

100

1.14

2.46

37.9

189

150

1.25

2.72

41.8

209

250

1.46

3.16

48.6

243

325

1.52

3.29

50.7

253

500

1.71

3.69

56.8

284

(

Y

U0 AC

Earth leakage protective device

Id  RA  50 V RA: sum of the resistances of the earth electrode and the protective conductor (Ω) Id: first fault current (A)

connection)

0.7

Notes *1 The leakage current on rubber insulated wire (RB) is about 70% of the above values, and that on 3-core 600-V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire (CV) is about 50%. *2 At 50 Hz, the values are 84% of the above values. *3 To obtain the leakage current on another line, multiply the values shown in Table 4-25 by the magnification shown in Table 4-26. *4 To determine the line length, add the length of all wires after ELCB installation point.

87

3 Selection

Protective condition

RA  In  50 V RA: sum of the resistances RA: of the earth electrode RA: and the protective RA: conductor (Ω) In: rated current sensitivity (A)

4 Selection

Selection of ELCB

3

3. Rated Voltage and Number of Poles Select the rated voltage and number of poles according to the circuit voltage and type. The following table shows the standard circuit voltage values. However, even at special voltage, if the voltage including the circuit voltage fluctuation is within the voltage range shown right, the leakage protection device will operate.

Voltage fluctuation range in which leakage protection function is operable Voltage (V)

80

264 242

121 160

100

200

253

320

484

300

500

400

100-200V 100-230V 100-240V 100-200-415V 100-440V 200-415V Switching between 100 and 200 V

Voltage switching 100V type Specific voltage 100V product

200V

200-440V Switching between 200 and 415 V

200V

415V 415V

Table 4-27 Circuit type

100V

4 3 Selection

Single-phase 2-wire 100- or 200-V circuit

Single-phase 3-wire 100- and 200-V circuit

100V

200V

200V

100V

Example of connection

2-pole breaker

・100-440V ・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・100-240V

Circuit type

3-pole breaker

2-pole breaker

・100-440V ・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・100-230V ・100V

・100-440V ・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・100-240V

3-pole breaker

3-pole breaker

・100-440V ・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・100-230V ・200-415V ・200-440V

・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・200-415V ・100-230V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-phase 3-wire 200-V circuit

2- or 3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・100V ・100-240V ・100-230V ・100-440V

2- or 3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・200-415V ・100-240V ・100-230V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-phase 3-wire 415-V circuit

200V

415V

3-pole breaker

Example of connection

・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・200-415V ・100-440V ・100-230V ・200-440V

Circuit type

2- or 3-pole breaker

3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・100-200V ・200-415V ・100-240V ・100-440V ・200-440V

・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・415V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・415V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-phase 4-wire 415-V circuit 415V

240V

Example of connection

4-pole breaker N ・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・415V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・415V ・100-440V ・200-440V

2- or 3-pole breaker ・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・100-240V ・100-440V ・200-440V

3-pole breaker

・100-200-415V ・200-415V ・100-440V ・200-440V

(1) When a 3-pole circuit breaker is used as a 2-pole one, use the right and left poles. (2) For the mains of a 3-phase 4-wire 415-V circuit, use a 4-pole circuit breaker having a rated voltage of 415 V or 440 V, and connect the neutral pole to the N pole on the right side.

88

4 Selection 3 Selection of ELCB

4. Earth Fault Protection Coordination and Combination of Devices Table 4-28 Protection type With selectivity only for earth fault breaking With selectivity for earth fault breaking and cascade type of short-circuit breaking With selectivity for earth fault breaking and short-circuit breaking

Details On general lines, the protection grounding resistance is relatively large and the earth fault current is small. In this case, install a time-delay relay on the main circuit and a high-speed relay on a branch circuit. The selectivity for earth fault breaking is as stated above. Significant short-circuit fault very rarely occurs because of its nature (in most cases, circuits are broken at the early stage of earth fault). This protection is applied when the continuity of power supply is expendable. (Refer to the combination for cascade breaking on page 83.)

Installation point

This protection is applied when selectivity is necessary in the entire area of fault. (Refer to the combination for selective breaking on page 81.)

Main circuit

Main circuit Branch circuit Main circuit Branch circuit

Branch circuit

Combination • Time-delay ELCB • Combination of MCCB and time-delay earth leakage relay High-speed ELCB • Class S time-delay ELCB • Combination of MCCB (class U) and time-delay earth leakage relay • Class C time-delay ELCB • Combination of MCCB (class C) and high-speed earth leakage relay Combination of electronic MCCB and time-delay earth leakage relay • High-speed ELCB • Combination of MCCB and high-sspeed earth leakage relay

Remark: 1. “Time-delay or high-speed earth leakage relay” refers to NV-ZBA, NV-ZSA, NV-ZHA or NV-ZLA.

Characteristic of time-delay relay with sensitivity of 500 mA (0.3 s) NV1

0.5 0.4 0.3

ZT60B

Selective breaking on earth fault

0.2

3

ZT40B

NV2

3

NV-ZSA 200mA 0.3s Time-delay

0.1 Characteristic of high-speed relay with sensitivity of 30 mA (within 0.1 s)

Selective breaking on earth fault

Point B

3

Point A

30

250

500 600700800

3

NV3

NV32-SV 30mA 0.1s High-speed

15

NV-ZSA 500mA 0.8s Time-delay

3

4

NV5

NV125-CV 30mA 0.1s High-speed

3 Selection

Operating time (s)

1.0

NV4

NV63-CV 30mA 0.1s High-speed

1000

Earth fault current (mA)

Fig. 4.18 Example of coordination of time-delay and high-speed relays for earth fault breaking

89

3 Selection

MEMO

4

90

5

Installation and Connection

1) Connection Types… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 92 2) Connecting Parts…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 94 3) Standard Tightening Torque… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 95 4) Crimp Terminal Type… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 96 5) Busbar… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 98 6) Insulation Distance on Power Source Side… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 99 7) Effect of Installation Orientation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 100 8) Connection of Line and Load…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 100

91

Installation and Connection

5

1

Installation and Connection

1. Connection Types Table 5-1 Connection Connection type (Code address)

Screw terminal (AMP-N)

Image

Please refer to page 98.

Front connection (F) Busbar terminal Solderless (BOX) (BAR) terminal (SL)

Bar stud (B-ST)

A

B

A B

− − NF30-CS   − NF32-SV • NF63-CV • NF63-SV • NF63-HV  NF125-CV • NF125-SV • NF125-HV •    NF125-SEV • NF125-SGV • NF125-LGV • NF125-HEV • NF125-HGV NF160-SGV • NF160-LGV • NF160-HGV • NF250-CV • NF250-SV • NF250-HV •    NF250-SEV • NF250-HEV • NF250-SGV • NF250-LGV • NF250-HGV  − NF400-SW • NF400-SEW • NF400-HEW • NF400-REW • NF400-CW − NF630-SW • NF630-SEW • NF630-HEW • NF630-REW • NF630-CW  − NF800-SEW • NF800-HEW • NF800-REW • NF800-SDW • NF800-CEW − NF1000-SEW • NF1250-SEW • NF1600-SEW   NF125-UV    NF125-RGV • NF250-RGV • NF250-UV  NF400-UEW  − − NF800-UEW  − NF50-SVFU    NF100-CVFU  NF125-SVU    NF125-HVU UL NF250-SVU    NF250-HVU  − NF225-CWU    NF-SKW • NF-SLW − − − BH BH-P (Only load side)  − NV32-SV • NV63-CV • NV63-SV • NV63-HV  NV125-CV • NV125-SV • NV125-HV •  −  NV125-SEV • NV125-HEV  − NV250-CV/SV/HV • NV250-SEV/HEV  − NV400-SW • NV400-SEW • NV400-HEW • NV400-REW • NV400-CW  NV630-SW • NV630-SEW • NV630-HEW • NV630-CW − − NV800-SEW • NV800-HEW Kind of terminal screw (A) (Circuit breakers having frame size of 1000A and more are not provided with terminal screws (A).)

ELCB

C•S•H

Pan-head screw with clamp

Pan-head screw

M5

M8

Screw size NF32-SV 63-CV 63-SV 63-HV 50-SVFU(*1)

BH-P

NV32-SV 63-CV 63-SV 63-HV

Type

In case of clamp connection (*1)

NF 63-CV(60, 63A) 63-SV(60, 63A) 63-HV(60, 63A) 125-CV 125-SV 125-HV 125-SEV 125-HEV 100-CVFU 125-SVU 125-HVU 125-UV

qWhen the wire size is 5.5 mm2 or more, divide the wires, and connect them. wWhen connecting wires differing in size, for example, f1.6 wires and 5.5-mm2 wires, connect the two kinds of wires together to a crimp terminal because the thinner wires easily come off. eDo not tighten directly solid wires and cords consisting of thin copper wires used as strands, for example f1.6 and 1.25-mm2 wires, together. Note *1 It is impossible to directly connect the wires of 40- and 50-A, NF/NV 50-SVFU.

92

Bolt (Hex-socket) M8

2×M8

− −

 



−



−



−



−

  

− −



−

− −

− −

−

−

−

−

− − − −

− − − 



−

 

−



Shape

Remarks

1 Installation and Connection

R•U

MCCB

C • S • H • MB

5

Rear (B) Round stud (B-ST)

Bolt M10

NF NV NF NV NF 63-CV(60, 63A) 125-SEV 400-UEW 800-SEW 400-CW 125-HEV (4P) 800-HEW 400-SW 63-SV(60, 63A) 125-RGV 63-HV(60, 63A) 125-SGV 800-CEW 400-SEW 125-CV 800-SEW 400-HEW 125-LGV 125-HGV 800-HEW 125-SV 400-REW 160-SGV 400-UEW(3P) 125-HV 800-REW 160-LGV 630-CW 125-SEV 160-HGV 800-UEW 630-SW 125-HEV 250-CV 800-SDW 250-SV 630-SEW 250-HV 630-HEW 250-SEV 630-REW 250-HEV NV 250-SGV 250-LGV 400-CW 250-HGV 400-SW 250-RGV 400-SEW 250-UV 400-HEW 225-CWU 250-SVU 400-REW 250-HVU 630-CW NV 630-SW 125-SEV 630-SEW 125-HEV 250-CV 630-HEW 250-SV 250-HV 250-SEV 250-HEV

−

 With insulating base (tube) for installation of metallic board The bar stud installation position can be turned 90° on all models (except NF800-UEW). The current-carrying capacity of a vertically installed bus bar is larger than that of a horizontally installed bus bar even if the bus bars have the same dimensions.

5 Installation and Connection

1 Installation and Connection

Screw terminal (PM)

Plug-in type for distribution board For distribution board for electric lamps (BPA)

− −

− 

− −

−



−



−

−



−

−

−

−

− (Except for 4P)  (Except for NF800-UEW) − −

(Except for 4P) −

− −

−

−

− −

− −

−

−

−

−

−

−

− − − −

− − − 

− −  −

−



−



−

−



−

−

Plug-in (PM)

 (Except for NF1600-SEW)

The circuit breaker can be connected only by pushing it onto the preliminarily wired terminal block. Install it tightening the supplied screws through the mounting holes.

5 1 Installation and Connection

Bar stud (PM)

Mounting base for distribution board for electric lamps. For the external dimensions, refer to page 139.

Table 5-2 List of terminal screws (B)

MCCB

U C•S•H

ELCB

C•S•H

Model

Connection type NF400-CW • NF400-SW • NF400-SEW • NF400-HEW • NF400-REW • NF630-CW • NF630-SW • NF630-SEW NF630-HEW • NF630-REW • NF800-CEW • NF800-SEW • NF800-HEW • NF800-REW • NF800-SDW • NF-SKW • NF-SLW NF1000-SEW • NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW NF400-UEW NF800-UEW NV400-SW • NV400-SEW • NV400-HEW • NV400-REW • NV400-CW • NV630-SW • NV630-SEW • NV630-HEW • NV630-CW • NV-SKW NV800-SEW • NV800-HEW

Front

Rear

Plug-in

M12 bolt M12 bolt M10 bolt M12 bolt M12 bolt M12 bolt M12 bolt

— —

93

5

Installation and Connection

1

Installation and Connection

2. Connecting Parts For the connection shown in the table on the previous page, the following parts are available as connecting parts. Table 5-3 Studs on rear surface (B-ST) Type name

1 Installation and Connection

5

Applicable models

Number of poles

ST-05SV2

2

ST-05SV3 ST-05SV4 ST-1SV2

3 4 2

ST-1SV3

3

ST-1SV4 ST-1HV2 ST-2SV2

4 2 2

ST-2SV3

3

ST-2SV4

4

ST-4SW2

2

ST-4SW3

3

ST-4SW4

4

ST-6SW2 ST-6SW3 ST-6SW4

2 3 4

ST-8SW2

2

ST-8SW3

3

ST-8SW4

4

MCCB

ELCB

NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF63-HV

NV32-SV, NV63-CV NV63-SV, NV63-HV — —

NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-HV(3, 4P)

NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-HV

NF125-HV(2P) NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV NF250-LGV/HGV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-RGV NF250-HEV, NF125-SGV/HGV NF125-LGV, NF160-SGV NF160-LGV/HGV

Stud shape and major included parts ★Round studs Round studs (with insulating tube) sets

Set of order

(2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

Bolts and nuts ★Bar studs Bar studs (with insulating tube) sets

(2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

Bolts and nuts

— —

NV125-SEV, NV125HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-HV, NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

★Bar studs Bar studs (with insulating tube) (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

sets

Bolts and nuts

— NF400-CW, NF400-SW NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF630-CW, NF630-SW NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW NF630-REW

NV400-CW, NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW — NV630-CW, NV630-SW NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW —

NF800-SDW, NF800-CEW NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW NF800-REW

Remarks

★Bar studs Insulating bases

One set includes the parts for one unit. Please place an order for the number of circuit breakers.

(2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

sets

Bar studs (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

Mounting screws, bolts and nuts ★Bar studs Insulating base (2 pcs) Bar studs sets

NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW

(2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

Mounting screws, bolts and nuts

Table 5-4 Plug-in type terminal blocks (PM) Type name

Number of poles

Applicable models

2P

PMDN-05SV3L

3P

PMDN-05SV4L

4P

PMDN-05SV2H

2P

NF63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)

PMDN-05SV3H

3P

PMDN-05SV4H

4P

NF63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A) NV63-CV/SV/HV (60A, 63A)

PMDN-1SV2

2P

NF125-CV/SV

PMDN-1HV2

2P

NF125-HV

PMDN-1SV3

3P

PMDN-1SV4

4P

NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV

PMDN-1UV2

2P

PMDN-1UV3

3P 2P

PMDN-2SV3

3P

PMDN-2SV4

4P

PMDN-2SV2

2P

PMDN-2SV3

3P

PMDN-2UV2

2P

PMDN-2UV3

3P

— PMDN-4SW2

PMDN-8SW2

NF125-SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV

NF250-UV

2P

NF400-CW/SW

3P

NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW

3P

NF400-HEW/REW NV400-HEW/REW

4P

NF400-SW/SEW NV400-SEW

4P

NF400-HEW

2P

NF800-SDW

3P

NF800-CEW/SEW NV800-SEW

3P

NF800-HEW/REW NV800-HEW

4P

NF800-SEW

4P

NF800-HEW

PMDN-8SW3

PMDN-8SW4

NF125-UV

4P

PMDN-4SW3

PMDN-4SW4

NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV (3A-50A) NV32-SV NV63-CV/SV/HV (5A-50A)

sets

Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc) Crip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc) sets Crip terminals  (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

sets

4P

PMDN-2SV2

Major included parts

NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV (3A-50A)

PMDN-05SV2L

—

Set of order

Plug-in type terminal block (2 pc) Crip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs)

Plug-in type terminal block (1 pc) Plug-in type barriers sets ( 2-pole: 2 pcs, 3-pole: 4 pcs, 4-pole: 6 pcs) Tulip terminals (2-pole: 4 pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs, 4-pole: 8 pcs)

Plug-in type terminal block (2 pc) sets Plug-in type barriers (2-pole: 2 pcs, 3-pole: 4 pcs) Tulip terminals (2-pole: 4pcs, 3-pole: 6 pcs)

Plug-in type terminal block (2 pcs) sets Plug-in type barriers (4 pcs) Tulip terminals (3-pole: 6 pcs)

sets

Plug-in type terminal block (2 pcs) Tulip terminals (3-pole: 6 pcs)

Note In addition to the circuit breakers shown above, 4-pole and 2-pole circuit breakers are available. We are ready to manufacture such circuit breakers to order. Please consult us.

94

5 Installation and Connection

1 Installation and Connection

3. Standard Tightening Torque Nut C

Screw A

Round stud

Fig. 1

Insulating tube

Connecting busbar

Fig. 2

Screw E Connecting conductor

Bar stud Insulating base

Connecting conductor

Screw D

Screw A Screw E

Connecting conductor

Circuit breaker

Screw A

Plug-in <Screw terminal>

Bar stud

Plug-in type terminal block Plug-in type stud

Fig. 4

Screw E Plug-in type terminal block

Fig. 3

Table 5-5 Standard tightening torque (*1) Model

MCCB

Connection type

ELCB

NF30-CS NF32-SV, NF63-CV NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-HV, NF125-UV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV, NF250-UV NF250-LGV/HGV, NF250-RGV, NF125-SGV/HGV NF125-LGV, NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV/HGV NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF400-UEW (3P) NF400-UEW (4P)

Fig. 5

− NV32-SV, NV63-CV NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-HV

NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-HV, NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

NV400-CW, NV400-SW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NV400-REW − NV630-CW, NV630-SW NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NV630-SEW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NV630-HEW NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW NV800-SEW NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NV800-HEW NF800-UEW (*2) NF1000-SEW − NF1250-SEW − NF1600-SEW

Tightening torque N·m Rear Round stud Fig.1 Screw A Nut C Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque

Plug-in Bar stud Screw terminal Bar stud Fig.5 Fig.4 Fig. 2, Fig.3 Screw E Screw D Screw A Screw E Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque Size Tightening torque

M4×0.7

1

M6

2

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

M4×0.7

1

M6

2

−

−

−

−

M6

3

−

−

−

−

−

−

M6

4

M8

12

M8

6

−

−

−

−

−

−

M6

10

M8

12

−

−

M8

12

5 −

−

−

−

M8

20

M12

45

−

−

M12

45

−

−

−

−

M10

30

M12

45

−

−

M12

45

−

−

−

−

M8

20

M12

45

−

−

M12

45

−

−

−

−

M10

30

2-M12

45

−

−

2-M12

45

−

−

−

−

4-M8

12

2-M12

45

−

−

2-M12

45

−

−

−

−

4-M8

12

4-M10

25

−

−

−

−

Notes *1 The appropriate range of tightening torque is ±20% of each value (standard tightening torque) shown in the above table. Please refer to the supplied assembly manual and instruction manual for more information. *2 The plug-in type is not available.

95

1 Installation and Connection

Rear

5

Installation and Connection

Installation and Connection

1

4. Crimp Terminal Type

As the terminals in , commercially available crimp terminals can be used. Please purchase the terminals at an electric material store. For others, the crimp terminals for MCCB must be used. Place an order with us. For the connection types shown in Fig. a and Fig. b, only crimp terminals will be delivered.

Table 5-6 List of applicable crimp terminals

Frame (A)

Nominal sectional area mm2 600 V, IV wire at 30°C, not Allowable current in conduit

Size of mm2 Model MCCB

30 50 100 30 32 50 60 63

ELCB

BH-P

–

BH-P100

–

NF30-CS, NF32-SV, NF63-CV*, NF63-SV* NV32-SV, NV63-CV*, NV63-SV* NF63-HV* NV63-HV* *50A or below *50A or below NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV 60, 63A –

125

125 225 250

1 Installation and Connection

5

2 (*4)

400 600 630 800 1000 1200 1250

8

14

22

49A

61A

88A

115A

1.04 to 2.63

2.63 to 6.64

6.64 to 10.52

10.52 to 16.78

R-2-5

R-5.5-5

R-8-5

R-14-5

16.78 to 26.66 BH-22 (L330T459-23)

R-8-8

R-14-8

R-22-8

R-2-5 *(R-2-6)

R-5.5-5 *(R-5.5-6)

R-8-5

R-14-5

JST22-S5 BH-22 (L330T459-23)

NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV 60, 63A

R-2-8

R-5.5-8

R-8-8

R-14-8

R-22-8

–

R-2-5 (R-2-6)

R-5.5-5 (R-5.5-6)

R-8-5

R-14-5

JST22-S5 (L330T459-23)

R-2-8

R-5.5-8

R-8-8

R-14-8

R-22-8

R-14-8

R-22-8

NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV, NF125-UV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 60A or more 60A or more NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-UV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NF125-SGV, NF160-SGV, NF250-SGV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NF125-LGV, NF160-LGV, NF250-LGV NF125-HGV, NF160-HGV, NF250-HGV NV400-CW, NV400-SW NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW NV400-REW, NV630-CW NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NV630-SW, NV630-SEW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NV630-HEW NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW NF800-REW, NF800-UEW, NF800-SDW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW

5.5

27A

NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW

d Reference drawings of connection types

Method of connecting directly to terminal(s) of body

Method of connecting to front bar terminal

To connect one terminal To connect two terminals

Connect with the bolt head downward.

(Fig. a)

96

(Fig. b)

Carefully check the insulating distance between the connecting bus bar, crimp terminal and tightening bolt and the ground and the phase-to-phase insulating distance.

5 Installation and Connection

1 Installation and Connection

<Explanation of abbreviations> 60

100

150

200

325

217A

298A

395A

469A

650A

26.66 to 42.42

42.42 to 60.57

96.3 to 117.2

117.2 to 152.05

192.6 to 242.27

242.27 to 325

AMP #322870 1AF-60 JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) NTK R38-8S CB60-S8

R-60-12

R-38-12

R-60-12

M5

2 to 3

M8

5 to 7

Remarks

Shape

When connecting two crimp terminals, set the terminals as shown below if the *-marked terminals are used.

M5

2 to 3

M8

5 to 7

M5

2 to 3

M8

5 to 7

I R - 2-5 R - 5.5-5

M8

(Fig. a) R -2-6 R -5.5-6

M8

2CR-150(*1) 2AF (LN300T920-20) (LN300T920-21) CB100-S8 (*1)CB150-S8

R-100-12

R-100-12

R-200-12

R-150-12

R-150-12 RD150-12 SD150-12

R-200-12 RD200-12 SD200-12

M8

8 to 13

When using 2AF, use a crimp tool having a nominal size of 100.

M12

40 to 50

Fit to a front type bar terminal. Up to two pieces can be fitted to one terminal.

JST325-12

JST325-12 RD325-12 SD325-12

(Fig. b)

Notes *1 When using 2CR-150 or CB150-S8, insulate it from TC-S with insulating tube or tape. When using CB150-S8 for a 2- or 3-pole circuit breaker, TCL-2SV3L is applicable. *2 On the power supply side, pan-head screws M5 are used. *3 When tightening a terminal screw without connecting a wire, crimp terminal or bar, tighten the screw to 20 to 30% of the torque shown in the above table (to prevent damage to the threads). *4 The table shows not the allowable current values of circuit breakers, but those of wires applicable to crimp terminals. Remark: 1. For the crimp terminals for UL listed circuit breakers, refer to the page of the characteristics and external dimensions of UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers.

d Dimensions of crimp terminals <extracted from catalog of JST>

5.3 6.4 8.4 5.3 6.4 8.4 5.3 5.3 6.4 8.4 5.3 5.3 5.3 6.4 8.4 5.3 5.3 6.4 8.4 13.0 8.4 8.4 13.0 8.4 8.4 13.0 8.4 13.0

B

L

F

9.5

16.8

7.3

12.0 21.8 11.0 9.5 12.0 15.0 12.0 9.0 12.0 15.0 9 12.0 9.0 12.0 16.0 12.0 9.5 12.0 16.5 22.0 15.5

19.8 25.8 28.0 23.8 22.3 23.8 29.8 23.8 29.8 28.3 29.8 32.8 30.0 28.7 30.0 33.7 42.5 38.0

8.3 13.0 13.7 9.3 13.8 9.3 13.3

E 4.8 6.8

Applicable wire mm2 1.04 to 0.8 2.63 2.63 to 1.0 6.64

8.5

1.2

6.64 to 10.52

8.5

1.2

6.64 to 10.52

10.5

1.5

10.52 to 16.78

12.0

1.8

16.78 to 26.66

14.5 12.0 13.5 19.5 16.0 14.0

1.8

18.0

2.0

22.5 51.0 20.0 21.0 28.5 55.6 20.4

2.6

22.0 42.7 17.7 16.0 46.7 20.7 22.0 49.7 20.7

26.66 to 42.42 42.42 to 60.57 96.3 to 117.2

Applicable Shape screw size M8 B M8 A M12 A M12 A M12

Part number

Thickness

LN300T920-21 L330T402-8 R150-12 R200-12 325-12 CB60-S8 CB100-S8 CB150-S8

M8

B

L

F

8.4 8.4 13.0 13.0 13.0 8.4 8.4 8.4

22.5 25.3 36.0 44.0 50.5 16.0 22.0 22.0

70.0 61.5 66.0 78.0 88.0 46.7 52.5 61.0

33.0 23.0 21.0 24.5 33.5 20.7 20.5 23.0

Applicable Shape screw size fd2 14.0 14.0 C M12 14.0 14.0 14.0

Part number RD60-12 RD100-12 RD150-12 RD200-12 RD325-12 SD150-12 SD200-12 SD325-12

Shape A

B

External dimensions fd2

C

M12

F

E L

Thickness

27.0

3.2

31.5 35.5 18.0 21.0 27.0

4.0 4.5 2.0 2.6 3.2

External dimensions B

22.0 28.5 36.0 44.0 50.5 36.0 14.0 44.0 50.5

Shape B

φd2

E

L

F

89.0 95.5 106.0 116.5 123.8 107.0 108.0 125.0

20.0 20.3 21.0 23.0 23.0 29.0 36.0 38.0

E

N Thickness

18.0 2.0 21.0 2.6 27.0 40 3.2 31.5 4.0 35.5 4.5 28.0 3.2 32.0 32 4.0 37.0 4.5

Shape C

φd2

Applicable wire mm2 117.2 to 152.05 192.6 to 242.27 242.27 to 325 42.42 to 60.57 96.3 to 117.2 117.2 to 152.05 Applicable wire mm2 42.42 to 60.57 96.3 to 117.2 117.2 to 152.05 192.6 to 242.27 242.27 to 325 117.2 to 152 192.6 to 242.2 242.2 to 325

φd2

B

External dimensions fd2

B

R2-5 R2-6 R2-8 R5.5-5 R5.5-6 R5.5-8 R8-5 8-5NS R8-6 R8-8 8-5SC-9 R14-5 14-5NS R14-6 R14-8 L330T459-23 22-5NS 22-S6 R22-8 R22-12 38-S8 R38-8 R38-12 L330T459-12 R60-8 R60-12 LN300T920-20 R100-12

Applicable Shape screw size M5 A M6 M8 M5 A M6 M8 M5 M5 A M6 M8 M5 M5 M5 A M6 M8 M5 M5 A M6 M8 M12 M8 A M8 M12 M8 A M8 M12 B M8 A M12

B

Part number

F

E L

N

F

E

L

97

5 1 Installation and Connection

R-38-12

Tightening torque N•m

M5

AMP #322870 1AF-60 JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) NTK R38-8S CB60-S8

R-60-8

Screw size

M5 • M6

1AF-60 AMP #322870 JST 38-S8 (L330T459-12) NTK R38-8S CB60-S8

R-38-8

Crimp terminal tightening screw

Reference drawing of connection type

38 162A

R····························Product specified by JIS CB··························Product specified by JEM 1399 AMP·······················Product made by Nippon AMP JST························Product made by J.S.T. Mfg. Co., Ltd. NTK························Product made by Nippon Tanshi Co., Ltd. NTM·······················Product made by Nichifu Co., Ltd. DST························Product made by Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co., Ltd.

5

Installation and Connection

Installation and Connection

1

5. Busbar

C

F G

f 9 or f 8.5

A

H

10

Conductor thickness t = 4 max. Nominal diameter of conductor tightening screw J

ON

4

A

C

B

Nominal diameter of conductor tightening screw J

ON

OFF

H

H

OFF

C

D

B

D E

E Conductor thickness t = 6 max.

Fig. 2 C

A

C

B

H

F

15

Fig. 1 f9

Conductor thickness t = 10 max.

20

F

H

f 6.5

10

The size of the conductor can be connected is shown on the outline drawing of each model. The following special busbars are available. Use them as needed. When using any busbar, isolate it from the bare busbar on the circuit breaker power supply side with an insulating barrier.

Nominal diameter of conductor tightening screw J

ON

OFF

H

5

D

Fig. 3

Table 5-7 Table of variable dimensions

FB-1SV

ELCB

NF32-SV NF63-CV (50A or below) NF63-SV (50A or below) NF63-HV (50A or below)

NV32-SV NV63-CV (50A or below) NV63-SV (50A or below) NV63-HV (50A or below)

NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-HV, NF125-UV

NV125-CV NV125-SV NV125-HV

Outline and dimentions

Fig.

A

B

C

Busbar D E

1

24

24

2

50

2

24

24

4

3

24

24

6

F

G

H

J

75

11.5

−

25

M5×0.8

60

90

18

15

29

M8

70

105

20

−

37

M8

11 .

40.5

5

2

FB-05SV

Applicable models MCCB

f 6.5 f5.5

18

46

4

Type name

15

f 8.5 f 8.5

FB-2SV

98

NF125-SEV NF125-HEV, NF125-RGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-UV, NF250-SEV NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV

NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-HV, NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

20

57.5

6

1 Installation and Connection

E

f9 f9

5 Installation and Connection

1 Installation and Connection

6. Insulation Distance on Power Source Side dBasic concept

Insulation distance (distance indicated in standards)

Be sure to at least secure the insulation distances (spatial distance and creeping distance) specified by the codes and standards of the relevant equipment and facilities where the circuit breakers are installed. It is recommended that insulation barriers and insulation tape be used to enhance the electrical insulation between bare-live parts and between bare-live parts and ground to avoid accidents otherwise caused by a loose metal piece, conductive dust, abnormal surge voltage in the circuit or a similar event so as to improve the reliability of panels.

Arc Space (insulation space)

At the exhaust outlet side of breaker, arc space is necessary. When the actual load circuit is opened, especially when a large current such as overload or shortcircuit is interrupted, ionized gas is emitted from the exhaust outlet. This gas can cause a short circuit between bare, live parts such as busbars, and also can cause grounding faults between conductive installation metal panels. Therefore, it is important to secure enough arc space at the exhaust outlet side of the breaker and to strengthen insulation of parts exposed to the gas. In addition, securing enough space at the front of the exhaust outlet is necessary, because when the gas emission is blocked, failures such as deterioration of breaking performance can be caused.

dInsulation required part

With regard to insulation of bear, live parts of the line side of the breaker, please make sure to insulate at least C part C indicated in the diagram above with insulation tape, a tube or a terminal cover. qA : Distance from the circuit breaker to the ceiling plate wB1 : Distance from the circuit breaker to the uncovered conducting part of the upper circuit breaker terminal (front connection) eB2 : Distance from the lower circuit breaker to the end face of the upper circuit breaker (rear connection) rD1 : Distance from the side of the breaker to the side plate tC : Insulated length of the power source terminal of the circuit breaker (front connection) Please secure insulation using insulating tape, insulating tubing, insulation barrier, or a terminal cover, between bare charge parts within this size range. Please refer to a table a necessary size must. When using insulation tape and insulation tubing together with insulation barriers and terminal covers, make them overlap with the other by at least 10 mm. For the models with insulation barriers supplied as standard, please make sure to use the barriers. a : clearance specified in standard yD2 : Side-to-side spacing of breakers While the circuit breakers can basically be installed together without a clearance in between, be sure to observe the following instructions. It is desirable to install an insulation barrier between the adjacent circuit breakers or insulate the bare-live parts considering the effect of cutoff gas. Be sure to secure the insulation distance (dimension a) as the minimum, indispensable requirement. With a leakage circuit breaker and a leakage alarm circuit breaker installed in close contact with the other, a current of 2,500A or higher flowing through one of the circuit breakers could cause the other to operate falsely. Be sure to secure a distance of at least 50 mm in between. A circuit breaker of 400-ampere frame or larger with an SHT or a UVT could operate falsely if a current of 50 kA or higher flows through the adjacent circuit breaker. Be sure to secure a distance of at least 50 mm in between. D2

5

Side plate D1

a

Table 5-8 Insulation distance (mm) (440VAC or below) *Figures in parentheses are for 230VAC or below. Model Class • Series

C • S • H • R • MB

R • U BH

UL

MCCB

NF30-CS NF32-SV, NF63-CV NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV NF125-SV NF125-HV NF250-CV NF125-SEV, NF250-SV, NF250-SEV NF125-SGV, NF160-SGV, NF250-SGV NF125-HEV, NF250-HV, NF250-HEV NF125-LGV, NF160-LGV, NF250-LGV NF125-HGV, NF160-HGV, NF250-HGV NF400-CW NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-CW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF800-SEW, NF800-CEW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV NF125-UV, NF250-UV NF400-UEW NF800-UEW BH-K, BH-K100 NF225-CWU NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU(*4) NF125-HVU(*5) NF250-SVU(*4) NF250-HVU(*5) NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU(*5) NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU(*5)

Ceiling plate

ELCB

− NV63-CV NV32-SV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-CV NV125-SV NV125-HV NV250-CV

A Uncovered metal Plate Without With terminal terminal cover cover 10 10 5 5 10 10 50(30) 40(30) 50(10) 30(10) 50 40 40 40

Horizontal spacing

Vertical spacing B1, B2 C

Insulated plate, coated plate

Without terminal cover

With terminal cover

10 5 10 10 10 40 40

20 20 30 50 50 80 50

20 20 30 50 50 80 50

(*1) (*1) 30 (*1) 50 80 50

20 20 25 25 25 40 50

D1

NV125-SEV, NV250-SV, NV250-SEV

70(40)

40

40

70(50)

50

70(50)

50

NV125-HEV, NV250-HV, NV250-HEV

80

60

60

80

80

80

60

NV400-CW NV400-SW, NV400-SEW NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

60 70 200 70 200 80 200

60 70 200 70 200 80 200

60 70 200 70 200 80 200

60 70 200 70 200 80 200

60 70 200 70 200 80 200

60 70 200 70 200 80 200

40 70 150 70 150 80 150

100

100

100

100

100

100

50 (*1) 70 80 (*1) (50) 30 50 50 80 70(50) 80 70 70

5 25 70 80 20 (50) 10 25(15) 25(20) 25(20) 50(20) 50(20) 70 70

− − − − − − − − − − − − − − −

30 (*6) 30 (*6) (*1) (*1) 70 70 80 80 (*1) − (40) 10 (*6) 10 (*6) 50(25) 40(25) 40(10) 30(10) 40 40 40 40 40 40 70 70 70 70

100 30 (*6) (*1) 70 80 (*1) (40) 10 (*6) 10 10 40 40 40 70 70

50 (*9) 50 (*9) (*1) (*1) 70 70 80 80 (*1) − (50) 20 (*7) 20 (*7) 50 50 50 50 80 80 50 70(50) 80 80 70 70 70 70

Remark: 1. The table shows the dimensions in the case of the use of a large terminal cover (TC-L). Notes *1 It is not necessary to provide an insulation distance (an arc space) on the power supply side. However, if a grounding metal piece or the like comes in close contact with the terminal, be sure to completely insulate the terminals or the bare-live parts of the cable conductors. *2 At more than 440 V AC, the distance shall be 10 mm. *3 For 480Y/277V AC. *4 For 480V AC. *5 For 600Y/347V AC. *6 An exhaust port is provided also on the circuit breaker load side. Secure the dimension A both on the power supply side and on the load side. *7 When any of the circuit breakers NF125-RGB to NF250-RGV is used on the upstream side, an exhaust port is provided also on the circuit breaker load side. Secure the larger distance of the dimension B1 of NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV or NF50-SVFU and the dimension B1 of the downstream circuit breaker.

99

1 Installation and Connection

B2

B1

B1

C

A

Ceiling plate

5

Installation and Connection

1

Installation and Connection

7. Effect of Installation Orientation Installation orientation does not affect the operating characteristics of circuit breakers of electronic or thermomagnetic operation types. However, the installation orientation affects the operating current of fully magnetic type circuit breakers as the iron core in the oil dash pot is under gravitational force. It is generally suggested they be installed vertically. Hydraulic-magnetic (The same applies to other models of hydraulic-magnetic type.) MCCB Class C

100%

Model

107%

NF30-CS

93% ON

ON ON

ON 110%

90%

ON

ON ON

ON 93%

107% 100%

Rate of change of rated current by mounting angle

8. Connection of Line and Load

1 Installation and Connection

5

The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is as shown in (a) normal connection on the right. Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection. This may lead to a decrease in breaking performance. However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models (excluding MDU breakers). NF-C, NF-S, NF-H, NF-R and NF-U class BH-P, CP30-BA, NV-C, S, H and R class of 400 to 800AF, NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU, NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU

100

Reverse connection is allowed for the standard models.

Line

Load

ON

ON

Load (a) Normal connection

Line (b) Reserve connection

Connection methods

Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

6 102

1) Internal Accessories … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 102 2) Kinds of Internal Accessories ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 103 3) Operations and Ratings of Switches ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 103 4) Maximum Number of Internal Accessories … …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 104 5) Cassette Type Accessories … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 109 6) Shunt Trip (SHT) … ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 111 7) Undervoltage Trip (UVT) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 112 8) Lead Wire Drawing … ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 114 9) Lead Wire Terminal Block … ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 114 10) Test Button Module (TBM) … …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 115 11) Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) … ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 116

2 External Accessories

117

1) F-type Operating Handle (Breaker Mount Type)… ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 2) V-type Operating Handle (Door Mount Type)… ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3) Terminal Covers… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4) Insulating Barriers………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5) Handle Lock Devices, Lock Covers, Auxiliary Handles, Card Holders………………………………………………………………………… 6) Mechanical Interlocks (MI)… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7) Boxes for Circuit Breakers and Boxed Circuit Breakers………………………………………………………………………………………… 8) Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers and Electrical Operation Devices… …………………………………………………………………… 9) Distribution Board Mounting Parts, Lock Covers and Handle Caps… ………………………………………………………………………… 10) IEC 35-mm Rail Mounting Adapters… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

117 119 121 124 127 129 130 133 136 137

101

6 Accessories

Internal Accessories

1

1. Internal Accessories The accessories to be installed in circuit breakers include the followings. For the numbers of the accessories which can be installed, refer to the tables on pages 106 to 110. The standard internal accessories have lead wires (450 mm long) drawn out. (However, some of Models UVT and TBM have vertical lead wire terminal blocks as standard.) When circuit breakers are installed side by side, keep a space of 8 mm or more for lead wires between the circuit breakers. (Models with lead wires drawn out toward load and models with lead wire grooves in the side faces can be installed in close contact.)

SHT (Shunt trip)

Device to electrically trip a circuit breaker from a distance. The allowable operating voltage range is 70 to 110% of the rated voltage. (JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1, Ann.2)

Power supply

Switch to electrically display the tripping status of circuit breaker

ALc

ALb

Control power supply

ALa PL

Load

Connection diagram

Small-size MCCB or fuse

AX (Auxiliary switch)

Power supply S1

Switch to electrically display the ON-OFF status of circuit breaker

S2

Load

AL (Alarm switch)

Pushbutton switch

Connection diagram

Power supply

AXc Control power supply

AXa AXb PL1 Load

PL2

Connection diagram

1 Accessories

6

TBM (Test button module) UVT (Undervoltage trip)

SLT (Lead wire terminal block)

Device to automatically trip a circuit breaker when the voltage drops. The operating voltage is 70 to 35% of the UVT rated voltage. (JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1) When the voltage recovers at least to 85% or more, the circuit breaker can be turned on after the device is manually reset.

Terminals for connecting with internal accessories. The terminal block will be manufactured to order. For the detailed dimensions, refer to pages 116 and 117. (The dimensions of SLT slightly vary depending on the number of installed accessories and the model.) However, circuit breakers with a frame size of 400A and above having an electrical operation device are normally provided with SLT.

Power supply

UC1 UC2

Connection diagram

102

Load

Unit to perform test under voltage from a distance. TBMs can be connected in parallel. (The standard TBMs are provided with SLT. In the case of the flush plate type, the external dimensions are partially different from those of the standard type.) Circuit breaker TBM TBM2 switch Control power supply TBM1

TBM circuit diagram

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

2. Kinds of Internal Accessories Table 6-1 Accessory name

AL

Alarm switch

AX

Auxiliary switch

SHT

Shunt tripping device

UVT

Undervoltage tripping device

Nameplate (sample)

Accessory name

EAL

Earth leakage trip alarm switch

TBM

Test button module

Nameplate (sample)

3. Operations and Ratings of Switches Table 6-4 Ratings of AL and AX switches

Table 6-2 Operations of AL switch Status of circuit breaker

Contact status of AL switch

Off or On

98/ALa (open) 96/ALb (closed) 95/ALc

Trip

98/ALa (closed) 96/ALb (open) 95/ALc

* The terminal numbers 98/ALa, 96/ALb and 95/ALc may vary depending on the number of installed switches and the installation poles.

A S

V

Voltage V (250) 125 460 250 125 460 250 125

AC Current A Resistive Inductive load load (0.5) (1) (1) 3 — — 2 3 3 5 2 5 10 10 10 10

Voltage V (50) 30 250 125 30 250 125 30

DC Current A Resistive Inductive load load (0.5) (1) (1) (2) 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 3 4 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.6 6 10

Remarks: 1. The ratings in parentheses do not conform to UL. 2. For the applied switches, refer to Tables 6-9-1 to 6-14-1.

Table 6-3 Operations of AX switch Status of circuit breaker

Applied switch

Contact status of AX switch

Off or Trip

14/AXa (open) 12/AXb (closed) 11/AXc

On

14/AXa (closed) 12/AXb (open) 11/AXc

* The terminal numbers 14/AXa, 12/AXb and 11/AXc may vary depending on the number of installed switches and the installation poles.

1 Accessories

6

103

6 Accessories

Internal Accessories

1

4. Maximum Number of Internal Accessories AL

JMCCB J and Motor Protection Breakers Table 6-5 Table of maximum number of internal accessories Left pole C

NF30-CS

L • H • R

NF32-SV NF63-SV NF125-SV

NF32-SV NF63-SV NF125-SV NF125-SGV NF160-SGV NF250-SV NF250-SGV

NF63-HV

NF63-HV NF125-HV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-RGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV NF250-HV NF250-LGV NF250-HGV NF250-RGV

U ber of p ole A L s (sta and nda rd) AX swit che s Accessory

are cassette type accessories. (Some of UVT are not provided with cassettes. Refer to page XXX for details.)

NF400-CW NF630-CW

NF800-CEW

NF125-SEV NF250-SEV

NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW NF630-SEW

NF800-SEW NF800-SDW

NF125-HEV NF250-HEV

NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF630-HEW NF630-REW

NF800-HEW NF800-REW

NF400-UEW(3P)

NF400-UEW(4P) NF800-UEW

2, 3 or 4 poles

2, 3 or 4 poles

NF125-UV NF250-UV 2 or 3 poles

2 poles

Outgoing direction of lead wires

PAL

Right pole

NF63-CV NF125-CV NF250-CV

Num

SHT or UVT

Handle of circuit breaker

NF63-CV NF125-CV

Model

S

AX

2, 3 or 4 poles

3, 4 poles

V

(*3)

(*7)

1

2

1

2

(*3)

AX

(*7)

1

1

2

3

(*1)

2

(*1)(*5)

1

2

3

1

3

1 5

3

2

4

2 6

4

(*1)(*5)

(*1) (*6)

(*1) (*6)

(*7)

(*7)

(*1)

(*1) (*6) (*7) (*8)

(*1) (*6) (*7) (*8)

(*1)

(*1) (*6) (*7) (*8)

SHT or UVT (*3)

1 Accessories

2, 3 or 4 poles

S

AL

6

NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

AL + AX

(*2)

(*2)

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1 2 5

3 4 6

(*1)

3-pole product only

(*1)

SHT AL + or UVT

SHT AX + or UVT

SHT AL + AX + or UVT

PAL (contact output) Notes *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 Remarks:

104

(*1)

1

1

2

2

(*1)

3

1 2

1 3 2 4

5

3

1

4

2

(*1) (*6) (*7) (*8)

(*1)

(*1) (*6) (*7) (*8)

(*1) (*6) (*7) (*8)

(*4)

(*9)

(*9)

Option for NF400-SEW, HEW, REW and UEW and NF630-SEW, HEW and REW

Option for NF800-CEW, SEW, HEW and REW and NF800-UEW

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

(*9)

Option for NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW and NF1600-SEW

When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.) The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body. Although the lead wires are normally drawn out laterally, those with lead wires drawn out toward load are available. (Only for front connection type) PAL (contact output) can be installed together with AL and AX on the left pole side. (It cannot be installed together with SHT or UVT.) The standard type is provided with SLT. PAL control voltage (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC) is necessary. SHT and UVT can be installed on the left side. SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. (The reset preventing UVT must be installed on the left pole side.) In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order. When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately. SLT is provided as standard. A control power supply (100 to 200 V AC) is required. (In this case, other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side.) 1. For electrically operated automatic reset type circuit breakers having a frame size of 400A or above, the numbers of AL switches which can be installed are smaller by 1 than the values shown above. 2. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

JELCB J

AL

Table 6-6 Table of maximum number of internal accessories Left pole C

Model

S

H • R

U er o f po les Sw itch

AX

SHT or UVT TBM

Handle of circuit breaker Right pole

Outgoing direction of lead wires

are cassette type accessories.

NV63-CV NV125-CV NV250-CV

NV400-CW NV630-CW

NV32-SV NV63-SV NV125-SV NV125-SEV NV250-SV NV250-SEV

NV400-SW NV400-SEW NV630-SW NV630-SEW

NV800-SEW

NV63-HV NV125-HV NV125-HEV NV250-HV NV250-HEV

NV400-HEW NV400-REW NV630-HEW

NV800-HEW

Num b

3 poles

2, 3, or 4 poles S

Accessory

(*6)

AL

AX

(*6)

1 2 (*2)

(*6)

(*6)

(*3)

(*5)

(*5)

SHT AL + or UVT

(*4) (*5) (*6)

(*4) (*5) (*6)

SHT AX + or UVT

(*4) (*5) (*6)

(*4) (*5) (*6)

SHT AL + AX + or UVT

(*4) (*5) (*6)

(*4) (*5) (*6)

AL + AX SHT or UVT

(*1)

(*1)

6

(*1)

Notes *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 Remarks:

1 Accessories

TBM The standard type is provided with SLT. Only in the case of 24 V DC, specify the control voltage. The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body. When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.) When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVF voltage module must be separately installed. When the accessory is provided with UVT, the UVT voltage module has a vertical lead wire terminal block. The UVT is not provided with a cassette. SLT to be used when three or more accessories are installed on the left pole is manufactured to order. 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation. 2. TBM can be installed regardless of the number of installed AL, AX, SHT and UVT.

105

6 Accessories

1

Internal Accessories

JUL J 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

Model

Table 6-7 Table of maximum number of internal accessories MCCB

NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU

NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU

Handle of circuit breaker

Left pole

NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU

AL

AX

Right pole

NF225-CWU

2 poles

3 poles

2 or 3 poles

3 poles

TBM

Outgoing direction of lead wires

are cassette type accessories.

NF400-SWU NF400-HWU

NF630-SWU NF630-HWU

Nu

mb ELCB er o fp (sta AL an oles nda d A X rd) swi tche s Accessory

SHT or UVT

3 poles

3 poles

NV50-SVFU

NV50-SVFU NV100-CVFU

NV125-SVU NV125-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU

2 poles

3 poles

3 poles

S (*4)

AL

1

2

1

2

1

2

(*4)

AX

1

1

2

3

(*1) (*6)

2

(*1) (*3) (*6)

1

2

3

1

(*1) (*3)

2

(*1)

1

3

1 5

3

1

1

2

4

2 6

4

2

2

(*1) (*3)

(*1) (*3)

(*1) (*6)

(*1)

(*6)

(*6)

(*2)

(*2)

SHT or UVT (*2)

AL + AX

(*2)

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

(*1) (*6)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

SHT AL + or UVT (*1) (*6)

SHT AX + or UVT

1

1

2

2

6

2 4 3

(*1) (*6)

SHT AL + AX + or UVT

1 3

(*1)

(*1)

5

1

3

1

2

4

2

(*1)(*3) (*4)(*5)

(*1)(*3) (*4)(*5)

(*7)

(*7)

1 Accessories

TBM Notes *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 Remarks:

106

When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.) SHT cannot be installed. SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order. When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately. UVT of NF50-SVFU and NV50-SVFU are not provided with cassettes. The standard type is provided with SLT. Only in the case of 24 V DC, specify the control voltage. 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation. 2. AL and AX for minute load can be manufactured to order. (These switches have been certified only by UL and CSA. They have not been certified by TUV.)

(*7)

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

JMDU J Breakers

AL

Table 6-8-1 Table of maximum number of internal accessories

Num ber

AX for transmission with MDU

TI

Outgoing direction of lead wires

NF600-SEP with MDU NF600-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU 3 or 4 poles S (*1)

AL AX

SHT or UVT

are cassette type accessories.

Right pole

NF400-SEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU

o f po les swit ch Accessory

AL for transmission with MDU

PAL

Handle of circuit breaker

Left pole

Model

AX

1

3

15

3

2

4

26

4

(*1)

(*2)

(*2)

(*3) (*4)

(*3) (*4)

(*1)

(*1)

(*1) (*2)

(*1) (*2)

SHT

AL + AX

AL + SHT

AX + SHT

(*1) (*2) 3

1 2

5

3 4

1 2

AL + UVT

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

AX + UVT

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

3

1 2

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

(*1) (*2)

(*1) (*2)

(*1) (*2)

AL + AX + SHT

AL + AX + UVT

13 24

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

13 24

5

3 4

1 2

(*1) (*3) (*4) (*5) (*1) (*3) (*4) (*5)

(*6)

(*6)

(*6)

(*6)

6

PAL EPAL TI With contact outputs for PAL and OAL

With contact outputs for PAL and OAL

Notes *1 In the case where three or more accessories are installed on the left pole side and AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which SLT, SHT or UVT is installed, the SLT will be manufactured to order. *2 SHT and UVT are normally installed on the right pole side. If you intend to install them on the left pole side, specify so. (The reset preventing UVT must be installed on the left pole side.) *3 The UVT voltage module is installed externally. UTV is not provided with a cassette. *4 UVT is normally installed on the right pole. If you intend to install it on the left pole, specify so. *5 When AL, AX or AL and AX are installed on the pole on which UVT is installed, the UVT voltage module must be installed separately. *6 The standard model has a terminal block. A 5-VA control power supply (compatible with 100 to 240 V AC/DC) is required. (In this case, another internal accessory cannot be installed on the right pole.) Remark: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.

107

1 Accessories

UVT

6 Accessories

Internal Accessories

1

JMDU J Breakers

AL

Table 6-8-2 Table of maximum number of internal accessories Left pole

Model

Num ber

o f po les swit ch Accessory AL for transmission with MDU (*1) AX for transmission with MDU (*1) AL + AX for transmission with MDU (*1) AL + AX + AL for transmission with MDU (*1) AL+AX + AX for transmission with MDU (*1) AL + AX + AL + AX for transmission with MDU (*1) Note

AL for transmission with MDU

Handle of circuit breaker

AX for transmission with MDU PAL

SHT or UVT

TI

Outgoing direction of lead wires

are cassette type accessories.

Right pole

NF600-SEP with MDU NF400-SEP with MDU NF600-HEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU 3 or 4 poles S

*1 To transmit signals from AL, AX or AL and AX, AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU are installed on the left pole side. In this case, the lead wires of AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU installed on the left pole side cannot be drawn out to the outside or fitted to the terminal block.

AL Handle of circuit breaker Left pole

Num ber

Model

o f po les switc h

6

2

AX

1 2

3

AL + AX

1 1

2 2

AX + SHT AL + AX + SHT AL + UVT AX + UVT AL + AX + UVT

AX for transmission with MDU PAL

SHT or UVT Outgoing direction of lead wires

are cassette type accessories.

S 1

AL + SHT

AL for transmission with MDU

3 or 4 poles

AL

SHT or UVT

Right pole

AX

NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU

Accessory

1 Accessories

AX

(*1)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

(*2)

AL for transmission with MDU (*3) AL for transmission with MDU AX (*3) AL for transmission with MDU AL + AX (*3) AL for transmission with MDU AL + AX + AL (*3) AL for transmission with MDU AL + AX + AX (*3) AL for transmission with MDU AL + AX + AL + AX (*3) Notes *1 The second AX can be installed in place of the AL on the left pole side. When placing an order, specify the incorporation of the switches in the body. *2 When UVT is provided, the UVT voltage module will come in the vertical lead wire terminal block type. (SHT does not have a voltage module.) *3 To transmit signals from AL, AX or AL and AX, AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU are installed on the left pole side. In this case, the lead wires of AL and/or AX for transmission with the MDU installed on the left pole side cannot be drawn out to the outside or fitted to the terminal block. In the case of 225A frame circuit breakers, AL for transmission with the MDU must be installed for fault current measurement. Remark: 1. The encircled numbers indicate the order of installation.

108

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

5. Cassette Type Accessories The internal accessories for major models having a frame size from 30 to 800 A come in cassettes, and they can be installed to and removed from circuit breakers by the user. Some cassette type accessories have lead wires drawn out, and others have vertical lead wire terminal blocks (SLT). (These parts are supplied by 10 pieces for frame size from 30 to 250 A or by 1 piece for frame size from 400 to 800 A.)

JApplicable J models and kinds of cassette type accessories Model

MCCB

ELCB

Alarm switch (AL)

Auxiliary switch (AX) Shunt tripping device (SHT) Undervoltage tripping device (UVT)

NF63-CV~NF250-CV, NF32-SV~NF250-SV NF63-HV~NF250-HV NF125-SGV~NF250-SGV, NF125-LGV~NF250-LGV NF125-HGV~NF250-HGV NF125-SEV, NF250-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF250-HEV NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV, NF125-UV, NF250-UV NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU









NF50-SVFU, NF400-CW, NF630-CW, NF800-CEW NF400-SW, NF630-SW, NF400-SEW~NF800-SEW NF800-SDW, NF400-HEW~NF800-HEW NF400-REW~NF800-REW, NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU







–

NV63-CV~NV250-CV, NV32-SV~NV250-SV NV63-HV~HV250-HV NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV, NV125-HEV, NV250-HEV NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU









NV50-SVFU, NV400-CW, NV630-CW NV400-SW, NV630-SW, NV400-SEW~NV800-SEW NV400-HEW~NV800-HEW, NV400-REW







–

JProcedure J for installing cassette type accessories

1. Press the trip button (PTT) to trip the circuit breaker. (*1)

2. Loosen the cover screws.

3. Open the cover.

4. Install the cassette type accessory. (*2)

5. Close the cover, and tighten the screws.

Notes *1. When installing any cassette type accessory, set the circuit breaker to the tripped state. *2. If the inner lid or another accessory has been installed, remove it before installing the accessory. When any circuit breaker supplied with the inner lid is used without an accessory, fit the inner lid without fail. Failure to do so may affect the short-circuiting performance. Models with inner lid: NF125-SV, NF125-HV, NF125-UV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-UV NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV250-HEV NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU, NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU NF400-REW, NF400-UEW NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU, NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU NF630-REW, NV400-REW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW NV800-HEW NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU

Cautions when installing

Before installing or removing any cassette type accessory, set the circuit breaker and accessories to the no-voltage state. Never install a cassette type accessory while the handle is in the ON or OFF position. Doing so may damage the accessory. When installing an accessory with lead wires drawn out, apply the supplied nameplate to the circuit breaker side face. When installing an accessory with lead wires drawn out for a frame size of 400 to 800 A, secure the lead wires along the circuit breaker side face with the supplied lead wire retainers.

109

1 Accessories

6

6 Accessories

Internal Accessories

1

JType J name Table 6-9-1 Model

MCCB

Installation pole

ELCB

AL

AX

AL+AX

SHT

UVTN or UVTS

SHTA240-03SVUR SHTA440-03SVUR AL-03SVU AX-03SVU ALAX-03SVU SHTD100-03SVUR For right pole AL-03SVURS AX-03SVURS ALAX-03SVURS SHTA240-03SVURS SHTA440-03SVURS SHTD100-03SVURS

NF50-SVFU

–

For left pole

SHTA240-03SVUL SHTA440-03SVUL AL-03SVU AX-03SVU ALAX-03SVU SHTD100-03SVUL For left AL-03SVULS AX-03SVULS ALAX-03SVULS SHTA240-03SVULS pole SHTA440-03SVULS SHTD100-03SVULS

NV50-SVFU

NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF125-RGV, NF125-UV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF250-RGV, NF250-UV

SHTA240-05SVR SHTA550-05SVR SHTD125-05SVR SHTA240-05SVRS SHTA550-05SVRS SHTD125-05SVRS

UVTNAD130-05SVR UVTNA250-05SVR UVTNA480-05SVR UVTNAD130-05SVRS UVTNA250-05SVRS UVTNA480-05SVRS

UVTSAD130-05SVR UVTSA250-05SVR UVTSA480-05SVR UVTSAD130-05SVRS UVTSA250-05SVRS UVTSA480-05SVRS

SHTA240-05SVL SHTA550-05SVL SHTD125-05SVL SHTA240-05SVLS SHTA550-05SVLS SHTD125-05SVLS

UVTNAD130-05SVL UVTNA250-05SVL UVTNA480-05SVL UVTNAD130-05SVLS UVTNA250-05SVLS UVTNA480-05SVLS

UVTSAD130-05SVL UVTSA250-05SVL UVTSA480-05SVL UVTSAD130-05SVLS UVTSA250-05SVLS UVTSA480-05SVLS

SHTA240-05SVUR SHTA550-05SVUR SHTD125-05SVUR For right AL-05SVU AX-05SVU ALAX-05SVU pole AL-05SVURS AX-05SVURS ALAX-05SVURS SHTA240-05SVURS SHTA550-05SVURS SHTD125-05SVURS

UVTNAD130-05SVUR UVTNA250-05SVUR UVTNA480-05SVUR UVTNAD130-05SVURS UVTNA250-05SVURS UVTNA480-05SVURS

UVTSAD130-05SVUR UVTSA250-05SVUR UVTSA480-05SVUR UVTSAD130-05SVURS UVTSA250-05SVURS UVTSA480-05SVURS

For left pole

UVTNAD130-05SVUL UVTNA250-05SVUL UVTNA480-05SVUL UVTNAD130-05SVULS UVTNA250-05SVULS UVTNA480-05SVULS

UVTSAD130-05SVUL UVTSA250-05SVUL UVTSA480-05SVUL UVTSAD130-05SVULS UVTSA250-05SVULS UVTSA480-05SVULS

AL-05SV AX-05SV ALAX-05SV For right AL-05SVRS AX-05SVRS ALAX-05SVRS pole

For left pole NV32-SV, NV63-CV NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-CV, NV125-SV NV125-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV

NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU/HVU NF250-SVU/HVU

AL-05SV For left AL-05SVLS pole

For right pole (2, or 3 poles)

NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW

1 Accessories

AX-05SV ALAX-05SV AX-05SVLS ALAX-05SVLS

SHTA240-05SVUL SHTA550-05SVUL AL-05SVU AX-05SVU ALAX-05SVU SHTD125-05SVUL For left AL-05SVULS AX-05SVULS ALAX-05SVULS SHTA240-05SVULS pole SHTA550-05SVULS SHTD125-05SVULS

NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU

For right pole (4 poles) For left pole (2, 3 or 4 poles)

–

AX-4SW AX-4SWRS AX2-4SWRS

–

SHT-4SW SHT-4SWRS

–

–

–

–

SHT-4SWRFS SHT-8SWRFS

–

SHT-4SW SHT-4SWLS

–

SHT-4SWU SHT-4SWURS

–

NV400-CW, NV400-SW AL-4SWL AX-4SW ALAX-4SWL NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW AL-4SWLS AX-4SWLS NV400-REW For left pole AL2-4SWLS AX2-4SWLS ALAX-4SWLS NV630-CW, NV630-SW (2, 3 or 4 poles) NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW

6

For right pole

NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU Remarks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

–

–

AX-4SWU AX-4SWURS AX2-4SWURS

–

For left pole AL-4SWUL AX-4SWUL ALAX-4SWUL SHT-4SWU For the possibility of installation of accessories and the installation pole, refer to the tables of maximum numbers on pages 106 to 110. AL and AX for minute load can be manufactured to order. Corrosion-proof cassette type AL and AX are not available. When the circuit breaker body is exposed to class 1 tropicalization, class 2 tropicalization, reinforced corrosion resistance treatment or class 2 heat resistance treatment, place an order for the circuit breaker including the accessories. Cassette type accessories with SLT for right pole cannot be installed to 4-pole circuit breakers. Accessories with SLT for right pole to be used in 4-pole circuit breakers are manufactured to order. Cassette type accessories with SLT cannot be installed to flush plate type circuit breakers. Cassette type accessories (AL, AX and SHT) cannot be installed to circuit breakers with MG. It is impossible to install a combination of a cassette type accessory with lead wires drawn out and that with SLT or a combination of cassette type accessories with SLT on the same pole. It is impossible to install the cassette type AL or AX to the pole to which UVT has been installed. AX and SHT with lead wires drawn out for frame size from 400 to 800 A can be installed to any of the right and left poles. When installing more than one AL or AX with lead wires drawn out for frame size from 400 to 800 A to one side, install the necessary number of the accessories for one piece. The lead wires from the circuit breaker vary in length depending on the installation position. Install the cassette accessories for frame size from 400 to 800 A starting from the outside of the installation positions. For the installation positions, see the installation positions shown in the following table. When three pieces of more of AL and AX are installed on a circuit breaker with a frame size 400 to 800 A, the AL and AX with SLT are manufactured to order.

Installation positions of cassette type accessories for 400 to 800 A frames Table 6-9-2 Installation positions of cassette type accessories

Installation positions

Frame (A)

L1 L2 L3 L4

R4 R3 R2 R1 OFF

400 • 600 • 630

800

Installation positions

L1

L2

L3

R2

R1

L1

L2

L3

L4

R4

R3

R2

AL





–

–

–







–

–

–

–

–

AX





–













–

–

 (*1)



AL + AX





–

–

–





–

–

–

–

–

–

SHT

–

–

–

–

–

Accessory

ON







 (*1)

* Accessories only for Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (NV-C, S and H), Earth Leakage Alarm Breakers (NF-Z) and single-phase 3-wire circuits (NF-N and NV-N) cannot be installed to R1, R2, R3 or R4. Note *1 It is impossible to simultaneously install AX on R2 and SHT on R3 or R4.

110

R1

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

Interpretation of type name (1) Alarm switch • Auxiliary switch AL Kind of accessory AL Alarm switch AX Auxiliary switch

2

SV (or SW)

4

Number of accessories to be installed When installing more than one AL or AX with SLT, specify the number.

L

Ampere frame For 30 to 250A frames For 400 to 800A frames

05 4

S

B

Installation position R Right pole, 2 or 3 poles Right pole, 4 poles RF Left pole L Right and left Blank

Blank B

With SLT (vertical lead wire terminal block) (with lead wires drawn out unless otherwise specified)

(2) Shunt tripping device Undervoltage tripping device SHT Kind of accessory Shunt tripping device SHT Undervoltage UVTN (*1) tripping device UVTS (*2)

A240 A440 A480 A550 D100 D125 Blank

A1

SV (or SW)

1

Voltage (SHT)

05 4

AC100-240V AC380-440V AC380-480V AC380-550V DC100V DC100-125V AC100-450/DC100-200V

8

Voltage (UVTN or UVTS) AD130 Switching between 100 to 130 V AC and 100 to 130 V DC A250 AC200-250V A480 AC380-480V

R

Ampere frame For 30 to 250A frames For 400•600•630A frames For 800A frames (3P) For 800A frames (4P)

Kind of switch Standard Minute load

S

Installation position R Right pole, 2 or 3 poles RF Right pole, 4 poles L Left pole Right and left Blank

With SLT (vertical lead wire terminal block) (with lead wires drawn out unless otherwise specified)

Notes *1 The circuit breaker cannot be reset if voltage is not applied to UVTN. (Non-reset type UVT) *2 The circuit breaker can be reset even if voltage is not applied to UVTS. (Reset type UVT)

6. Shunt Trip (SHT) JCoil J ratings (standard) Table 6-10-1

NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU

AC100-240 380-440 DC100

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV, NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU

AC100-240 380-550 DC100-125

Operating time (*2) (ms)

60

50

120

AC100-240 380-480 DC100-125

Provided

NF225-CWU

Input (VA) (*1) DC AC

Voltage (V)

15 or less

60 100V 20

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU

Compatible with 100 to 450 V AC and 100 to 200 V DC

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW NF1600-SEW/SDW

AC100-120 200-240 380-450 DC100

200V 50

100V

10

200V

35

5-15

380V 120 450V 170 200

70

7-15

300

100

15-25

6

Notes *1 Ensure that the voltage of the operating power supply for SHT is not dropped below the allowable operating voltage (70% of the rated minimum voltage value) by the input power. *2 The operating time is the time from when the rated voltage is applied to the shunt tripping device until the main contact of the circuit breaker starts opening. Remark: 1. The accessory is usable at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.

JCoil J ratings (list of available special voltage coils) Table 6-10-2 Model

VAC

Compatible with AC/DC

VDC

380- 440- 50024 25-27 24-48 48 50-55 60 440480 550 550 550 12

24 24-36 36 36-48 48

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, F160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV/UV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU

−

−



−

−

−

−

−

−

−



−



−



−

−

−

−

−



−

−

NF225-CWU

−

−



−

−



−

−

−

−



−



−



−



−

−

−



−

−

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU

−

−

−

−

−

−

−



−

−



−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

−



NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW NF1600-SEW/SDW



−

−



−

−



−

−







−



−



−





−

−

−

−

60

220110 125 220 200250 250 24-48

111

1 Accessories

Provision of coil burnout preventing switch

Model

6 Accessories

1

Internal Accessories

7. Undervoltage Trip (UVT) (1) Specifications for UVT and coil ratings Table 6-11 Specification Model NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU

–

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV/HRV NF125-CV/SV/HV/RGV/SEV/HEV/UV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/RGV/SEV/HEV/UV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW







AC/DC100-130V AC200-250V AC380-480V



 (*5)

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW





NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU

 (*4)

–

NF225-CWU

–



(*1)

Input Operating time (*2) (VA) (ms)

5

AC/DC24V AC/DC48V AC500-600V

(*3)

(*4)

Notes *1 *2 *3 *4 *5

Coil ratings Voltage (V) Standard voltage Special voltage AC/DC24V AC/DC48V

Reset type Non-reset type

30 or less

(*3)

Switching between 24/48 AC Switching between 500 to 550/600 AC Switching between 100 to 110 and 120 to 130 AC Switching between 24/48DC Switching between 200 to 220 and 230 to 250 AC Switching between 110/125DC Switching between 380 to 415 and 440 to 480 AC Switching between Switching between (*3) 100 and 110 DC 24/48 AC Switching between 24/48DC Switching between 110/125DC

5-30

5

5-35 5-30

30 or less

Some special voltage models vary in voltage range. The operating time is the time from when the undervoltage tripping device is set to the no-voltage state until the main contact starts opening. The accessory is usable at 50 Hz and 60 Hz. If UVT is turned on without excitation, the circuit breaker instantaneously opens and immediately trips. Only for installation on the left pole

(2) Reset type and non-reset type UVT

1 Accessories

6

JReset J type (Refer to Table 6-12.) The reset type UVT has a structure which does not trip a circuit breaker even if the UVT coil is not excited when the circuit breaker handle is in the OFF or reset position. Therefore, it keeps the circuit breaker in the reset state even if the coil is not excited when the breaker is reset electrically. When the coil in the unexcited state is turned on, the circuit breaker is normally tripped. However, the major contacts of some models of circuit breakers may instantaneously close, or, on circuit breakers with AX, the AX switches may instantaneously change over. For electrical interlock, use a non-reset type UVT. JNon-reset J type (Refer to Table 6-12.) When the UVT coil is not excited, the circuit breaker cannot be set to the off state even if the circuit breaker is tried to be reset from the tripped state. When the coil exciting voltage restores to the reference voltage or more, the circuit breaker can be reset to the off state.

(3) Time delay UVT l This type of UVT has a time delay in operation. l It can prevent operation upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure. Table 6-12 UVT module type name

U-05W

U-30W

112

Time delay

Voltage (V)

Standard voltage Special voltage AC24/48 AC100−120/200−240/380−450 AC380−450/460−550/600−690 Switching among AC220−250/380−450/460−550 (Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz) 0.1, 0.3 and 0.5 s DC24/48 (Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz) DC100−110 Switching among 0.5, 1 and 3 s

AC100−120/200−240/380−450 AC220−250/380−450/460−550 (Compatible with 50 Hz and 60 Hz)

−

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

(4) Structure of UVT The UVT mechanical unit is installed in a circuit breaker, and the UVT voltage module is installed on the outside of the circuit breaker. When the voltage drops, the UVT voltage module detects the voltage drop, and the UVT mechanical unit trips the circuit breaker. The UVT voltage module has a vertical lead wire terminal block and is normally installed on the body. The external module will be manufactured to order. lOutline drawing D

7 11 Terminal cover fixing hole 3x10, tapping screw (to be prepared by user)

3

Terminal cover

44.5 56

24.5

f4.5

44.5 29.5 3.5

D

C

8.5

2

7.5

7.5

Fig. 2

Terminal screw M3.5 Tightening torque: 0.9 to 1.2 N·m

A

8

90

57

Fig. 1 8

1

Terminal screw M3.5 Tightening torque: 0.9 to 1.2 N·m

44.5 56

B

84 (Terminal cover)

90 4

3

f4.5 4

1

100 80

2

Terminal cover fixing hole 3x10, tapping screw 8.5 (to be prepared by user)

24.5 11 5

56 44.5 3.5 Terminal cover

A

f4.5

80 100

8.5

44.5 3.5

Terminal screw M3.5 Tightening torque: 0.9 to 1.2 N·m

C

7.5

84 (Terminal cover) 57

7.5

Terminal cover fixing hole 3x10, tapping screw (to be prepared by user)

24.5 10 5

56 44.5 3.5

Terminal cover f4.5

8.5

5

4

100

55

92.5 (Terminal cover)

12

100 5

4

110 90

1

2

90 110

92.5 (Terminal cover) 55 12

3

1

2 3

Terminal cover 44.5 56

24.5

Terminal cover fixing hole 3x10, tapping screw (to be prepared by user)

29.5

B

44.5

Terminal screw M3.5 Tightening torque: 0.9 to 1.2 N·m

Fig. 3

Short-circuit protecting device, such as fuse

Short-circuit protecting device, such as fuse Terminal symbols D1/P1 D2/P2 J1/UC1 J2/UC2

8

Fig. 4

lExamples of connection

1 2 3 4

8

Terminal symbols 1 2 3 4 5

Control power supply terminal (COM) Control power supply terminal (rated voltage) UVT coil connecting terminal UVT coil connecting terminal

Remarks: 1 When the UVT voltage module is installed on the body (standard), the UVT is supplied with J1/UC1 and J2/UC2 terminals connected with the UVT coil. 2 When the UVT is installed on the left pole side, the UVT module terminal positions are reversed (on the power supply and load sides). Carefully connect the terminals.

Examples of connection

Examples of connection

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Table 6-13 Installation on right pole side Model NF50-SVFU NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF100-CVFU NF125-CV/SV/HV NF125-SVU/HVU NF125-UV NF125-SEV/HEV/RGV, NF250-CV/SV/HV/RGV/SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SVU/HVU NF250-UV NF225-CWU NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-SWU/HWU NF400-UEW(3P) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-SWU/HWU NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF-1600-SEW

Reference drawing

Fig. 1 Fig. 5

Fig. 3 Fig. 6

D1/P1 D2/P2 D3/P3 J1/UC1 J2/UC2

Control power supply terminal (COM) Control power supply terminal (rated voltage Lo) Control power supply terminal (rated voltage Hi) UVT coil connecting terminal UVT coil connecting terminal

Remarks: 1 When the UVT is used at the rated voltage Lo, connect the control voltage to D1/P1 and D2/P2 terminals. When the UVT is used at the rated voltage Hi, connect the control voltage to D1/P1 and D3/P3 terminals. (Ex.) 100 to 110/120 to 130 V AC (Rated voltage Lo/rated voltage Hi) 2 When the UVT voltage module is installed on the body (standard), the UVT is supplied with J1/UC1 and J2/UC2 terminals connected with the UVT coil. 3 When the UVT is installed on the left pole side, the UVT module terminal positions are reversed (on the power supply and load sides). Carefully connect the terminals.

Table 6-14 Installation on left pole side Variable dimensions B A 7.5 11 7.5 20.5 7.5 20.5 7.5 20.5 7.5 41.5 7.5 81.5 38

7.5

48 113 25.5

7.5 7.5 7.5

67.5

41.5

107.5 76.5 123.5 161

138.5 41.5 138.5 63

Model NV125-CV/SV/HV NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF400-ZCW/ZSW/ZEW NF400-SWU/HWU NF400-UEW(3P) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW, NF630-SWU/HWU NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW

Reference drawing Fig. 2 Fig. 5

Variable dimensions C D 20.5 7.5 38 7.5

67.5

41.5

107.5

138.5

76.5

41.5

123.5

138.5

Fig. 4 Fig. 6

113

6 1 Accessories

7 10

6 Accessories

Internal Accessories

1

8. Lead Wire Drawing JLead J wire lateral drawing … Available to all models Note *1 Except for BH, BH-P, BH-S, BH-PS, BH-D6, BH-D10, BH-DN, BV-D, BV-DN and KB-D.

JLead J wires drawing to load Table 6-15 Model applicable to lead wire drawing to load

(only front connection type)

NF30-CS

JSpecifications J for lead wires Table 6-16 Applicable model

Kind of lead wire Lead wire thickness Lead wire length Example of ring mark 0.4mm2

NF30-CS

1000A frame or above

Heat-resistant wire

30 to 800A frames except above models

0.75mm2 0.5mm2

450mm

98/ALa (Red), 96/ALb (Blue) 95/ALc (Gray), 14/AXa (Brown) 12/AXb (Black), 11/AXc (White) C1/S1 (Red), C2/S2 (Red) J1/UC1 (White), J2/UC2 (White) A terminal symbol is indicated on each lead wire with a ring mark.

9. Lead Wire Terminal Block (1) Vertical lead wire terminal block (SLT)

Remark: 1. Although the following models are applicable to lead wires drawn laterally, they are normally applicable to installation in close contact with the circuit breaker side faces. (The circuit breaker side faces have grooves.)

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV~NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV, NF125-RGV NF250-RGV, NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV~NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV~NV250-CV/SV/HV NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-SEV/HEV NF50-SVFU, NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU/HVU, NF250-SVU/HVU, NF225-CWU NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU (When a 4-pole model among the above models has accessories installed on the right pole side, the lead wires are 400 mm long.)

The lead wire terminal blocks for plug-in terminal blocks are available (P-LT). The drilling size of these terminal blocks differs from the standard size. Consult us for details. For a flush plate type circuit breaker, a terminal block will be installed on the circuit breaker rear face. (Specify as FP-LT.) Note *1 When the circuit breaker body is equipped with internal accessories and electrical operation device of motor-driven type (2) or spring charge type (2), the circuit breaker is normally provided with a lead wire terminal block.

JMCCB J Table 6-17-1 Table of variable dimensions

1 Accessories

E

25

10.5

B D

6

10.5

Terminal cover (transparent) 18

A

F 12.5

C Terminal screw M3.5

A 4 7 7 7 7

B 4.5 26.5 26.5 87.5 119

C 44.5 54 54 54 54

D 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5

E 4.5 26.5 26.5 87.5 119

F 7 7 7 7 7

G 10 14 14 14 14

H 22 26 26 26 26

J 34 38 38 38 38

7

44

54

86.5

44

7

14

26

38

7 7 7 7

27.5 28.5 47.5 37

54 54 54 54

86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5

27.5 28.5 47.5 37

7 7 7 7

14 14 14 14

26 26 26 26

38 38 38 38

79.5

54

86.5

79.5

7

14

26

38

88.5 173 119.5 135.5

54 54 54 54

86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5

88.5 173 119.5 135.5

7 7 7 7

14 14 14 14

26 26 26 26

38 38 38 38

41 62.5 138

Note *1 The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details. Remark: 1. Terminal screw tightening torque: M3.5 … 0.9 to 1.2 N·m

J H

114

Model (*1) NF30-CS NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV NF125-UV NF250-UV NF125-SEV/HEV/RGV, NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV/RGV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU/HVU NF225-CWU NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-SWU/HWU NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-SWU/HWU NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1600-SEW (*1) NF400-UEW(3P) (*1) NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW

G

8 13.5

6 Accessories 1 Internal Accessories

Table 6-17-2 Table of variable dimensions

JELCB J Terminal cover (transparent)

A

F H

D

25

10.5

B

10.5

18

A 16.5 7 7 7 7 7 7

B 17 26.5 36.5 26.5 47.5 44 54

C 54 54 54 54 54 54 54

D 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5

E 16.5 7 7 7 7 7 7

F 17 26.5 36.5 26.5 47.5 44 54

G 54 54 54 54 54 54 54

H 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5

J 6 7 7 7 7 7 7

K 10.5 14 14 14 14 14 14

L 22.5 26 26 26 26 26 26

M 34.5 38 38 38 38 38 38

41

79.5

54

86.5

26.5

79.5

52

92

7

14

26

38

41

88.5

54

86.5

26.5

88.5

52

92

7

14

26

38

Notes *1 The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details. Remarks: 1. Terminal screw tightening torque: M3.5 … 0.9 to 1.2 N·m 2. The lead wire terminal block for TBL is provided on the right pole side. However, the lead wire terminal blocks for TBL of NV30-FA and NV50-FA are provided on the left pole side.

J 12.5

C

Model NV50-SVFU NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV100-CVFU NV125-CV/SV/HV NV125-SVU/HVU NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-SVU/HVU NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW (*1) NV800-SEW/HEW

G

Terminal screw M3.5

M K

8 13.5

E

L

J14-terminal J SLT SLT for installing three or more internal accessories on the left pole side Terminal cover (transparent)

Model

11 41

115

11

11

9

B

25

7 Terminal screw M3.5 A

Table 6-17-3 MCCB NF400-CW/SW/SEW NF400-HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW NF630-HEW/REW NF400-UEW(3P) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW NF800-HEW/REW NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

ELCB NV400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW −

A

B

20

60

117

100

20

69

−

117

116

−

35

154

NV800-SEW/HEW

Remark: 1. The terminal positions are different from those shown in the left figure. Consult us for details.

17

75

10. Test Button Module (TBM) l The test button is kept pressed while control input voltage is applied to the button.

Table 6-18 18

18

Control input (VA)

1.5 VA or less

1 VA or less

Reference drawing

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Note *1 Unless otherwise specified, the module will be manufactured for 100 to 240 V AC and 100 to 240 V DC. In the case of 24 V DC, specify the voltage. Remark: 1. The length of the lead wires to be connected to TBM1 and 2 shall be 100 m or more.

10.5

86.5

TBM1

Compatible with 100 to 240 AC and 100 to 240 DC (DC24) (*1)

7 Fig. 1

12

6.5 On a single-phase 3-wire circuit breaker with neutral pole protection, this terminal is used as an overvoltage detection terminal.

Fig. 2

12.5

(10.5)

TBM1 TBM2

92 (Terminal cover)

TBM2

(10.5)

Control input Rated voltage (V)

NV400-CW/SW NV630-CW/SW NV400-SEW~NV800-SEW NV400-HEW~NV800-HEW NV400-REW

10.5

Model

NV32-SV NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV50-SVFU NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU

On a single-phase 3-wire circuit breaker with neutral pole protection, this terminal is used as an overvoltage detection terminal.

For a flush plate type with 250A frame or below, the external dimensions of the flush plate type differ from the standard dimensions.

115

6 1 Accessories

(When ELCB of time delay type is used, apply voltage for 2 seconds or more.) l The test button module is supplied with voltage through a circuit isolated from the main circuit. It can share the control sequence with SHT of a molded case circuit breaker. l Unlike TBL, the test button modules can be connected in parallel. l The module is normally provided with a vertical lead wire terminal block (SLT).

6 Accessories

Internal Accessories

1

11. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) The pre-alarm is a function to output an alarm when the load current exceeds the preset current value. It is helpful in securing continuous power supply and preventive maintenance. It can be fitted to electronic circuit breakers with a frame size from 125 to 1600 A.

j 125 and 250A frames d Pre-alarm module (PAL module)

The standard modules have SLT. Other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side. A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 240 V AC and DC) is necessary. The control power supply voltage range is 85 to 246 V AC/DC, and the required volt-ampere is 5 VA.

Table 6-19-1 Model

Switching capacity Contact output (1a)

NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

Pre-alarm characteristics

■ Applicable models NF125-SEV, NF250-SEV NV125-SEV, NV250-SEV

Pre-alarm operating characteristics

1h

Press the reset button, or turn off the control power supply.

Terminal arrangement

25

18 Long time delay operating time, TL 12-60-80-100s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

■ Applicable models NF125-HEV, NF250-HEV NV125-HEV, NV250-HEV

Control power supply P1 P2

25

Operating time

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Resetting method

DC 30V 2A DC100V 0.3A

Dimensional drawing of pre-alarm module

4h 2h

AC125V 2A AC250V 2A

1min 30s 20s 10s Pre-alarm current Ip Inx (0.7-0.75-0.8-0.852s 0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10% 5s

1s

0.2s 0.1s

60 70

100 125

200

300 400 500 600 700

Pre-alarm setting knob

Pre-alarm operation indicating LED

Pre-alarm operation indicating LED

Reset button

Reset button

133

Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±20% 2 (at200%)

0.5s

Pre-alarm setting knob

Pre-alarm output PALa

1000

Current (% to rated current In)

PALc

Terminal screw M3.5

d Pre-alarm LED indication

When the load current exceeds the preset current value, the LED lamp on the pre-alarm module front panel starts blinking. When the pre-alarm output is given, the lamp stops blinking and turns on.

d Pre-alarm current setting (IP setting)

The pre-alarm current can be set to the rated current In × 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95 or 1.0 with the knob on the pre-alarm module front panel.

j 400 A frame or above d Solid state relay (SSR) output (PAL lead)

The lead wires are drawn out. On the right pole side, only internal accessories with lead wires drawn out can be installed. A control power supply is unnecessary.

Table 6-19-2 Switching capacity Solid state relay (SSR) – Non-contact output

Model

Resetting method When the load current becomes lower than the preset current value, the alarm is reset.

AC/DC24 to 240V 20mA

d Pre-alarm module (PAL module)

The standard modules have SLT. Other internal accessories cannot be installed on the right pole side. A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC) is necessary except for NF-ZEW. The control power supply voltage range is 80 to 242 V AC, and the required volt-ampere is 10 VA.

Table 6-19-3 Switching capacity Contact output (1a)

Model NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

Pre-alarm characteristics

100 V AC or 200 V AC, 2 A

Detailed drawing of pre-alarm module

Pre-alarm module output rating AC

Pre-alarm operating characteristics

5h

Voltage V 200 100

2h 1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

PALOUT LED Long time delay operating time, TL 12-60-100-150s (at 200%)

6min 4min

RESET

1min

PALa Pre-alarm output

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s 1s

Reset switch

86.5

150s 100s 60s

2min

P2 Pre-alarm current Ip Inx (0.7-0.75-0.8-0.850.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%

12s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= (at200%) 2 60 70

100 125

200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 Current (% to rated current In)

Resetting method Press the reset button, or turn off the control power supply.

10h

Operating time

1 Accessories

6

NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW NF400-UEW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

P1

Control power supply

Current (A) Resistive load Inductive load 3 2 3 2

A control power supply (compatible with 100 to 200 V AC) is necessary. For the wiring method, see the following figure. (The control power supply voltage range is 80 to 242 V AC.) The required volt-ampere is 10 VA.

Vertical lead wire terminal block PALa Indicating lamp (example)

(PALc) 18

P2 P1

Control power supply PALc

d Pre-alarm LED display (standard device)

When the load current exceeds the preset current value, the LED lamp on the circuit breaker front panel starts blinking. When the pre-alarm output is given, the lamp stops blinking and turns on.

d Pre-alarm current setting (IP setting)

The pre-alarm current can be set to the rated current In × 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95 or 1.0 with the knob on the circuit breaker front panel.

116

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

1. F-Type Operating Handle Operating handle of breaker mount type to be installed to circuit breaker body DAppearance D (Color: Munsell N1.5)

Dust-proof packing (optional)

DDThe handle provides an isolating function in combination with the circuit breaker body (except F10SW and above). DDIt has a safety device which prevents the circuit breaker turning on while the door is open. DDIt can be locked in the OFF position. (Up to 3 commercially available padlocks (35 mm and 40 mm) can be fitted. A type which can be locked in the ON or OFF position can be manufactured. Specify the type if required.) On circuit breakers with a frame size of 1000A or above, the handle can be locked in the ON or OFF position. (If it is necessary to lock the handle only in the OFF position, specify so.) DDIt is in protection class IP54 (IEC 60529). (For circuit breakers with a frame size of 1000A or above, the protection class (IEC 60529) is IP3X (IP5X when dust-proof packing is provided).

ON

ON ED IPP

TR

ED

150

150

OFF

B

O FF

RE

R

G

M Trip button

N Trip button

B

Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2 35

Release knob

83

A±2

150

Fig. 1

150 Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2

41

62

(a)

78

(b)

Circuit breaker

For 30 to 250 A frames

4-f15

For 400 to 800 A frames

Circuit breaker

(b)

(a)

(b)

(b)

(a)

Center of circuit breaker handle

Center of circuit breaker (a)

(b)

(b)

(a)

F C

E

(f)

11

D

D (b)

C

C

E

(g)

(4H+120) (5H+85) 0 or more or more or more

DDoor D lock withstand load

D

Center of operating handle

Center of circuit breaker handle

J

Center of circuit breaker

0 or more

Remarks: 1. The handle is opened and closed in the projection area of the handle and does not run over the projection area of the circuit breaker (except when the auxiliary handle is provided.) 2. When the operating handle is fitted to NV, the test button cannot be pressed easily. If necessary, use a circuit breaker with TBL or TBM. When using an Earth Leakage Alarm Breaker, use the externally resetting type (ECA-SLT RST) or automatically resetting type (ARS).

(e)

DDimensional D drawings of circuit breaker mounting holes Center of circuit breaker handle

Hinge on left side Hinge on right side H X2 X1 H Less than 10 170 or more (5H+85) 0 or more (5H+120) or more 10 or more or more

(4H+120) (8H+150) For 1000 to 1600 A 0 or more 0 or more frames or more or more

112

(d)

X2

DDThe right drawing shows the relationship between the hinges and circuit breaker viewed from the load side of the circuit breaker.

Center of hinge and circuit breaker

f1 18

Center of operating handle 112

Right hinge

L

112

Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

(c)

F

f9 0

Center of operating handle

78

Front plate

Circuit breaker

X1

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle

112

Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

Interlock engaging part F(N)

Fig. 3

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle 4-f15

78

78

f9 0

62

Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle 4-f12 Circuit breaker F

5

f6

4-f12

104

A 2

50

Auxiliary handle (Note)

A±2

Fig. 2

f1 18

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle



114

Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2

f20

DDimensional D drawings of front plate drilling 4-f12

F10SW~F120UR

Operating handle

Note Auxiliary handles are provided with F10SW, F10SW4P and F120UR as standard. Auxiliary handles (F-HT) are provided for F-4S ~ F-6SUL as option.

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle

PFL

Left hinge

T SE

ET N ES O P E

L

Trip button

DCenter D of hinge and breaker

Packing

TR

IP P

K Trip button

Decorative board Front plate Handle

Packing

Front plate

Delivery category

H

Center of operating handle

Release knob

Operating handle type name

H

DOutline D drawings

Type nema

F(N) F-05~F-2 F-4~F-8

L(mm) 50 68

500

E

(h)

Table 6-20 Summary of dimensions

F-05SV2 F-05SVE2 F-05SV F-05SVE (*2) F-1SV2, F-1SVE2 F-1SV F-1SVE F-1UV, F-1UVE

Door opening position OFF Reset position position

–



–



–



–



–



F-2SV F-2SVE

–



F-2UV, V-2UVE F-1SVUL F-2SVUL F-03SVUL2 F-03SVUL F-05SVUL2 F-05SVUL F-2SUL F-4S F-4SE F-4U F-4UE F-8S F-8SE F-8U F-8UE F-4SUL F-6SUL

– – – – – – – –

       

–



–



–



F10SW (*3) F10SW4P (*3)

–



– –

 

–



Reference drawing

Applicable model MCCB

NF32-SV NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF32-SV NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF125-HV NF125-UV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RV NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-RV NF250-UV NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU NF50-SVFU

Number of poles

2P

ELCB

–

NV32-SV 3P • 4P NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV – 2P 3P • 4P NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 2P • 3P • 4P

2P • 3P • 4P

–

NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV 2P • 3P • 4P NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV

2P • 3P • 4P 3P 3P 2P 3P 2P 3P 3P

– NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU

3P

–

NV50-SVFU

– NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU – NF225-CWU NV400-CW, SW, SEW, HEW, REW NF400-CW, SW, SEW, HEW, REW 2P, 3P, 4P NV630-CW, SW, SEW, HEW NF630-CW, SW, SEW, HEW, REW NF400-UEW NF800-CEW, SDW, SEW NF800-HEW, REW NF800-UEW NF400-UEW(4P) NF400-SWU/HWU NF630-SWU/HWU NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW/SDW NF1600-SEW/SDW

2P, 3P, 4P NV800-SEW, HEW

Dimensional Drilling plan Number of poles drawing

–

f

2P • 3P

g

b

–

f

3P • 4P

g c

–

Dimensions (mm)

A (*1)

25

b

3P, 4P

d

g

183

–

e

h

280

d

g

183

35

105 107

30 35 9 18 13 25 35

80 105 104 107

–

e

h

280

– –

3P –

d

g

183

–

–

d

g

221

Notes *1 The dimensions for the front connection type are shown. On some models of the rear connection type and plug-in type, the reference surface for mounting the circuit breaker may change. *2 For the 4-pole plug-in type, a special handle is required. Consult us for details. *3 If a handle which can be locked only in the OFF position is required, specify so. *4 The circuit breaker can be tripped by operating the trip button while the door is open. *5 Do not remove the sponge packing used to secure the protection class IP51. Fit the supplied packing without fail. *6 The handle cannot be used when the circuit breaker is installed on IEC 35-mm rails.

–

126

M4 screw or f5

201 123 126

Trip button position (*4)

–

–

–

–

31

86

L

–

K

38 6

100.5 61.5

K L K

–

–

L

–

–

L

M

82.5 111 126 194

–

234

20

243

– 70

–

4P

104

44

3P 3P

Fig. 3

J

N

30

107

3P, 4P

2P, 3P

G

111

104

h h g f g f g g

Fig. 2

F

N

172

h

c c b

3P

E

15 105

– 3P 3P 2P 3P – 3P –

b

D

13

f

a

C

105

b

3P • 4P Fig. 1

B

M6 screw or f7

–

290

23.5

44 70

194 243

–

70

375

M8 screw or f10

–

N L –

– –

–

Mounting screw

(a) Circuit breaker mounting screw (2 pcs.) (b) Circuit breaker handle mounting screw (2 pcs.) F-05SV2 F-05SVE2 F-1SV2 F-1SVE2 F-05SRUL2 F-03SVUL2 F-05SVUL2 Only the screws (b) are used for the following models.

(a)(b) Circuit breaker mounting screw (4 pcs.)

200

Remarks: 1. The handles with E in their model names are designed for emergency stop devices. Their delivery category is . 2. The standard handles are Reset Open Type which can open the doors only when they are reset to open. OFF Open type handles which can open the doors when they are in the OFF position can be manufactured to order. 3. A handle which can be operated and can indicate the ON and OFF positions in the same manner as the standard models even if the circuit breaker is installed horizontally can be manufactured to order. 4. F10SW and higher models do not conform to the isolation function. 5. Handles which are opened and closed in the OFF position can be opened also in the reset position.

117

6 2 Accessories

Type name

6 Accessories

2

External Accessories

DInstallation D procedure For details, please refer to Operating Handle Installation Manual supplied with the product. q Installation to a breaker

Install the operating handle to the circuit breaker in accordance with the following procedure.

250A frame and below

400 to 1600A frames Center of operating handle and center of circuit breaker

Circuit breaker mounting screw (2 pcs.) (a)

Circuit breaker mounting screw (supplied with body)

(Power supply side)

Installation procedure

Spacer for installation of operating section (supplied)

Handle

(Installation procedure)

Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)

(Load side)

2 poles 3 poles 4 poles

q Remove the circuit breaker cover screws in the same positions as the operating handle mounting holes. w Install the circuit breaker with the four circuit breaker mounting screws. e Fit the spacer(s) for installation of operating handle between the circuit breaker and operating handle. (The number of the spacers varies depending on the model.) r Install the operating handle with the supplied operating handle mounting screws. Center of operating handle and center of circuit breaker

Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)

Installation position of operating handle with respect to circuit breaker (Note 1) Operating handle mounting screw (2 pcs.) (b)

In the case of F-05SV2, F-1SV2, F-05SRUL2, F-05SUL2 and F-1SUL2 q Install the circuit breaker on the panel with the two circuit breaker mounting Tighten the circuit breaker and operating handle screws through the holes (a). together with the supplied two operating handle w Install the operating handle with the mounting screws. supplied two operating handle mounting screws through the holes (b).

(Installation procedure)

Handle

Operating section mounting screw (supplied)

(In the case of F-4S to F-6SUL) The operating handle mounting screws are tapping screws without washers or spring washers.

3 poles 4 poles Installation position of operating handle with respect to circuit breaker

Note *1 In the case of F-05SRUL2, the center of the operating handle is the same as the center of the circuit breaker.

w Installation of decorative board and retaining board Drill holes in the door according to the drilling size shown on the previous page, and tighten the decorative board and retaining board with the supplied countersunk screws. In the case of 800A frame or below, fit the supplied packing to the position shown right.

d Operation Lock Devices (1) Padlock B

Handle

Padlock Dimensions

C

Use commercially available padlocks. Applicable A (Nominal size) B model

Interlock lever Interlock engaging part Retaining board Packing (for 800A frame or below) Front plate (door)

(mm)

C

35

19

5

40

22 or 23

5.5

All models A

Dimension C: Maximum 8mm.

(2) Lockout Devices (Scissors Lock)

Decorative board Countersunk screw

d Door locking mechanism The panel door can be opened only when the operating handle is operated to open (reset). (On F-4S to F10SW, the door lock is held in the released state even if the handle is returned to OFF.) The door can be opened when the handle is in the ON position if the release knob is operated with a tool.

2 Accessories

6

d Operation locking mechanism Circuit breakers with a frame size of 800A or below can be locked by setting the handle in the OFF position. (Operating handles which can lock circuit breakers in the ON or OFF position can be manufactured.) Operate the locking part, and lock the handle with padlocks. Up to three padlocks can be fitted. Lockout hasps (scissors locks) can be used. If the circuit breaker trips even when the operating handle is locked in the ON position, also the operating handle indicates that it has tripped. F-2SUL or below: Only when one 35-mm padlock (weighing 70 g or less) is used F-4S or above: Only when one 40-mm padlock (weighing 100 g or less) is used To 800A frame or below, padlocks with dimension C of 3 mm to 8 mm can be applied. For 1000A or above, padlocks with dimension of 3 mm to 6 mm can be applied. (When using padlocks of 3 mm or less, please consult us.) d Circuit breaker installation direction (except UL 489 listed circuit breakers) We can supply circuit breakers on which the handles and their ON and OFF positions are in the same directions as on vertically installed circuit breakers even when they are installed horizontally. The door drilling size is identical. If you intend to install an operating handle on a horizontally installed circuit breaker, specify “Y” (horizontal installation with power supply on the left) or “Z” (horizontal installation with power supply on the right) at the end of the model name. (Ex.: F-4S Y) Power supply

Power supply

Lord

Power supply

Lord

d How to order For 800A frame or below, specify the following specification symbols together with the model name. · Operation lock: LF·················Lock in OFF position · Operation lock: LN·················Lock in ON or OFF position · Door opening: DR··················Reset to open · Operation lock: DF·················Open in OFF position · Installation direction: Blank····Power supply upward · Installation direction: Y···········Power supply on left · Operation lock: Z···················Power supply on right For a standard product with a frame size of 1000A or above, specify the model name. When it is required to enable the operation lock only in the OFF position, specify the model name and “only lock in OFF position.” If you intend to seal the release knob, place an order for the release protection. (Lot: 10 pcs.) d Interpretation of model name

Lord

d Sealing of release knob The use of an optional part, Release Protection “F-RCS”, can prevent the panel door being opened by operating the release knob. (800A frame or below)

118

Release knob

When F-RCS is not used

F-RCS

When F-RCS is used (sealed state)

(1) For 800A frame or below F – 1 SV UL E 2 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) F: Operating handle type name 2) 1: Circuit breaker group (0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8) 3) SV: Classification of circuit breaker (S, SV, H, U, UV, SR or SG) 4) UL: Blank···General product UL···UL 489 listed product 5) E: Blank···Standard E···For emergency stop 6) 2: Blank···3P or 4P 2···2P (2) For 1000A frame or above 10 SW 4P F 2) 3) 4) 1) 1) F: Operating handle type name 2) 4: Circuit breaker A frame (10 or 120) 3) SW: Series name 4) 4P: Number of poles (4P) * Not indicated for 3P

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

2. V-Type Operating Handle

Operating handle of door mount type consisting of operating section to be mounted on circuit breaker body and operating handle on panel door

DAppearance D (Color: Munsell N1.5)

d The handle provides an isolation function in combination with the circuit breaker body. d Conforming to the safety regulations of EN Standard (EN 60204-1) d Protection class (IEC 60529) IP65 as standard d The handle can be locked only in the OFF position with up to three commercially available padlocks (35 mm or 40 mm). d The panel door can be opened in the OFF position. In the ON and trip positions, the panel door is locked and cannot be opened. However, the door can be opened even in the ON and trip positions by operating the release part with a tool.

DCenter D of hinge and breaker

DOutline D drawings Front plate

Front plate

Front plate

Front plate

ED

TR

I

PP

R

M Trip button

Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2 54 N Trip button

A

RE

12 67 70

K Trip button L Trip M button Trip button

B C±2

Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2

90 N Trip button

Fig. 1

A B C (stationary type) ±2 D (adjustable type) ±2

54

Thickness: A B 1.2 to 3.2 C (stationary type) ±2 62 D (adjustable type) ±2

140

Fig. 2

Circuit breaker

Fig. 3

DDimensional D drawings for front plate drilling

X

Center of operating handle

(a)

54

For 30 to 250 A frames

E

Center of operating handle

For 400 to 800 A frames

3

104

(b)

J

F

F

F

(d)

(e)

F

J

Center of operating handle

(f)

Center of operating handle

F J

(g)

0 or more

F(N) 30 to 800A frames

4 poles 3 poles CL C L

200

Circuit breaker

G

E

G F/2

J

G

Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

G

G

G

Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

Center of circuit breaker Center of circuit breaker handle

Center of circuit breaker

Circuit breaker Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

Center of circuit breaker handle

E

Center of circuit breaker

Center of circuit breaker and circuit breaker handle

Center of Center of circuit circuit breaker breaker

Center of Center of circuit breaker and circuit breaker circuit breaker handle handle

X

5H+100 or more 8H+150 or more

DDoor D lock withstand load

(c)

DDimensional D drawings of circuit breaker mounting holes Center of circuit breaker handle

H

* The above figure shows the relationship viewed from the load side.

ø6

4 ø5

0 ø4

40

4-ø10

Center of circuit breaker

104

40

E

ø9

X

Relationship between hinges and circuit breaker viewed from load side of circuit breaker

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle Center of ø9 circuit breaker

54

Center of circuit breaker handle and operating handle

Right hinge

Left hinge

Note Auxiliary handles (F-HT) are provided for V-4S ~ V-6SUL as option.

Center of operating handle

H

H SE

T

OF F

140

OFF

ET ES

70

90

TRI

PP

F(N)

ON

ON

ED

F/2 F

F

J

(h)

C L

J

F Center of circuit breaker and operating handle

(j)

Table 6-21 Summary of dimension Adjustable type

MCCB

V-05SV2 V-05SVE2

NF32-SV NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV

V-05SV V-05SVE

NF32-SV NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV

V-1SV2, V-1SVE2

NF125-CV, NF125-SV

Number of poles 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P

NF125-CV, NF125-SV (*1) NF125-HV Adjusting unit V-AD3S is V-1UV mounted on NF125-UV V-1UVE stationary type. NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-SGV NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV, NF125-RGV 2P, 3P V-2SV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV V-2SVE NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV 4P NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-RGV 2P, 3P V-2UV NF250-UV V-2UVE 4P V-03SVUL2 2P − NF50-SVFU V-03SVUL 3P 2P V-05SVUL2 (*1) NF100-CVFU V-05SVUL Adjusting unit 3P V-1SVUL NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU 3P V-AD3S is mounted on V-2SVUL NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU 3P stationary type. NF225-CWU V-2SUL 3P V-4S NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P, 4P V-4SE NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW (*1) V-4U NF400-UEW 3P Adjusting unit V-4UE V-AD3L is V-8S NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P, 4P mounted on V-8SE stationary type. NF400-SWU/HWU V-4SUL 3P V-6SUL NF630-SWU/HWU 3P V-1SV V-1SVE

Notes

Reference drawing ELCB

Number of poles

−

Drilling plan

−

−

−

−

NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV

b

4P

f

−

162 300 39

−

− 2P 3P − 3P 3P 3P 3P

− 3P 3P −

*1 For the adjustable type, purchase the optional adjusting unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L. *2 The dimensions of the adjustable type models provided with the adjusting unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L are shown. *3 When using the operating handle for a plug-in type model with a frame size of 250A or below, specify so. *4 The dimensions on the front connection type are shown. For the rear connection and plug-in types, separately consult us. *5 The circuit breaker can be tripped by operating the trip button while the door is open. (The trip button position varies depending on the model.) *6 The handle cannot be used when the circuit breaker is installed on IEC 35-mm rails.

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 2

a b b

c

61

−

125

39

25

L 111

N

30

M4 screw 172 or f5

L

e

41

126 35

37.5 39 39

76

61

125

−

−

−

61

− − 125 162 300

61

125 162 300

61

125 162 300

97

191 233 300

−

194 288 330 397

20

97

191 233 300

− 6 −

−

K 201

9 18 12.5 25 30 35 35 44

6

N

15

30.5

41

39

j

Trip button position (*5)

162 300

g h d e d e g

h

J

−

j Fig. 3

G

12.5 −

−

−

− −

Fig. 2

d e f e f g h e

− NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU − NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 3P, 4P NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW

NV800-SEW/HEW

−

e

3P

− NV50-SVFU

B

d

NV32-SV 2P, 3P NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV − − − − 3P NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV 4P −

A

Dimensions (mm) Stationary Adjustable type type(*2) E F D D C (min) (max)

82.5 M4 111 screw f5 or 123 126 126

M N N L L K −

194

70

234 M6 screw 243 or f7

44 70

194 243

−

Remarks 1. The products whose model names contain E are designed for emergency stop. The delivery category is d. That of V-05SVE is d. 2. When the operating handle is fitted to NV, the test button cannot be pressed easily. If necessary, use a circuit breaker with TBL or TBM. When using an Earth Leakage Alarm Breaker, use the externally resetting type (ECA-SLT) or automatically resetting type (ARS).

119

2 Accessories

Stationary type

Applicable model

Dimensional drawing

Type name

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

DInstallation D procedure For details, please refer to Operating Handle Installation Manual supplied with the product. q Installation to a breaker

Install the operating handle to the circuit breaker in accordance with the following procedure. 400 to 800A frames (Installation procedure)

q Operating handle for 3- or 4-pole circuit breaker Set the rotary plate of the operating section to the OFF (symbol O) position, and fit the plate to the circuit breaker with the supplied operating section mounting screws and nuts. Install the circuit breaker to the panel with the circuit breaker mounting screws (2 pcs.). w Operating handle for 2-pole circuit breaker Install the operating section together with the circuit breaker to the panel with the supplied operating section mounting screws (2 pcs.)

q Remove the circuit breaker cover screws (4 pcs.) in the same positions as the operating handle mounting holes. w Install the circuit breaker with the circuit breaker mounting screws (4 pcs.). e Fit the supplied operating section mounting spacers (4 pcs.) between the circuit breaker and operating handle. r Set the rotary plate to the OFF (symbol O) position, and install the operating section to the circuit breaker with the supplied operating section mounting screws. Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)

Nut M4 (2 pcs.): Except for 2-pole circuit breaker

Circuit breaker mounting screw (M6, 4 pcs.) (supplied with body)

Operating section

Spacer for installation of operating section (supplied)

Rotary plate Projection

(Load side) Projection

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker cover screws (Remove.)

Rotary plate pin Operating section

Circuit breaker mounting screw (2 pcs.)

w Installation of operating handle section Drill a hole in the door according Operating handle section mounting screw to the dimensional drawing for (250A frame or below: 2 pcs. 400A frame or above: 4 pcs.) front plate drilling given on the Operating previous page, and install the handle section operating handle section in accordance with the following Washer (2 pcs.) procedure. · Tighten the operating handle section from the back of the front plate. Temporarily tighten the screws to center the section in the hole. · Set the handle of the operating Handle Front plate handle section to the OFF state, tighten the front plate, and make sure that the handle can be smoothly turned to the ON and OFF positions. Turn the handle to the right and left in the OFF state, and make sure that OFF is displayed. If OFF is not displayed, move the operating handle section up and down and to the right and left for adjustment. (Take care that the operating handle section is in parallel with the circuit breaker.) Then, open the front plate, and finally tighten the screws.

2 Accessories

d Door locking mechanism The operating handle is provided with an interlock mechanism to prevent the door opening in the ON and TRIP positions. In the OFF position, the door can be opened. However, the door can be opened in the ON or TRIP position by pressing the release knob in the arrow direction with a tool (3 mm wide and 1.8 mm thick).

Note The adjusting unit is not applicable to 2-pole external type circuit breakers. If it is used on a 2-pole external type circuit breaker, the positions may not be correctly displayed.

Shaft

Locking hole Operating section Padlock

Warning mark

Joint clamp screw

Make adjustments with the adjusting unit as stated below. qExternal dimension drawing

wCalculation of shaft cutting allowance

Front plate

Front plate

Thickness: 1.2 to 3.2

V-1SV V-1SVUL V-1SUL Release knob

Operating section

Joints

Min Max Dimensions (mm) Min

Max

P

Cutting allowance

V-05SV V-05SVUL

d Adjusting unit The height from the circuit breaker mounting surface to the panel door can be adjusted by fitting the optional adjusting unit V-AD3S or V-AD3L. Cut the shaft of the adjusting unit according to the height.

120

Operating section mounting screw (supplied) (4 pcs.)

Type name

d Operation locking mechanism q Operating handle section Operation lock can be set only in the OFF Position. Up to three commercially available padlocks (A = 35 or 40 mm) can be fitted. Lockout hasps (scissors locks) can be used. When the operating handle section is locked with padlocks, also the door is locked. w Operating section The operating section can be locked so that the circuit breaker will not be turned on carelessly when the inside of the panel is inspected with the panel door open. Fit a padlock through the hole in the operating section of the operating handle.

Rotary plate Rotary plate pin

Shaft

162

300

V-2SV V-2SVUL V-2SUL V-2SGUL

X 175

180

Cutting allowance

(Cutting allowance)(P max)(panel size) X = 300 mm - P

318

V-4S

Shaft

V-8S

233

Calculation

8

Operating sectiuon mounting screw (2 pcs.)

6

(Power supply side)

10

Installation procedure

250A frame and below (Installation procedure)

300

V-4SUL V-6SUL

X 109

Cutting allowance

Note The unit is applicable to operating handles for emergency stop (E).

d Padlocks The user must prepare padlocks. The dimensions of the padlocks are the same as those shown on page 129. d How to order Specify the model name of the operating handle. For adjustable type, place an order for the adjustment unit. (One lot includes 1 pc.) 250A frame or below: V-AD3S 400 to 800A frames: V-AD3L d Interpretation of model name (1) For 800A frame or below V – 1 S UL E 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

V: 1: S: UL: E: 2:

2 6)

Operating handle type name Circuit breaker group (0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8) Classification of circuit breaker (S, SV, H, U, UV) Blank···General product UL···UL 489 listed product Blank···Standard E···For emergency stop Blank···3P or 4P 2···2P

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

3. Terminal Covers

C

A

B

The terminal covers are used to avoid exposure of live parts. Many kinds of terminal covers, including large terminal covers (TC-L), small terminal covers (TC-S), transparent terminal covers (TTC), rear terminal covers (BTC) and plug-in terminal covers (PTC), for various models and applications are available, and they are helpful. (The terminal covers cannot be fitted to electrically operated circuit breakers of spring charged type (2) and motor-drive type (2). The standard terminal covers can be used for the spring charged type (1). For the motor-drive type, special terminal covers can be manufactured. Consult us for details.) d Quick terminal covers These covers are very convenient because they can be fitted only by inserting them into the mounting holes in the circuit breaker body. To remove the terminal cover, shift the projections of the terminal cover with the tip of a slotted screwdriver or finger, and draw it out.

ON

TC-L TC-S TTC

DTable D of variable dimensions Table 6-22 Large terminal covers (TC-L)

TCL-05SV2 (*2)(*8) TCL-05SV2L (*2)(*9) (*3)(*8)

TCL-05SV3L (*3)(*9) TCL-05SV4 (*3) TCL-1SV2 (*2) TCL-1SV3

(*3)

TCL-1SV4

(*3)

TCL-2SV3

(*3)(*10)

TCL-2SV3L (*3)(*11)

TCL-2SV4

(*3)(*5)

TCL-4SW3

(*3)

TCL-4SW4

(*3)

TCL-8SW3

(*3)

TCL-8UW3 TCL-8SW4

(*3)

TCL-8UW4 TCL-10SW3 TCL-10SW4 TCL-03SVU2 (*3) TCL-03SVU3 (*3) TCL-05SVU2 (*2)(*8) TCL-05SU2L (*2)(*9) TCL-05SVU3 (*3)(*8) TCL-05SVU3L (*3)(*9) TCL-1SVU3

(*3)

White 2, 3 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7) White 3 NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7) Transparent 3 NF800-UEW (*4) NF800-SEW/HEW White 4 NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7) NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*7) Transparent 4 NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW (*4) NF1000-SEW Transparent 3 NF1250-SEW/SDW NF1000-SEW Transparent 4 NF1250-SEW/SDW White 2 NF50-SVFU White 3 NF50-SVFU White 2 NF100-CVFU White 2 NF100-CVFU White 3 NF100-CVFU White 3 NF100-CVFU 2, 3 NF125-SVU White 3 NF125-HVU

TCL-2SVU3 White (*3)(*10) TCL-2SVU3L White (*3)(*11) TCL-2SWU3 (*10) White

TCL-2SWU3L White (*3)(*11) TCL-4SWU White TCL-6SWU

Transparent

NV800-SEW/HEW

Dimensions (mm)

Contents Cover Sealing Number mounting of covers screw plate 2 − 2 2 − 2

A

B

C

43.5 67

25 25

30.5 30.5

50

25

65.5

2

−

2

50

40

65.5

2

−

2

75

25

65.5

2

−

2

75

40

65.5

2

−

2

100 60

25 40

65.5 65.5

2 2

− −

2 2

90

40

65.5

2

−

2

120

40

65.5

2

−

2

105

40

65.5

2

−

2

105

50

65.5

2

−

2

140

40

65.5

2

−

2

171

110

99.5

2

−

171

110

132.5/196.5

2

−

240

110

105

2

6

2

224

155

103.5

2

4

−

220

155

146/194.5

2

4

−

−

294

155

103.5

2

6

−

Quick type The cover can be sealed with the sealing plate.

6 Use in combination with insulating barrier.

−

290

155

146/194.5

2

6

−

−

220

150

139

2

4

−

−

290

150

139

2

4

−

Screw type

NV50-SVFU NV50-SVFU − − NV100-CVFU NV100-CVFU − NV125-SVU/HVU

36 54 50 50 75 75

30 30 25 40 25 40

65.5 65.5 65.5 65.5 65.5 65.5

2 2 2 2 2 2

− − 2 2 2 2

− − − − − −

Quick type (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.)

90

40

65.5

2

2

− −

Screw type

3

NF250-SVU/HVU

NV250-SVU/HVU

105

40

65.5

2

2

3

NF250-SVU/HVU

NV250-SVU/HVU

105

50

65.5

2

2

−

3

NF225-CWU

−

105

40

65.5

2

−

−

3

NF225-CWU

−

105

50

65.5

2

−

−

3

NF400-SWU/HWU

−

171

110

99.5

2

−

2

Screw type (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.) Screw type (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.) Screw type (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.) Quick type (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.) Quick type (Remove the existing cover from the body, and fit the terminal cover.) Quick type

3

NF630-SWU/HWU

−

224

155

103.5

2

4

−

Screw type

Notes *1 For 2-pole NV, use TC-L for 3-pole circuit breaker. *2 For a circuit breaker with F or V type operating handle, specify the model name with F at the end. (F or V type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) *3 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type Operating Handles. *4 The dimension C is the size on the power supply side and load side. *5 When a crimp terminal applicable to wires with a size of 117.2 to 152.05 mm2 (Model 2CR-150 or CB150-S8) is used, TC-L cannot be fitted. Insulate the terminal from TC-S with insulating tube or taping. *6 In the case of installation on the body, specify the model name with-MDU at the end. *7 It cannot be installed in the case of installation on the body.

Remarks

−

−

−

Appearance

Use in combination with insulating barrier.

*8 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 75A or less (max. wire size 25 mm2) *9 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 125A or less (max. wire size 60 mm2) *10 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2) *11 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 250A or less (max. wire size 150 mm2) (Applicable to UL wire 300MCM) Remarks 1. The wire sizes shown in the above notes *10 to *13 are those of the 600-V vinyl insulated wires. 2. Insulate the exposed live parts of crimp terminals with insulating tape or the like. 3. When protection from the power supply and load sides is necessary, 121 separately consult us.



2 Accessories

TCL-03CS2W TCL-03CS3W

TCL-05SV3

Applicable model Number of poles of circuit MCCB ELCB breaker White 2 − (*1) NF30-CS White 3 − NF32-SV White 2 − NF63-CV/SV/HV NF32-SV − White 2 NF63-CV/SV/HV NF32-SV NV32-SV, NV63-HV White 3 NF63-CV/SV/HV White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV White 3 NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-HV White 2, 3 − NV63-CV/SV White 4 NF63-SV/HV − White 2 NF125-CV/SV − White 3 NF125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV − White 4 NF125-SV/HV/UV NV125-SV/HV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV White 3 (*6) NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV NF250-SV/HV/UV NV250-SV/HV NF250-SEV/HEV NV250-SEV/HEV White 4 NF125-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NF225-SWM (*6) NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-CW/SW/SEW White 2, 3 NF630-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW NF400-SEP with MDU (*7) − White 3 NF400-UEW (*4) − NF400-SW/SEW/HEW NV400-SEW/HEW White 4 NF630-SW/SEW NV630-SEW NF400-SEP with MDU (*7) Color

Type name

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

Type name TCS-03CS2W

Color

Table 6-23 Small terminal covers (TC-S) Number of poles of circuit breaker

White

2

Applicable model MCCB

Dimensions (mm) ELCB

A

B

C

−

43.5

5

30.5

Contents Cover Sealing Number mounting of covers screw plate 2

−

Appearance

Remarks

2

NF30-CS TCS-03CS3W TCS-05SV2 TCS-05SV3

White

3

(*1) White

2

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV

White

3

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NV32-SV, NV63-HV

(*2)

TCS-1SV2 (*2)

White 2, 3

−

White

2

NF125-CV/SV

White

3

NF125-CV/SV

−

67

5

30.5

2

−

2

−

50

5

65.5

2

−

2

75

5

65.5

2

−

2

60

6.5

65.5

2

−

2

90

6.5

65.5

2

−

2

6.5

65.5

2

−

2

NV63-CV/SV − NV125-CV/SV/HV

TCS-1SV3 (*3) White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV

−

NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV 105 White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV (*2) NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV Notes *1 For a circuit breaker with F type operating handle, specify the model name with F at the end. (F type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) *2 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type Operating Handles. TCS-2SV3

Quick type The cover can be sealed with the sealing plate.

Remarks 1. Small terminal covers for 4-pole circuit breakers are available. 2. Insulate the exposed live parts of crimp terminals with insulating tape or the like.

Table 6-24 Transparent terminal covers (TTC) Applicable model

Number of poles of circuit breaker

Type name TTC-03CS2

MCCB

Dimensions (mm) ELCB

A

B

C

−

43.5

25

30.5

2

Contents Cover Sealing Number mounting of covers screw plate 2

−

Appearance

Remarks

2

NF30-CS TTC-03CS3 TTC-05SV2 TTC-05SV3

3 (*1)

3 (*2)

TTC-1SV2

(*1)

TTC-1SV3

(*2)

2 Accessories

2, 3

NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV −

2

NF125-CV/SV

3

NF125-CV/SV

2, 3

NF125-HV/UV

−

67

25

30.5

2

−

2

−

50

25

65.5

2

−

2

75

25

65.5

2

−

2

60

40

65.5

2

−

2

90

40

65.5

2

−

2

122

2, 3

105

40

65.5

2

−

2

171

110

104.5

2

4

−

240

110

104.5

2

6

−

224

155

103.5

2

4

−

294

155

103.5

2

6

−

Transparent

NV32-SV, NV63-HV NV63-CV/SV − NV125-CV/SV/HV −

NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NV250-CV/SV/HV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV250-SEV/HEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV 3 − − NV400-CW/SW/SEW NF400-CW/SW/SEW NV400-HEW/REW NF400-HEW/REW 2, 3 NV630-CW/SW/SEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW TTC-4SW3 NV630-HEW NF630-HEW/REW 3 NF400-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) − NF400-SW/SEW/HEW NV400-SEW/HEW TTC-4SW4 4 NF630-SW/SEW/HEW NV630-SEW NF400-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW NV800-SEW/HEW 2, 3 NF800-HEW/REW TTC-8SW3 NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) 3 − NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) NF800-SEW/HEW TTC-8SW4 4 NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) − NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*4) Notes *1 For a circuit breaker with F type operating handle, specify the model name with F at the end. (F type operating handle dedicated models, screws are used for fixing.) *2 The standard models can be used in combination with F and V Type Operating Handles. TTC-2SV3 (*2)(*3)(*5)

6

2

Quick type The cover can be sealed with the sealing plate.

Transparent

Use in combination with insulating barrier. Screw type

*3 When a crimp terminal applicable to wires with a size of 117.2 to 152.05 mm2 (Model 2CR-150 or CB150-S8) is used, TTC cannot be fitted. Use TCL-2SV3L. Or insulate the terminal from TC-S with insulating tube or taping. *4 In the case of installation on the body, specify the model name with • MDU at the end. *5 Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2)

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories





Fig. 1

A

Fig. 2

A

D C

A

C

B

B

B

C

ON

ON

BTC-03CS2W

White

Applicable model

Number of poles of circuit breaker

MCCB

Dimensions (mm) ELCB

2

A

B

Contents Cover Sealing Number mounting of covers screw plate

C

−

43.5

6.5

30.5

2

−

2

−

67

6.5

30.5

2

−

2

50

5

65.5

2

−

2

75

5

65.5

2

−

2

60

6.5

65.5

2

−

2

NV125-CV/SV/HV −

90

6.5

65.5

2

−

2

NV250-CV/SV/HV NV250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV

105

6.5

65.5

2

−

2

NV400-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW (*5)

140

42 (*2)

99.5

2

−

−

140

42 (*2)

132.5/ 196.5

2

−

185

42 (*2)

97.5

2

6

−

210

32 (*2)

97.5

2

8

−

210

32 (*2)

146/ 194.5

2

4

−

280

32 (*2)

97.5

2

10

−

32 (*2)

146/ 194.5

2

6

−

Appearance

NF30-CS BTC-03CS3W BTC-05SV2 BTC-05SV3 BTC-1SV2 BTC-1SV3

BTC-2SV3

BTC-4SW3

BTC-4SW4

BTC-8SW3

BTC-8SW4

White

3

NF32-SV White 2 NF63-CV/SV/HV NF32-SV White 3 NF63-CV/SV/HV White 2, 3 − White

2



−

(*1)

NV32-SV, NV63-HV NV63-CV/SV

NF125-CV/SV

−

White 3 NF125-CV/SV White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV NF400-CW/SW/SEW White 2, 3 NF630-CW/SW/SEW NF400-SEP with MDU (*5) White 3 NF400-UEW (*4)

NF400-SW/SEW/HEW NV400-SEW/HEW (*3) Transparent 4 NF630-SW/SEW/HEW NV630-SEW NF400-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) Transparent 2, 3 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) − NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) (*3) Transparent 3 NF800-UEW (*4) −

(*3) Transparent

4

NF800-SEW/HEW NF600-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) NF800-SEP with MDU/HEP with MDU (*5) NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW (*4)

(*5)

−

Notes *1 For 2-pole ELCB, use BTC for 3-pole circuit breaker. *2 Dimension B in Fig. 2 *3 The covers can be used for plug-in type circuit breakers. Other models are designed only for rear connection type. *4 The dimension C is the size on the power supply side and load side. *5 In the case of installation on the body, it can be fitted only on the power supply side.

280

2

Remarks Cover for connection block in the case of simple rear connection

Cover for stud connection block on back in the case of rear connection type Quick type The cover can be sealed with the sealing plate.

Screw type

Remarks 1. PTC-4SW3 can be used as the back terminal covers for NF400-HEW/REW, NF630-HEW/REW, NV400-HEW/REW and NV630-HEW. 2. For terminal covers for 4-pole circuit breakers not listed above, consult us.

6

Type name PTC-05SV2 PTC-05SV3 PTC-1SV2

Color

Table 6-26 Plug-in terminal covers (PTC) Number of poles of circuit breaker

White

2

White

3

White 2, 3

Applicable model MCCB NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV −

White

2

NF125-CV/SV

White

3

NF125-CV/SV

Dimensions (mm)

PTC-2SV3

PTC-4SW3

NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV White 2, 3 NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV NF400-CW/SW/SEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW (*2) Transparent 2, 3 NF400-HEW/REW (*1) NF630-HEW/REW (*1)

Appearance

ELCB

A

B

C

D

−

50

6.5

65.5

72

2

2

−

75

6.5

65.5

72

2

2

−

60

6.5

65.5

−

2

4

−

90

6.5

65.5

−

2

4

−

NV250-CV/SV/HV NV250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV

105

6.5

65.5

78.5

2

4

−

Screw type

NV400-CW/SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW NV400-HEW/REW (*1) NV630-HEW (*1)

140

42

97.5

−

2

4

−

Same as screw type of BTC

Remarks

NV32-SV, NV63-HV NV63-CV/SV −

Cover for stud connection block in the case of plug-in type

NV125-CV/SV/HV

PTC-1SV3 White 2, 3 NF125-HV/UV

Contents Cover Sealing Number mounting of covers screw plate

−

Notes *1 The covers can be used as back terminal covers. *2 See Fig. 2 of BTC.

123

2 Accessories

Type name

Color

Table 6-25 Rear terminal cover (BTC)

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

Table 6-27 List of terminal covers applicable to F and V Type Operating Handles Large terminal covers (TC-L) TCL-05SV2F (*2)(*3) TCL-05SV2LF (*2)(*4) TCL-05SV3 (*3) TCL-05SV3L (*4) TCL-05SV4 TCL-1SV2F (*2) TCL-1SV3 TCL-1SV4 TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L

Type name Small terminal covers (TC-S) TCS-05SV2F

Transparent terminal covers (TTC)

(*2) TTC-05SV2F

TCS-05SV3

TTC-05SV3

– TCS-1SV2F

– (*2) TTC-1SV2F

TCS-1SV3 – (*5) TCS-2SV3 (*6)

F-05SV, V-05SV (*2) F-1SV2, V-1SV2 F-1SV, V-1SV

– TTC-2SV3 –

TCL-4SW3 TCL-4SP3W

–

TTC-4SW3

3 2, 3 4 2 3 2, 3 4 2, 3

TCL-4SW4

–

TTC-4SW4

TCL-8SW3

–

TTC-8SW3

TCL-8SW4

–

TTC-8SW4

4

F-4S V-4S

F-8S V-8S

For 2-pole NV, use a terminal cover for 3-pole circuit breaker. Only for F and V Type Operating Handles (screw type) Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 75A or less (max. wire size 25 mm2) Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 125A or less (max. wire size 60 mm2) Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 200A or less (max. wire size 100 mm2) Applicable to circuit breakers with rating of 250A or less (max. wire size 150 mm2)

MCCB

ELCB

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV

2

F-2SV, V-2SV

–

Applicable model

Number of poles of circuit breaker

(*2) F-05SV2, V-05SV2

TTC-1SV3

TCL-2SV4

Notes *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6

Applicable operating handles

2, 3 4 2, 3

– (*1)

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV – NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV NF125-CV/SV NF125-HV/UV NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF125-SEV/HEV NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-SW/SEW/HEW NF630-SW/SEW/HEW

NV32-SV, NV63-HV NV63-CV/SV – – NV125-CV/SV/HV – NV125-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV NV125-SEV/HEV NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV400-SEW/HEW NV630-SEW

NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW

NV800-SEW/HEW

NF800-SEW/HEW

4

–

Remark: 1. The terminal covers for UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers can be normally combined with F Type Operating Handles.

4. Insulating Barriers The insulating barrier enhances the insulation between the phases of circuit breaker terminals. It also prevents accidents due to conductive foreign matter and dust, and secondary accidents when isolating a fault current.

D insulating barrier is available for the models listed in the table below. 6 DThe Table 6-28

2 Accessories

Applicable model

MCCB NF32-SV, NF63-CV NF125-CV, NF100-CVFU NF63-SV/HV NF125-SV/HV NF125-SEV/HEV, NF125-ZEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU NF225-CWU NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW(4P) NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/SDW

ELCB NV32-SV, NV63-CV NV125-CV, NV100-CVFU NV63-SV/HV NV125-SV/HV

Front

(“” denotes optional)

Connecting method Rear Flush plate

Plug-in



–

–

–

Standard attachment

–

–

–

Standard attachment

–

–

Standard attachment

Standard attachment

–

–

–

Standard attachment





Standard attachment

Standard attachment







–

Standard attachment





–

–

Standard attachment

–

–

–

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW

–

Standard attachment

–

–

Standard attachment

NF1600-SEW/SDW

–

Standard attachment

–

–

–

NF800-UEW NF400-SWU/HWU NF630-SWU/HWU

Always mount the insulating barrier when it comes with the circuit breaker.

124

NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU NV125-SVU NV125-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU NV100-SWU NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

DInsulating D Barrier-Front (BA-F) Table 6-29 Summary of dimensions Applicable model

Type name

MCCB

BAF-2SV

BAF-05SVU BAF-2SVU

NV32-SV NV63-CV NV125-CV NV63-SV/HV NV125-SV/HV

NF100-CVFU

NV100-CVFU

NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NF250-SVU NF250-HVU

NV125-SVU NV125-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU

BAF-2SWU

NF225-CWU

BAF-4SW

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW

BAF-4UW

BAF-4SWU

Quantity per breaker 2P 3P 4P 1 (*2)

59.5

2

Reference diagram

3 A

− NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW

100

59.5

2

4

6

50

59.5

2

4

−

100

59.5

−

4

−

100

59.5

−

4

−

110

98.5

2

4

6

−

110

132/ 98.5

−

4

−

NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW

110

98.5

1

2

3

NF400-UEW(4P) NF800-UEW, NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW/SDW NF400-SWU/HWU NF630-SWU/HWU(less than 600A)

BAF-10SW

50

NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU

(*1) NF400-UEW(3P)

BAF-8SW

Dimensions (mm) A B

B

BAF-05SV

NF32-SV NF63-CV NF125-CV NF63-SV/HV NF125-SV/HV/UV NF125-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV/SEV/HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU

ELCB

−

110

132

1

2

3

− −

110 110

98.5 98.5

− −

4 2

− −

BAF-6SWU

NF630-SWU/HWU(630A)

−

150

98.5

−

4

−

BAF-16SW

NF1600-SEW/SDW

−

185

132

1

2

3

Notes *1 The barriers BAF-4UW for the power supply and load sides vary in the dimension B. *2 Not supplied with ELCB.

DInsulating D Barrier-Rear (BA-B) Table 6-30 Summary of dimensions Applicable model

Type name

MCCB

Dimensions (mm) Quantity per breaker A B 2P 3P 4P

ELCB

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW(3P) NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW

NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW

140

74.5

−

4

6

BAB-8SW

NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW(4P) NF800-UEW

NV800-SEW/HEW

140

74.5

−

4

6

Mounting panel

A

BAB-4SW

Reference diagram

B

6

Drilling size for use of BA-B (in the case of 3-pole circuit breaker)

Power supply side

Note The dimensions in brackets are those for NF400-UEW.

NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW, NF800-UEW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW

2 Accessories

NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF400-UEW NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW

Note The dimensions in brackets are those for NF800-UEW. 6-f48 24 24

10

243[290]

225[265]

4 screws M6 or f7

4 screws M6 or f7

11

44 87

11

24 24

24 24

194[234]

8

24 24

5

6-f35

11

8 screws M4 Make these eight threaded holes in addition to the standard holes.

70 140

11

8 screws M4 Make these eight threaded holes in addition to the standard holes.

Load side The drilling size drawings show the dimensions viewed from the rear side.

125

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

DInsulating D Barrier-Plug-in (BA-P) Table 6-31 Summary of dimensions Type name

Applicable model MCCB

ELCB

Dimensions (mm) A B

NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV

172

74.5

BAP-4SW

NF400-CW/SW NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-CW/SW NF630-SEW/HEW/REW

NV400-CW/SW NV400-SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW NV630-SEW/HEW

178

74.5

NF800-CEW/SEW NF800-HEW/REW

NV800-SEW/HEW

172

74.5

215

74.5

Reference diagram

4 A

BAP-2SV

NF125-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-SEV/HEV

Quantity per breaker 2P 3P 4P

B

4

6

−

A

BAP-8SW NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW

−

B

DEarth D fault preventing barriers (BA-G) Table 6-32 Summary of dimensions BAG-05SV3 BAG-1SV3 BAG-2SV3 BAG-4SW3

Applicable model MCCB NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV

ELCB NV32-SV NV63-CV/SV/HV

NF125-CV/SV/HV

NV125-CV/SV/HV

NF125-SEV/HEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF250-SEV/HEV/ZEV with MDU NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW

NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NV250-SEV/HEV with MDU NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW

BAG-4UW3

NF400-UEW

BAG-8SW3

NF800-CEW/SEW/SDW/HEW/REW

Dimensions (mm) A B 30

75

40

90

63

105

63

164

−

63

164

NV800-SEW/HEW

110

210

BAG-8UW3

NF800-UEW

−

110

210

BAG-10SW3

NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW/SDW

−

98

210

BAG-16SW3

NF1600-SEW/SDW

−

150

300

Also the earth fault preventing barriers for 2- and 4-pole circuit breakers are available.

2 Accessories

6

126

Quantity per breaker 3P

Reference diagram

B

A

Type name

1

Earth fault preventing barrier (3 poles)

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

5. Handle Lock Devices, Lock Covers, Auxiliary Handles, Card Holders (1) Handle Lock Devices (HL and HL-S) These devices are used to lock the circuit breakers in the ON or OFF position. If overcurrent flows while the circuit breaker is locked, it will trip. Model HL (red resin moldings) to be fitted to handles and Model HL-S to be secured on circuit breaker covers are available. (Use a commercially available padlock having the nominal size shown in the right table. If a padlock in another size is used, the device may not lock correctly.)

Padlock size (mm) Application

Table 6-33 HL Applicable model

Type name

MCCB NF30-CS NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF125-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF125-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF125-SVU/HVU NF250-SVU/HVU

HLN-05SV

HLF-05SV

HLF-05SVU HLF-2SWU HL-4CW HL-4SW HL-4SWU HL

NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV, NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV

40

22 or 23

5.5

C

B

a

Fig. 1

Fig. 1

Padlock

− − NV400-CW NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW − −

Fig. 2

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

c

Fig. 3

Number of poles

2P

−

−

2P

−

−

3P

NV32-SV, NV63-HV

4P

− NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV − NV125-SV, NV125-HV − −

3P

NF125-HV NF125-SV, NF125-HV

2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P

NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV (*1) NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV

HLS-05SVU HLS-2SVU HLS-2SWU HLS-4SW

(*3)

HLS-4UW HLS-8SW

(*3) NF400-UEW (*3) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW (*3) NF800-UEW

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW

Dimensions (mm) ELCB

NF125-CV, NF125-SV

(*1) NF50-SVFU (*1) NF100-CVFU (*1) NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU/HVU (*2) NF125-SVU/HVU (*1) NF250-SVU/HVU (*1) NF225-CWU

HLS-8UW

5

c

Remarks 1. One lot of HL-4CW and HL-4SW contains one piece, and one lot of others contains 10 pieces. 2. HLF types are used for OFF lock, and HLN types for ON lock.

NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV (*1) NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV NF63-HV NF63-SV,NF63-HV

NF250-UV HLS-03SVU HLS-05SVU2 HLS-05SVU

19

NV125-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU

Applicable model Number of poles

NF125-UV

HLS-2SV

11

35

Fig. 4

MCCB

(*1)

25

b

Padlock

Fig. 4

Table 6-34 HL-S

HLS-05SV

4

a

A

Notes *1 When a padlock is not used, the device can be used as a lock cover (LC). *2 Place an order for a circuit breaker body combined with the device.

HLS-05SV2

C

NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV, NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV250-SEV/HEV

NF225-CWU (*1) NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (*1) NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF400-SWU/HWU, NF630-SWU/HWU (*2) NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW, NF1600-SEW/SDW

Type name

B

A

B

57 75

32

E

F

− 32

23

86 62.5

28 − 28

1.5 Fig. 5

NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV

−

3P

63 32

32 84

4P 2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 2P 3P 2P, 3P 2P, 3P 3P 3P

NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-SV, NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV − − NV50-SVFU

− NV100-CVFU NV125-SVU/HVU NV125-SVU/HVU NV250-SVU/HVU − NV400-CW/SW/SEW/ HEW/REW 2P, 3P, 4P NV630-CW/SW/SEW/ HEW 3P − 2P, 3P, 4P NV800-SEW/HEW 4P − 3P, 4P

Notes *1 For locking in OFF position *2 A, B, C and D in Figs. 5 and 6 are drilling sizes in front plate. *3 Terminal covers cannot be fitted.

6

−

2P

3P

Reference Padlock diagram

75

3P − 4P − −

D

50

3P −

C

2 Accessories

HL-05FH

Reference diagram

ELCB −

A (Nominal size)

100 b

4P − − 2P, 3P − 3P 3P 3P 3P 3P

33

69.5 −

−

32

75

32

75 84 84

− 50 75 86 86 100 100

− 33 −

-5.5 Fig. 9 32

−

Fig. 5

−

32

Fig. 5

−

32

Fig. 6

3P, 4P

−

−

−

−

−

−

− 3P, 4P

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

− −

−

−

−

−

−

−

−

Fig. 7

Fig. 8

127

Padlock

36 cL

cL

32

B

F

R1

cL

E

cL

f5.5

E

B

C

C

A

A

B A

cL

B

F

A

cL

Circuit breaker Pan head tapping screw

cL

A

R1

Line side

1

Pan head tapping screw

R

R1

Circuit breaker

D

R

R1

C cL

B

cL

A

C

cL

1

C

External Accessories

2

B

6 Accessories

D

C

Load side

Fig. 5

72

Fig. 6

86

Circuit breaker

cL

Circuit breaker

cL

Spacer

F

40 210

Load side

43.5

Fig. 9

Fig. 8

O

(3) Auxiliary Handles (HT)

Lock Cover is a plug-in lock for indicating easily without using padlocks that it is prohibited to operate the circuit breaker. A “Caution” tag can be hung on it. The covers are red resin moldings.

These handles facilitate opening and closing circuit breakers. Table 6-36 HT

(*1)

Table 6-35 LC

LC-05SV

Applicable model MCCB NF30-CS NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV/UV NF125-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV NF250-SEV/HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV

LCBH1R (red) BH-P(1P) LCBH1Y (yellow) LCBH2R (red) BH-P(2P) LCBH2Y (yellow) LCBH3R (red) BH-P(3P) LCBH3Y (yellow)

HT-4CW

ELCB −

NV32-SV NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV NV250-SEV/HEV

LCBH1

LCBH2, 3

Applicable model

Dimensions B C D

A

Auxiliary Handles Outline dimension drawing

E

77.5

NF400-CW, NV400-CW

NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 59 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW HT-4SW (*1) NF800-REW/UEW (*2) NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW NF1000-SEW 62 HT-10SW NF1250-SEW/SDW NF1600-SEW/SDW

fD

81

32

38

M4

118

34

45

M4

C

A

E screw

Notes *1 HT can be supplied separately. The user can fit it to the circuit breaker. (One lot contains 1 piece.) *2 1-pole circuit breakers with 800A frame and 4-pole NF400-UEW come with auxiliary handles as standard accessories.

− −

(4) Card Holders (CH)

−

Cards showing the circuit breaker name and circuit number can be inserted to the card holder. Fit the card holder to the circuit breaker body or the flush plate in the flush frame. (Although a card holder is supplied with each circuit breaker body, the card holder is available as an optional part.)

Remark: 1. One lot of LCBH, LCBL and LCNVL contains 50 pieces, and one lot of other models contains 10 pieces.

A

Table 6-37 Card holder size (mm)

B

Applicable model

128

N

B

Type name LC-05SW to LC-2SW

C

2 Accessories

E

128.5

cL

(2) Lock Covers (LC)

LC03CS

Circuit breaker

22.5

43.5

Type name

36

Pan head screw

Line side

Fig. 7

6

20

cL

22.5 138

cL

71

73.5 109.5

48

cL

103

109.5

115.5

116.5

20 cL

Type name

NF250-SV or below CH-P No.5 NV250-SV or below NF400-SW or above CH-P No.3 NV400-SW or above

A

B

C

Card size

44

12

5

39×9

38

22

5

33×20

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

6. Mechanical Interlocks (MI)

This mechanical interlock device is used to enable one of two circuit breakers to turn on. Install the device on the panel. Mechanical interlocks to be installed directly to circuit breaker bodies can be manufactured. Consult us for details.

DFront, D rear and plug-in types

Front, rear and plug-in types (Panel mounting)

Center of mechanical interlock Center of circuit breaker

70(100)

70

A

C

15.5 (20)

31(40)

15

47.5

Stroke

CL

CL

45

Circuit breaker

CL

Circuit breaker

CL

CL

CL

CL

CL

CL

P

P

The values in parentheses apply to NF1600-SEW, NF1600-SDW

Center of mechanical interlock

F

F

120

M40.7 or f5 screw

F

F M40.7 or f5 screw

120

Drilling Dimension Diagram

Drilling Dimension Diagram

Drilling Dimension Diagram (breaker mount)

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Applicable model

Pitch (P) (*1)

−

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV

NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV

NF125-CV/SV NF125-CV/SV/HV NF125-UV NF125-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV, NF250-SEV/HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-UV

− NV125-CV/SV/HV −

NF225-CWU

NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV NV250-SEV/HEV

Standard Type name 2P 120 MI-05SV3 − MI-05SV3

3P − 120

120

−

−

120

Dimensions (mm)

Semi-standard Standard 3P Type name 4P − − − − 120 − 130 MI-05SV4 (*4) − − − − 130

150

MI-1SV4

t

130 (*4)

NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF400-UEW (3P) − NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW NF400-UEW (4P) − NF800-UEW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW − NF1600-SEW/SDW −

Breaker mount (*3) Type name 2P•3P MI-05SVFB2

A

B

C

D

E

15

33

63

47.5

58

15

33

63

−

58

MI-05SVFB3

15 15 15

33 33 33

63 63 32.5

45

58 58 58

MI-1SVFB2 MI-1SVFB3 −

−

(Fig. 3)

−

(*2) − 120 (*4)

MI-05SV3

150

180

MI-2SV4

150 (*4)

15

33

−

−

−

−

15

33

MI-4SW4

250

−

−

− −

Reference diagram

Notes *1 For 400A frame or above, use a panel 1.6 to 3.2 thick. *2 When the panel is 2.3 or more thick, countersink the panel (rear side) in f9.5 for the four f5.5 holes.

Table 6-38 Table of variable dimensions

ELCB (*6)

M6 or f7 screw

P

63

−

58

−

58

MI-2SVFB3 (Fig. 3) (Fig. 1)

25.5 MI-05SWU3

−

190

MI-4SW3

MI-8SW3 MI-10SW3 MI-16SW3

120 (*4)

−

190 220

−

220 220 315

−

210

−

240

MI-8SW4

290

− −

− −

MI-10SW4 MI-16SW4

290 426

47.5

33

83.5

−

47.5

33

60

47.5 47 37.5 65 54.5 39

−

−

−

−

MI-4SWFB3

74

83.5 83.5

(*2) −

2.3 (*5)

63

− (Fig. 3) MI-8SWFB3 −

74

− −

− −

6

− (Fig. 2)

− −

−

Notes *1 Specify the circuit breaker mounting pitch (P). *2 No need to specify the panel thickness (t). (Usable panel thickness range: t = 1~3.2mm. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t = 1.6~3.2mm) *3 Terminal covers cannot be fitted. (However, TCL-4SW3 can be fitted.) *4 When UVT is provided, separately install the module. *5 If the thickness is not 2.3, specify the panel thickness (t). *6 For NV with TBL, use a circuit breaker with MG. Remarks 1. When a mechanical interlock is installed on the panel, screw type terminal covers cannot be installed. 2. These devices do not provide an isolation function. However, 400, 600, 630 and 800A frame circuit breakers can be made conforming to it. (See Note 3.) 3. On a 2-pole circuit breaker obtained by removing the neutral pole conductor from a 3-pole circuit breaker, the mechanical interlock can be installed in the same manner as on a 3-pole circuit breaker.

129

2 Accessories

D

NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV

Stroke

94.5

61

H

43.5

43.5

Stroke

Outside Dimension Diagram

Center of mechanical interlock Center of circuit breaker

Center of mechanical interlock

Mechanical interlock P mounting plate

Reference diagram (3P)

C

15.5

15

50(80)

MCCB

P 190 260

120

Machine this part according to the 4f (f5.5 and f7.5 front plate drilling dimensions countersunk (rear) of the main breaker use M50.8 flat countersunk head screws (*2)

Center of circuit breaker

G 194 243

Mechanical interlock

Mechanical interlock mounting plate 120

Mechanical interlock mounting plate

111

1.5

Outside Dimension Diagram

Machine this part according to the front plate drilling dimensions of the main breaker

F 44 70

Circuit breaker

G

B

B

31

Type name MI-4SWFB3 MI-8SWFB3

Mechanical interlock

1.5 (Gap between circuit breaker and panel)

Outside Dimension Diagram

50

H 61 75 61 61

Panel plate thickness (t1.6 to 3.2)

Stroke

J

(Gap between circuit breaker and panel)

4f (f5.5 and f7.5 countersunk (rear) use M50.8 flat countersunk head screws (*2)

G 111 111 111 126

Circuit breaker

Panel plate thickness (t1 to 3.2) (*1)

Stroke

F 25 25 30 35

Mechanical interlock

Center of circuit breaker

A

Terminal covers cannot be fitted.

Type name MI-05SVFB3 MI-05SWHFB3 MI-1SVFB3 MI-2SVFB3

J 47.5 45

Type name MI-05SVFB2 MI-1SVFB2

G

Center of mechanical interlock

Breaker mountiong (front)

44(55)

22(30)

22

E

44

Front, rear and plug-in types (Panel mounting) These interlocks can be locked with padlocks.

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

7. Boxes for Circuit Breakers and Boxed Circuit Breakers (1) Kinds and specifications Table 6-39 Dust-proof type (I)

Water-proof type (W)

–

–

–

NFI-05SV

–

NFI-1SV

– – NFW-05SV – NFW-1SV NFW-1HV

–

NFI-2SV

Closed type (S)

Appearance

(*1)

NF30-CS NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV

MCCB (*2)

NF125-CV/SV NF125-HV NF125-SGV/LGV NF160-SGV/LGV NF250-SGV/LGV NF250-CV/SV, NF125/250-SEV NF125/160/250-HGV NF250-HV, NF125/250-HEV NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW

ELCB (*2)

NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV NV125-HV NV250-CV/SV, NV125/250-SEV NV250-HV, NV125/250-HEV NV400-CW NV400-SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW NV800-SEW Operating method Standard paint color Protection class (IEC 60529)

Notes *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Remarks:

2 Accessories

6

2, 3P 2P 3P 2P 3P 2, 3P

NFS-03CS NFS-05SV2 (*5) NFS-05SV NFS-1SV2 (*5) NFS-1SV

NFS-2SV 2, 3P

2P 3P

3P

(*1)

NFW-2SV

– – – NFI-4CW NFW-4CW – – NFI-4SW NFW-4SW – – NFI-6SW NFW-6SW – – NFI-8SW NFW-8SW NFS-05SV – – NFI-05SV NFS-05SV NFW-05SV NFS-1SV NFW-1SV – NFI-1SV NFS-1SV NFW-1HV NFS-2SV – NFI-2SV NFW-2SV – – – NFI-4CW NFW-4CW – – NFI-4SW NFW-4SW – – NFI-6SW NFW-6SW – – NFI-8SW NFW-8SW Operation through operating handle mechanism Direct operation of circuit breaker handle Box: Munsell 5Y7/1 Operating handle: Munsell N1.5 IP3X IP65 (*4) IP4X (*3)

The window frame varies depending on the model. For 1-pole circuit breakers, boxes are not manufactured. The protection class of NFI-1SV and NFI-2SV is IP3X. The protection class of NFW-4CW, NFW-4SW, NFW-6SW and NFW-8SW is IP54. The circuit breaker body is a 2-pole external type. 1. Only internal accessories with lead wires drawn out can be fitted. (However, LT and SLT can be fitted on the right pole side.) 2. The dust-proof type (I) models do not provide an isolation function.

d Selection of rated current When selecting the rated current of circuit breaker, it is necessary to consider the temperature in the box. When the rated current is carried, the temperature in the box increases by 10 to 20K. Correct the rated current with the temperature correction curve. Determine the maximum working current to be 80% or less of the rated current. d Locking Type I and W boxed circuit breakers can be provided with locks in the following parts. Locking can prevent unnecessary operation. qCover and case wON or OFF position of operating handle Padlocks must be prepared by the user. The dimensions of the padlocks are shown on page 116.

d Interlock (only for Dust-proof type) The cover cannot be opened while the circuit breaker is in the ON state. However, if the interlock release screw is turned, the cover is released from the locked state and can be opened even in the ON state. d Handle operation and display The ON, OFF or trip state of the body is displayed on each position on the decorative board.

Example of Type I operating handle block

130

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

(2) External dimensions JMCCB J 4 mounting holes fG (key slot)

A

E A

E

4 mounting holes fG

D

F

Screw M6 Earth terminal

D

F B

B

C

K, hole

NFI-05SV NFI-1SV,NFI-2SV

··············································2 pcs. on bottom

NFI-4CW to NFI-8SW······

H

K, hole ···2 pcs. on bottom

630A or below: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom 800A: 3 pcs. on each of top and bottom

J

H

Fig. 3 Type I

Fig. 1 Type S

4 mounting holes fG

4 mounting holes fG

F B

E A

E A

E

3 mounting holes fG (key slot)

A

J

Earth terminal

C

D

Screw M6 Earth terminal

F

D

B

C

D C

F B

C

K socket 630A or below: 1 pc. on each of top and bottom 800A: 2 pc. on each of top and bottom H

H

K, hole ···2 pcs. on bottom

J

H

Fig. 2 Type S

K socket, 1 pc. on each of top and bottom

Fig. 4 Type W

Table 6-40 Table of variable dimensions (Boxes for 4-pole circuit breakers are not manufactured.) Box type

S

Type name NFS-03CS NFS-05SV2 NFS-05SV NFS-1SV2 NFS-1SV NFS-2SV NFI-05SV NFI-1SV NFI-2SV

I NFI-4CW NFI-4SW NFI-6SW NFI-8SW NFW-05SV NFW-1SV NFW-1HV

W

NFW-2SV NFW-4CW NFW-4SW NFW-6SW NFW-8SW

Applicable Model NF30-CS NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV NF125-CV/SV/HV NF250-CV/SV, NF125/250-SEV NF125-SGV/LGV NF160-SGV/LGV NF250-SGV/LGV NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV/HV NF250-CV/SV/HV, NF125/250-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV NF125-CV/SV NF125-HV NF250-CV/SV/HV, NF125/250-SEV/HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW NF630-CW/SW/SEW NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW

Fig. 5 Type W

Earth terminal

Note) The sockets are applicable to thick steel duct (JIS C 8305) and conduit tube thread.

Variable dimensions E F G 150 78 6

Fig. 2

A 188

B 158

C 69

D 58

H 25

J 100

K 20, 28

1

260

178

98

78

202

100

7

34

100

28, 35, 44

1

310

178

98

78

252

100

7

34

100

28, 35, 44

1

440

247

137

116

373

170

9

52

120

50, 62, 78

3 3

350 352

186 188

155.5 155.5

117 118

286 286

120 120

7 7

42 42

100 100

28, 35, 44 28, 35, 44

3

442

248

162

124

373

170

9

54

120

50, 62, 78

3 3 3 3 4 4 4

730 730 940 1353 390 390 480

320 320 433 543 265 265 265

244 244 260 304 214 214 239

191 191 207 251 160 160 186

650 650 856 1270 350 350 440

240 240 350 460 225 225 225

11 11 15 15 9.5 9.5 9.5

87 65 90 90 45 50 60

120 120 150 320 – – –

50, 62, 78 50, 62, 78 92 104 28 36 36

4

550

355

264

210

510

315

11

75

–

54

5 5 5 5

800 800 800 1435

355 355 355 550

257 257 257 339

220 220 220 265

760 760 760 1395

315 315 315 515

11 11 11 15

85 85 85 100

– – – 180

70 70 82 104

131

6 2 Accessories

J

6 Accessories JELCB J

External Accessories

2

3 mounting holes fG

4 mounting holes fG

E A

A

E

A

E

4 mounting holes fG

D

F D C

Earth terminal

NFI-05SV NFI-1SV NFI-2SV

D C

F B

········2 pcs. on bottom 630A or below: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom

NFI-4CW to NFI-8SW······· 800A: 3 pcs. on each of top and bottom

H

J

H

J

Earth terminal

K, hole: 2 pcs. on each of top and bottom

Fig. 5 Type W

Fig. 3 Type I

Fig. 1 Type S 3 mounting holes fG (key slot) (NVS-03CS) 4 mounting holes fG (key slot)

4 mounting holes fG

E

A

E

K socket 630A or below: 1 pc. on each of top and bottom 800A: 2 pc. on each of top and bottom

A

J

Earth terminal

K, hole

H

F B

C

B

Screw M6 Earth terminal F B

D C

F

D

B

C

H

K, hole: 2 pcs. on bottom

J

Fig. 4 Type W

H

Fig. 2 Type S

K socket, 1 pc. on each of top and bottom

Table 6-41 Table of variable dimensions (Boxes for 4-pole circuit breakers are not manufactured.) Box type

S

2 Accessories

6

I

W

132

Type name NFS-05SV2 NFS-05SV NFS-1SV2 NFS-1SV NFS-2SV NFI-05SV NFI-1SV NFI-2SV NFI-4CW NFI-4SW NFI-6SW NFI-8SW NFW-05SV NFW-1SV NFW-1HV NFW-2SV NFW-4CW NFW-4SW NFW-6SW NFW-8SW

Applicable Model NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV, NV125/250-SEV NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV125/250-SEV/HEV NV400-CW NV400-SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW NV800-SEW NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV NV125-HV NV250-CV/SV/HV, NV125/250-SEV/HEV NV400-CW NV400-SW/SEW NV630-CW/SW/SEW NV800-SEW

Note) The sockets are applicable to thick steel duct (JIS C 8305) and conduit tube thread.

Variable dimensions E F G

Fig.

A

B

C

D

H

J

K

2

260

178

98

78

202

100

7

34

100

28, 35, 44

2

310

178

98

78

252

100

7

34

100

28, 35, 44

2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5

440 350 352 442 730 730 940 1353 390 390 480 550 800 800 800 1435

247 186 188 248 320 320 433 543 265 265 265 355 355 355 355 550

137 155.5 155.5 162 244 244 260 304 214 214 239 264 257 257 257 339

116 117 118 124 191 191 207 251 160 160 186 210 220 220 220 265

373 286 286 373 650 650 856 1270 350 350 440 510 760 760 760 1395

170 120 120 170 240 240 350 460 225 225 225 315 315 315 315 515

9 7 7 9 11 11 15 15 9.5 9.5 9.5 11 11 11 11 15

52 42 42 54 87 65 90 90 45 50 60 75 85 85 85 100

120 100 100 120 120 120 150 320 − − − − − − − 180

50, 62, 78 28, 35, 44 28, 35, 44 50, 62, 78 50, 62, 78 50, 62, 78 92 104 28 36 36 54 70 70 82 104

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

8. Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers and Electrical Operation Devices

Spring charge type (2) Standard paint color: Munsell 5Y7/1

(1) Specifications DElectrically D operated circuit breakers

Specify the electrical operation device together with the circuit breaker body.

Table 6-42

Electrically operating method

Class S, H and R

MCCB

NF125-CV NF250-CV

Class C Class U Motor breakers

Class S, H and R ELCB

Spring charge type (1) NF125-SV, NF125-HV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF125-RV, NF250-RV

NF125-UV NF250-UV NF125-SV, NF250-SV NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV

Motor-drive type (2) Standard paint color: Munsell 5Y7/1

Spring charge type (2) NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW NF400-UEW NF800-UEW

Motor-drive type (2) NF400-SW, NF400-SEW NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW

NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SEW NF1600-SDW

− − −

NV400-SW, NV400-SEW NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NV630-SW, NV630-SEW NV630-HEW, NF800-SEW NV800-HEW

−

−

NV125-CV NV400-CW − NV250-CV NV630-CW Motor breakers NV125-SV, NV250-SV − − Compatible with 100 to 240 V Rated operating voltage (V) DC100-110, AC100-110 (Allowable operating voltage range: AC and 100 to 250 V DC AC200-220(DC125, AC240) 24 V DC, 48 to 60 V DC (*1) 85 to 110%) ON 8 10 0.5 (1.5) Operating DC 100/110V OFF 1.0 (3.0) 1.0 (4.0) current ON 10 10 (Ams) 100/110V 0.6 (3.0) Values in OFF 1.0 (3.0) 1.0 (3.0) ( ): Starting AC ON 8 8 current 200/220V 0.5 (2.5) OFF 0.5 (1.5) 0.5 (1.5) ON 0.05~0.1(*2) 0.05 0.07 Operating s OFF 0.6 or less (self-holding type) time 3 or less (self-holding type) Charge 1.2 or less (self-holding type) Required transformer capacity VA 150 700 Endurance voltage 1500V Class C

NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SEW NF1600-SDW

NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW NF400-UEW NF800-UEW

− −

− NV400-SW, NV400-SEW NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NV630-SW, NV630-SEW NV630-HEW, NF800-SEW NV800-HEW (*3) NV400-CW(*3) NV630-CW −

−

−

− −

DC100-110, AC100-110, AC200-220 (DC125, AC240) 3.0(8.0)

5.0(13.5)

4.0(8.0)

5.0(10.0)

2.0(4.5)

3.5(7.0)

6

0.3 or less (self-holding type) − 400

− 700

1500V

Notes *1 When the rated operating voltage is 24 V DC or 48 to 60 V DC, specify the voltage. If the voltage is not specified, the circuit breaker will be manufactured for 100 to 240 V AC and 100 to 250 V DC. *2 For 24-V DC circuit breakers, the operating time at a voltage of 100% or more is shown. *3 Models for special voltage (125 V DC or 240 V AC) are not provided with the test button. Remarks 1. Flush plate type circuit breakers can be manufactured to order. 2. The models with voltage in parentheses are special voltage products. 3. For the spring charge type (1), use an ON-OFF operating switch for minute load. 4. For the spring charge type (1) The circuit breaker of 3 pole can be used TC-S, TC-L, TTC, BTC and PTC. In case of 125A frame 4 pole can be used only TC-L. In case of 250A frame 4 pole can be used TC-S, TC-L, TTC, BTC and PTC. 5. When the body of the spring charge type (1) breaker is an earth leakage alarm breaker, the reset button cannot be pressed. Provide such a circuit breaker with an external reset or automatic reset system (except for the electronic type). 6. When the body of the motor-drive type (2) or spring charge type (2) has internal accessories, they are normally provided with lead wire terminal blocks. 7. The types other than the spring charge type (1) do not provide an isolation function. 8. When placing an order for a CE marked product of the spring charge type (1) or spring charge type (2), specify the model name with CE. 9. The switching durability of electrically operated circuit breakers conforms to JIS.

DElectrical D operation devices Table 6-43 Electrically operating method Applicable models Rated operating voltage

The following models of Electrical Operation Devices are supplied also as separate devices. The user can install them to the circuit breaker body. (Front connection, rear connection and plug-in types) (When requiring a motor breaker or a CE marked product, place an order for it together with the circuit breaker body.) Spring charge type (1) NF125-SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-CV/SV/HV/UV/SEV/HEV/SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF250-UV

NV250-CV/SV/HV

NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-SEV/HEV

MDSAD240-NF2SVE

MDSAD240-NV2SVE

MDSAD240-NVE2SVE

MDSD024-NV1SVE

MDSD024-NF2SVE

MDSD024-NV2SVE

MDSD024-NVE2SVE

MDSD060-NV1SVE

MDSD060-NF2SVE

MDSD060-NV2SVE

MDSD060-NVE2SVE

NF125-CV/SV/HV

NV125-CV/SV/HV

Compactible to 100-240VAC/100-250VDC

MDSAD240-NF1SVE

MDSAD240-NV1SVE

24VDC

MDSD024-NF1SVE

48-60VDC

MDSD060-NF1SVE

133

2 Accessories

Spring charge type (1)

6 Accessories

External Accessories

2

DCautions D

DDAll electrical operations are based on intermittent rating. Avoid operating any device continuously 10 times or more (ON and OFF operations are counted as one time). DDOperate any device at 85 to 110% of the rated operating voltage. DDThe dielectric strength of electrical operation circuits is 1500 V. When performing dielectric strength test of any of these devices and other devices, if the test voltage exceeds the rated value (1500 V), disconnect the operation power supply terminal. DDWhen collectively operating more than one electrical operation device, isolate the devices connecting a relay to each device. If the control terminals are directly connected in parallel, a circuit will be formed, and the devices may not normally function.

DAutomatic D reset (optional)

The automatic reset type has a built-in alarm switch in the circuit breaker and is connected in such a way that the OFF operation circuit is closed when the circuit breaker trips. Therefore, when the circuit breaker trips, it is automatically reset. However, when the circuit breaker thermally trips, it may not be automatically reset. If an automatic reset spring charge type (1) is required, the user must wire the device in accordance with the external connection diagram shown in Fig. 1 in (3).

(2) Installation and connection (List of manufacturable) Table 6-44 Frame (A)

Installation and connection method 50~250 400~800 1000, 1250 1600

2 Accessories

6

Front connection type

Rear connection type

Plug-in type

   

   

   −

(*1) (*2)

Notes *1 For ELCB, only 3-pole circuit breakers with a frame size of 125 to 400 A can be manufactured. *2 In the case of 4-pole 125 A frame circuit breakers and U class, the circuit breakers are supplied as special models. Consult us for details. Remarks: 1. All models of the front connection type are provided with bar terminals (except the spring charge type (1)). 2. 2-pole circuit breakers of all models are obtained by removing the neutral pole conductors from 3-pole circuit breakers.

times. Then, the circuit breaker will be turned off (reset), and, at the same time, the closing spring will be charged. Although the circuit breaker can be turned off even if the switch is not turned to MANUAL, the selection switch should be set to MANUAL because remote operation may be accepted. · After turning the changeover switch to MANUAL, draw out the OFF lock plate, and lock the circuit breaker in the OFF state with padlocks (to be prepared by the user). Up to three padlocks can be fitted. f5 to f8 padlocks can be fitted. Note: After the completion of manual operation (on-site operation), return the selection switch to AUTO without fail. If it is not returned, electrical operation (remote operation) cannot be performed. DDDisplay of tripping state When the circuit breaker trips in the ON state, the tripping state is displayed. When it trips in the OFF state, the OFF state is kept displayed. Note: When it trips in the OFF state, signals from AL will not be output. DDCautions for use q To the ON or OFF operation switch (to be prepared by the user), current only of 24 V DC and 15 to 30 mA flows. Use a switch for minute load. w Operate the operation switch for 0.1 s or more to turn on and for 20 ms or more to turn off. If it is operated for less than the time, it may not function. The wire to the operation switch shall be less than 100 m. e The power supply module has a built-in switching power supply. Therefore, it may interfere with communication devices near the module. In such a case, install a noise filter on the input side. r For the automatic reset type, purchase a circuit breaker with alarm switch (for minute load), and connect the signal circuit (among the terminal numbers S1, S2 and S4) as shown in Fig. 1. If the circuit breaker in the OFF state is tripped by UVT-N or the like, it cannot be automatically reset. To reset it, it is necessary to turn it on under no current. After this operation, it will be automatically reset.

(3) Structure and operation

Fig. 1

P1

Uc

P2 S1

ON OFF

S2

Power supply module

S4

AL (for minute load)

AL “a” (alarm switch for minute load)

charge type (1) JSpring J DDElectrical operation · When the ON operation switch is closed, the relay will operate, the motor will be driven, the latch mechanism will be released, and the closing spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. · When the OFF operation switch is closed, the relay will operate, the motor will be driven, the circuit breaker will be turned off (reset), and, at the same time, the closing spring will be charged. Note: The charge may not be completed because the circuit protective function operates. DDManual operation · After turning the MANUAL/AUTO selection switch on the cover upper surface to MANUAL, press the ON button, and the latch mechanism will be released, and the closing spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. · After turning the MANUAL/AUTO selection switch on the cover upper surface to MANUAL, draw out the manual handle, and move it upward and downward about 10 to 14

134

Operation circuit Power supply module Operating power Uc supply

P1 P2 S1

ON

Power supply circuit

Electrical operation base

M

Control circuit

SW1

SW1 MANUAL/AUTO selection switch SW2 Charge/Discharge detecting switch M

Motor

S2 SW2

S4 OFF (RESET) The circuit breaker is off, and the electrical operation device is in the charged state.

Symbol SW1 SW2 M

Interpretation of symbol MANUAL/AUTO selection switch Limit switch (For spring condition detection charge/discharge) Motor

Note *1 When power is applied, inrush current (capacitor charging current) of 60 A flows to the breaker and fuse installed on the power supply circuit for 1 ms or so. When selecting the breaker and fuse, make sure that they will not cause problems, such as blowout and malfunction.

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

type (2) JMotor-drive J

DDElectrical operation Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball screw to switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset). DDManual operation The manual operation handle can be used to switch the breaker ON and OFF directly. DDCautions for use

q In the case of a circuit breaker with UVT, if the circuit breaker trips owing to the operation of UVT, the procedure for re-closing the circuit breaker varies depending on the condition of the electrical operation device before the circuit breaker trips. • Tripping in ON state: Reset (OFF). → Turn on. • Tripping in OFF state: Turn on (idle tripping). → Reset (OFF). → Turn on. (If the circuit breaker cannot be turned on (idle tripping), reset (OFF) it, and turn on.) • When an automatic reset system is configured on a nonreset type circuit breaker with UVT, if UVT is set to the no-voltage state, the operations to turn off (reset), trip, turn off (reset) and trip are repeated.

Therefore, configure the circuit in such a way that power is disconnected from the electrical operation device before the circuit breaker is tripped by the non-reset type UVT. w Current of about 0.2 A will flow to the ON-OFF switch. Use an appropriate switch. e Do not apply ON and OFF operation signals continuously. An interval of 0.5 sec or more is necessary between ON and OFF signals. r In the case of the automatic reset type device, it will perform the reset operation with an interval of 0.5 sec after NFB performs the tripping action. t The electrical operation device has a built-in pumping preventing circuit. Therefore, it can operate to turn off the circuit breaker while the ON operation switch is held in the closing state, but it cannot turn on continuously after turning off. To turn on, once turn off the ON operation switch, and turn on the switch. Do not apply the ON operation signal continuously. y The manual operating handle moves at a high speed during electrical operation. Pay attention to the handle. Keep the operation circuit power supply off during manual operation. u In the manual operation, surely turn the manual operating handle to the position indicated on the nameplate.

DDOperation circuit ···· For the automatic reset type, the connections indicated with the dashed lines are added. circuit 1

Operation

NF400-CW~NF800-UEW NV400-CW~NV800-HEW Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off) G (Earth terminal) (DC-)

A1

R3

R4

R1

R2

Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off) G

Z2

(DC-)

M

Operating power supply

ON

B

OFF Reset

C

ALa

T1 T1b Z3

X X1

Y1

Z4a

Z4b R

A1

T1 A2

Y

Y2a

T2

ON

T2

OFF Reset

D

B

:

Motor

X

:

Relay for ON operation

Y

:

Relay for OFF operation

R

:

Motor driving relay

Z

:

X4

Y1

Y4

Y2

Z1

Y3

Z X

T1b

C

M

Z2

LS

Y

T2a T2

Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)

ALa

M

X1 X3

D

Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)

X2

(Earth terminal)

Operating power supply

Z1 LS

Z

A2

circuit 2

NF1000-SEW~NF1600-SEW

Z, K: Exciting coil of keep relay

: Motor field coil

(Operation circuit 3)

: Surge absorbing circuit

LS, LS1, LS2: Limit switches

: Surge absorber

X1~X4, Y1~Y4, Y2a, Z4a, Z4b, Z1, Z2, Z3, K1, T1b, T2a: Relay switches

Polarity switching relay

T1 : Pumping preventing timer

(Operation circuit 1 or 2)

T2 : Timer for automatic reset

6

(R1)~(R4): Relay switches

charge type (2) JSpring J

DDElectrical operation When the ON operation switch is closed, the closing coil will be excited to release the latch mechanism, and the closing spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. When the OFF operation switch is closed, the relay will operate to start the motor, turn off (reset) the circuit breaker and, at the same time, charge the closing spring. DDManual operation • Press the ON button, and the latch mechanism will be released, and the closing spring force will instantaneously turn on the circuit breaker. • Turning off (resetting) Push the leaf spring, bring out the manual handle, and move the handle upward and downward more than ten times. Then, the circuit breaker will be turned off (reset), and, at the same time, the closing spring will be charged. DDCautions for use

q In Before installing or removing the electrical operation device to or from the circuit breaker, trip the circuit breaker, and discharge the electrical operation device. After the device is installed to the circuit breaker, the device will not trip the circuit breaker in the OFF state even if the trip button is pressed. This is not a trouble. The electrical operation device takes 3 seconds to turn off the circuit breaker. To open the circuit immediately by remote operation, use a circuit breaker with SHT or UVT. • The device has a built-in pumping preventing relay. w Current of about 9 A and 0.2 A will flow to the ON and OFF switches, respectively. Use appropriate switches.

Internal structure of spring charge type

Internal structure of motor-drive type

DDOperation circuit For the automatic reset type, the connections indicated with the dashed lines are added. Internal connection (when circuit breaker is off) LS3

CC : Coil for making

LS2 Y M X

X X

CC Y LS1

Y

Y

: Relay for pumping prevention

X

: Relay for self-sustaining on OFF side

LS1 : Limit switch interlocking with cam LS2 : Limit switch interlocking with cam LS3 : Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plate M

G

P2

P1

Operating power supply (DC-)

S2 ON

S4 OFF RESET

: Motor

Alarm switch for automatic resetting (contact a)

135

2 Accessories

Operation

6 Accessories

2

External Accessories

9. Distribution Board Mounting Parts, Lock Covers and Handle Caps DBPA-type D mounting base (for BH-P) Three-phase-type Note: Single-phase tvpes have no central pole.

34

Solderless terminal for wire size : 125A 14~50mm2 250A 22~125mm2

A

86.5

21

21

Solderless terminal for wire size 22~60mm2

37.5

75

4.5

75

Mtg. holes 4.5 dia.

25

75 A

25

87

25 25 75

Single-phase-type

Max. no. of ways 6 9 12 15 18 24 30 36 42

2 Accessories

6

136

1ph, 2w Main : 125A BPA-1106 BPA-1109 BPA-1112 BPA-1115 BPA-1118 – – –

154 164

1ph, 3w Main : 125A BPA-2106 – BPA-2112 – BPA-2118 BPA-2124 – –

3ph, 4w Main : 250A – – – – BPA-2218 BPA-2224 BPA-2230 BPA-2236

Main : 125A BPA-3106 – BPA-3112 – BPA-3118 BPA-3124 – –

Main : 250A – – – – BPA-3218 BPA-3224 BPA-3230 BPA-3236 BPA-3242

Neutral terminal NT-06 – NT-12 – NT-18 NT-24 NT-30 NT-36 NT-42

6 Accessories 2 External Accessories

DMounting D plate (for BH) 13.5

38.5 (63.3)

16

Spring clip

36

11

9.5

11

0.8

10

) : 3P

d) Handle cap for 2-pole units

b) Lock cover for c) Handle cap for 1-pole 2-pole, 3-pole units units

a) Lock cover for 1-pole units

5-6 wide mtg. slot

11

33

34

(

86 116 Line side

57 22.5

5.6 25 × 32 = 800 ± 1

14

13

22.5

5 102

Mounting pitch 102 25 25

Line side

BH MCB (mm)

5.5ø mtg. holes

Breakoff undercut

Outlines and dimensions (mm)

59

Colors available

One mounting plate has 32 circuits. One package includes 10 mounting plates (320 circuits).

Fig. ref.

Item

a) b) b) c) d)

DLock D covers and handle caps (for 1-pole, 2-pole and 3-pole types) Many panelboards include some restricted-operation circuits, which must either normally remain on, such as all-night lighting or alarms, or must remain off, such as spare circuits, or circuits used in repair or construction work. Breakers for such circuits can be locked by simply installing a lock cover on the handle.

Poles 1 2 3 1 2

Lock cover Cap

ON

Red LCBH1R LCBH2R LCBH3R HC1R HC2R

OFF

Colors Yellow LCVH1Y LCBH2Y LCBH3Y HC1Y HC2Y

ON

Lock cover in place (1-pole unit)

Green – – – HC1G HC2G

OFF

Lock cover in place (2-pole unit)

10. IEC 35-mm Rail Mounting Adapters Table 6-45

DExternal D dimension

Applicable model MCCB

2, 3

NF30-CS

2, 3

NF32-SV NF63-CV/SV/HV

ELCB –

Fig.

IEC 35-mm rail mounting adapter

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

3.5

Remark: 1. Place an order in units of 10 pieces.

8

Fig. 1

2 Accessories

NV32-SV NV63-CV/SV/HV

35

DIN-05SV

6

3

(Note1)

35

DIN-03CS

Number of poles of circuit breaker

100

Type name

1

Fig. 2 Mounting hook for IEC 35mm rail [DIN-05SV]

137

2 Accessories

MEMO

6

138

7

Characteristics and Dimensions 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 140

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers 198

• NF30-CS…………………………………………………………… 140 • NF32-SV, NF63-CV/SV/HV……………………………………… 142 • NF125-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 144 • NF125-UV… ……………………………………………………… 146 • NF250-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 148 • NF250-UV… ……………………………………………………… 150 • NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV, NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV, NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV… ………………………………… 152 • NF125-SEV/HEV, NF250-SEV/HEV… ………………………… 154 • NF400-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 156 • NF400-SEW/HEW/REW… ……………………………………… 158 • NF400-UEW… …………………………………………………… 160 • NF630-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 162 • NF630-SEW/HEW/REW… ……………………………………… 164 • NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW…………………………………… 166 • NF800-SDW… …………………………………………………… 168 • NF800-UEW… …………………………………………………… 170 • NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW… ………………………………… 172 • NF1250-SDW……………………………………………………… 174 • NF1600-SEW……………………………………………………… 176 • NF1600-SDW……………………………………………………… 178

• NF50-SVFU, NV50-SVFU… …………………………………… 198 • NF100-CVFU, NV100-CVFU… ………………………………… 200 • NF125-SVU/HVU, NV125-SVU/HVU…………………………… 202 • NF225-CWU… …………………………………………………… 204 • NF250-SVU/HVU, NV250-SVU/HVU…………………………… 206 • NF400-SWU/HWU………………………………………………… 208 • NF630-SWU/HWU………………………………………………… 210

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers 180 • NV32-SV, NV-63CV/SV/HV……………………………………… 180 • NV125-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 182 • NV250-CV/SV/HV… ……………………………………………… 184 • NV125-SEV/HEV, NV250-SEV/HEV… ………………………… 186 • NV400-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 188 • NV400-SEW/HEW/REW… ……………………………………… 190 • NV630-CW/SW… ………………………………………………… 192 • NV630-SEW/HEW………………………………………………… 194 • NV800-SEW/HEW………………………………………………… 196

4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers 212 • NF250-SEV/HEV with MDU……………………………………… 212 • NF400-SEP/HEP with MDU……………………………………… 214 • NF630-SEP/HEP with MDU, NF800-SEP/HEP with MDU… … 216

5 Miniature Circuit Breakers,

Residual Current Circuit Breakers, Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection and Isolating Switch 218

• BH,BH-P…………………………………………………………… 218 • BH-D6, BH-D10…………………………………………………… 219 • BH-DN……………………………………………………………… 220 • BV-D………………………………………………………………… 221 • BV-DN……………………………………………………………… 222 • KB-D………………………………………………………………… 223

6 Circuit Protectors

224

• CP30-BA…………………………………………………………… 224

7 Electrical Operated Cicuit Breakers 225

139

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF30-CS

Model

NF30-CS

Rated current In (A)

3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30

Number of poles

2

3

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

500 690V

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

−

500V

−

415V

1.5/1.5

380V

1.5/1.5

240V

2.5/2

Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)

Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 (2pcs)

NF30-CS

Operating Characteristics 3h 2h Types NF30-CS

1h 40min 20min 10min 6min 4min 2min

Operating time

1min 40s 30s 20s

Max.

10s 6s 4s 2s 1s 0.6s 0.4s

Min.

0.2s 0.1s 0.06s 0.04s 0.02s 0.01s

1 1.25

2

3

4

5

7

10

Internal Accessories AL

External Accessories Terminal cover

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

70

100

Lead wire direction

AX

Remarks: 1. Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be produced upon request. 2. Refer to page 106.

Type name

Small

(TC-S) TCS-03CS3W (*1)

Large

(TC-L) TCL-03CS3W (*1)

Rear

(BTC) BTC-03CS3W (*1)

Skeleton

(TTC) TTC-03CS (*1)

Reference page

121

Handle lock

(HL) HL-05FH

127

Lock cover

(LC) LC03CS

128

(DIN) DIN-03CS

137

Note *1 The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.

140

50

Rated ambient temperature

Operating handle Right-side mounting

3-pole

IEC 35mm rail mounting adapter

40

Temperature Characteristics Curve

2-pole

Accessories

30

Operating time change rate (%)

7

Left-side mounting

20

×100% of rated current

300 250 200 150 100 80 70 –10

0

10

20

30

40

Ambient temperature (°C)

50

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF30-CS

Outline Drawing

Front connection 14.5

84 10

47 67.5

2-pole

3-pole

49 3

23.5

12.5 (max.)

28 45

Breaker

f5.5

f5

f8.5 23.5

M40.7 taps or f5

Applicable wire size: f1.6mm to 14mm2

54

64

96

76.5

M5 screw

6

Mtg. hole

2-pole

Conductor thickness t=3 max.

52

Drilling plan

Busbar drilling for direct connection

67

3-pole

Rear connection 3-pole M40.7 taps or f5 Mtg plate t max. =3.2

2-pole

Breaker

Breaker

Mounting base

2-pole

3-pole

20 18

23.5 47

M6 screw

84

76.5 23.5

8

55

58.5

38.5

5

25 (min)

76.5

45 (min)

R2

Breaker mtg M40.7 screw

2-pole

3-pole

ø14

20

Front-plate cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle

Drilling plan

IEC Rail Mounting Adapter 35mm IEC-rail adapter for installation

35

3-pole

52 55 58 70

7 1 Characteristics and Dimensions

2-pole

4

31 Installation utensil for 35mm IEC-rail

100

5

141

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

NF32-SV NF63-CV NF63-SV NF63-HV

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

Model Rated current In (A) Number of poles

NF32-SV

NF63-CV

NF63-SV

NF63-HV

3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32

3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63

3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63

10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63

2

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

Rated short-circuit IEC 60947-2 breaking (Icu/Ics) capacity (kA)

2

3

600

AC

DC

2

3

600

4

2

3

4

600

690

690V

–

–

–

2.5/2.5

500V

2.5/2.5

2.5/2.5

7.5/7.5

7.5/7.5

440V

2.5/2.5

2.5/2.5

7.5/7.5

10/8

415V

2.5/2.5

2.5/2.5

7.5/7.5

10/8

400V

5/5

5/5

7.5/7.5

10/8

380V

5/5

5/5

7.5/7.5

10/8

230V

7.5/7.5

7.5/7.5

15/15

25/19

250V (*1)

2.5/2.5

2.5/2.5

7.5/7.5

7.5/7.5

Standard attached parts (front connection)

Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) (*2)

Notes *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. Not available for use with connection as shown at the bottom of page 14. *2 Supplied with NF63-SV and NF63-HV.

NF63-SV

Operating Characteristics 4h

30min 20min 14min 10min

2h 1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min

6min 4min

2min

2min

Max.

1min

5s

Operating time

Max. total breaking time

10s

Min.

2s

Instantaneous trip current is fixed to AC600±A120A and DC850±A170A.

Max.

30s 20s

0.5s

Max. (40A-50A)

1min

5s Min.

30s 20s

Max. total breaking time

10s 5s Min. 2s

Max. total breaking time

1s

Max. (60A-63A)

2min

10s

2s

1s

Operating characteristics NF63-CV 40A-63A NF63-SV 40A-63A NF63-HV 40A-63A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

1min

30s 20s

2h

Operating characteristics NF32-SV 10A-32A NF63-CV 10A-32A NF63-SV 10A-32A NF63-HV 10A-32A

Operating time

1h

Operating time

4h

4h Operating characteristics NF32-SV 3A-6A NF63-CV 3A-6A NF63-SV 3A-6A

2h

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

AC AC

0.1s

DC

0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

AC

0.05s Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

40

DC

0.02s 0.01s

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

5 6 7

Internal Accessories Operating handle

AL

15

20

30

40 50 60 70

2

3

4

5 6 7

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

40

Temperature Compensation Curve AX

SHT or UVT

Lead-wire direction

130

Current rating (%)

Right-side mounting

3, 4-pole

120 110 100 90

(Rated ambient 80 –10 temperature 40°C)

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

× 100% of rated current

2-pole

7

0.01s

100

× 100% of rated current

× 100% of rated current

Left-side mounting

0.02s

Instantaneous trip 10

DC

0.05s

Rated ambient temperature

0.2s

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories F Operating handle V LC Handle lock device

HL(*1) HL-S

Type name 2P

F-05SV2

3, 4P

F-05SV

2P

V-05SV2

3, 4P

V-05SV

Reference page 117

Accessories Mechanical interlock

119

Small

TC-S

LC-05SV HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-05SV

Note *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock.

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-05SV4

2P

TCS-05SV2

3P

TCS-05SV3

2P 127

Large

TC-L

Terminal cover Skeleton

142

MI

Type name 2, 3P

TTC

Rear

BTC

Plug-in

PTC

3P

129

TCL-05SV2 TCL-05SV2L TCL-05SV3 TCL-05SV3L

4P

TCL-05SV4

2P

TTC-05SV2

3P

TTC-05SV3

2P

BTC-05SV2

3P

BTC-05SV3

2P

PTC-05SV2

3P

PTC-05SV3

IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters

Reference page

DIN-05SV

121

137

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF32-SV · NF63-CV · NF63-SV · NF63-HV

Outline Drawing

Front connection Insulation barrier (removable)

M50.8 screw (M8 for 60A and 63A)

Mounting hole

24

50

111

f4.5

50

Applicable wire size: 2 f1.6 to 22mm (for M50.8 screw) 84

112

130

M40.7 taps or f5 Breaker

f5.5 (f8.5 for 60A and 63A)

Trip button

25

50

75

50

75

100

Neutral pole

45

3-pole

25

25

61 12.5 max.

68

(16 max. for 60A and 63A)

72

4

2-pole

8

25

f8.5

22

90

4-pole

2-pole

(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

3-pole

4-pole

Drilling plan

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Rear connection 4-pole

2-pole Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

M40.7 taps or f5

Mounting base

3-pole

Breaker

43 (44 for 60A and 63A)

Breaker

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

72

f14

25 42

52

25

27 min. 68

R1

111 50

M6 screw

112

8

112

8

27 min.

25

22.5

25

50

75

3-pole

4-pole

50

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

(46 for 60A and 63A)

2-pole

70

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Plug-in Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block

M50.8 Terminal block mounting screw

3-pole

4-pole

80

105

50

75

7

Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

Details of terminal

89

25 55

30

2-pole

f6.5

Conductor drilling

25

50

57

82

107

2-pole

3-pole

4-pole

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. Only 2-pole and 3-pole models are available for NF32-SV and NF63-CV.

143

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

54

7 M6 screw 21

80

54

116

16.5 max.

85

5.5

170

11

83.5

54

25

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

NF125-CV NF125-SV NF125-HV

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

Model Rated current In (A)

NF125-CV

NF125-SV

NF125-HV

50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125

(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125

(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125

2

2

Number of poles

2

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

600

Rated short-circuit IEC 60947-2 breaking (Icu/Ics) capacity (kA)

AC

DC

3

4

3

690

4

690

690V

–

8/8

10/8

500V

7.5/4

18/18

30/23

440V

10/5

25/25

50/38

415V

10/5

30/30

50/38

400V

10/5

30/30

50/38

380V

10/5

30/30

50/38

230V

30/15

50/50

100/75

250V (*1)

7.5/4

40/40

–

Standard attached parts (front connection)

Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) (*2) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)

Notes *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. If wired as shown at the bottom on page 14, three and four poles can be used for up to 400 and 500VDC, respectively. *2 Supplied with NF125-SV and NF125-HV.

NF125-SV

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

6min 4min

1min

Max.

30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

2s

Max. total breaking time

1s

30s 20s

1min

5s Min.

5s Min. 2s 1s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

10s

1s 0.5s

0.5s AC

AC

AC DC Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

5 6 7

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

40 50 6070

0.05s

0.02s 0.01s

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

AL

4

5 6 7

0.02s

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

0.01s

40

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

40

× 100% of rated current

× 100% of rated current

Internal Accessories Operating handle

DC

0.1s

0.05s

× 100% of rated current

Temperature Compensation Curve AX

SHT or UVT

Lead-wire direction

130

Right-side mounting

Current rating (%)

Left-side mounting

0.2s

DC

2-pole

3, 4-pole

Rated ambient temperature

0.02s

120 110 100 90

(Rated ambient 80 –10 temperature 40°C)

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

30s 20s

2s

0.2s

Max.

2min

Max. total breaking time

10s

0.5s

0.05s

7

6min 4min

Max. (40A-50A)

1min

Operating characteristics NF125-CV 125A NF125-SV 125A NF125-HV 125A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Max. (60A-100A)

2min Operating time

Operating time

30min 20min 14min 10min

Instantaneous trip current is fixed to AC600±A120A and DC850±A170A.

2min

0.01s

2h Operating characteristics NF125-CV 50A-100A NF125-SV 40A-100A NF125-HV 40A-100A

1h

Operating time

1h

4h

2h

Operating characteristics NF125-SV 15A-32A NF125-HV 15A-32A

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories F Operating handle V LC Handle lock device

HL(*1) HL-S

Type name 2P

F-1SV2

3, 4P

F-1SV

2P

V-1SV2

3, 4P

V-1SV

Reference page 117

Accessories Mechanical interlock

119

Small

MI TC-S

LC-05SV HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-05SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Large

127 Terminal cover

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

BTC

Plug-in

PTC

Electrical operation device

144

Type name 2, 3P

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-05SV4

2P

TCS-1SV2

3P

TCS-1SV3

2P

TCL-1SV2

3P

TCL-1SV3

4P

TCL-1SV4

2P

TTC-1SV2

3P

TTC-1SV3

2P

BTC-1SV2

3P

BTC-1SV3

2P

PTC-1SV2

3P

PTC-1SV3 (*2)

Reference page 129

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF125-CV · NF125-SV · NF125-HV

Outline Drawing

Front connection

Solderless terminal for wire size

24

Breaker

14 to 2/0AWG CU/AL

Wire connection

f4.5

50

f8.5 8

30

22

60

f8.5

Trip button

30

84

112

130

50

M8 screw

111

Insulation barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

60

90

90

120

68

Neutral pole 4

3-pole

M40.7 taps or f5

19 max. Comb conductor 2-pole 16.5 max. (Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

72 90

2-pole

30

30

45 61

3-pole

4-pole

4-pole Conductor drilling for direct connection

Drilling plan

Rear connection

4-pole

4-pole Mounting base Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

30 8.5

30

15 68 72

5

M8 bolt

2.5

Insulation tube

15

30

90

f18

60

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

60

2.5

54.5

52

R1

112 16

15 connection allowance

R1

111

52

Breaker

3-pole

2-pole

112

102

2-pole

8

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

3-pole

28

30

57

90 M40.7 taps or f5

2-pole

86

3-pole

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

104.5

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Plug-in

Mounting plate

M50.8 Terminal block mounting nut or screw mounted directly

Plug-in terminal block

3-pole

4-pole

95

125

60

90

7

Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

Details of terminal

30

56

12 f8.5 65

89

30

60

67

97

127

2-pole

3-pole

4-pole

30

2-pole

Conductor drilling

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

Drilling plan

Remarks: 1. The 2-pole models of NF125-HV are 3-pole models with the central pole removed. 2. Only 2-and 3-pole models are available for NF125-CV.

145

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

M8 screw

21

80

54

116

20 max.

85

5.5

170

11

83.5

56

30

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF125-UV

Model

NF125-UV 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 125

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

2

3

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

4

690

AC

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

DC

690V

10/10

500V

200/200

440V

200/200

415V

200/200

400V

200/200

380V

200/200

230V

200/200

250V

−

Standard attached parts (front connection)

Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) M4×0.7×73 (2 and 3P: 2pcs)

NF125-UV

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h

6min 4min Instantaneous trip current is fixed to 600A ± 120A.

10s 5s Min.

2s 1s 0.5s

1min

30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

1s

0.1s

Time-delay trip 4

5 6 7

15

20

30

0.01s

40 50 60 70

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

× 100% of rated current

5 6 7

0.02s

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

0.01s

40

3

4

5 6 7

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

40

Temperature Compensation Curve AX

Right-side mounting

SHT or UVT

EAL

TBL

MG

Lead-wire direction

130

TBM

7

120 110 100 90

(Rated ambient 80 temperature 40°C) –10

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Time-delay trip 2

1 1.25

× 100% of rated current

Current rating (%)

Left-side mounting

AL

4

× 100% of rated current

Internal Accessories Operating handle

Max. total breaking time

0.1s 0.05s

0.02s

Instantaneous trip 10

0.2s

Max. total breaking time

Rated ambient temperature

3

Min.

0.5s

0.2s

0.05s

2

5s 2s

0.1s

1 1.25

10s

1s

0.05s 0.02s

30s 20s

2s

0.5s Max. total breaking time

0.2s

Max.

2min Operating time

30s 20s

6min 4min

Max. (40A-50A)

1min Operating time

Max.

Operating characteristics NF125-UV 125A

30min 20min 14min 10min

Max. (60A-100A)

2min

1min

1h

Operating characteristics NF125-UV 40A-100A

30min 20min 14min 10min

2min

Operating time

2h

1h

Operating characteristics NF125-UV 15A-30A

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

0.01s

4h

2h

1h

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Lock cover Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-1UV

117

V

V-1UV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL (*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-05SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127 Terminal cover

MI

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-05SV4

3P

TCS-1SV3

3P

TCL-1SV3

4P

TCL-1SV4

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

3P

TTC-1SV3

Rear

BTC

3P

BTC-1SV3

Plug-in

PTC

3P

PTC-1SV3

Electrical operation device

146

Type name 2, 3P

(*2)

Reference page 129

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF125-UV

Outline Drawing

Front connection

M8 screw

Breaker 24

90

90

120

61

Neutral pole

19 max. (Comb conductor 16.5 max.) (Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

68 4

3-pole

4-pole

172

8 45

f8.5

30 60

f4.5

Trip 22 button

50

84

191

f8.5

130

173

61

Mounting hole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

72 90

30

30 M40.7 taps or f5

3-pole

4-pole

Drilling plan

Rear connection

3-pole

4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

8.5 72

60

2.5

54.5

30

60

5

M8 bolt

15 68

52

R1

30 2.5

173

16

15Connection allowance

8

173

Mounting base

4.5

3-pole

172

52

4-pole

Breaker

102

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

M40.7 breaker mounting screw Insulation tube

104.5

86

30 90

M40.7 taps or f5

90

15

28

f18

3-pole

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

Drilling plan

Front-panel cutout

Plug-in

Mounting plate

Breaker (Plug-in terminal block)

7 1 Characteristics and Dimensions

141

115

16.5 max.

56

12

177

231

11

144.5

56

Plug-in terminal block

M50.8 Terminal block mounting nut or screw mounted directly

5.5

60

21 M8 screw 89

30

f8.5

30 97

95

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

Conductor drilling Drilling plan

Details of terminal

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

147

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

NF250-CV NF250-SV NF250-HV

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

Model Rated current In (A)

NF250-CV

NF250-SV

NF250-HV

(*1) (100) 125 150 175 200 225 250

(*1) (100) 125 150 160 175 200 225 250

125 150 160 175 200 225 250

2

2

Number of poles

2

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

Rated short-circuit IEC 60947-2 breaking (Icu/Ics) capacity (kA)

3

600

AC

DC (*1)

4

3

690

4

690

690V

–

8/8

10/8

500V

10/8

30/30

50/38

440V

15/12

36/36

65/65

415V

25/19

36/36

70/70

400V

25/19

36/36

75/75

380V

25/19

36/36

75/75

230V

36/27

85/85

100/100

250V

15/12

20/20 (300V)

40/40 (300V)

Standard attached parts (front connection)

Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Note *1 Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. In this case, do not use the neutral pole of the four-pole products. If wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, three-pole NF250-CV can be used for up to 400VDC, three-pole NF250-SV and NF250-HV up to 500VDC and four-pole products up to 600VDC.

NF250-SV

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h 2h 1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min 2min

2min

Max.

Operating time

1min

30s 20s

Max. total breaking time

10s 5s Min.

2s

30s 20s

Max. total breaking time

10s 5s Min.

2s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

AC

0.2s

AC

0.1s

0.1s

DC

DC

0.05s

0.05s 0.02s 2

3

4

5 6 7

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

10

15

20

30

0.01s

40

2

3

4

× 100% of rated current

AL

10

15

20

30

40

Temperature Compensation Curve AX

SHT or UVT

Lead-wire direction

130

Current rating (%)

Operating handle

5 6 7

× 100% of rated current

Internal Accessories

Left-side mounting

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

Rated ambient temperature

0.01s

Operating characteristics NF250-CV 250A NF250-SV 250A NF250-HV 250A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Max.

1min Operating time

2h

Operating characteristics NF250-CV 100A-225A NF250-SV 100A-225A NF250-HV 125A-225A

Right-side mounting

7

120 110 100 90

(Rated ambient 80 temperature 40°C) –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-2SV

117

V

V-2SV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL(*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-2SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127

MI

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

Terminal cover

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-2SV4

2, 3P 2, 3P

Reference page 129

TCS-2SV3 TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L

4P

TCL-2SV4

Skeleton

TTC

2, 3P

TTC-2SV3

Rear

BTC

2, 3P

BTC-2SV3

Plug-in

PTC

2, 3P

PTC-2SV3

Electrical operation device

148

Type name 2, 3P

(*2)

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF250-CV · NF250-SV · NF250-HV

Outline Drawing

M8 bolt (hex-socket)

Insulation barrier (removable)

24

Breaker

.5 10

f8 C 1

f4.5

50

102

165

144

126

Solderless terminal for wire size 125-175A 14-95mm2 200-250A 70-125mm2 Wire connection

100

Mounting hole

30

Front connection

1 C

35

70

105

45

68 4

140

3-pole

35

72

M40.7 taps or f5

3-pole

25 max.

92

4-pole

35

.5

f8

61

Neutral pole

105

Or

9

22

25 max.

f8.5

100

Trip button

4-pole

(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole

Mounting base Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

Breaker

3-pole

15

72

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

6

15

68

R

52

1

144

126

20

Connection allowance

22

144

8

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

3-pole

4-pole

35

70

f9 M8 bolt

Insulation tube

105

71

f24

106

70

32.5

35

M40.7 taps or f5

35

100

105

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

3-pole

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Plug-in 4-pole 145

7

Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

M5 terminal block mounting screw

21 31 89 112

30

Insulation barrier

56.5

20

3-pole 70 4-pole 105 3-pole 105 4-pole 140

80

54 15

28

151

6

11

70

144

165

190

24

56.5

Connection allowance

f9 M8 bolt Stud attachable in this direction only

70

105

107

142

3-pole

4-pole

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

Drilling plan

Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed. 2. Only 2-pole and 3-pole models are available for NF250-CV.

149

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

34.5

Mounting plate

3-pole 110

Plug-in terminal block

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF250-UV

Model

NF250-UV 125 150 175 200 225 250

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

2

3

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

4

690

AC

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

DC

690V

15/15

500V

200/200

440V

200/200

415V

200/200

400V

200/200

380V

200/200

230V

200/200

250V

− Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (2 and 3P: 2pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Standard attached parts (front connection)

NF250-UV

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h

2h Operating characteristics NF250-UV 125A-225A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min 2min

30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

2s

30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

2s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

Max. total breaking time

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.1s 0.05s

0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

Max.

1min Operating time

Operating time

2min

Max.

1min

Operating characteristics NF250-UV 250A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

3

4

5 6 7

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 2

1 1.25

10

15

20

30

0.01s

40

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

× 100% of rated current

Internal Accessories AX

Right-side mounting

SHT or UVT

EAL

TBL

MG

Lead-wire direction

20

30

40

130

TBM

7

120 110 100 90

(Rated ambient 80 temperature 40°C) –10

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

15

Rated ambient temperature

AL

10

Temperature Compensation Curve

Current rating (%)

Operating handle Left-side mounting

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

× 100% of rated current

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-2UV

117

V

V-2UV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL(*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-2SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127

MI

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

Terminal cover

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-2SV4

2, 3P 2, 3P

Reference page 129

TCS-2SV3 TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L

4P

TCL-2SV4

Skeleton

TTC

2, 3P

TTC-2SV3

Rear

BTC

2, 3P

BTC-2SV3

Plug-in

PTC

2, 3P

PTC-2SV3

Electrical operation device

150

Type name 2, 3P

(*2)

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF250-UV

Outline Drawing

Front connection M8 bolt (hex-socket)

Breaker

24

201

f8.5

f8.5

100

10

f4.5

50

165

102

240

165

219

75

75

100

28

Insulation barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

Trip button

45

35

22

Neutral pole 70

23 max.

61 68

(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

72

Conductor drilling for direct connection

105 4

105

140

3-pole

4-pole

92

35

35

3-pole

M40.7 taps or f5

4-pole

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

Mounting base

3-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

Breaker 4-pole 3-pole

11.5

73

219

201

8 6

15

68 72

71

15 f9 M8 bolt

70 105

f24

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

32.5

35

100

35

35 Insulation tube

M40.7 taps or f5

70

106

3-pole Drilling plan

52

R1

20

Connection allowance 22

219

108

105

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

Front-panel cutout

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

30

7

56.5

151

70 15

31 89

20

28

21

Breaker (Plug-in terminal block)

129

219 6

265

M5 terminal block mounting screw 11

110

56.5

Plug-in terminal block

155

34.5

Mounting plate

Connection allowance 24

Plug-in

70 Insulation barrier

105

f9 M8 bolt Stud attachable in this direction only

70

f6 hole or M5 taps

107

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

151

Characteristics and Dimensions

NF125-SGV NF250-SGV NF160-LGV NF125-HGV NF250-HGV NF250-RGV

NF160-SGV NF125-LGV NF250-LGV NF160-HGV NF125-RGV

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

Model

NF125-SGV 16-20, 20-25, 25-32 32-40, 35-50, 45-63 Rated current In (A) 56-80, 70-100, 90-125 Number of poles 2 3 4 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690V 8/8 500V 30/30 440V 36/36 415V 36/36 IEC AC 60947-2 400V 36/36 (Icu/Ics) 380V 36/36 230V 85/85 200V 85/85 DC (*1) 300V 20/20 Standard attached parts (front connection)

NF160-SGV

NF250-SGV NF125-LGV NF160-LGV 16-20, 20-25, 25-32 125-160 32-40, 35-50, 45-63 125-160 140-200 125-160 56-80, 70-100, 90-125 175-250 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 690 690 690 690 8/8 8/8 8/8 8/8 30/30 30/30 36/36 36/36 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 85/85 85/85 90/90 90/90 85/85 85/85 90/90 90/90 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

7

Model

NF160-HGV

NF250-HGV NF125-RGV 16-20, 20-25, 25-32 125-160 32-40, 40-50, 50-63 125-160 140-200 63-80, 80-100, 100-125 175-250 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 690 690 690 10/8 10/8 – 50/38 50/38 – 65/65 65/65 125/125 70/70 70/70 150/150 75/75 75/75 150/150 75/75 75/75 150/150 100/100 100/100 150/150 100/100 100/100 150/150 40/40 40/40 – Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NF125-HGV 16-20, 20-25, 25-32 32-40, 35-50, 45-63 Rated current In (A) 56-80, 70-100, 90-125 Number of poles 2 3 4 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690V 10/8 500V 50/38 440V 65/65 415V 70/70 IEC AC 60947-2 400V 75/75 (Icu/Ics) 380V 75/75 230V 100/100 200V 100/100 DC (*1) 300V 40/40 Standard attached parts (front connection)

NF250-SGV

NF250-LGV 125-160 140-200 175-250 2 3 4 690 8/8 36/36 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 90/90 90/90 20/20

NF250-RGV 125-160 160-200 200-250 2 3 690 – – 125/125 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 –

Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, three-pole models can be used for up to 500VDC, and four-pole models for up to 600VDC.

Operating Characteristics

AC 600A±120A

DC 850A±170A

1min 30s 20s

Max.

10s Min.

1s Max. total breaking time

0.5s 0.2s

0.02s

Time-delay trip 1 1.3

2

3

4

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15 20

30 40 50 6070

lnstantaneous trip current ratio AC xln(%) 1000±200

30s 20s 10s

2s 1s 0.5s Max. total breaking time

DC

0.1s

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 1 1.3

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15 20

30 40

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15 20

0.01s

30 40

Current( × 100% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In)

Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In)

AL

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

Current( × 100% of Ir)

Internal Accessories

Max. total breaking time

DC

0.1s 0.05s

0.02s 0.01s

AC

0.2s

0.05s

0.02s 0.01s

AC

0.2s

DC

DC xln(%) 1300±260

Min.

5s

2s

lnstantaneous trip current ratio AC xln(%) 1000±200

10s

1s AC

Max.

30s 20s

0.5s

Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In)

Operating handle

1min

0.5s

Current( × 100% of Ir)

Left-side mounting

DC xln(%) 1300±260

Min.

5s

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15 20

Current( × 100% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current( × 100% of In)

30 40

Temperature Compensation Curve AX

SHT or UVT

Lead-wire direction

130 Current rating (%)

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Max. total breaking time

1min

6min 4min 2min

Max.

1s

0.05s

0.05s

7

Min.

5s

0.1s

DC

2min

10s

0.2s

AC

0.1s

DC 850A±170A

30s 20s

2s

2s

0.01s

1min

AC 600A±120A

30min 20min 14min 10min

Right-side mounting

Rated ambient temperature

5s

Max.

1h

NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV Current setting Ir = 40- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) Current setting Ir = 45- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) Current setting Ir = 56- 80A(Rated current In= 80A) Current setting Ir = 63-100A(Rated current In=100A) NF125-RGV Current setting Ir = 50- 63A(Rated current In= 63A) Current setting Ir = 63- 80A(Rated current In= 80A)

6min 4min

lnstantaneous trip current

2min Operating time

Operating time

2min

Operating time

6min 4min

Operating Characteristic Curves Thermal-Adjustable types NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV Current setting Ir = 70-100A(Rated current In=100A) Current setting Ir = 80-125A(Rated current In=125A) Current setting Ir = 90-125A(Rated current In=125A) NF160-SGV NF160-LGV NF160-HGV Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A) NF250-SGV NF250-LGV NF250-HGV Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A) Current setting Ir = 140-200A(Rated current In=200A) Current setting Ir = 160-250A(Rated current In=250A) Current setting Ir = 175-250A(Rated current In=250A) NF125-RGV Current setting Ir = 80-100A(Rated current In=100A) Current setting Ir = 100-125A(Rated current In=125A) NF250-RGV Current setting Ir = 125-160A(Rated current In=160A) Current setting Ir = 160-200A(Rated current In=200A) Current setting Ir = 200-250A(Rated current In=250A)

2h

Thermal-Adjustable types

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV Current setting Ir = 32-40A(Rated current In=40A) Current setting Ir = 35-50A(Rated current In=50A) NF125-RGV Current setting Ir = 32-40A(Rated current In=40A) Current setting Ir = 40-50A(Rated current In=50A)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

lnstantaneous trip current

Operating Characteristic Curves

2h

Thermal-Adjustable types

1h

NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF125-RGV Current setting Ir = 16-20A(Rated current In=20A) Current setting Ir = 20-25A(Rated current In=25A) Current setting Ir = 25-32A(Rated current In=32A)

30min 20min 14min 10min

Operating Characteristics

2h

Thermal-Adjustable types

1h

4h

4h

4h Operating Characteristics

2h

Operating time

 4h

120 110 100 90 80 -10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C) (rated ambient temperature 40°C)

External Accessories Accessories F V LC

Operating handle

Handle lock device

HL(*1) HL-S

Type name F-2SV V-2SV LC-05SV HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-2SV

Reference page 117 119

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

152

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127 Terminal cover

MI

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

Skeleton TTC Rear BTC Plug-in PTC Electrical operation device

Type name 2, 3P 4P 2, 3P 2, 3P 4P 2, 3P 2, 3P 2, 3P

MI-05SV3 MI-2SV4 TCS-2SV3 TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L TCL-2SV4 TTC-2SV3 BTC-2SV3 PTC-2SV3 (*2)

Reference page 129

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF125-SGV · NF160-SGV · NF250-SGV · NF125-LGV · NF160-LGV · NF250-LGV · NF125-HGV · NF160-HGV · NF250-HGV · NF125-RGV · NF250-RGV

Outline Drawing

30

Front connection Insulating barrier (removable)

Breaker

126 10

C

1

f4.5

f8

.5

50

102

Solderless terminal for wire size 125-175A 14-95mm2 200-250A 70-125mm2 Wire connection

165

144

24

M8 bolt (hex-socket)

100

Mounting hole

100

f8.5

1

C

Thermal Adj Button 22

35

70

105

105

25 max.

45

35

Or

61 Neutral pole

.5 f8

68 4

140

72

35

M40.7 taps or f5

3-pole

9

Trip button

4-pole

25 max.

92

(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

3-pole

4-pole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole 3-pole

4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

3-pole

Breaker

R

52

1

144

20

Connection allowance

22

126

144

8

Mounting plate t max. = 3.2

Mounting base

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

15 68 72

f24

6

15

f9 M8 bolt

Insulating tube

70

70

105

71

35

M40.7 taps or f5

35

100

105

1mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

3-pole

106

32.5

35

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Plug-in

21 31 89 112

30

56.5

Insulating barrier

4-pole 105 3-pole 105 4-pole 140

56.5

80

54 20

3-pole 70

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

M5 terminal block mounting screw

15

28

151

6

11

7

3-pole 110

70

144

165

190

Mounting plate

4-pole 145

24 connection allowance

34.5

Plug-in terminal block

f9 M8 bolt Stud attachable in this direction only

70

105

107

142

3-pole

4-pole

f6mm hole or M50.8 taps

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

153

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

Model

NF125-SEV

NF125-HEV

NF250-SEV

NF250-HEV

Rated current In (A)

32 63 125

32 63 125

160 250

160 250

Current setting Ir (A)

16-32 32-63 63-125

16-32 32-63 63-125

80-160 125-250

80-160 125-250

Number of poles

3

3

4

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

Rated short-circuit IEC 60947-2 breaking (Icu/Ics) capacity (kA)

4

690

AC

DC

3

4

690

690

3

4 690

690V

8/8

10/8

8/8

10/8

500V

30/30

50/38

30/30

50/38

440V

36/36

65/65

36/36

65/65

415V

36/36

70/70

36/36

70/70

400V

36/36

75/75

36/36

75/75

380V

36/36

75/75

36/36

75/75

230V

85/85

100/100

85/85

100/100

250V

–

–

–

–

Standard attached parts (front connection)

Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

NF125-SEV

Operating Characteristics 10h

10h

5h

Operating characteristics

5h

Operating characteristics

2h

NF125-SEV NF125-HEV

2h

NF250-SEV NF250-HEV

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

6

LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 670s (TL = 100s set) 540s (TL = 80s set) 400s (TL = 60s set) 80s (TL = 12s set)

Current setting Ir 16-32 32-63 63-125

Rated current In 32A 63A 125A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

2min 30s 20s

6

I t OFF

10s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%

5s

1min

Operating time

LTD operating time TL 12–60–80–100s ±20% (at 200%)

6

I t ON

2s

6

I t OFF

10s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%

5s 2s 1s 0.5s

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

0.2s 0.1s

I t ON

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

0.2s 0.1s

0.1±0.03s

2

0.05s

I t ON

0.05s 2

INST pickup current Ii In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15%

0.01s 0.6 0.7

1 1.25

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

0.02s

Max. total breaking time 15

20

30

I t OFF

0.01s

40

0.6 0.7

1 1.25

Internal Accessories

3

4

5 6 7

Max. total breaking time

10

15

20

30

40

AX

Right-side mounting

Lead-wire direction

SHT or UVT

PAL

Rated ambient temperature

AL

2

Current Reducing Curve Derating of load current (%)

Operating handle

INST pickup current Ii In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15%

× 100% of current setting Ir Instantaneous tripping current (% of rated current or % of current setting Ir)

× 100% of current setting Ir Instantaneous tripping current (% of rated current or % of current setting Ir)

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

0.1±0.03s

2

2

I t OFF

0.02s

Left-side mounting

Rated current In 160A 250A

LTD operating time TL 12–60–80–100s ±20% (at 200%)

6

I t ON

30s 20s

1s 0.5s

7

Current setting Ir 80-160 125-250

2min

1min

Operating time

6

LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 670s (TL = 100s set) 540s (TL = 80s set) 400s (TL = 60s set) 80s (TL = 12s set)

130 120 110 100 90 80 70 –10

(Note)

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

The rated current does not have thermal characteristics. Reduce the current as shown in the curve on the left chart if the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-2SV

117

V

V-2SV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL(*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-2SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127 Terminal cover

MI

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-2SV4

3P

TCS-2SV3

3P

Reference page 129

TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L

4P

TCL-2SV4

Skeleton

TTC

3P

TTC-2SV3

Rear

BTC

3P

BTC-2SV3

Plug-in

PTC

3P

PTC-2SV3

Electrical operation device

154

Type name 3P

(*2)

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF125-SEV · NF125-HEV · NF250-SEV · NF250-HEV

Outline Drawing

30

Front connection

Insulation barrier (removable)

M8 bolt (hex-socket)

24

Solderless terminal for wire size 125-175A 14-95mm2 200-250A 70-125mm2 Wire connection

100

Mounting hole

Breaker

126

10 1

C

f4.5

C

1

50

102

165

144

f8

.5

Trip button

25 max.

35

70

105

105

Neutral pole

Or

45

f8.5

61

4

35

M40.7 taps or f5

68

140

25 max.

72

4-pole

4-pole

3-pole

(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

92

3-pole

35

9

22

f8.5

100

Trip characteristics selector

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole

Mounting plate t=3.2 max.

Stud can be rotated 90°

Mounting base

3-pole

4-pole

Breaker

Breaker

15 71

72

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

6

15

68

R

52

1

144

126

20

22 connection allowance

144

8

3-pole

f9 M8 bolt

70

Insulation tube

105

70

35

M40.7 taps or f5

100

105

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

3-pole

106

32.5

35

f24 35

Drilling plan

Front-panel cutout

89 112

30

f9 M8 bolt

4-pole 105 3-pole 105

80

56.5 3-pole 70

Insulation barrier

56.5

151 20

Stud attachable in this direction only

70

105

107

142

3-pole

4-pole

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

4-pole 140

Drilling plan

155

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

M5 terminal block mounting screw

31

15

28 21

7 54

34.5 6

144

11

4-pole 145 3-pole 110

70

165

190

Mounting plate

Plug-in terminal block

24 connection allowance

Plug-in

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF400-CW NF400-SW

Model

NF400-CW

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

2

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NF400-SW

250 300 350 400

AC

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

DC (*1)

2

3

690

690

690V

−

10/10

500V

15/8

30/30

440V

25/13

42/42

400V

36/18

45/45

230V

50/25

85/85

250V

20/10

40/40

4

Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs) Front connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs) Rear Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) connection

Standard attached parts

Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.

NF400-SW

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h

2h Operating characteristics

1h

6min 4min

2min

2min

1min

1min

Operating time

Operating time

NF400-SW

30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min

Max.

30s 20s

Operating characteristics

1h

NF400-CW

30min 20min 14min 10min

10s 5s

Max.

30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

Min. 2s

2s

1s

1s AC

0.5s

0.5s DC 0.2s

0.2s DC 0.1s

0.1s

Max. total interrupting time

0.05s

AC

interrupting time

0.02s

0.02s

Time delay trip

Instantaneous trip

Time delay trip 200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

1500

2000

100 125

3000 4000

200

300

400 500 600 700

1500 2000

3000 4000

Temperature Compensation Curve

Internal Accessories Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

130

(*1)

(*1)

120 110 100 90 80

(*1)

Rated ambient temperature

AX

Current rating (%)

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

(*1)

0

10

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

20

30

40

50

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Type name

F V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

117

V-4S

119

2, 3P MI-4SW3 4P

Reference page

F-4S

MI-4SW4 HT-4CW, HT-4SW

129 128

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

Accessories Terminal cover

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

1000

% of rated current

% of rated current

Left-side mounting

Instantaneous trip

0.01s

0.01s 100 125

7

Max.total

0.05s

Large Skeleton Rear

Handle lock device Electrical operation device

156

Type name TC-L TTC BTC

2, 3P

TCL-4SW3

4P

TCL-4SW4

2, 3P

TTC-4SW3

4P

TTC-4SW4

2, 3P 4P

BTC-4SW3 BTC-4SW4

HL

HL-4CW, HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW

NFM

3P 4P

(*1)

Reference page

121

127 133

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF400-CW · NF400-SW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

94.5

Insulating barrier (removable)

44

28

4-pole

8

3-pole

Breaker

Breaker 39

43

110

16

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

168 185

140

196

3-pole

4-pole

5

44 118

Conductor drilling for direct connection

97 103

51

M6 tap or f7

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

44

56

112

f10.5 44

Neutral pole f14 M12 bolt

194

12

39

25

107

3-pole

155 (NF400-SW) 134 (NF400-CW)

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

4-pole

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Stud can be rotated 90°

Line side

4-pole

Mounting plate

Breaker

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

6-f35 8

24 24

8

3-pole

Connection allowance

24 24

M6 screw for mounting breaker Insulation tube

87

f35

44

8

f13 M12 bolt

225

194

225

194

83

128

26 10

4-M6 tap or f7

14

225

265

M6 tap or f7

25 20 20

113

92

f12.5

47 f7

257 Trip button

R6

102

Mounting hole

44

11

11

87

43.5

44

130.5

87

3-pole

4-pole

130.5

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

Load side

Drilling plan

Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

Plug-in

4-pole 3-pole

Mounting plate

Breaker

163

24

55

79 160

7

f13 M12 bolt

28

Stud attachable in this direction only 87 130.5

Insulating barrier

f10 44

87

136

181

3-pole

4-pole

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

121

28

18

135

Connection allowance

15

M8 terminal block mounting screw

8

24

225

280

55

35

Plug-in terminal block

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

157

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW

Model

NF400-SEW

NF400-HEW

Number of poles

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NF400-REW

200-400 adjustable

Rated current In (A)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

3

4 690

3 690

690V

10/10

35/18

−

500V

30/30

50/50

70/35

440V

42/42

65/65

125/63

400V

50/50

70/70

125/63

230V

85/85

100/100

150/75

Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Front connection Rear connection

Standard attached parts

4 690

Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)

NF400-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories Left-side mounting

10h 5h

Operating characteristics

2h

NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW

1h LTD operating time at 125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Current setting Ir: 200-400A (Adjustable)

AX

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

(*1)

(*1)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s 2s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

STD pickup current Is Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

Current Reducing Curve

STD operating time Ts 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

Tp=

0.1s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s INST pickup current II x4-x16 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s 0.01s 60 70

100 125

Continuous load current (%)

0.2s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

Max. total breaking time 1500 2000

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Rated ambient temperature

1s 0.5s

130 120 110 100 90 80 70 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

7 External Accessories Operating handle

Type name

F V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

Reference page

F-4S

117

V-4S

119

3P

MI-4SW3

4P

MI-4SW4 HT-4SW

129 128

Accessories Terminal cover

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Accessories

Type name

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

BTC

Handle lock device Electrical operation device Notes *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit. *2 This is for NF400-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NF400-HEW/REW, use PTC-4SW3. *3 This is for NF400-SEW/HEW.

158

PAL

(*1)

Rated Current In: 400A

(*1)

2min

Operating time

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

3P

TCL-4SW3 (*2)

4P

TCL-4SW4 (*3)

3P

TTC-4SW3

4P

TTC-4SW4

3P 4P

BTC-4SW3 (*2) BTC-4SW4 (*3)

HL

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW

NFM

3P 4P

(*1)

Reference page

121

127 133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF400-SEW · NF400-HEW · NF400-REW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

94.5

Insulating barrier (removable) 28

44 4-pole

8

3-pole

Breaker

Breaker 39

43

110

16

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

f7

39

25

44 103

51

168 185

140

196

3-pole

4-pole

M6 tap or f7

5

92

44

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

118

Conductor drilling for direct connection

97 56

112

f10.5 44

Neutral pole f14 M12 bolt

194

12

59

f12.5

257 Trip button

R6

102

Mounting hole

107

3-pole

155

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

4-pole

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

3-pole

Line side

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

6-f35 8

24 24

8 Connection allowance

194

225

24 24

M6 screw for mounting breaker

44

8

f13 M12 bolt

113

194

83

128

26

25 20 20

10

4-M6 tap or f7

14

225

265

M6 tap or f7

Insulation tube

87

225

Mounting plate

f35

44

87

11

43.5

130.5

11

44

130.5

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan

Load side

Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

Plug-in

4-pole

Mounting plate

3-pole

Breaker

7

163

24

55

160

79

f13 M12 bolt

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

121

28

18

135

Connection allowance

15

M8 terminal block mounting screw

8

24

225

280

55

35

Plug-in terminal block

f10

28

Stud attachable in this direction only 87 130.5

Insulating barrier

44

87

136

181

3-pole

4-pole

Drilling plan

159

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF400-UEW

Model

NF400-UEW 200-400 adjustable

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

3

4

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

690

AC

Standard attached parts (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)

690V

−

500V

170/170

440V

200/200

400V

200/200

230V

200/200

Front connection Rear connection

Mounting screw: M6×65 (2pcs), M6×174 (2pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs) Mounting screw: M6×72 (2pcs), M6×181 (2pcs)

NF400-UEW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories

5h

1h LTD operating time at 125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Current setting Ir: 200-400A (Adjustable)

Operating time

Rated Current In: 400A

(*1)

(*1)

Note

*1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remarks: 1. Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF800-UEW. 2. Refer to page 106.

30s 20s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

STD pickup current Is Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

Current Reducing Curve

1s

Tp=

STD operating time Ts 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

TL ±20% 2

(at 200%)

0.1s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s INST pickup current II x4-x16 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s 0.01s 60 70

100 125

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

Max. total breaking time 1500 2000

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

130

Rated ambient temperature

0.2s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

Continuous load current (%)

0.5s

120 110 100 90 80 70 0

10

20

30

40

50

Ambient temperature (°C)

Accessories

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Operating handle

F

Type name

F-4U

Reference page 117

V

V-4U

119

Mechanical interlock

MI

MI-4SW3

129

Auxiliary handle

HT

HT-4SW

128

Accessories Terminal cover

7 External Accessories

Large

TC-L

Type name 3P

Skeleton

TTC

3P

−

BTC HL

3P

BTC-4SW3

Handle lock device

HL-S

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit. Remark *1 Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF800-UEW.

Reference page

TCL-4SW3

Rear

Electrical operation device

160

PAL

(*1)

(*1)

2min

2s

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

1min

5s

AX

Operating characteristics NF400-UEW

2h

10s

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

Left-side mounting

10h

HL-4SW HLS-4UW (*1)

121

127 133

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF400-UEW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

127.5

Insulating barrier (removable)

78

Breaker

8

f7

f12.5

47

f10.5

43

39

25

16

191.5

28

200 5

140

118

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

3-pole

204

3-pole

M6 tap or f7

Conductor drilling for direct connection

194

112

44

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

141

f14 M12 bolt

252

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Mounting plate

Line side

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

Breaker

Stud can be rotated 90°

8

8

6-f35 24 24

51

92

f7

f12.5

156

234

11.5

31 102

257

297 Trip button

R6

Mounting hole

26

Breaker

43

110

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

M6 screw or f7

210

24 24 11 f35

M6 screw for mounting breaker

8 87

265

234

265

234

f13 M12 bolt

83

128

26

14

25 20 20

10

4-M6 tap or f7

305

265

Connection allowance

Load side

Drilling plan

3-pole

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

87

Insulation tube

11

44

44

Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

Plug-in

Plug-in terminal block

Breaker

7

24

Stud attachable in this direction only

28

f13 M12 bolt

87

Insulating barrier

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

3-pole

15

79

218

160

28 18

175

Connection allowance

8

24

M8 terminal block mounting screw

265

297

320

Mounting angle

max. 203

35

Mounting angle

f10 44

3-pole Drilling plan

161

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF630-CW NF630-SW

Model

NF630-CW

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

2

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NF630-SW

500 600 630

AC

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

DC (*1)

3

2

3

690

690

690V

−

10/10

500V

18/9

30/30

440V

36/18

42/42

400V

36/18

50/50

230V

50/25

85/85

250V

20/10

40/40

4

Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) Front connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs) Rear Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs) connection

Standard attached parts

Note *1 When wired as shown at the bottom of page 14, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.

NF630-SW

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h

2h Operating characteristics

1h

NF630-SW

30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min

6min 4min

2min

2min

1min

1min Max.

Operating time

30s 20s

Operating time

Operating characteristics

1h

NF630-CW

30min 20min 14min 10min

10s 5s

Min.

2s

Max.

30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

2s

1s

1s AC

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

DC

Max.total interrupting time

0.1s

AC Max.total interrupting time

0.1s

0.05s

0.05s

0.02s 0.01s

DC

Time delay trip 100 125

200

300

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

400 500 600 700

1000

1500

2000

0.01s

3000 4000

Time delay trip 100 125

200

300

% of rated current

2000

AX

(*1)

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

(*1)

130

(*1)

120 110 100 90 80

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

0

10

20

30

40

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Operating handle

Type name

F V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

117

V-4S

119

2, 3P MI-4SW3 4P

Reference page

F-4S

MI-4SW4 HT-4SW

129 128

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

Accessories Terminal cover

Accessories

Large

Type name TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

BTC

Handle lock device Electrical operation device

162

3000 4000

Rated ambient temperature

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

(*1)

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

1500

Temperature Compensation Curve Current rating (%)

7

1000

% of rated current

Internal Accessories Left-side mounting

Instantaneous trip

400 500 600 700

2, 3P

TCL-4SW3

4P

TCL-4SW4

2, 3P

TTC-4SW3

4P 2, 3P

TTC-4SW4 BTC-4SW3

4P

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW 3P 4P

121

BTC-4SW4

HL

NFM

Reference page

(*1)

127 133

50

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF630-CW · NF630-SW

Outline Drawing

12

Front connection 94.5

CL

Conductor thickness t=10 max.

28

4-pole

44 30

16

8

Breaker

39 102

CL

f12.5

59

39

Trip button

f7

CL

Neutral pole

194

257

CL

118

44 97

f14 M12 bolt

56

51

168

112

185

140

196

3-pole

4-pole

103 5

44

107

1.0mm clearance on each side of handle.

M6 screw or f7

44

3-pole

155

Front-plate cutout

4-pole Drilling plan Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

4-pole Breaker

Stud can be rotated 90°

3-pole

Line side

Eddy-current heat-reducing slit

6-f35

CL

Connection allowance

225

194

225

194

14

4-M6 tap or f7

24 24

M6 breaker mounting screw 44

8

10 f13 M12 bolt

113

CL

83

128

225

20

265

M6 screw or f7

32

25 20

8

8

CL

24 24

Mounting plate

CL

R6

CL

Breaker

CL

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Mounting hole

CL

3-pole

f10.5

Conductor thickness t=10 max. 43

110

CL

92

Insulating barrier (removable)

Insulating tube attached to 3P:Center pole 4P:Center and neutral poles

87 130.5

f35

87

44

11

43.5 130.5

3-pole

11

44

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

4-pole

Load side

Drilling plan Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

Plug-in

4-pole Mounting plate

3-pole

CL

CL

Breaker

CL

135

7

f10 Stud attachable in this direction only

30

121 f13 M12 bolt

110 165.5

Insulating barrier

44

87

136

181

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

55

93 160

28 18

CL

163

Connection allowance

25

M8 terminal block mounting screw

20

25

225

CL

10

280

55

35

Plug-in terminal block

3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

163

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW

Model

NF630-SEW

NF630-HEW

Number of poles

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NF630-REW

300-630 adjustable

Rated current In (A)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

3

4

3

690

690

690V

10/10

35/18

−

500V

30/30

50/50

70/35

440V

42/42

65/65

125/63

400V

50/50

70/70

125/63

230V

85/85

100/100

150/75

Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Front connection Rear connection

Standard attached parts

4 690

Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)

NF630-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories Left-side mounting

10h Operating characteristics NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW

5h 2h 1h LTD operating time at 125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Current setting Ir: 300-630A (Adjustable)

(*1)

Operating time

(*1)

(*1)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106. Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

Current Reducing Curve

STD pickup current Is Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

Tp=

TL 2

STD operating time Ts 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

±20%

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

(at 200%)

0.1s 0.05s

INST pickup current II x4-x15 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s 0.01s 60 70

100 125

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

Max. total breaking time 1500 2000

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Accessories

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Operating handle

F V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

Type name

Reference page 117

V-4S

119

MI-4SW3

4P

MI-4SW4 HT-4SW

110 100 90 80 70

129 128

Accessories

10

20

30

Type name

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

Handle lock device Electrical operation device Notes *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit. *2 This is for NF630-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NF630-HEW/REW, use PTC-4SW3. *3 This is for NF630-SEW/HEW.

164

120

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

F-4S 3P

130

0

Terminal cover

7 External Accessories

Rated ambient temperature

0.2s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

Continuous load current (%)

1s 0.5s

PAL

(*1)

30s 20s

2s

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

5s

AX

Rated Current In: 630A

1min

10s

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

BTC

3P

TCL-4SW3 (*2)

4P

TCL-4SW4 (*3)

3P

TTC-4SW3

4P 3P

TTC-4SW4 BTC-4SW3 (*2)

4P

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW 3P 4P

121

BTC-4SW4 (*3)

HL

NFM

Reference page

(*1)

127 133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF630-SEW · NF630-HEW · NF630-REW

Outline Drawing

12

Front connection 94.5

CL

Conductor thickness t=10 max.

28

4-pole

44 30

16

8

Breaker

39 102

CL

f12.5

59

39

Trip button

f7

CL

Neutral pole

194

257

CL

118

44 97

f14 M12 bolt

56

51

168

112

185

140

196

3-pole

4-pole

103 5

107

1.0mm clearance on each side of handle.

M6 screw or f7

44

44

3-pole

155

Front-plate cutout

4-pole Drilling plan Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

4-pole Breaker

Stud can be rotated 90°

3-pole

Line side

Eddy-current heat-reducing slit

6-f35

CL

Connection allowance

225

194

225

194

14

4-M6 tap or f7

24 24

M6 breaker mounting screw f35

44

8

10 f13 M12 bolt

113

CL

83

128

225

20

265

M6 screw or f7

32

25 20

8

8

CL

24 24

Mounting plate

CL

R6

CL

Breaker

CL

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Mounting hole

CL

3-pole

f10.5

Conductor thickness t=10 max. 43

110

CL

92

Insulating barrier (removable)

Insulating tube attached to 3P:Center pole 4P:Center and neutral poles

87 130.5

44

11

87

43.5

3-pole

4-pole

11

44

130.5

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87 Load side

Drilling plan Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

Plug-in

4-pole Mounting plate

3-pole

CL

CL

CL

Breaker

135

7

f10 Stud attachable in this direction only

30

121 f13 M12 bolt

110 165.5

Insulating barrier

44

87

136

181

3-pole

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

55

93 160

28 18

CL

163

Connection allowance

25

M8 terminal block mounting screw

20

25

225

CL

10

280

55

35

Plug-in terminal block

4-pole Drilling plan

165

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW

Model

NF800-CEW

NF800-SEW

Number of poles

3

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NF800-HEW

NF800-REW

400-800 adjustable

Rated current In (A)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

Standard attached parts (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)

3

690

4

3

690

4

3

690

690

690V

−

10/10

15/15

−

500V

18/9

30/30

50/50

70/35

440V

36/18

42/42

65/65

125/63

400V

36/18

50/50

70/70

125/63

230V

50/25

85/85

100/100

150/75

Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)

Front connection Rear connection

Mounting screw: M6×40 (4pcs)

NF800-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories

10h

2h

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

Left-side mounting

Operating characteristics NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW

5h

AX

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

PAL

1h LTD operating time at 125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Current setting Ir: 400-800A (Adjustable)

(*1)

1min

Current Reducing Curve

STD pickup current Is Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

1s 0.5s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

0.2s

Tp=

STD operating time Ts 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

TL ±20% 2

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

(at 200%)

0.1s 0.05s

INST pickup current II x4-x12 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s 0.01s 60 70

100 125

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

Max. total breaking time 1500 2000

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

7

130

Rated ambient temperature

2s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

Working current correcting ratio (%)

5s

(*1)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

30s 20s 10s

(*1)

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

Operating time

(*1)

Rated Current In: 800A

120 110 100 90 80 70 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

Accessories Operating handle

Type name

F

F-8S

V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

V-8S 3P

MI-8SW3

4P

MI-8SW4 HT-4SW

Reference page 117 119 129 128

Accessories Terminal cover

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

External Accessories TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

Handle lock device Electrical operation device Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

166

Type name

Large

BTC

3P

TCL-8SW3

4P

TCL-8SW4

3P

TTC-8SW3

4P 3P

TTC-8SW4 BTC-8SW3

4P

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-8SW 3P 4P

121

BTC-8SW4

HL

NFM

Reference page

(*1)

127 133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF800-CEW · NF800-SEW · NF800-HEW · NF800-REW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

94.5 46

4-pole 8

102 f14

8

51

70

40 140

210

210

280

3-pole

15

46 97

107

5

f14 M12 bolt

70

51

70

M6 tap or f7

172

40

103

Neutral pole

4-pole

22

(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)

3-pole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

155 217

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

4-pole

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

M6 tap or f7 Breaker

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

6-f48

243

243

12.5

295

4-M6 tap or f7

10 8 113

24 24

45

13

243

10

10

24 24

5

5

Stud can be rotated 90°

Connection allowance 25 Mounting plate

8

32 15

70

70

140 f13 M12 bolt

110

M6 screw for mounting breaker

140

3-pole

f48

Drilling plan

11

70

11

70

210

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

140

4-pole

Plug-in

Mounting plate

Stud can be rotated 90

Plug-in terminal block

Breaker

7

56 70 208

3-pole

f10

Drilling plan

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

f13 M12 bolt

112

8 32 140

15

25

301

13

40 M8 terminal block mounting screw

155

56 23 126

Connection allowance

10

243

20

187

Trip button

R6

f8.5

12

8 32

14

Breaker

Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor f8

275

15

87

32

Auxiliary handle (removable)

N

3-pole

Breaker

92

87

32

110

26

Conductor thickness t=12 max.

243

Insulating barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

140 278

4-pole

167

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF800-SDW

Model

NF800-SDW

Rated current In (A)

(700), 800

Number of poles

2

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) Time constant not larger than 10ms

690

DC

Standard attached parts (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)

250V

40/40

Front connection Rear connection

Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) Mounting screw: M6×40 (4pcs)

NF800-SDW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories

4h 2h

Operating characteristics NF800-SDW

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Max.

1min. 30s 20s

Control setting

Inst trip current (A)

Lo 2 3 Hi

2600±520 3900±780 5200±1040 6500±1300

(*1)

(*1)

(*1)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

10s Min.

5s

Temperature Compensation Curve

2s 1s

130

0.1s

Current rating (%)

Adjustment range 800A

0.2s

Max. total interrupting time

0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

Time-delay trip

100 125

200

Inst trip 300

400 500 600 700

1000

1500 2000

3000 4000

Accessories

F V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

Type name

4P

Reference page

F-8S

117

V-8S

119

2, 3P MI-8SW3 MI-8SW4 HT-4SW

110 100 90

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

129 128

Accessories Terminal cover

7 External Accessories

120

80 0

% of rated current

Operating handle

Rated ambient temperature

Adjustment range 700A

0.5s

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

(*1)

Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps)

2min

Type name

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

Handle lock device Electrical operation device Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

168

AX

700A,800A DC

6min 4min

Operating time

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

Left-side mounting

BTC

2, 3P

TCL-8SW3

4P

TCL-8SW4

2, 3P

TTC-8SW3

4P 2, 3P

TTC-8SW4 BTC-8SW3

4P

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-8SW 2, 3P 4P

121

BTC-8SW4

HL

NFM

Reference page

(*1)

127 133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF800-SDW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

94.5 Conductor thickness t=12 max.

26

46

12

102 f14

f8

275 87

15

51

70

40 140

210

210

280

3-pole

4-pole

3-pole

22

8

51

40

46 Trip button

R6

M6 tap or f7

70

f8.5

15

8 32

32

14

Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor

92

87

32

Breaker

Auxiliary handle (removable)

N

4-pole 3-pole

8

172

243

Insulating barrier (removable)

110

Mounting hole

Breaker

97

Neutral pole 5

f14 M12 bolt

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

103

(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)

107

Conductor drilling for direct connection

155

Front-panel cutout 70

217

4-pole Drilling plan

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Connection allowance 25

M6 tap or f7

Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

6-f48

243

243

12.5

295

4-M6 tap or f7

10

8 8

113

24 24

45

13

243

10

10

24 24

5

5

Mounting plate

32

f13 M12 bolt

110

70

70

140

15

M6 screw for mounting breaker

11

70 140

f48

3-pole

11

70

210

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

140

4-pole Drilling plan

Plug-in

Mounting plate

Stud can be rotated 90°

Plug-in terminal block

Breaker

56

112

8 32 140

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

126

M8 terminal block mounting screw

187

56

7

15

40 23

155

13

25

Connection allowance

301

243

20

70 f13 M12 bolt

208

f10

3-pole

140 278

4-pole Drilling plan

Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF800-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage. 2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

169

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

1

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

NF800-UEW

Model

NF800-UEW 400-800 adjustable

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

3

4

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

690

AC

Standard attached parts (4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.)

690V

35/35

500V

170/170

440V

200/200

400V

200/200

230V

200/200

Mounting screw: 3P: M6×35, M6×132 (2pcs each) 4P: M6×35 (3pcs), M6×132 (2pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) Mounting screw: 3P: M6×40, M6×137 (2pcs each) Rear connection 4P: M6×40 (3pcs), M6×137 (2pcs) Front connection

NF800-UEW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories

5h

1h

Current setting Ir: 400-800A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time at-125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Operating time

(*1)

Rated Current In: 800A

(*1)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

30s 20s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

Current Reducing Curve

STD pickup current Is Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

STD operating time Ts 0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

Tp=

0.1s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s INST pickup current II x4-x12 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s 0.01s 60 70

100 125

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

Max. total breaking time 1500 2000

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Accessories

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Operating handle

F

Type name

V

Mechanical interlock

MI

Auxiliary handle

HT

− 3P

MI-8SW3

4P

MI-8SW4 HT-4SW

Reference page

Accessories

119 129 128

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

BTC

Handle lock device

90 80 70 10

20

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

Type name 3P

TCL-8UW3

4P

TCL-8UW4

3P

−

4P

−

3P

BTC-8SW3

4P

30

40

50

Reference page

121

BTC-8SW4

HL

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-8UW

Electrical operation device

170

110 100

Ambient temperature (°C)

117

F-8U

120

0

Terminal cover

7 External Accessories

130

Rated ambient temperature

0.2s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

Continuous load current (%)

1s 0.5s

PAL

(*1)

(*1)

2min

2s

Lead wire direction

SHT or UVT

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

1min

5s

AX

Operating characteristics NF800-UEW

2h

10s

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

Left-side mounting

10h

(*1)

127 133

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF800-UEW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

Insulating barrier (removable)

44 (ON side) 123.5 (OFF side)

143

Mounting hole

64 8

27.5

f14

Auxiliary handle (removable)

f7

87

110

Conductor thickness t=12 max.

12

3-pole Breaker

Conductor drilling for direct connection Conductor thickness t=8 max.

Insulating barrier (removable)

R6

143

92

f14

252 314

97 6.5 51

f7

f14

Auxiliary handle (removable)

172

3-pole

51

4-pole

Drilling plan

102

f7 f14

48

Trip button

70 M6 screw or f7

6.5

35

141

Neutral pole

70

194

f14 M12 bolt

210

Front-panel cutout

112

16

N

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

15 275

290

322

27.5

48

110

70 Breaker

70

22.5

(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)

204

Mounting hole

4-pole

40

200 5

f14 M12 bolt

4-pole

22

194 Neutral pole

280

3-pole

102

f7

210

210

275

322 40 140

8 143

15

70

87

32

14 51

f8.5

8

N

Trip button

Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor

15 112

200

280

204

5

252

NF400-UEW 4-pole

314

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Mounting plate

6-f48

8

32

f13 M12 bolt

140

M6 screw for mounting breaker

290

342

290

3-pole

10

70

f48

140

24 24

26 20

70

70

10 110

4-M6 tap or f7

290 12.5

15

10 210

342

45

13

290

10

8

10

Connection allowance Stud can be rotated 90° 25

210

4-pole

210

83

f13 M12 bolt

11 70

11

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

7

140

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

24 24

M6 tap or f7 Breaker

5

Mounting plate

Standard direction of stud is horizontal Connection on power side, and vertical on load side. allowance Otherwise, specify the direction. 25

5

Rear connection

NF400-UEW 4-pole

Drilling plan

171

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW

Model

NF1000-SEW

NF1250-SEW

500−1000 Adjustable

600−1250 Adjustable

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

3

4

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

3

4

690

690

690V

25/13

25/13

500V

65/33

65/33

440V

85/43

85/43

400V

85/43

85/43

230V

125/63

125/63

Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc)

Front connection Standard attached parts Rear connection

NF1250-SEW

Operating Characteristics 10h

10h

5h

5h

Operating characteristics NF1000-SEW

2h 1h

LTD operating time at-125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min

Current setting Ir:500-1000A (Adjustable)

Rated Current In:1000A

1h

30s 20s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

STD pickup current Is

In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%

In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s

2s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

STD pickup current Is

In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%

In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

2s

1s

1s Pre-alarm operating time Tp

STD operating time Ts

0.5s

0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

0.2s

Tp=

TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

Tp=

0.1s

0.1s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s INST pickup current II x (4-x12) ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

60 70

100

125

200

300 400 500 600 700

1000

1500 2000

INST pickup current II x (4-x12) ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s

Max. total breaking time

0.01s

3000 4000

60 70

100

125

200

300 400 500 600 700

1000

1500 2000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Current Reducing Curve

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

AX

SHT or UVT

Lead wire direction

Continuous load current (%)

Internal Accessories Left-side mounting

Max. total breaking time

0.01s

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

0.05s

0.02s

7

STD operating time Ts

TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

PAL

130

Rated ambient temperature

0.2s

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

Operating time

Operating time

1min

0.5s

120 110 100 90 80 70 0

Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

10

20

30

40

50

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories (An order for  should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Operating handle

F

Mechanical interlock

MI

Type name 3P

F10SW

4P

F10SW4P

3P

MI-10SW3

4P

MI-10SW4

Reference page 117 129

Accessories

Type name

Reference page

Auxiliary handle

HT

HT-10SW

128

Handle lock device

HL

HL ()

127

Large terminal cover

TC-L

Electrical operation device Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

172

Rated Current In:1250A

6min 4min LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

5s

Current setting Ir:600-1250A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time at-125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min

10s

Operating characteristics NF1250-SEW

2h

NFM

3P

TCL-10SW3

4P

TCL-10SW4

3P 4P

(*1)

121 133

60

3000 4000

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF1000-SEW · NF1250-SEW

Outline Drawing

Front connection Conductor thickness 15 40 t=82pcs max.

Insulating barrier (removable) 110

Bolt M1250 Mounting hole

Breaker

375 f9.5

406

346

Auxiliary handle (removable)

Neutral pole 140 210

4-pole

3-pole

18.5

70

15 44 133.5 17 140 190 280

70 210 280

43 f13 M12 bolt

f17.5

80

15 32 8

13

M8 tap or f10

3-pole

70

4-pole

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole Mounting plate

3-pole

140

97

269

R11.5

39.5 81.5

273

12 140

8 32 15 97

Bolt M1245

86

Conductor thickness t=62pcs max.

45

13

109

86

Stud can be rotated 90°

18 Connection allowance f13 22

Breaker

35.5

Breaker

M8 screw for mounting breaker

70 230

Insulation cover (removable)

80

70 300

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

M8 tap or f10

Front-panel cutout

3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan

Plug-in Mounting plate

Breaker

208

134

f12 70 204

3-pole

140 274

Drilling plan

4-pole

7 1 Characteristics and Dimensions

68

43 140

136

12

Connection allowance f13 Conductor thickness Insulating t=62pcs max. barrier Bolt M1245

15 32 8 104

269

13

30

225

25.5

100.5

105

136

Stud can be rotated 90°

269

28.5

M10 terminal block mounting screw

28.5

Plug-in terminal block

173

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF1250-SDW

Model

NF1250-SDW

Rated current In (Amp.)

1000, 1250

Number of poles

2

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) Time constant not large than 10ms

690

DC

250V

40/20

Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc)

Front connection Standard Attached parts Rear connection

NF1250-SDW

Operating Characteristics 3h 2h

3h 2h

1h

1h

Operating characteristics NF1250-SDW 1000A

40min 20min 10min

20min

4min

6min 4min

2min

2min

1min

Adjustable range of standard instantaneous tripping current (4 stages)

Min.

10s

Operating time

Position of Standard value of adjusting instantaneous knob tripping current (A) L0 2800±700 2 4200±700 3 5600±700 Hi 7000±700

6s 4s 2s 1s

1min 40s 30s 20s

4s 2s 1s 0.6s 0.4s 0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.06s

Max. total breaking time

0.06s

0.04s

0.04s

Time-delay trip

0.01s 100125

200

0.01s 100125

300 400 500 700 1000

2000 3000 5000 7000 4000 Current (% of rated current)

Instantaneous trip 300 400 500 700 1000

2000 3000 5000 7000 4000

Temperature Compensation Curve Lead wire direction

AL

AX

SHT or UVT

MG

EAL

TBL

TBM

ATU

PAL

Continuous load current (%)

Right-side mounting

200

Current (% of rated current)

Internal Accessories

Left-side mounting

Time-delay trip

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

Operating handle

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Position of Standard value of adjusting instantaneous knob tripping current (A) L0 2800±700 2 4200±700 3 5600±700 Hi 7000±700

6s

0.2s

7

Min.

10s

0.6s 0.4s

0.02s

Adjustable range of standard instantaneous tripping current (4 stages)

130

1000A

Rated ambient temperature

Operating time

40s 30s 20s

Max.

10min

Max.

6min

Operating characteristics NF1250-SDW 1250A

40min

120 110

1200A, 1250A

100 90 80 0

10

20

30

40

50

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories (An order for  should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Operating handle

F

Mechanical interlock

MI

Type name 2, 3P F10SW 4P

F10SW4P

2, 3P MI-10SW3 4P

MI-10SW4

Reference page 117 129

Accessories

Reference page

HT

HT-10SW

128

Handle lock device

HL

HL ()

127

Large terminal cover

TC-L

Electrical operation device

NFM

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

174

Type name

Auxiliary handle

2, 3P

TCL-10SW3

4P

TCL-10SW4

2, 3P 4P

(*1)

121 133

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF1250-SDW

Outline Drawing Same dimensions as NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Front connection

15 40 Conductor thickness t=82 pcs. max. Bolt M1250

110

Insulation barrier (removable) Mounting hole

Breaker

375 f9.5

Trip button

346

406

Auxiliary handle (removable)

f17.5

80

15 32 8

13

43

70 210 280

140 210

f13 M12 bolt

3-pole

70

18.5

15 44 133.5 17 140 190 280

4-pole

70

M8 screw or f10

3-pole

4-pole Drilling plan

Differing in external dimensions from NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Rear connection

4-pole 3-pole

Mounting plate

86 187.5

Stud can be turned 90°.

140

8 32 15 97

70 230

Insulation cover (removable)

70 300 M8 screw or f10

3-pole

97

20.5

Bolt M1245

12 140

18

86

Conductor thickness t=62 pcs. max.

Breaker

R11.5 375

233

Connection allowance 22 f13 45

13

109

18

35.5

Breaker

M8 screw for breaker mounting

80 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Differing in external dimensions from NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.

Plug-in

Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate Breaker

68 208

25.5 146.5

Bolt M1245

48 318 375 43 140

Insulation barrier

8 32 104

12

Connection allowance Conductor thickness t=62 pcs. max. f13

15

13

30

30 74.5

248

M10terminal block mounting screw Stud can be turned 90°.

70 204

3-pole

f12

Drilling plan

7 1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF1250-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage. 2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

175

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF1600-SEW

Model

NF1600-SEW Adjustable 800−1600

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

3

4

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

690 690V

25/13

500V

65/33

440V

85/43

400V

85/43

230V

125/63 Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc)

Front connection

Standard attached parts

Rear connection

NF1600-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Internal Accessories

10h 5h Operating characteristics NF1600-SEW

2h 1h

LTD operating time at-125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min

Current setting Ir:800-1600A (Adjustable)

Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

Left-side mounting

Rated Current In:1600A

AX

Lead wire direction PAL

SHT or UVT

6min 4min LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

Operating time

2min 1min

Remark: 1. Refer to page 106.

30s 20s 10s 5s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

STD pickup current Is

In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -0.9-0.95-1.0) ±10%

In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Current Reducing Curve

2s

STD operating time Ts

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

Tp=

0.1s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s INST pickup current II x (4-12) ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s

Max. total breaking time

0.01s 60 70

100

125

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

1500

2000

3000 4000

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

120 110 100 90 80 70 0

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

7

130

Rated ambient temperature

0.2s

Continuous load current (%)

1s 0.5s

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories (An order for  should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Operating handle

F

Mechanical interlock

MI

Type name 3P

F10SW

4P

F10SW4P

3P

MI-16SW3

4P

MI-16SW4

Reference page 117 129

Accessories

Reference page

HT

HT-10SW

128

Handle lock device

HL

HL ()

127

Electrical operation device

NFM

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

176

Type name

Auxiliary handle

3P 4P

(*1)

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF1600-SEW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

Conductor thickness t=6W75 max. 20 35

f11

101.5 304.5 364.5

263

3-pole

Neutral pole

4-pole

97

375

130

115

N

17

f9.5

f17.5

406

R11.5 346

(185.5)

(185.5)

18.5

280

203

Breaker

Breaker

Auxiliary handle (removable)

Mounting hole

210

4-pole 3-pole

Bolt M1065

38 15

Insulating barrier 60 (removable) 38

49.5 20 133.5 140 190 280

70

70

3-pole

80

M8 tap or f10

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

4-pole

Drilling plan

Front-panel cutout

38

212

18

106 106 318

Connection 15 38 15 allowance

60

Rear connection

Stud can be rotated 90° Mounting angle

Breaker Conductor thickness t=6W75 max. 20

Mounting angle

109

81.5

18

273

273

109 Connection allowance

140

f11 BM1050 bolt

54 70 210

140 4-pole

125

f11 M1050 bolt

M8 tap or f10

70

3-pole

70

4-pole

Drilling plan

7 1 Characteristics and Dimensions

3-pole

38 38 125 15 200

36

15

140

60

38

15

100 max. 160 min.

Conductor thickness t=6W75 max. 20

Mounting angle

269

Stud can be rotated 90°

177

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

1

NF1600-SDW

Model

NF1600-SDW

Rated current In (Amp.)

1600

Number of poles

2

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) Time constant not large than 10msec

690

DC

Standard Attached parts

250V

40/20

Front connection Rear connection

Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs) Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc) Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs) Auxiliary handle: (1pc)

NF1600-SDW

Operating Characteristics 3h 2h 1h

Operating characteristics of NF1600-SDW, magnetic trip only, 1600 A

40min 20min 10min

Max. allowable current carrying time

6min 4min 2min

Operating time

1min 40s 30s 20s

Adjustable range of instantaneous tripping current (4 stages)

10s

Position of Instantaneous adjusting tripping knob current (A) L0 3200±800

6s 4s

2 3 Hi

2s 1s

4800±800 6400±800 8000±800

Internal Accessories

0.6s 0.4s 0.2s

Operating handle

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.06s

7

Right-side mounting

AL

AX

SHT or UVT

MG

EAL

TBL

TBM

ATU

PAL

0.04s 0.02s

Instantaneous trip

0.01s 100125

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

Left-side mounting

200

300 400 500 700 1000

2000 3000 5000 7000 4000 Current (% of rated current)

External Accessories (An order for  should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.) Accessories Operating handle

F

Mechanical interlock

MI

Type name 2, 3P F10SW 4P

F10SW4P

2, 3P MI-16SW3 4P

MI-16SW4

Reference page 117 129

Accessories

Reference page

HT

HT-10SW

128

Handle lock device

HL

HL ()

127

Electrical operation device

NFM

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

178

Type name

Auxiliary handle

2, 3P 4P

(*1)

133

Lead wire direction

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers NF1600-SDW

Outline Drawing Same dimensions as NF1600-SEW.

Front connection

Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max. 20 35 Bolt M1065 Auxiliary handle (removable)

210

Mounting hole

(185.5)

(185.5)

38 15

60 Insulation barrier (removable) 38 φ11

4-pole 3-pole

Breaker

Breaker 18.5

280

97

375 f17.5 f9.5

406

346

R11.5

130

115

Trip button

101.5 304.5 364.5

203 263

3-pole

4-pole

49.5 20 133.5 17 140 190 280

70

70

3-pole

80

M8 screw or f10

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Differing in external dimensions from NF1600-SEW.

Rear connection

Mounting angle

Breaker f11 Bolt M1050 Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max.

Stud can be turned 90°. 140

3-pole

109

38 60 109 233

Connection allowance 15

233

36 140

175 or more 160 or more

Mounting angle

20

Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max. 20

Mounting angle

f11 38 15 Bolt M1050 38 15 Stud in horizontal direction. 125 It cannot be turned 90°. 200

4-pole

70 140

125

375

18 212

106 106 318

38 60

Connection allowance 15 38 15

70 M8 screw or f10

3-pole

4-pole

Drilling plan

Remarks: 1. Standard specification of NF1600-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage. 2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

1 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

179

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

NV32-SV NV63-CV NV63-SV NV63-HV

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

Model

NV32-SV

Number of poles

3

Rated operational voltage Ue (V)

AC

High-speed type

3

2

3

3

1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

100-440

100-240

100-440

100-240

100-440

100-440

30

15 30 100/200/500 selectable

(15) 30

(15) 30 100/200/500 selectable

(15) 30 100/200/500 selectable

at IΔn

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

at 5IΔn

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

−

−

−

−

Max operating time (s)

−

−

−

−

Inertial operating time (s) (or more)

−

−

−

−

Max operating time (s)

Time-delay type

Earth-leakage indication system

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NV63-HV (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63

2

(15) 30 100/200/500 selectable

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

NV63-SV

3f3W, 1f2W

Phase line

Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button) Mechanical type (button)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

440V

5/5

−

2.5/2.5

−

7.5/7.5

10/8

415V

5/5

−

2.5/2.5

−

7.5/7.5

10/8

400V

5/5

−

5/5

−

7.5/7.5

230V

10/10

7.5/7.5

15/15

25/19

200V

10/10

7.5/7.5

15/15

25/19

100V

10/10

7.5/7.5

15/15

25/19

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

NV63-SV

NV63-CV

(5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (5) (10) (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63

(5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 32

Rated current In (A)

Mounting screw: M40.755 (2pcs)

(*1)

10/8

Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs)

Note *1 Attached to NV63-SV and NV63-HV.

Operating Characteristics 4h

1h

2h 30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min

2h

Operating Characteristics NV32-SV 10A-32A NV63-CV 16A-32A NV63-SV 16A-32A NV63-HV 16A-32A

1h

30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min Instantaneous trip current is fixed to 600A120A.

2min

1min Operating time

1min

30s 20s 10s 5s

30s 20s

5s Min.

2s

30s 20s 10s 5s Min. 2s

1s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

4

3

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

40

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

Max. (40A-50A)

1min

10s

Min.

2s

Max. (60A-63A)

2min

Max.

Operating time

Max.

Operating Characteristics NV63-CV 40A-63A NV63-SV 40A-63A NV63-HV 40A-63A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

6min 4min

2min Operating time

4h

4h Operating Characteristics NV32-SV 6A

2h

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

40 50 60 70

Max. total breaking time

0.05s

0.01s

100

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

 100% of rated current

 100% of rated current

Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics

4

5 6 7

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

40

 100% of rated current

Internal Accessories

4h

Max. total breaking time

High-speed type

2h

Operating handle

1h

Left-side mounting

30min

AL

Right-side mounting

TBM

5s 2s

Temperature Compensation Curve

Test button 130

Current rating (%)

1s 0.5s

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s 0.04s

120 110 100

0.02s 0.01s

ZCT

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

50 100

Internal Wiring Diagram

0

10

20

30

40

50

Load side

10s

Line side

7

30s

Rated ambient temperature

Operating time

1min

Lead-wire direction

Rated current sensitivity

2min

Rated nonoperating current

10min 4min

AX

SHT or UVT

Senstivity selector

60

500 1000

Ambient temperature (°C)

Ground-fault current ( 100% of rated current sensitivity)

Leakage indication button

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-05SV

117

V

V-05SV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL (*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-05SV

Note *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock.

127

Accessories

Terminal cover

MI-05SV3

Small

TC-S

TCS-05SV3

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

TTC-05SV3

Rear

BTC

BTC-05SV3

Plug-in

PTC

PTC-05SV3

IEC 35mm rail mounting adapters

180

Type name

MI

Mechanical interlock

Reference page 129

TCL-05SV3 TCL-05SV3L

DIN-05SV

121

137

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV32-SV · NV63-CV · NV63-SV · NV63-HV

Outline Drawing

Front connection

M50.8 screw (M8 for 60 and 63A)

50

24

Test button

12.5 max.

61

50

72

4

25

(16 max. for 60A and 63A)

68

75

8

45

f8.5

22

Trip button

Breaker

f5.5 (f8.5 for 60 and 63A)

f4.5

50

84

112

130

Sensitivity current selector Leakage indication button

M40.7 taps or f5

Applicable wire size: f1.6 to 22mm2 (for M50.8 screw)

111

Insulation barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

Conductor drilling for direct connection

90

Drilling plan

Rear connection

M40.7 taps or f5 Mounting base 43 (44 for 60A and 63A)

Breaker

Breaker

M6 screw

27 min.

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

f14 70

25

68

42

72

(46 for 60A and 63A)

52

R1

111 50

112

8

112

8

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

50

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Plug-in

M50.8 terminal block mounting screw

Mounting plate

80

Plug-in terminal block

Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

7

80 54

16.5 max. 7

5.5

54

116

170 85

11

83.5

54

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

50

21 89

25

M6 screw

82

30 f6.5

Details of terminal

Conductor drilling

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

181

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

NV125-CV NV125-SV NV125-HV

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

Model

NV125-CV

Rated current In (A) Number of poles

Rated operational voltage Ue (V)

AC

3

3

4

3

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

100-440

100-440

200-440

100-440

200-440

(15) 30 100/200/500 selectable

Rated current sensitivity (mA) High-speed type

30 100/200/500 selectable

4

(30) 100/200/500 selectable

at IΔn

0.1

0.1

0.1

at 5IΔn

0.04

0.04

0.04

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

(100/200/500 selectable)

(100/200/500 selectable)

(100/200/500 selectable)

Max operating time (s)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

440V

10/5

25/25

50/38

415V

10/5

30/30

50/38

400V

10/5

30/30

50/38

230V

30/15

50/50

100/75

200V

30/15

100V

30/15

Max operating time (s)

Inertial operating time (s) (or more) Earth-leakage indication system

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NV125-HV

(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 (15) 16 20 30 32 40 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 (*2) (60) 63 75 80 100 125 (*2)

3f3W, 1f2W

Phase line

Time-delay type

NV125-SV

(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

NV125-SV

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

50/50

100/75

50/50

−

Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)

(*1)

100/75

−

Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)

Note *1 Attached to NV125-SV and NV125-HV. *2 In case of time delay type, rated current is prodused with 20 amp. or more.

Operating Characteristics 4h

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

2h

2h

Operating Characteristics NV125-SV 15A-30A NV125-HV 15A-30A

1h

Operating Characteristics NV125-CV 60A-100A NV125-SV 40A-100A NV125-HV 40A-100A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Instantaneous trip current is fixed to 600A120A.

2min

Operating time

10s 5s Min.

2s

1min

30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

2s

2s

1s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

0.1s

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

0.2s Max. total breaking time

0.05s

0.01s

40 50 60 70

Time-delay trip 2

1 1.25

3

 100% of rated current

4

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

Max. total breaking time

0.05s

0.01s

40

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

5 6 7

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

Operating handle High-speed type

Time-delay type 0.45s (Max)

1h

Time-delay type 1s (Max)

Left-side mounting

Time-delay type 2s (Max)

AL

Right-side mounting

Rated current sensitivity Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

Current rating (%)

0.5s

0.1s 0.05s 0.04s

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

Test button 130

1s

0.2s Inertial nonoperating time

0.02s 0.01s 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

TBM

Internal Wiring Diagram

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

120 110 100

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

500 1000

Line side

2s

Temperature Compensation Curve Rated ambient temperature

5s

Rated nonoperating current

10s

Rated nonoperating current

Operating time

7

30s

Rated current sensitivity

1min

Rated current sensitivity

2min

Rated nonoperating current

4min

AX

SHT or UVT

Lead-wire direction

Rated current sensitivity

Rated nonoperating current

30min 10min

40

Internal Accessories

4h 2h

30

 100% of rated current

 100% of rated current

Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics

4

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

ZCT

Load side

30s 20s

Max.

2min

Max.(40A-50A)

1min

Max.

6min 4min

Max. (60A-100A)

2min

Operating Characteristics NV125-CV 125A NV125-SV 125A NV125-HV 125A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Operating time

1min Operating time

4h

4h

2h

Senstivity selector

Ambient temperature (°C) Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)

Leakage indication button

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-1SV

117

V

V-1SV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL (*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-05SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

127

Accessories Mechanical interlock

Terminal cover

MI

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-1SV4

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

TTC-1SV3

Rear

BTC

BTC-1SV3

Plug-in

PTC

PTC-1SV3

Electrical operation device

182

Type name 3P

Reference page 129

TCS-1SV3 3P

TCL-1SV3

4P

TCL-1SV4

(*2)

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV125-CV · NV125-SV · NV125-HV

Outline Drawing

Front connection

50

111

f8.5

22

f8.5

8

f4.5

50

112

84

50 112

Breaker

24

Wire connection

Sensitivity current selector Leakage indication button Test button

Trip button

14-2/0AWG CU/AL

M8 screw

Operating time selector (for time-delay type)

130

Mounting hole

130

Solderless terminal for wire size

Insulation barrier (removable)

30 60

90

90

120

61

19 max. Comb conductor 16.5 max.

68

Neutral pole 4

72

M40.7 taps or f5

3-pole

4-pole

(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

90

3-pole

30

30

45

4-pole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Drilling plan

Rear connection

4-pole

Breaker

112

R1

111

112

52

8

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

3-pole

Breaker

Stud can be rotated 90°

52

Mounting base 102

4-pole

3-pole

16

15 connection allowance

8.5

30

M8 bolt

2.5 15 68 72

5

Insulating tube

15

28

30

60

60

2.5

54.5

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

f18

30

86

90 1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

M40.7 taps or f5

90

3-pole

104.5

4-pole Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Plug-in

Mounting plate

Plug-in terminal block

M50.8 terminal block mounting nut or screw mounted directly

3-pole

4-pole

95

125

60

90

7

Breaker (plug-in terminal block)

89

30

80

54

f8.5

54

12

20 max.

30

60

97

127

3-pole

4-pole

Conductor drilling

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for NV125-CV.

183

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

M8 screw

21

Details of terminal

116

85

5.5

170

11

83.5

54

30

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

NV250-CV NV250-SV NV250-HV

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

Model Rated current In (A)

NV250-CV

NV250-SV

NV250-HV

125 150 175 200 225 250

125 150 175 200 225 250

125 150 175 200 225 250

Number of poles

3

3

4

3

3f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

100-440

100-440

200-440

100-440

200-440

Phase line Rated operational voltage Ue (V)

AC

30 100/200/500 selectable

Rated current sensitivity (mA) High-speed type

at IΔn

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.04

0.04

0.04

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

(100/200/500 selectable)

(100/200/500 selectable)

(100/200/500 selectable)

Max operating time (s)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

440V

15/12

36/36

65/65

415V

25/19

36/36

70/70

400V

25/19

36/36

75/75

230V

36/27

85/85

100/100

200V

36/27

100V

36/27

Inertial operating time (s) (or more) Earth-leakage indication system

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

NV250-CV

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

85/85

100/100

85/85

−

Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)

100/100

Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics

Operating Characteristics 4h 2h

5s Min.

2s

4min

30s 20s

1min

2min

10s 5s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

10s 5s 2s 1s

Min.

2s 1s

30s

Rated current sensitivity

10min

Max.

1min

1s

Time-delay type 2s (Max)

Rated nonoperating current

10s

Time-delay type 1s (Max)

Rated current sensitivity

Operating time

30s 20s

Time-delay type 0.45s (Max)

1h

2min

Max.

1min

High-speed type

2h

Rated nonoperating current

2min

4h

30min

Rated nonoperating current

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Operating Characteristics NV250-CV 250A NV250-SV 250A NV250-HV 250A

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Rated current sensitivity

1h

Rated current sensitivity

Operating Characteristics NV250-CV 125A-225A NV250-SV 125A-225A NV250-HV 125A-225A

Operating time

2h

Rated nonoperating current

4h

Operating time

(30) 100/200/500 selectable

at 5IΔn

Max operating time (s)

Time-delay type

(30) 100/200/500 selectable

4

0.5s Inertial nonoperating time

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s 0.04s

Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

0.02s

50 100

0.1s

0.1s Max. total breaking time

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

2

3

4

5 6 7

Instantaneous trip 10

15

20

30

40

0.02s 0.01s

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15

20

TBM

120 110

25 50 100

500 1000

Internal Wiring Diagram Test button

100

ZCT

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

Senstivity selector

60

Leakage indication button

Ambient temperature (°C)

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

500 1000

40

Rated ambient temperature

Right-side mounting

Lead-wire direction

Current rating (%)

7

Left-side mounting

SHT or UVT

30

Temperature Compensation Curve 130

AX

25 50 100

100% of rated current

Internal Accessories AL

500 1000

Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 1 1.25

100% of rated current

Operating handle

25 50 100

Load side

0.02s

500 1000

Max. total breaking time

0.05s

Line side

0.05s

0.01s

0.01s

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-2SV

117

V

V-2SV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL (*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-2SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127 Terminal cover

MI

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-2SV4

3P

TCS-2SV3

3P

Reference page 129

TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L

4P

TCL-2SV4

Skeleton

TTC

3P

TTC-2SV3

Rear

BTC

3P

BTC-2SV3

Plug-in

PTC

3P

PTC-2SV3

Electrical operation device

184

Type name 3P

(*2)

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV250-CV · NV250-SV · NV250-HV

Outline Drawing

30

Front connection

M8 bolt (hex-socket)

Solderless terminal for wire size 125-175A 14-95mm2 200-250A 70-125mm2 Wire connection

24

100

10

f8 .5

C

1

50

f4.5

1

Test button

25 max.

35 70

45

68 4

105

140

3-pole

4-pole

.5

35

f8

61

Neutral pole

105

Or

35 M40.7 taps or f5

9

22

f8.5

100

Trip button

Breaker

C

Leakage indication button

102

144

144

165

Sensitivity current selector

165

100

Operating time selector (for time-delay type)

126

Insulation barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

25 max.

72

3-pole

(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

92

Conductor drilling for direct connection

4-pole

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole

Mounting base 4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

Breaker

3-pole

15

72

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

6

15

68

71

f9 M8 bolt

70

Insulation tube

105

106

M40.7 taps or f5

70

1

3-pole

52

R

32.5

35

f24 35

144

126

144

22 connection allowance

20

8

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

3-pole

100

35 105

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

31 89 112

30

56.5 54 3-pole 70

Insulation barrier

4-pole 105 3-pole 105 4-pole 140

80 56.5

20 f9 M8 bolt Stud attachable in this direction only

70

105

107

142

3-pole

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

4-pole

Drilling plan

Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for the model of NV250-CV.

185

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

21

15

28 M5 terminal block mounting screw

7 151

6

11

4-pole 145 3-pole 110

70

144

165

190

Mounting plate

34.5

Plug-in terminal block

24 connection allowance

Plug-in

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

NV125-SEV NV125-HEV NV250-SEV NV250-HEV

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

Model

NV125-SEV

NV125-HEV

NV250-SEV

Rated current In (A)

125

125

250

NV250-HEV 250

Current setting Ir (A)

63-125

63-125

125-250

125-250

Number of poles

3

4

3

4

3

3

Phase line type

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f4W

3f3W, 1f2W

3f3W, 1f2W

Rated operational voltage Ui Rated operational voltage Ue (V)

V

440

440

440

440

AC

100-440

100-440

100-440

100-440

(30) (30) (30) (30) 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable 100/200/500 selectable

Rated current sensitivity (mA) High-speed type Max operating time (s)

Time-delay type

at IΔn

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

at 5IΔn

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

Rated current sensitivity (mA)

(100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable) (100/200/500 selectable)

Max operating time (s)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

(0.1/0.5/1.0)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

Mechanical type (button)

440V

36/36

65/65

36/36

65/65

415V

36/36

70/70

36/36

70/70

400V

36/36

75/75

36/36

75/75

230V

85/85

100/100

85/85

100/100

200V

85/85

100/100

85/85

100/100

100V

85/85

100/100

85/85

100/100

Inertial operating time (s) (or more) Earth-leakage indication system

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

Mounting screw: M40.755 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)

(0.45/1.0/2.0 selectable)

Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

NV250-SEV

Earth leakage Tripping Characteristics

Operating Characteristics 10h 5h

1h

STD pickup current Is Ir (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%

2s 1s

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

0.2s 0.1s

STD pickup current Is Ir(2–2.5–3–3.5–4 –5–6–7–8–10)±15%

5s 2s

30s 10s 5s 2s 1s

Inertial nonoperating time

0.2s

0.5s

0.1s 0.05s 0.04s

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

0.2s

Inertial nonoperating time

0.02s 0.01s

0.1±0.03s

2

I t ON

50 100

500 1000

1 1.25

INST pickup current Ii In2-14 ±15%, Ir14 ±15% 2

3

4

5 6 7

Max. total breaking time

10

15

20

30

40

0.02s 0.01s

0.6 0.7

AX

Right-side mounting

SHT or UVT

TBM

INST pickup current Ii In2-14 ±15%, Ir14 ±15% 2

3

4

5 6 7

15

20

30

500 1000

40

Lead-wire direction

PAL

130

Internal Wiring Diagram

120 110

Test button Magnetic device

100 90 80

(Note *1)

25 50 100

Max. total breaking time

10

Current Reducing Curve Current rating (%)

AL

500 1000

 100% of current setting Ir Instantaneous tripping current (% of rated current or % of current setting Ir)

Internal Accessories Operating handle

25 50 100

500 1000

Ground-fault current(% of rated current sensitivity)

1 1.25

 100% of current setting Ir Instantaneous tripping current (% of rated current or % of current setting Ir)

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

25 50 100

2

I t OFF

70 –10

(Note *2)

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

CT CT

Magnetic device

Ambient temperature (°C)

Notes *1 For the 24VDC TBM only instruct us of a control voltage. (The standard shared voltage is 100-240VAC/100-240VDC.) *2 SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (100-200VAC) is necessary.

Characteristic setting part

ZCT

Line side

0.6 0.7

Inertial nonoperating time

0.5s

0.05s I t OFF

0.02s

7

1min

I t OFF

2

Left-side mounting

2min

6

0.1s

0.1±0.03s

2

I t ON

0.05s

0.01s

4min

Rated current sensitivity

10min

LTD operating time TL 12–60–80–100s ±20% (at 200%)

6

I t ON

1s

0.5s

Time-delay type 2s (Max)

The rated current does not have thermal characteristics. Reduce the current as shown in the curve on the left chart if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.

CT

Load side

5s

10s

Time-delay type 1s (Max)

Rated nonoperating current

I t OFF

30s 20s

Time-delay type 0.45s (Max)

1h

Rated current sensitivity

6

1min

High-speed type

2h

Operating time

10s

4h

30min

Rated ambient temperature

30s 20s

LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 670s (TL = 100s set) 540s (TL = 80s set) 400s (TL = 60s set) 80s (TL = 12s set)

2min LTD operating time TL 12–60–80–100s ±20% (at 200%)

6

I t ON

Operating time

Operating time

2min 1min

6

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Rated nonoperating current

6

LTD operating time at 125% (I t ON) 670s (TL = 100s set) 540s (TL = 80s set) 400s (TL = 60s set) 80s (TL = 12s set)

Rated nonoperating current

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Operating Characteristics NV250-SEV NV250-HEV Current setting Ir Rated current In 250A 125-250

2h

Rated current sensitivity

Operating Characteristics NV125-SEV NV125-HEV Current setting Ir Rated current In 63-125 125A

2h

Rated current sensitivity

5h

Rated nonoperating current

10h

Senstivity selector

Leakage indication button

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle

Handle lock device

Type name

Reference page

F

F-2SV

117

V

V-2SV

119

LC

LC-05SV

HL (*1) HL-S

HLF-05SV HLN-05SV HLS-2SV

Notes *1 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *2 Specify the working voltage. Refer to the reference page for type name.

Accessories Mechanical interlock

127 Terminal cover

MI

Small

TC-S

Large

TC-L

MI-05SV3

4P

MI-2SV4

3P

TCS-2SV3

3P

Reference page 129

TCL-2SV3 TCL-2SV3L

4P

TCL-2SV4

Skeleton

TTC

3P

TTC-2SV3

Rear

BTC

3P

BTC-2SV3

Plug-in

PTC

3P

PTC-2SV3

Electrical operation device

186

Type name 3P

(*2)

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

NV125-SEV · NV125-HEV · NV250-SEV · NV250-HEV

Outline Drawing

30

Front connection Insulation barrier (removable)

24

Breaker

10

f8

.5

100

126

f4.5

50

102

144

C 1

Sensitivity current selector Leakage indication button Test button

144

Solderless terminal for wire size 125-175A 14-95mm2 200-250A 70-125mm2 Wire connection

1 C

165

100

Operating time selector (for time-delay type)

165

Mounting hole

M8 bolt (hex-socket)

25 max. Or

100 35

70

105

105

Neutral pole

68 4

140

25 max.

72

(Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

92

4-pole

3-pole

35

61 9

22

.5 f8

45

f8.5

Trip button

Trip characteristics selector

35

M40.7 taps or f5

3-pole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

4-pole

Drilling plan

Rear connection 4-pole

Mounting base

Stud can be rotated 90°

3-pole

4-pole

Breaker

3-pole

Breaker

15 68

M40.7 breaker mounting screw

6

15

72

52

R

1

144

126

20

22 connection allowance

144

8

Mounting plate t = 3.2 max.

f9 M8 bolt

71

70

Insulation tube

105

M40.7 taps or f5

70

3-pole

106

32.5

35

f24

35

35

100

105

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame

4-pole Drilling plan

Front-panel cutout

21 31 89 112

30

56.5 54 f9 M8 bolt 3-pole 70

Insulation barrier

4-pole 105 3-pole 105

Stud attachable in this direction only

4-pole 140

80 56.5

20 70

105

107

142

3-pole

f6 hole or M50.8 taps

4-pole Drilling plan

Remark: 1. Only 3-pole models are available for the model of NV250-SEV and NV250-HEV.

187

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

M5 terminal block mounting screw

15

28

151

6

11

7

4-pole 145 3-pole 110

70

144

34.5

Plug-in terminal block

165

190

Mounting plate

24 connection allowance

Plug-in

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV400-CW NV400-SW

Model

NV400-CW

NV400-SW

Number of poles

3

Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1)

100-440 Multi-voltage type

Rated current In (A)

250 300 350 400 (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

High-speed type

0.04

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s)

Time-delay type

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

(100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)

Max. operating time at 2IΔn (s)

(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)

Inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s)

Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (lcu/lcs) EN 60947-2

Button

AC

440V

25/13

42/42

400V

36/18

45/45

230V

50/25

85/85

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (4pcs)

Note *1 Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.

NV400-SW

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

4h 2h

20s 10s

NV400-CW

5s Min.

30s 10s 5s 2s 1s

2s

0.5s

1s

0.2s NV400-SW

0.5s

Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

0.1s

Inertial nonoperating time

0.04s 0.02s

0.2s

Rate current sensitivity

2min 1min

Rate nonoperating current

Max.

30s

Time-delay type 2s. (MAX)

Rate current sensitivity

4min

1min

Time-delay type 1s. (MAX)

Time-delay type 0.45s. (MAX)

Rate nonoperating current

10min

2min

Highspeed type

Rate current sensitivity

6min 4min

Rated current sensitivity

1h 30min

Rated nonoperating current

2h

Operating time

Operating time

4h

Rate nonoperating current

Operating characteristics NV400-CW NV400-SW

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

0.01s

0.1s Max. total breaking time

25 50 100

0.05s

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity) 0.02s 0.01s 100

Time-delay trip 125

200

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000

1500 2000

3000

4000

Current (% of rated current)

Internal Accessories

Temperature Compensation Curve

Operating handle Right-side mounting

AL

AX

Lead wire direction

TBM

SHT or UVT

130 Current rating (%)

Left-side mounting

7

110 100 90 80

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

Remark: 1. Refer to page 107.

Internal Wiring Diagram

Operating handle Mechanical interlock

Type name

Reference page

117

Auxiliary handle

HT

HT-4CW, HT-4SW

128

V-4S

119

Large

TC-L

TCL-4SW3

MI-4SW3

129

Terminal cover

Accessories

Reference page

Skeleton

TTC

TTC-4SW3

Rear

BTC

BTC-4SW3

Type name F

F-4S

V MI

Accessories

Handle lock device

HL

HL-4CW, HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW

Electrical operation device

(*1)

121

Test button

ZCT

Line side

External Accessories

Load side

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

Rated ambient temperature

120

127 133

Sensitivity selector

Magnetic device

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

Leakage indication button

188

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV400-CW · NV400-SW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

94.5 44

Insulating barrier (removable) 28 16

39

43

f12.5

Test button

44 97

f14 M12 bolt

103

51

5

112 140

CL

92

CL

12 25

39

Trip button

47 f7

102

257

Leakage indication button

194

110

CL

Breaker

R6

Sensitivity current selector Operating time selector (Time-delay type)

Mounting hole CL

Breaker

CL

8

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

f10.5

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

44

118

M6 tap or f7

Conductor drilling for direct connection

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

107

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

155(NV400-SP) 134(NV400-CP)

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Line side 6-f35 8

C L

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

24 24

M6 tap or f7

10 113

8 f13 M12 bolt

87

225

194 24 24

83

128

26

25 20 20

225

194

4-M6 tap or f7

C L

14

265

225

Connection allowance CL

M6 screw for mounting breaker

44

Insulation tube

87

f35

11 44

11

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

Drilling plan

Load side

Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

7 2 Characteristics and Dimensions

Stud can be rotated 90°

8

Breaker

Mounting plate

189

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW

Model

NV400-SEW

Number of poles

3

Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1)

Time-delay type

3

NV400-REW

4

3

100-440 Multi-voltage type

Rated current In (A) High-speed type

NV400-HEW

4

200-400 adjustable (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

0.04

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

(100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s)

(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)

Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s)

Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) EN 60947-2

Button

AC

440V

42/42

65/65

400V

50/50

70/70

125/63

230V

85/85

100/100

150/75

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

125/63

Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Note *1 Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.

NV400-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

10h 5h

Operating characteristics NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.80.85-0.9-0.95 -1.0) ±10%

STD pickup current Is Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-45-6-7-8-10) ±15%

2min 1min 30s 10s 5s 2s 1s 0.5s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL ±20% Tp= 2 (at 200%)

0.2s 0.1s

INST pickup current II x 4 - x16 ±15% (Magnification to In) 60 70

100 125

0.01s

0.1 ± 0.03 s 0.06 ± 0.02 s

0.02s 200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

Inertial nonoperating time

0.04s 0.02s

0.3 ± 0.06 s 0.2 ± 0.04 s

0.05s

0.01s

0.1s

STD operating time Ts

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

Max. total breaking time 1500 2000

Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

0.2s

1s 0.5s

Time-delay type 2s. (MAX)

Rate current sensitivity

4min

Time-delay type 1s. (MAX)

Time-delay type 0.45s. (MAX)

Rate nonoperating current

1min

Highspeed type

Rate current sensitivity

10min

Rated current sensitivity

1h 30min

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

Operating time

2h

Rated nonoperating current

400s (TL= 60s set) 80s (TL= 12s set)

Rated current In: 400A

Operating time

6min 4min

Current setting Ir: 200-400A (Adjustable)

Rate nonoperating current

4h LTD operating time at 125% 1000s (TL=150s set) 670s (TL=100s set)

Rate current sensitivity

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Rate nonoperating current

2h

3000 4000

Current setting (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

AL

AX

SHT or UVT

Lead wire direction

TBM

PAL

7

120 110 100 90 80 70 0

Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. 2. Refer to page 107.

MI

F-4S

117

V-4S

119

3P

MI-4SW3

4P

MI-4SW4

129

Notes *1 This is for NV400-SEW. *2 This is for NV400-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NV400-HEW/REW, use PTC-4SW3. *3 Specify the operation method and voltage. *3 Order in combination with the breaker unit.

Accessories Auxiliary handle Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

Rear

BTC

Handle lock device

3P

TCL-4SW3 (*1)

4P

TCL-4SW4 (*1)

3P

TTC-4SW3

4P

TTC-4SW4

3P

BTC-4SW3 (*2)

4P

BTC-4SW4

HL

HL-4SW

HL-S

Electrical operation NVM device

190

Type name HT-4SW

HT

HLS-4SW 3P 4P

(*3)

Reference page

Characteristic setting part

128

40

50

60

Test button

Magnetic device

121

127 133

ZCT

N CT

Line side

Mechanical interlock

V

30

Internal Wiring Diagram Reference page

Terminal cover

Operating handle

Type name

F

20

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories

10

CT CT

Magnetic device

Leakage indication button

In case of 4P

Load side

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

130

Continuous load current (%)

Operating handle Right-side mounting

Left-side mounting

Current Reducing Curve Rated ambient temperature

Internal Accessories

Sensitivity selector

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV400-SEW · NV400-HEW · NV400-REW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

Insulating barrier (removable)

CL

39

44 97

56

103

51

168

112 140

185

3-pole

4-pole

5

92

194

Conductor drilling for direct connection

44

M6 tap or f7

44 118

107 155

196

CL

f7

39

25 f10.5 Conductor thickness t=8 max.

Neutral pole f14 M12 bolt

CL

12

59

f12.5

102

257

Test button

3-pole

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

4-pole

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Line side

4-pole

Breaker

6-f35 8

24 24

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent C C L L

3-pole

8

Stud can be rotated 90°

Mounting plate

M6 tap or f7 225

C L

194

4-M6 tap or f7 194

14

265

225

Connection allowance CL

225

M6 screw for mounting breaker 10 113

8 f13 M12 bolt

87

Insulation tube

24 24

83

128

26

25 20 20

f35

44

44

87

11 44

43.5

130.5

4-pole

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

130.5

3-pole

11

Load side

Drilling plan

Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

7 2 Characteristics and Dimensions

Trip button

Breaker

CL Breaker

CL

R6

Operating time selector (Time-delay type) Leakage indication button

CL

3-pole

44

Conductor thickness 8 t=8 max. 43

110

16

28

Sensitivity current selector Mounting hole

4-pole

94.5

CL

191

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV630-CW NV630-SW

Model

NV630-CW

Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)

100-440 Multi-voltage type

Rated current In (A)

500 600 630 −

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

High-speed type

−

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s)

Time-delay type

NV630-SW 3

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

100 · 200 · 500 Selectable

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s)

0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0

Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s)

Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) EN 60947-2

Button

AC

440V

36/18

42/42

400V

36/18

50/50

230V

50/25

85/85

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (4pcs)

NV630-SW

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

4h 2h 1h

Operating characteristics NV630-CW NV630-SW

30min 20min 14min 10min

4h

5s Min. 2s

30s 10s 5s 2s 1s 0.5s

1s

Rate current sensitivity

10s

Time-delay type 2s. (MAX)

Rate nonoperating current

Operating time

Operating time

20s

2min 1min

Rate nonoperating current

Max.

30s

Rate current sensitivity

4min

1min

Rate nonoperating current

10min

2min

Time-delay type 1s. (MAX)

Time-delay type 0.45s. (MAX)

Rate current sensitivity

2h 1h 30min

6min 4min

0.5s

0.1s

0.2s

0.04s 0.02s

Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

0.2s

Inertial nonoperating time

0.01s

0.1s Max. total breaking time

0.05s

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

0.02s Time-delay trip 0.01s 100 125

200

300

Instantaneous trip

400 500 600 700

1000

1500 2000

3000 4000

% of rated current

Temperature Compensation Curve

Internal Accessories Operating handle Right-side AL mounting

AX

SHT or UVT

Lead wire direction

TBM

130 Current rating (%)

Left-side mounting

110 100 90 80 0

10

20

Remark: 1. Refer to page 107.

50

Accessories

Type name

F

F-4S

117

Auxiliary handle

HT

HT-4SW

V

V-4S

119

Large

TC-L

TCL-4SW3

MI

MI-4SW3

129

Skeleton

TTC

TTC-4SW3

Rear

BTC

BTC-4SW3

HL

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW

Handle lock device

Electrical operation device

(*1)

Reference page 128 121

ZCT

127 133

Sensitivity selector

Magnetic device

Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

192

60

Test button

Line side

Mechanical interlock

Reference page Terminal cover

Operating handle

Type name

40

Internal Wiring Diagram

External Accessories Accessories

30

Ambient temperature (°C)

Load side

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Rated ambient temperature

120

Leakage indication button

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV630-CW · NV630-SW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

4-pole 3-pole

Breaker

Breaker 39

194 f10.5

59 f7

30 Conductor thickness t=10 max.

f12.5

39 Neutral Pole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

44

44

56

51

168

112

185

140

196

4-pole

4-pole 1mm clearance on each side of handle

107

Drilling plan

155

3-pole

44

3-pole

103 5

M6 screw or f7

118

97

f14 M12 bolt

Front-plate cutout

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Breaker

3-pole

Eddy-current heat-reducing slit

Line side 6-f35 24 24

8 f13 M12 bolt

194

225

194

8 87

24 24

83

128

4-M6 tap or f7

M6 breaker mounting screw

44

Insulated tube

87

f35

44

11

43.5

130.5

44

4-pole

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

130.5

3-pole

11

Load side

Drilling plan Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

7 2 Characteristics and Dimensions

10 113

14

225

20 20 32

25

M6 screw or f7

265

Connection allowance

225

4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

8

Mounting plate

92

102

Leakage-indicator button Test button

R6

257

12

Operating-time selector (time-delay type)

Trip button

44 8

43

Sensitivity selector Mounting hole

94.5

16

Insulating barrier (removable)

110

Conductor thickness t=10 max.

28

193

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV630-SEW NV630-HEW

Model

NV630-SEW

Number of poles

3

Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1)

Time-delay type

3

100-440 Multi-voltage type

Rated current In (A) High-speed type

NV630-HEW

4

300-630 adjustable −

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

−

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

(100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s)

(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable) (0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)

Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s)

Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) EN 60947-2

Button

AC

440V

42/42

400V

50/50

70/70

230V

85/85

100/100

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

65/65

Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)

Note *1 Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.

NV630-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

10h 5h

Operating characteristics NV630-SEW NV630-HEW

2h

30s 20s 10s 5s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip

2s

Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -0.9-0.95-1.0)±10%

STD pickup current Isd Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

2min 1min 30s 10s 5s 2s 1s 0.5s

1s

0.1s

Pre-alarm operating time Tp

STD operating time Ts

TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

0.2s 0.1s

0.01s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

INST pickup current II In x(4-15) ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s

Inertial nonoperating time

0.04s 0.02s

0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

Tp=

Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

0.2s

0.5s

Time-delay type 2s. (MAX)

Rate current sensitivity

4min

Operating time

1min

Rate current sensitivity

10min LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

Time-delay type 1s. (MAX)

Time-delay type 0.45s. (MAX)

Rate nonoperating current

2h 1h 30min

2min

Operating time

4h

Rate nonoperating current

6min 4min

Rated Current In:630A

Rate current sensitivity

Current setting Ir:300-630A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time at-125% 1000s(TL=150s set) 570s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

Rate nonoperating current

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Max.total breaking time

0.01s 60 70

100 125

200

300

400 500 600 700

1000

1500 2000

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous Tripping Current (% of In)

Internal Accessories AX

SHT or UVT

TBM

Lead wire direction

PAL

Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. 2. Refer to page 107.

Mechanical interlock

F

F-4S

117

V

V-4S

119

MI

3P

MI-4SW3

4P

MI-4SW4

129

Notes *1 This is for NV630-SEW. *2 This is for NV630-SEW. For rear terminal cover of NV630-HEW, use PTC-4SW3. *3 Specify the operation method and voltage. *3 Order in combination with the breaker unit.

80 70 10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

Accessories Auxiliary handle Large Skeleton Rear

Handle lock device

Type name HT-4SW

HT TC-L TTC BTC

3P

TCL-4SW3 (*1)

4P

TCL-4SW4 (*1)

3P

TTC-4SW3

4P

TTC-4SW4

3P

BTC-4SW3 (*2)

4P

BTC-4SW4

HL

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-4SW

Electrical operation NVM device

194

90

Internal Wiring Diagram Reference page

Terminal cover

Operating handle

Type name

110 100

0

External Accessories Accessories

120

3P 4P

(*3)

Reference page Characteristic setting part

128

Test button

Magnetic device

121

ZCT

N

127

CT CT CT

133

In case of 4P

Load side

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

130

Rated ambient temperature

AL

Line side

Operating handle Right-side mounting

Continuous load current (%)

Left-side mounting

Current Reducing Curve

Magnetic device

Leakage indication button

Sensitivity selector

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV630-SEW · NV630-HEW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

4-pole 3-pole

Breaker

Breaker 39

194 f10.5

59 f7

30 Conductor thickness t=10 max.

f12.5

39 Neutral Pole

Conductor drilling for direct connection

44

56

51

168

112

185

107

140

196

4-pole

4-pole 1mm clearance on each side of handle

Drilling plan

155

3-pole

44

3-pole

103 5

M6 screw or f7

44

118

97

f14 M12 bolt

Front-plate cutout

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Rear connection

Breaker

3-pole

Eddy-current heat-reducing slit

Line side 6-f35 24 24

8 f13 M12 bolt

194

225

194

8 87

24 24

83

128

4-M6 tap or f7

M6 breaker mounting screw

44

Insulated tube

87

43.5

3-pole

4-pole

f35

130.5

44

11 44

11

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

87

130.5 Load side

Drilling plan Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

7 2 Characteristics and Dimensions

10 113

14

225

20 20 32

25

M6 screw or f7

265

Connection allowance

225

4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

8

Mounting plate

92

102

Leakage-indicator button Test button

R6

257

12

Operating-time selector (time-delay type)

Trip button

44 8

43

Sensitivity selector

Mounting hole

94.5

16

Insulating barrier (removable)

110

Conductor thickness t=10 max.

28

195

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

2

NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

Model

NV800-SEW

NV800-HEW

Number of poles

3

Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)

100-440 Multi-voltage type

Rated current In (A) High-speed type Time-delay type

400-800 adjustable −

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

−

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

100 · 200 · 500 Selectable

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s)

0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable 0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0

Max. inertial non-operating time at 2IΔn (s)

Earth-leakage indication system

Button

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) EN 60947-2

AC

440V

42/42

400V

50/50

70/70

230V

85/85

100/100

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

65/65

Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2pcs)

NV800-SEW

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

10h 5h Operating characteristics NV800-SEW NV800-HEW

4h

30s 20s 10s 5s

STD pickup current Isd Ir × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15%

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir × (0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85

2s 1s 0.5s 0.2s

– 0.9 – 0.95 – 1.0) ±10%

2min 1min 30s 10s 5s 2s 1s 0.5s 0.1s

STD operating time Ts

0.04s 0.02s

0.3 ± 0.06s 0.2 ± 0.04s

(at 200%)

0.1s

100 125

200

300

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

25 50 100

500 1000

Max.total breaking time

0.01s 60 70

25 50 100

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

INST Pickup current Ii In x(4-10) ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s

Inertial nonoperating time

0.01s

0.1 ± 0.03s 0.06 ± 0.02s

0.05s

Inertial nonoperating time

Inertial nonoperating time

0.2s Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL Tp= ±20% 2

Rate current sensitivity

4min

Operating time

1min

Rate nonoperating current

10min LTD operating time TL 12 – 60 – 100 – 150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

Time-delay type 2s. (MAX)

Rate current sensitivity

1h 30min

Time-delay type 1s. (MAX)

Time-delay type 0.45s. (MAX)

2h

1000s(TL=150s set) 670s(TL=100s set) 400s(TL= 60s set) 80s(TL= 12s set)

6min 4min

Operating time

Rated Current In:800A

Rate nonoperating current

Current setting Ir:400-800A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time at-125%

Rate current sensitivity

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Rate nonoperating current

2h

400 500 600 700

1000

1500

2000

3000

4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous Tripping Current (% of In)

Internal Accessories AX

TBM

SHT or UVT

Lead wire direction

PAL

Remarks: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached. 2. Refer to page 107.

External Accessories Operating handle Mechanical interlock

Type name

Reference page

Accessories

Type name

F-8S

117

Auxiliary handle

HT

HT-4SW

V

V-8S

119

Large

TC-L

TCL-8SW3

MI

MI-8SW3

129

Terminal cover

Accessories

Skeleton

TTC

TTC-8SW3

Rear

BTC

BTC-8SW3

HL

HL-4SW

HL-S

HLS-8SW

F

Handle lock device

Electrical operation device Note *1 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit.

(*1)

Reference page

130 120 110

Rated ambient temperature

100 90 80 70

0

10

30

40

50

Test button Characteristic setting part Magnetic device

127 133

60

Internal Wiring Diagram

128 121

20

Ambient temperature (°C)

ZCT Line side

AL

Working current correcting ratio (%)

Operating handle Right-side mounting

Load side

2 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Left-side mounting

Current Reducing Curve

CT CT CT

Magnetic device

196

Leakage indication button

Sensitivity selector

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

2 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers NV800-SEW · NV800-HEW

Outline Drawing

Front connection

26

92

243 102

f8 f14

12

172 70

22

46

Test button

M6 tap or f7

97

40

1.0mm clearance on each side of the handle frame.

103

40

5

140

107

Boring dimensions for rear connection type barriers (3-pole)

Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent

M6 tap or f7 Stud can be rotated 90°

5

Breaker

6-f48 5

Connection allowance 25

10

Rear connection

Mounting plate

Front-panel cutout

Drilling plan

Conductor drilling for direct connection

155

210

(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)

24 24

32 32 32 8

f8.5

8

14

4-M6 tap or f7

32 110

15

24 24 f13 M12 bolt

140

M6 screw for mounting breaker

70

f48

140

70

11

8-M4 screw Add these tapped holes in 8 positions to standard boring.

140

Drilling plan

Note The bore dimensional drawing shows the breaker viewed from the rear.

7 2 Characteristics and Dimensions

8

243

11

8

10

113

12.5

243 45

13

295

10

243

Trip button

R6

Terminal dimension for directly connecting conductor

15

Leakage indication button

51

Breaker

Breaker

8

Sensitivity current selector

Operating time selector (Time-delay type)

15

110

87

46

Conductor thickness t=12 max.

275 87

94.5

Insulating barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

197

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

NF50-SVFU NV50-SVFU

Model

Number of poles

2

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated voltage VAC

NV50-SVFU

600Y/347V

−

480V

−

AC 480Y/277V

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics)

Phase line

− 440

690V

−

500V

−

440V

7.5/4

415V

10/5

400V

10/5

380V

10/5

230V

15/8

2

100-240 100-440

Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA

AC

0.04 (*1) Indicator window

480V

−

240V

14

120V

AC

30 50 100

75% of IΔn

Earth-leakage indication system

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

30 50

Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

1f2W

120-240

Pick-up current UL 1053

UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02

3 3f3W

1f2W

Rated voltage IEC 60947-2 VAC EN 60947-2

14

120V

(5) (10) 15 20 30 40 50

UL 489

−

240V Rated insulation voltage Ui V

Number of poles

3 240

NV50-SVFU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

(3) 5 10 15 20 30 40 50

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02

Model

NF50-SVFU

High-speed type

3

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

14

440V

−

7.5/4

400V

−

10/5

230V

15/8

15/8

100V

15/8

15/8

IEC35 rail mounting claws

Note *1 0.1 for UL1053. Remark: 1. The mounting screws must be prepared by the user. (Recommended size: M430.7365 (2 pcs).)

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) 4h

NV50-SVFU (UL 1053)

2h

1h

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF50-SVFU, NV50-SVFU

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

30min 10min 4min

Max. (3A-30A)

2min

Max. (40A-50A)

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s

30s 10s 5s 2s

Min.

2s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s 0.05s

0.04s

0.01s 100 135

Time-delay trip 200

300 400 500 600 700 1000

0.02s

Instantaneous trip 1500 2000

0.01s

3000 4000 25 100 500 63.8 75 86.2 Ground fault current (100% of rated current sensitivity)

Current (% of Ir)

Handle of circuit breaker

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

Left pole

AL

Temperature Compensation Curve

AX

SHT or UVT

Right pole

Outgoing direction of lead wires

TBM

NF50-SVFU

NV50-SVFU

2-pole

2-pole 3-pole

3-pole

130

Rated ambient temperature

Internal Accessories

Rated current compensation rate %

7

120 110

Internal Wiring Diagram Test button

ZCT

100

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60 Leakage indication

Ambient temperature °C

External Accessories Accessories F Operating handle V Handle lock device

198

HL HL-S

2P 3P 2P 3P

Type name F-03SVUL2 F-03SVUL V-03SVUL2 V-03SVUL HLF-03SVU HLS-03SVU

Reference page 117 119 127

Accessories Terminal cover

Large

TC-L

2P 3P

Type name TCL-03SVU2 TCL-03SVU3

Reference page 121

Sensitivity selector

Load side

0.02s

Line side

Operating time

1min

Operating time

2min

Highspeed type

2h

Rated current sensitivity

4h

Rated non-operating current

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers NF50-SVFU · NV50-SVFU

Outline Drawing

Front connection Mounting hole

M50.8 screw

Leakage current indicator window

Mounting hole

24

f8

3.5

Trip button Trip button

Trip button 18

18

36 54

18

36

36

36 54

2-pole

3-pole

2-pole

3-pole

(NF50-SVFU)

56 65

Test button

f4.2

Test button

Trip button 18

35

16.5

36 50 26 37

87.5 120

87.5 120

Leakage current indicator window

68 3

76 90

(NV50-SVFU)

Compatible crimp terminals Applicable wire range (*1) mm2

AWG (#)

(60°C/75°C)

f5.5 16-14

2.63-4.6

12

6

1.04-2.63

11.5 max.

Tightening torque 22lb-in (2.5N·m)

Crimp terminal type (*2) JST R2-5 2-M5 V2-5 V2-M5 R5.5-5

(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

2.63-6.64

12-10

Conductor drilling for direct connection

6.64-10.52

8

Remarks: 1. The mounting screws are not enclosed with the breaker. 2. The wires cannot be connected directly.

10.52-16.78

6

16.78-26.66

4

V5.5-5 R8-5 R14-5 14-NK5 22-S5 22-S6

NTM R2-5 R2-5M R3.5-5S R3.5-5L R5.5-5 R5.5-5S R5.5-5N R8-5 R8-5S R14-5 R14-5S

R22-5S

JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd. Notes *1 14AWG or lager to comply with UL Standards. *2 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp terminal combination shown above.

Breaker CL

Breaker

CL

18

2-pole

3-pole

CL

52

82.5

CL

37

55

2-pole

3-pole

7 3 Characteristics and Dimensions

CL

27

M40.7screw or f5

R1

CL

The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on each side of breaker window frame.

Drilling plan

Front panel drilling plan

199

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU

Model

60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100

2

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Rated voltage VAC

3

Number of poles

3 3f3W

600Y/347V

−

480V

− −

240V

14

120V

−

Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690V

− 7.5/4

440V

10/5

415V

10/5

400V

10/5

380V

10/5

230V

15/8

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

120-240

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2

100-440

Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA

30/50/ 100/200/500 selectable

Pick-up current UL 1053

75% of IΔn 0.04 (*1)

Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn

600

500V

1f2W

UL 489

Rated voltage VAC

240

AC 480Y/277V

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics)

60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100

Phase line

Number of poles

UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02

NV100-CVFU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

NF100-CVFU

Model

NF100-CVFU

High-speed type

3

Mechanical button

Earth-leakage indication system Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02

AC

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

480V

−

240V

14

120V

14

440V

10/5

400V

10/5

230V

15/8

100V

15/8

IEC35 rail mounting claws, Insulating barrier (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminal) Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws)

Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.

Operating Characteristics

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)

NV100-CVFU

2h 1h

1h 30min 10min 4min

6min 4min

2min

Max.

2min

1min

Operating time

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

2s

Highspeed type

2h

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF100-CVFU NV100-CVFU

30min 20min 14min 10min

Operating time

4h

(UL 1053)

30s 10s

Rated current sensitivity

4h

Rated non-operating current

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)

5s 2s 1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s 0.05s

0.04s 0.02s

0.02s 0.01s 100 135

Time-delay trip 200

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000

1500 2000

0.01s

3000 4000 25 100 500 63.8 75 86.2

Current (% of Ir)

Ground fault current (100% of rated current sensitivity)

Outgoing direction of lead wires

NV100-CVFU 3-pole

2-pole 3-pole

130 120

Test button

110

ZCT

100

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

Sensitivity selector

60

Ambient temperature °C

Leakage indication

External Accessories Accessories F Operating handle V

2P 3P 2P 3P

HL Handle lock device

200

HL-S

2P 3P

Type name F-05SVUL2 F-05SVUL V-05SVUL2 V-05SVUL HLF-05SVU HLS-05SVU2 HLS-05SVU

Reference page

Accessories

117

2P Terminal cover

119

127

Large

TC-L 3P

Type name TCL-05SVU2 TCL-05SVU2L TCL-05SVU3 TCL-05SVU3L

Reference page

121

Load side

TBM

NF100-CVFU

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

SHT or UVT

Internal Wiring Diagram

Line side

AX

Right pole

Rated ambient temperature

AL

Handle of circuit breaker Left pole

Temperature Compensation Curve Rated current compensation rate %

7

Internal Accessories

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers NF100-CVFU · NV100-CVFU

Outline Drawing

Front connection M8 screw 24

Mounting hole

Mounting hole

f4.5

50

84

Leakage current indicator button

112

150

150

112

Sensitivity current selector

Test button

Trip button

22

50

50

50

75

2-pole

3-pole

Trip button

8

22 25

f8.5

f8.5 45 65 68 75

16 max.

4

72 90

(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

(NF100-CVFU)

Conductor drilling for direct connection

(NV100-CVFU)

Compatible crimp terminals Applicable wire range

Tightening torque 54lb-in (6N·m)

Crimp terminal type (*1)

AWG (#)

mm2

(60°C/75°C)

2.5-2.63

14

2.63-6.64

12-10

6.64-10.52

8

10.52-16.78

6

R14-8

16.78-26.66

4

R22-8

R22-8S

26.66-42.42

2

38-S8

R38-8S

42.42-60.57

JST

NTM

R2-8

R2-8

R5.5-8

R5.5-8

R8-8

R8-8 R14-8 R14-8S

60-2BA

1/0

CB60-8

60-S8

JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd. Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp terminal combination shown above.

CL

Terminal cover

CL

Mounting hole

CL

Solderless terminal

Terminal cover

Y

Mounting hole

Size of screwdriver with bolting Please bolt with flat head screwdriver. The length of X : 6mm-7mm The length of Y q 9.5mm

X

Front connection(solderless terminal)

Flat head screwdriver

90

M40.7screw or f5

CL

CL

25

2-pole

3-pole Drilling plan

The tightening torque is different according to connected wire. Refer to instruction manual for details. Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating Remark: by the setting of twisted strands or the stress Remark: of heating and cooling.

2-pole

3-pole

CL

CL

50

70

Breaker

CL

7 3 Characteristics and Dimensions

75

111

CL

68

7 7 7 7 7 19

Breaker

52

75

3-pole

14AWG 12-10AWG 8AWG 6-4AWG 2AWG 1-1/0AWG

R1

50

2-pole

CL

84

CL

50

210

210

Wire size 60°C/75°C CU ONLY Number of strands

The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on each side of breaker window frame.

Front panel drilling plan

201

Model

NF125-SVU

15 20 30 40 50 60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Number of poles

2

125

125

3

480

600Y/347V UL 489 480V CSA C22.2 AC No.5-02 240V

−

−

18

18

30

30

50

50

50

50

100

100

−

−

−

−

Rated insulation voltage Ui V

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics)

690

690

690

690

690V

8/4

8/4

10/5

10/5

500V

18/9

18/9

25/13

25/13

440V

30/15

30/15

50/25

50/25

415V

30/15

30/15

50/25

50/25

400V

30/15

30/15

50/25

50/25

380V

30/15

30/15

50/25

50/25

230V

50/25

50/25 100/50 100/50

NV125-SVU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C Number of poles

15 20 30 (40) 50 60 75 100 3

Phase line

3f3W 1f2W

Rated 2 3 3 3 voltage 480 600Y/347V 600Y/347V VAC

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

NF125-HVU

15 20 30 40 50 60 (70) 75 (80) (90) 100

Rated voltage VAC

120V

Model

NF125-HVU

High-speed type

NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NV125-SVU NV125-HVU

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

3

NV125-HVU

15 20 30 125 (40) 50 60 125 75 100 3 3 3 3f3W 3f3W 3f3W 1f2W

1f2W

1f2W

UL 489

120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2

100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440

Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA Pick-up current UL 1053

30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 selectable selectable selectable selectable 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn

Operating time (sec) within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1)

Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02

AC

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics)

480V

30

30

50

50

240V

50

50

100

100

120V

50

50

100

100

440V

30/15

30/15

50/25

50/25

400V

30/15

30/15

50/25

50/25

230V

50/25

50/25 100/50 100/50

100V

50/25

50/25 100/50 100/50

Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws), Insulating barrier (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs)

Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.

Operating Characteristics (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) 4h Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-HVU NV125-HVU

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-HVU NV125-HVU

2h 1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

15A-30A

6min 4min

10s 5s

Min.

30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

2s

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.05s

0.05s

0.05s

Time-delay trip 200

0.2s

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000

0.01s 100 135

3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 10000

300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)

300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000

AL

Handle of circuit breaker Left pole

Highspeed type

Right pole

NF125-SVU NF125-HVU

AX

Outgoing direction of lead wires

SHT or UVT TBM NV125-SVU NV125-HVU

Operating time

1min 30s 10s

2-pole

Rated current sensitivity

2min

Rated non-operating current

10min 4min

3-pole

3-pole

Temperature Compensation Curve Internal Wiring Diagram

5s 2s

Test button

0.2s 0.1s 0.04s 0.02s 0.01s

130 120 110 100

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

25 100 500 63.8 75 86.2 Ground fault current (100% of rated current sensitivity)

ZCT

Line side

Rated current compensation rate %

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

0.5s

Rated ambient temperature

1s

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature °C Leakage indication

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device

202

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir)

30min

(UL 1053)

7

200

Internal Accessories

4h

1h

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip

0.01s 100 135

3000 4000

Current (% of Ir)

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics 2h

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

Time-delay trip 200

Current (% of Ir)

NV125-SVU NV125-HVU

Min.

2s

1s

0.02s 0.01s 100 135

Max.

2min

F V HL HL-S

Type name F-1SVUL V-1SVUL HLF-05SVU HLS-05SVU

Reference page 117 119 127

Accessories Terminal cover

Large

Type name TC-L

TCL-1SVU3

Reference page 121

Sensitivity selector

Load side

2s

1min

125A

6min 4min

Operating time

30s 20s

Operating time

Max.

1h

Max. (60A-100A) Max. (40A-50A)

2min

1min

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF125-SVU NV125-SVU NF125-HVU NV125-HVU

2h 30min 20min 14min 10min

40A-100A

6min 4min

2min

Operating time

4h

4h

2h

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

NF125-SVU · NF125-HVU · NV125-SVU · NV125-HVU

Outline Drawing

Front connection Mounting hole

Insulation barrier (removable)

Insulation barrier (removable)

Mounting hole

M8 screw 50

50

24

f4.5

Leakage current indicator button

50

84

124

160

160

124

Sensitivity current selector

8

50

50

f8 .5

f8.5

Test button Trip button

45 61

22

22 Trip button

60 90

19 max.

60

68

90

(NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU)

65

4

(Conductor thickness t=4 max.)

72

Conductor drilling for direct connection

(NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU)

90

Compatible crimp terminals Applicable wire range

Tightening torque 54lb-in (6N·m)

Crimp terminal type (*1)

AWG (#)

mm2

(60°C/75°C)

2.5-2.63

14

2.63-6.64

12-10

6.64-10.52

8

10.52-16.78

6

R14-8

16.78-26.66

4

R22-8

R22-8S

26.66-42.42

2

38-S8

R38-8S

42.42-60.57

1/0

JST

NTM

R2-8

R2-8

R5.5-8

R5.5-8

R8-8

R8-8

60-2BA 60-S8

R14-8 R14-8S

CB60-8

JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd. Note *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp terminal combination shown above.

Front connection (solderless terminal)

50

Insulation barrier (removable)

Hexagon socket set screw Mounting hole

Insulation barrier (removable)

50

Mounting hole

Solderless terminal

5.03 Wire size Number of strands 60°C/75°C CU ONLY

50

84 90

90

Breaker

7 7 7 7 7 19

a

52

R1

123

6

Breaker

86

30 M40.7 screw or f5

Drilling plan

7 3 Characteristics and Dimensions

50

90

a

The tightening torque is different according to connected wire. Refer to instruction manual for details. a:Solid copper wire is usable. Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating Remark: by the setting of twisted strands or the stress Remark: of heating and cooling.

68

50

160

160

6

14AWG 12-10AWG 8AWG 6AWG 4-2AWG 1AWG

The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on each side of breaker window frame.

Front panel drilling plan

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.

203

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

3

NF225-CWU

Model

NF225-CWU

Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 40˚C (IEC30˚C)

125 150 175 200 225

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Number of poles

3 Rated voltage (VAC)

UL 489

AC

240

240V

35

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

DC

600

500V

10/5

440V

15/8

400V

18/9

230V

35/18

250V

10/5 (*1) Mounting screw: M430.7×55 (2pcs), Insulation barrier: (4pcs), Terminal cover: (1 set) (*2)

Standard attached parts

Notes *1 Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 32, the models can be used for up to 400 V DC. *2 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger protection) structure.



NF225-CWU

Operating Characteristics 4h 2h Type

1h

NF225-CWU

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Operating time

2min

Max.

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

2s 1s 0.5s

Max. total breaking time

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s 0.02s Time-delay trip

0.01s 1

1.35

2

3

4

Instantaneous trip 5

6 7

10

15

20

30

40

 100% of Rated current

Temperature Compensation Curve

Internal Accessories

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

Right-side mounting

AL

AX

SHT or UVT

Current rating (%)

7

Left-side mounting

Lead wire direction

Rated ambient temperature

130

Operating handle

120 110 100 90 80 –10

0

10

20

30

40

Ambient temperature (°C)

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device

204

Type name

Reference page

F

F-2SUL

117

V

V-2SUL

119

HL

HLF-2SWU

127

Accessories Mechanical interlock Terminal cover

Large

Type name Ml TC-L

Reference page

MI-05SWU3

129

TCL-2SWU3 TCL-2SWU3L

121

50

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers NF225-CWU

Outline Drawing

Front connection

Compatible crimp terminals

Insulating barrier

24

C L

Applicable wire range

M8 bolt (Hex-soket)

mm2

50

f8.5 10

f4.5

f8.5

102

144

C L

165

100

Mounting hole

22 max. 100

Trip button

Conductor thickness t=7 max.

22

16.78-26.66

4

26.66-42.42

2

42.42-60.57

1/0

JST

NTM

R22-8 22-S8

R22-8 R22-8S CB22-8S

R38-8 38-S8 R60-8 60-2BA CB60-S8

R38-8 R38-8S R60-8 CB60-8 CB60-8S R70-8

60.57-76.28

2/0

70-8

76.28-96.3

3/0

80-3BA CB80-S8

96.3-117.2

4/0

100-3BA CB100-S8

JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd. Notes *1 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp terminal combination shown above.

Conductor drilling for direct connection

45 61

70

AWG (#)

(60°C/75°C)

Tightening torque 90lb-in (10N.m)

Crimp terminal type (*1)

68

105 4

72 92

Drilling plan

M40.7 screw or f5

1

C L

100

Front cover cutout 1mm clearance on each side of handle

7 3 Characteristics and Dimensions

35

Breaker

52

126

C L

C L

Breaker

R

C L

205

NF250-SVU NF250-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

3

Model

NF250-SVU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

125 150 175 200 225

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Number of poles

125 150 175 200 225

250

Rated voltage 3 3 600Y/347V 600Y/347V VAC

3

3 480

600Y/347V UL 489 480V CSA C22.2 AC No.5-02 240V

−

−

18

18

35

35

50

50

65

65

100

100

−

−

−

−

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics)

690

690

690

690

690V

8/4

8/4

10/5

10/5

500V

25/13

25/13

36/18

36/18

440V

36/18

36/18

50/25

50/25

415V

36/18

36/18

50/25

50/25

400V

36/18

36/18

50/25

50/25

380V

36/18

36/18

50/25

50/25

230V

65/33

65/33 100/50 100/50

Standard attached parts (Front connection)

NF250-HVU

30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 30/50/ 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 100/200/500 selectable selectable selectable selectable 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn 75% of IΔn

Rated current sensitivity IΔn mA Pick-up current UL 1053

Operating time s within AT 5lΔn 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1) 0.04 (*1)

UL 489 CSA C22.2 No.5-02

AC

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics)

480V

35

35

50

50

240V

65

65

100

100

120V

65

65

100

100

440V

36/18

36/18

50/25

50/25

400V

36/18

36/18

50/25

50/25

230V

65/33

65/33 100/50 100/50

100V

65/33

65/33 100/50 100/50

Earth Leakage Tripping Characteristics

(The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.)

NV250-SVU NV250-HVU

1h 30min

10s 5s

Min.

2min

30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

2s

1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s Max. total breaking time

4min

Operating time

30s 20s

0.1s

10min

Max.

1min

0.02s

0.02s

30s 10s 5s

1s 0.5s 0.2s 0.1s

Max. total breaking time

0.1s 0.05s

1min

2s

0.2s

0.05s

Highspeed type

2h

(UL 1053)

250A

2min

Operating time

1min

4h

Rated current sensitivity

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

Max.

0.2s

0.04s 0.02s 0.01s

0.01s 100 135

300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000

Time-delay trip 200

Current (% of Ir)

7 Internal Accessories AL

Temperature Compensation Curve Internal Wiring Diagram AX

Right pole

NF250-SVU NF250-HVU

SHT or UVT

Outgoing direction of lead wires

Rated current compensation rate %

Handle of circuit breaker

25 100 500 63.8 75 86.2 Ground fault current (100% of rated current sensitivity)

300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000

Current (% of Ir)

Left pole

Instantaneous trip

TBM

NV250-SVU NV250-HVU

130 120

Test button

110 100

Magnetic device

90 80 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60 Leakage indication

Ambient temperature °C

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device

F V HL HL-S

Type name F-2SVUL V-2SVUL HLF-05SVU HLS-2SVU

Reference page 117 119 127

Accessories Terminal cover

Large

TC-L

ZCT

Type name TCL-2SVU3 TCL-2SVU3L

Reference page 121

Sensitivity selector

Load side

200

Instantaneous trip

Line side

Time-delay trip

Rated ambient temperature

0.01s 100 135

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

100-440 100-440 100-440 100-440

6min 4min

2min

Operating time

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF250-SVU NV250-SVU NF250-HVU NV250-HVU

2h

6min 4min

206

1ø2W

Mounting screw M430.7355 (2 screws), Insulating barrier (4pcs)

4h

125-225A

2s

1ø2W

IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2

Rated non-operating current

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min

1ø2W

120-480 120-480 120-480 120-480

Note *1 0.1 for UL1053.

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF250-SVU NV250-SVU NF250-HVU NV250-HVU

2h

1ø2W

UL 489

Earth-leakage indication system Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button Mechanical button

Operating Characteristics (The CE and CCC characteristics are noted differently. Contact us for more information.) 4h

NV250-HVU

125 150 125 150 175 200 250 175 200 250 225 225 3 3 3 3 3ø3W 3ø3W 3ø3W 3ø3W

Phase line

480

Rated insulation voltage Ui V

NV250-SVU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C Number of poles

250

Rated voltage VAC

120V

Model

NF250-HVU

High-speed type

7

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Characteristics and Dimensions

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

NF250-SVU · NF250-HVU · NV250-SVU · NV250-HVU

Outline Drawing

Front connection

Compatible crimp terminals

Tightening torque 90lb-in (10N.m)

Applicable wire range AWG (#)

mm2 Insulation barrier (removable)

24

Hexagon socket M8 bolt

Insulation barrier (removable)

100

100

Mounting hole

Mounting hole

4

26.66-42.42

2

42.42-60.57

1/0

f4.5 f8.5

100

R22-8 R22-8S CB22-8S

R38-8 38-S8 R60-8 60-2BA CB60-S8

R38-8 R38-8S R60-8 CB60-8 CB60-8S R70-8

2/0

70-8

76.28-96.3

3/0

80-3BA CB80-S8

96.3-117.2

4/0

100-3BA CB100-S8

117.2-152.05 250/300MCM CB150-S8 (*1) JST: Japan Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. NTM: Nichifu Co., Ltd. Notes *1 TCL-2SVU3L can be mounted when using CB150-S8. *2 When using with a wire connection, use the crimp terminal combination shown above.

Test button

100

NTM

R22-8 22-S8

60.57-76.28

50

102

144

185

185

144 Trip button

JST

(60°C/75°C)

16.78-26.66

Sensitivity current selector Leakage current indicator button

Crimp terminal type (*2)

45 61

70

70

9

1 (Conductor thickness t=7 max.)

Max. 25

92

(NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU)

10

or

72

C

4

.5

f8

1

68

105

105

.5

f8

65

22

C

Trip button

22

Max. 25

Conductor drilling for direct connection

(NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU)

Front connection (solderless terminal) Mounting hole

Terminal cover

Mounting hole

Solderless terminal Hexagon socket set screw

Terminal cover

Wire size 60°C/75°C CU ONLY Number of strands 4-2AWG 7 1-1/0AWG 19 3/0-4/0AWG 19 250-350MCM 37

50

102

265

265

6.1

The tightening torque is different according to connected wire. Refer to instruction manual for details.

105

Remark: Periodical retightening prevents overheating Remark: by the setting of twisted strands or the stress Remark: of heating and cooling.

68

105

92

Breaker Breaker

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

CL

7

52

126

CL

R1

CL

CL

100

35 M40.7screw or f5

Drilling plan

The drilling dimensions have a 1.0 mm clearance on each side of breaker window frame.

Front panel drilling plan

207

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

3

NF400-SWU NF400-HWU

Model

NF400-SWU

NF400-HWU

250 300 350 400

250 300 350 400

Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 40˚C

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Number of poles

3

3

600Y/347

600Y/347

600Y/347V

20

25

480V

35

65

240V

65

100

Rated voltage (VAC)

UL 489 CSA C22 2 No.5-02

AC

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690V IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

690

690

10/10(5/5) (*1)

15/10

500V

30/30(25/25) (*1)

42/42

440V

42/42(36/36) (*1)

65/65

400V

45/45(36/36) (*1)

70/70

230V

85/85(65/65) (*1)

100/100

Mounting screw: M6360 (4screws) Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating barrier (4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminals)

Mounting screw: M6360 (4screws) Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating barrier (4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminals)

Standard attached parts

Note *1 In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/). *2 0.1 for UL1053.

NF400-SWU

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h

2h Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF400-SWU NF400-HWU

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

1h

6min 4min

2min

2min

Max.

1min

Operating time

1min 30s 20s 10s 5s Min.

2s 1s

Max.

30s 20s 10s 5s Min. 2s 1s

0.5s

0.5s Max.total interrupting time

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

0.05s

0.05s

0.02s

Time-delay trip

0.01s 100 135

200

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000

Max.total interrupting time

0.01s 100 130

1500 2000 3000 4000

Time-delay trip 200

% of rated current

Operating handle Right-side mounting

Temperature Compensation Curve

AL

AX

SHT or UVT

MG

EAL

TBL

TBM

ATU

PAL

Lead-wire direction

7

Current rating (%)

NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU

(*1)

130 120 110 100 90 80 −10

(*1)

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

1500 2000 3000 4000

% of rated current

Internal Accessories Left-side mounting

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000

Rated ambient temperature

Operating time

Operating Characteristics (IEC 60947-2) (EN 60947-2) NF400-SWU NF400-HWU

30min 20min 14min 10min

0

10

20

30

40

Ambient temperature (°C)

(*1)

(*1)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for left-side mounting.

External Accessories Accessories Operating handle Handle lock device

208

F V HL

Type name F-4SUL V-4SUL HL-4SWU

Reference page 117 119 127

Accessories Terminal cover

Large

Type name TC-L

TCL-4SWU

Reference page 121

50

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers NF400-SWU · NF400-HWU

Outline Drawing

Front connection (Solderless terminal)

Hexagon socket set screw Solderless terminal

Tightening torque 275lb-in. (31.1N·m) 8

Mounting hole 102

47

Trip button

f7

f12.5

257

225

UL Ampere ratings

Wire size

250A, 300A

250-350kcmil CU

250A

350kcmil AL

350A, 400A

(2) 3/0AWG CU

Number of strands 37 19

IEC 87

97

140

103 107

5

(max. 141) (NF400-SWU)

Ampere ratings

Wire size (IEC 60228) Class 2

Class 5

250A, 300A

70-185mm2

95-185mm2

350A, 400A

150-240mm2

150-185mm2

3. Use a wire size that can carry the rated current. 4. When using IEC Class 5 (multi-core wire), pay attention to strand breakage and pinching, etc., while tightening. 5. The NF400-HWU does not have a solderless terminal.

155

Remarks: 1. Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. 2. When using the solderless terminals, conduct periodic inspections and tightening as the wires may wear down over use.

Front connection (Busbar terminal) Insulating barrier (removable)

46 Conductor thickness t=10 max.

10

44

110

13

26

47

Trip button

f7

f12.5

257

102

Mounting hole

10

f13 M12 bolt

46 97

112

103

140 5

(max.141) (NF400-SWU) (NF400-HWU)

107 155

Remark: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.

Breaker

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

92

194

7

CAUTION When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown. 58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre insulating plate extending 12.7mm out from each side of breaker.

R6

Breaker

97

58

30

44

Drilling plan

f7 holes or M6 taps

118

Front-panel cutout

1mm clearance on each side of handle.

Insulating plate (Line)

209

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

3

NF630-SWU NF630-HWU

Model

NF630-SWU

NF630-HWU

Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 40°C

500 600 630

500 600 630

Number of poles

3

3

600Y/347

600Y/347

600Y/347V

20

25

480V

35

65

240V

85

100

Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)

Rated voltage (VAC) UL 489 AC

CSA C22.2 No.5-02

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

690

690

690V

10/10

15/10

500V

30/30

42/42

440V

42/42

65/65

400V

45/45

70/70

230V

85/85

100/100

Mounting screw: M6335 (4pcs) Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating barrier (500A,600A: 2pcs, 630A: 4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminals)

Mounting screw: M6335 (4pcs) Insulating plate (1pce) Insulating barrier (500A,600A: 2pcs, 630A: 4pcs) (Only for type with bar terminals)

Standard attached parts

NF630-SWU

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

2h 1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps)

2min

Control Inst. trip setting current (%)

Max.

1min

10s

400±80 600±120 800±160 1000±200

Lo 2 3 Hi

30s 20s Min.

5s

Adjustable range of inst. pick up current

2s 1s

1min

Lo 2 3 Hi

30s 20s

5s Adjustable range of inst. pick up current

Min.

0.5s 0.2s Max. total interrupting time

0.1s 0.05s

Max. total interrupting time

0.1s 0.05s

Time-delay trip 135

200

0.02s

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000

0.01s

1500 2000 3000 4000

Time-delay trip

100 130

200

Instantaneous trip

300 400 500 600 700 1000

% of rated current

Temperature Compensation Curve AX

SHT or UVT

MG

EAL

TBL

TBM

ATU

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

PAL

(*1)

(*1)

Lead-wire direction

130

Rated ambient temperature

Right-side mounting

AL

Current rating (%)

Left-side mounting

1500 2000 3000 4000

% of rated current

Internal Accessories Operating handle

120 110 100

(*1)

90 80 −10

(*1)

0

10

20

External Accessories Accessories

Handle lock device

210

F V HL

Type name F-6SUL V-6SUL HL-4SWU

Reference page 117 119 127

Accessories Terminal cover

Large

Type name TC-L

TCL-6SWU

30

40

Ambient temperature (°C)

Note *1 Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for left-side mounting.

Operating handle

400±80 600±120 800±160 1000±200

10s

1s

0.2s

0.01s 100

Inst. trip adjustment range (4 steps) Control Inst. trip setting current (%)

Max.

2min

2s

0.5s

0.02s

Operating Characteristics (IEC 60947-2) NF630-SWU NF630-HWU

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Operating time

Operating time

2h

Operating Characteristics (UL 489) NF630-SWU NF630-HWU

Reference page 121

50

60

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

3 UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers NF630-SWU · NF630-HWU

Outline Drawing

Front connection (Solderless terminal) Solderless terminal

Hexagon socket set screw Tightening torque 275lb-in. (31.1N·m)

102

275

243

Mounting hole 8

15

UL Ampere ratings

Wire size

Number of strands

500A, 600A

(2) 250-350kcmil CU ONLY

37

f8

f14

Trip button

IEC 140

97

Ampere ratings

210

103

500A, 600A

5 Remarks: 1. Do not remove solderless terminal in any case. 2. When using the solderless terminals, conduct periodic inspections and tightening as the wires may wear down over use.

Front connection (Busbar terminal)

Class 5

(2) 95-185mm2

(2) 120-185mm2

3. Use a wire size that can carry the rated current. 4. When using IEC Class 5 (multi-core wire), pay attention to strand breakage and pinching, etc., while tightening. 5. The 630A and NF630-HWU does not have a solderless terminal.

107 155

46

Conductor thickness t=12 max.

10

630A:150 500A, 600A:110

Insulating barrier (removable)

Wire size (IEC 60228) Class 2

102

275

Mounting hole

15

40

87

32

14

10

15

630A:150

8

f8

f14

Trip button

46

140

97

f14 M12 bolt

210

103 5

107 155

Remark: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.

Breaker

Breaker

CAUTION

92

97

3 Characteristics and Dimensions

R6 243

7

When mounted in steel or cast box cover must be insulated as shown. 58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre insulating plate extending 12.7mm out from each side of breaker.

58

30

70

Drialling plan

f7 holes or M6 taps

172

1mm clearance on each side of handle.

Insulating plate (Line)

Front-panel cutout

211

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

4

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU

Model Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C Current setting Ir (A) Number of poles Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

NF250-SEV with MDU

NF250-HEV with MDU

250

250

125-250

125-250

3

4 3 4 690 690 8/8 10/8 18/18 30/23 36/36 50/50 36/36 70/70 36/36 75/75 36/36 75/75 85/85 100/100 − − Mounting screw M4  0.7  55 (3P: 2psc, 4P: 4pcs) Insulation barrier (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs) MDU, Connection cable (for breaker mounting) MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting screw, Connection cable (for panel mounting)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

690V 500V 440V AC 415V IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics) 400V 380V 230V DC 250V Standard attached parts (Front connection) Breaker mounting MDU accessories Panel mounting

NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-SEV with MDU (Breaker mounting) (Panel mounting)

Operating Characteristics 10h

10h Operating characteristics NF250-SEV with MDU NF250-HEV with MDU

5h 2h 1h

2h

Note) Current setting Ir Rated current In 125-250 250A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time 6 at 125%(I t ON) 670s (TL = 100s set) 540s (TL = 80s set) 400s (TL = 60s set) 80s (TL = 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

1h

LTD operating time 6 at 125%(I t ON) 670s (TL = 100s set) 540s (TL = 80s set) 400s (TL = 60s set) 80s (TL = 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

LTD operating time TL 12–60–80–100s ±20% (at 200%)

6

I t ON

30s 20s

Operating time

1min

6

I t OFF

10s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%

5s 2s

1min

6

I t OFF

10s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2–2.5–3–3.5–4 –5–6–7–8–10) ±15%

5s

1s 0.5s

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

0.5s 0.2s 0.1s

0.1s

0.1±0.03s

2

I t ON

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

0.2s

2

2

I t OFF

0.02s

200

Max. total breaking time

0.01s

600 1000 1500 3000 500 700 2000 4000 Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In, or % of Ir)

300 400

AL

AX

60 70 100 125

INST pickup current Ii In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15%

200

Max. total breaking time

300 400 600 1000 1500 3000 500 700 2000 4000

Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In, or % of Ir)

Current Reducing Curve SHT or UVT

Right-side mounting

PAL

Lead-wire direction AL for MDU transmission

Derating of Load current (%)

4 Characteristics and Dimensions

Operating handle

I t OFF

0.02s

AX for MDU transmission

(*1)

Rated ambient temperature

60 70 100 125

INST pickup current Ii In × 2-14 ±15%, Ir × 14 ±15%

Internal Accessories

7

0.1±0.03s

2

I t ON

0.05s

0.05s

Left-side mounting

LTD operating time TL 12–60–80–100s ±20% (at 200%)

6

I t ON

30s 20s

2s

1s

0.01s

Note) Current setting Ir Rated current In 125-250 250A (Adjustable)

2min

2min Operating time

Operating characteristics NV250-SEV with MDU NV250-HEV with MDU

5h

130 120 110 100 90 80 70 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

The rated current does not have thermal characteristics. Reduce the current as shown in the curve on the left chart if the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.

Ambient temperature (°C) Note *1 SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (100-240VAC/100-240VDC) is necessary.

External Accessories Accessories F Operating handle (*1) V LC

Type name Reference page 117 F-2SV 119 V-2SV LC-05SV HLF-05SV 127 Handle lock device HL (*2) HLN-05SV HL-S (*1) HLS-2SV Notes *1 Available only for the MDU panel mounting type. *2 HLF types are used for OFF lock and HLN types for ON lock. *3 When selecting the MDU breaker mounting, only the MI panel mounting can be manufactured. *4 Specify the working voltage. *5 In the case of the MDU breaker mounting type, specify the model name with MP at the end. 212

Accessories Mechanical interlock

MI (*3)

Small

TC-S

Terminal Large cover

TC-L

Skeleton TTC Rear BTC Electrical operation device (*1)

3P 4P 3P 3P 4P 3P 3P

Type name MI-05SV3 MI-2SV4 TCS-2SV3 (*5) TCL-2SV3 (*5) TCL-2SV3L (*5) TCL-2SV4 TTC-2SV3 (*5) BTC-2SV3 (*5) (*4)

Reference page 129

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

NF250-SEV with MDU · NF250-HEV with MDU

Outline Drawing

M8 bolt (Hex-soket)

Trip button

Neutral pole

92

MDU unit

3-pole

MDU specification No transmission, pulse output

4-pole

MDU breaker mounting

CC-Link

35 105 140

Neutral pole

.5

f8

9

45 61 4

126

or

f4.5

144 165 22 70 105

f8.5

f8.5

45 61 68 77

100

35 105 140

25 max.

f4.5

133 144 165 102 86.5 100 22

Breaker

1 C

Trip button

70 105

24

100

Mtg hole

10

Insulation barrier (removable)

f8

3

102 50

25

(65)

24

100

Mtg hole

C 1

M8 bolt (Hex-soket)

A

38.5

Insulation barrier (removable)

.5

Front connection

68

M4 × 0.7 taps or f5

(Bus t max.=7)

72

A 25 32

3-pole

4-pole

35

35

25 max.

3-pole

4-pole

92

Bus drilling for direct connection

MDU panel mounting

Drilling plan

Rear mounting

77

70 105

106

MDU unit

Insulation tube

32.5

100 60 77.5

B B

MDU specification B No transmission, pulse output 16

f9 M8 bolt

CC-Link

MDU breaker mounting

126 144

1 R

52

M4 × 0.7 taps or f5

70

105

4-pole

3-pole

Front-plate cut out MDU panel mounting

Drilling plan

MDU panel mounting

MDU terminal for panel mounting

90 14.5

35 35

f24

35

1mm clearance on each side of handle

f9 M8 bolt

23

This figure is without terminal cover. Please bind wires. Control power MB

106

32.5 100

Insulation tube

70 105

71

Front-plate cut out

MDU unit terminal for breaker mounting

Control power FG

15 68

M4 × 0.7 breaker mtg screw

6

15

72

Breaker

Breaker

3-pole

20

M4 × 0.7 breaker mtg screw

15

71

4-pole 3-pole

4-pole

Connection allowance 22

20

144

R1

8

Breaker

6

15 68

Stud can be rotated 90° Insulation tube

8

4-pole 3-pole

Connection allowance 22

Mtg plate t max.=3.2

4-pole 3-pole

144

Stud can be rotated 90° Insulation tube

39.5 88.5

Mtg plate t max.=3.2

70

Panel note: Panel t 1.0mm - 3.2mm

Operation and indication side 90

This figure is without terminal cover. Please bind wires.

Terminal block Panel holder plate

MDU connector

MA, MB,FG M3 screw

90

Control power MA

1 2 3 4 5 6 MAMB

70 90

Control power

1 2 3 4 5 6

R2

4

5

6

−

−

−

−

−

Pulse output

−

−

−

CC-Link

− SLD −

−

Cb Ca

82.5

DG DB DA

MDU specification 1

2

3

4

5

6

−

−

−

−

FG

−

−

−

No transmission Pulse output

Ca Cb

FG

−

CC-Link

DA DB DG SLD FG

−

Front-panel cut out

7 4 Characteristics and Dimensions

3

−

72

2

No transmission

72

57.5

MDU specification 1

50

Removable connector

213

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

4

NF400-SEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU

Model

NF400-SEP with MDU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue V 690V 500V 440V 415V IEC 60947-2 AC (Icu/Ics) 400V 380V 230V 200V Standard attached parts Breaker (Front connection)

200 225 250 300 350 400 Adjustable 4 3 4 690 690 10/10 10/10 30/30 50/50 42/42 65/65 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 45/45 70/70 85/85 100/100 85/85 100/100 Mounting screw M6  60 (4pcs) Insulation barrier (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs) MDU, Connection cable (for breaker mounting) MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting screw, Connection cable (for panel mounting)

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

3

Breaker mounting Panel mounting

MDU accessories

NF400-HEP with MDU

NF400-SEP with MDU (Breaker mounting)

Operating Characteristics 10h

2h 1h

LTD operating time at 130% 790s (TL = 150s set) 530s (TL = 100s set) 315s (TL = 60s set) 65s (TL = 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min 1min

(*1)

(*1)

SHT or UVT MG

(*1)

(*1)

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

EAL

TBL

TBM

PAL

ATU

TI

EPAL

Lead-wire direction

Note *1 Right side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left side mounting.

5s

1s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

0.5s

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

Tp=

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s

0.1±0.03s 0.06±0.02s

INST pickup current II x4-x16 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s

60 70 100 130

200

600 1000 1500 3000 500 700 2000 4000 Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Accessories

Handle lock device Mechanical interlock

F V HL HL-S MI (*2)

Max. total breaking time

300 400

7 External Accessories Operating handle

Current Reducing Curve

3P 4P

Type name Breaker mounting Panel mounting − F-4S − V-4S HL-4SW HL-4SW HLS-4SW − MI-4SW3 MI-4SW3 MI-4SW4 MI-4SW4 HT-4SW HT-4SW

Rated ambient temperature

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

Derating of Load current (%)

10s

2s

130 120 110 100 90 80 70 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

The rated current does not have thermal characteristics. Reduce the current as shown in the curve on the left chart if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.

Ambient temperature (°C)

Reference page 117 119 127 129

HT 128 Auxiliary handle Notes *1 For NF400SEP with MDU. *2 When selecting the MDU breaker mounting, only the MI panel mounting can be manufactured. *3 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the breaker unit. *4 This is for NF400-SEP with MDU. For rear terminal cover of NF400-HEP with MDU, use PTC-4SW3.

214

AX

AX for MDU transmission

Note) Current setting Rated Current Ir: 200-400A In: 400A (Adjustable)

30s 20s

0.01s

AL

AL for MDU transmission

Accessories

Terminal cover

Operating time

2min

Operating handle Right-side mounting

Left-side mounting

Operating characteristics NF400-SEP with MDU NF400-HEP with MDU (Magnification to In)

5h

4 Characteristics and Dimensions

Internal Accessories

Large

TC-L

Skeleton

TTC

3P 4P 3P 4P 3P

Rear

BTC 4P

Electrical operation device

NFM

3P 4P

Type name Breaker mounting Panel mounting − TCL-4SW3 (*1) − TCL-4SW4 (*1) TTC-4SW3-MDU TTC-4SW3 TTC-4SW4-MDU TTC-4SW4 BTC-4SW3 (*1) BTC-4SW3 (*4) Only line side BTC-4SW4 BTC-4SW4 Only line side −

(*3)

Reference page

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

NF400-SEP with MDU · NF400-HEP with MDU

Outline Drawing

Insulating barrier (removable)

112

Mounting hole

51

56

22

44

Conductor t max.=8

8

Breaker 39

43

110

94.5 28 16

Front connection

Trip button

97

194

f12.5

f7

47

39

75

51

257

102

103

Current indication LED OVER PAL MDU 70%

M12 bolt 58

MDU terminal cover

12

PE f14

44

30

25

36

5

131

185

140

196

3-pole

4-pole

f10.5

107

168

90

M6 taps or f7

44

Neutral pole

155

4-pole

3-pole

Conductor t max.=8

Conductor drilling for direct connection

Rear connection

44

Drilling plan

1mm clearance on each side of handle. (Load side of breaker mounting has given the space to pass wires to the terminal.)

Front-plate cutout 4-pole

Stud can be rotated 90°

Breaker

MDU

3-pole

Breaker

Eddy-current heat-reducing slit

225

14

265

3-pole

R6

M6 breaker mounting screw

10

44

8 f13

M12 bolt

f35

44

87

Insulating tube

87

92 138

63

83

128

26

20

113

R6

46

25

225

20

3-pole

194

M6 taps or f7

Connection allowance

4-pole

4-pole

8

Mounting plate

130.5

3-pole

4-pole

Drilling plan

Note The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed.

33

43.5

130.5

37

37

(59)

118

118

<Panel mounting> CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting

NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU (No transmission, pulse output) MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.

MDU panel mounting

Panel thickness 1-3.2mm 72

<Panel mounting> 4 3 2 1

40

L2 L1

86.5

MDU display part

Terminal PE screw (M4)

Control power 1 A

28.5

Panel holder plate

For the set installation

2

Pulse output

MDU connector

113 114

B

Terminal block

90

85

96

72

4



Front panel cutout

M3.5 screw

L1L2 1

2 3 4 5 6

Control power

58.5 30

3

No transmission

M3 nut

Terminal block

8.5

Figure of the breaker mounting is removed the terminal cover.

MDU terminal

Panel 90

12

70

M4 screw

40

R2

75

75

40

Operation/display side

Upper side

Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate 10cm or more from the distribution line.

Terminal cover

M4 screw

Type NF400-SEP NF400-HEP

54

M3 nut

B A 244 205 374 205

In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier.

1

2

No transmission

FG

Pulse output

FG

3

4

5

6

7

113 114

NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU (CC-Link)

75

28.5

12

70

Panel holder plate

43.1

55

Terminal block

58.5 23

Terminal cover M3 screw

MDU display part

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

76

L2 L1 1 2 SLD DG 5 6 SLD DG

For the set installation

Front panel cutout

67.5

104.5

M3 screw

72

85 90 96

48

M3 nut

R2

86.5

MDU connector

Terminal PE screw(M4)

75

40

38

90

M3 screw Upper side

Panel thickness 1-3.2mm

Panel

MDU terminal <Panel mounting>

A

Operation/display side

Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate 10cm or more from the distribution line.

B

MDU panel mounting

Figure of the breaker mounting is removed the terminal cover.

4 Characteristics and Dimensions

MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.

Control power

3 4 DB DA 7 8 DB DA



Terminal block M3 nut

Type NF400-SEP NF400-HEP

B A 263 205 393 205

In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier.

L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6

Control power 1

2 3 4 5 6 FG SLD DG DB DA

215

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Measuring Display Unit Breakers

4

NF630-SEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU

Model

NF630-SEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU

Rated current In (A) Rated ambient temperature 40°C

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)

Number of poles Rated operational voltage Ue V

IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

AC

300 350 400 500 600 630 Adjustable

400 450 500 600 700 800 Adjustable

3

3

690V 500V 440V 415V 400V 380V 230V 200V

Standard attached parts (Front connection) (*1)

Breaker

MDU accessories

Breaker mounting Panel mounting

4

3

690 10/10 30/30 42/42 45/45 45/45 45/45 85/85 85/85

4 690 15/15 50/50 65/65 70/70 70/70 70/70 100/100 100/100

4 690 10/10 30/30 42/42 45/45 45/45 45/45 85/85 85/85

3

4 690 15/15 50/50 65/65 70/70 70/70 70/70 100/100 100/100

Mounting screw M6  35 (4pcs) Insulation barrier (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) MDU, Breaker mounting plate, Mounting screw for breaker mounting plate, Connection cable (for breaker mounting), MDU Mounting screw MDU, Panel mounting bracket, Panel mounting nut, Connection cable (for panel mounting), MDU Mounting screw

Note *1 4-pole models are provided with auxiliary handle.

NF630-SEP with MDU (Breaker mounting)

Operating Characteristics 10h

LTD operating time at 130% 790s (TL = 150s set) 530s (TL = 100s set) 315s (TL = 60s set) 65s (TL = 12s set)

2h 1h

Note) Current setting Rated Current In: 630A Ir: 300-630A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min 1min

5s 2s 1s

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s

60 70 100 130

0.1s

0.01s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Pre-alarm operating time Tp TL ±20% 2 (at 200%)

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

Tp=

0.1±0.03s 0.06±0.02s

INST pickup current II x4-x12 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s

300 400

60 70 100 130

200

Max. total breaking time

300 400

600 1000 1500 3000 500 700 2000 4000 Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

Current Reducing Curve Operating handle Right-side mounting

AL

Derating of Load current (%)

(*1)

AX

AL for MDU transmission AX for MDU transmission (*1)

SHT or UVT MG

EAL

TBL

TBM

PAL

ATU

TI

EPAL

130 120 110 100

The rated current does not have thermal characteristics. Reduce the current as shown in the curve on the left chart if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.

90 80 70 –10

Lead-wire direction

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

Note *1 Right side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left side mounting.

External Accessories Type name Reference Accessories page Breaker mounting Panel mounting 117 F − F-8S Large TC-L Operating handle 119 V − V-8S HL HL-4SW HL-4SW 127 Handle lock device Skeleton TTC HL-S − HLS-8SW 3P MI-8SW3 MI-8SW3 MI 129 Mechanical interlock (*1) 4P MI-8SW4 MI-8SW4 Rear BTC HT HT-4SW HT-4SW 128 Auxiliary handle Notes *1 When selecting the MDU breaker mounting, only the MI panel mounting can be manufactured. Electrical operation *2 Specify the operation method and voltage. Order in combination with the NFM device breaker unit. Accessories

Terminal cover

4 Characteristics and Dimensions

Pre-alarm pickup current Ip Ir x(0.70-0.75 -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10% -0.95-1.0)

0.05s

Max. total breaking time

Left-side mounting

(*1)

5s

0.2s

Internal Accessories

(*1)

10s

1s

600 1000 1500 3000 500 700 2000 4000 Current (% of Ir) Instantaneous tripping current (% of In)

7

30s 20s

0.5s

0.1±0.03s 0.06±0.02s

200

1min

2s

STD operating time Ts 0.3±0.06s 0.2±0.04s

INST pickup current II x4-x15 ±15% (Magnification to In)

0.02s 0.01s

STD pickup current Is Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%

Pre-alarm operating time Tp T Tp= L ±20% 2 (at 200%)

0.5s

LTD operating time TL 12-60-100-150s ±20% (at 200%)

2min

30s 20s 10s

Note) Current setting Rated Current In: 800A Ir: 400-800A (Adjustable)

LTD operating time at 130% 790s (TL = 150s set) 530s (TL = 100s set) 315s (TL = 60s set) 65s (TL = 12s set)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Rated ambient temperature

1h 30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

Operating characteristics NF800-SEP with MDU NF800-HEP with MDU (Magnification to In)

5h

Operating time

2h

Operating time

10h

Operating characteristics NF630-SEP with MDU NF630-HEP with MDU (Magnification to In)

5h

216

3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P

Type name Breaker mounting Panel mounting − TCL-8SW3 − TCL-8SW4 TTC-8SW3-MDU TTC-8SW3 TTC-8SW4-MDU TTC-8SW4 BTC-8SW3 BTC-8SW3 Only line side BTC-8SW4 BTC-8SW4 Only line side −

(*2)

Reference page

121

133

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

4 Measuring Display Unit Breakers

NF630-SEP with MDU · NF630-HEP with MDU · NF800-SEP with MDU · NF800-HEP with MDU

Insulating barrier (removable)

51

70

Conductor t max. 600AF t8 800AF t12

35

94.5

600AF 44 800AF 46

Breaker

32

97

90

14

210

MDU terminal cover

40 140

600AF 44 800AF 46 5

22

M6 taps or f7

70

107

3-pole

Conductor t max. 600AF t8 800AF t10

155

4-pole Drilling plan

Conductor drilling for direct connection

4-pole

Rear connection

1mm clearance on each side of handle. (Load side of breaker mounting has given the space to pass wires to the terminal.)

Front-plate cutout

Connection allowance

Stud can be rotated 90°

25

MDU

M6 taps or ø7 Breaker

Eddy-current heat-reducing slit

4-pole

4-pole

3-pole

3-pole

5

Mounting plate

70

40

131

f14 M12 bolt

210

3-pole

f8.5

30

Neutral pole

280

f8

f14

51

87 32

50

Dimension of terminal directly connected to conductor

8

15

85

PE

8

Current indication LED OVER PAL MDU 70%

15

75

102

275

103

Trip button

600AF 24 800AF 26

8

87

110

Mounting hole

243

Front connection

12

Outline Drawing

Breaker

138

92

46 46

243

12.5

295

R6

R6

40

243

8 13

Breaker

10

15

10 8

32 113

ø13

110

70

70

M6 breaker mounting screw

140

M12 bolt

140

51

6

70

ø48

51 172

(86) 210 172

3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan



Note The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed.

<Panel mounting>

CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting

NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output) MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.

MDU panel mounting

Panel thickness 1-3.2mm 72

<Panel mounting> 4 3 2 1

40

L2 L1

86.5

MDU display part

Terminal PE screw (M4)

Control power 1 A

28.5

Panel holder plate

For the set installation

2

Pulse output

MDU connector

113 114

B

Terminal block

90

85

96

72

4



Front panel cutout

M3.5 screw

L1L2 1

58.5 30

3

No transmission

M3 nut

Terminal block

8.5

Figure of the breaker mounting is removed the terminal cover.

MDU terminal

Panel 90

12

70

M4 screw

40

R2

75

75

40

Operation/display side

Upper side

Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate 10cm or more from the distribution line.

Type NF630-SEP NF800-SEP NF630-HEP NF800-HEP

Terminal cover

M4 screw 54

M3 nut

B A 253 221 263 221 383 221

2 3 4 5 6

Control power In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier.

1

2

No transmission

FG

Pulse output

FG

3

4

5

6

7

113 114

NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (CC-Link)

75

28.5

12

70

Panel holder plate

43.1

55

Terminal block

58.5 23

Terminal cover M3 screw

MDU display part

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

76

L2 L1 1 2 SLD DG 5 6 SLD DG

For the set installation

Front panel cutout

67.5

104.5

M3 screw

72

85 90 96

48

M3 nut

R2

86.5

MDU connector

Terminal PE screw(M4)

75

40

38

90

M3 screw Upper side

Panel thickness 1-3.2mm

Panel

MDU terminal <Panel mounting>

A

Operation/display side

Space greater than the value shown in the figure below must be secured, and must be separate 10cm or more from the distribution line.

B

MDU panel mounting

Figure of the breaker mounting is removed the terminal cover.

4 Characteristics and Dimensions

MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.

Control power

3 4 DB DA 7 8 DB DA



Terminal block M3 nut

Type NF630-SEP NF800-SEP NF630-HEP NF800-HEP

B A 272 221 282 221 402 221

In case of front connection, keep space between MDU and conductor or insulation barrier.

L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6

Control power 1

2 3 4 5 6 FG SLD DG DB DA

217

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Miniature Circuit Breakers

5

BH BH-P

Model

BH

Number of poles

1

Rated current (A) at ambient temperature 40˚C

70

1

2

70

DC

3

70, 100 70, 100

230/400

230/400

125

Rated short IEC 60898-1 AC230/400V circuit AC400V capacity (kA) − DC125V

BH

3

70, 100 70, 100

AC

Rated voltage (V)

BH-P

2

125

3

−

3

−

3

−

− 3

1

1

BH-P

Operating Characteristics

Temperature Compensation Curve

4h

135

Type:BH, BH-P Rated Current:70, 100A

1h

Rated ambient temperature

140 Operating Characteristics

2h

130

Amb. temp.:40°C

125

Current rating (%)

30min 20min 14min 10min 6min 4min

120 115

70, 100A

110 105 100

2min

95

1min

Operating time

90 30s

85

20s

0

10

20

Max.

10s

30

40

50

60

Ambient temperature (°C)

5s Min.

2s 1s 0.5s

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s

0.02s 0.01s 1

1.13

1.45

2

3

4

5

6

7

10

15

20

30

40

 100% of rated current

Outline Drawing

74

M5  0.8 screw

71.5

Plug-in terminal (line side)

7.5

113

95

57

95

73

•BH-P

32

M5  0.8 screw (line side and load side)

57.5

Mtg bracket

100

•BH

Breaker center 25 25

50

25

50

75

22

47

47

57.5

Mtg hole f4.5

63.5 77.5

25

25

60.5

25

50

75

65.5

20.5

45.5

70.5

79

1-pole

2-pole

3-pole

6

f5

.5

Conductor thickness t=4 max.

5.5

1-pole

2-pole

3-pole

13.5

12

Conductor drilling

Note Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers. and four for 2-pole and 3-pole breakers.

218

4.5

5 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

14

Mtg slot

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

5 Miniature Circuit Breakers BH · BH-P · BH-D6 · BH-D10

BH-D6 BH-D10

Model

BH-D6

Number of poles (P)

1

2

Instantaneous tripping

AC

1

2

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

4(3+N) (*1)

3

1

2

Type B, C, D

Type B, C

440

250

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

0.5, 1, 1.6, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

440

Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30°C

IEC60898-1 GB10963.1 (Icn)

2(1+N) (*1) Type B, C

Type B, C, D

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

Rated shortcircuit capacity (kA)

4(3+N) (*1)

3

BH-D10 (For DC)

BH-D10

230V

6

−

6

10

−

6

−

230/400V

6

−

−

10

−

6

−

400V

−

6

−

−

10

−

6

IEC60898-2 DC 125V GB10963.2 250V (Icn)

−

−

10

−

−

−

−

10

Note *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).

BH-D6

Operating Characteristics 4h

30min 20min

2h

30min 20min

5min

10min

5min

5min

Max.

(0.5A-4A) Max.(13A-63A)

1min

Operating time

10s 5s 2s

30s 20s

Max.(6A-10A)

10s 5s 2s

Min.

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s

B

C

0.02s

0.1s

0.1s

0.05s

0.05s

1 1.13 1.45

0.6 0.7

2

3

4

5

6 7

10

15

20

0.01s

30

0.01s 0.6 0.7

 100% of rated current

1 1.13 1.45

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

0.6 0.7

1 1.13 1.45

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

 100% of rated current

 100% of rated current

Temperature Compensation Curve

Outline Drawing M5 screw

C

0.02s

0.02s

0.01s

B

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s 0.05s

Min.

1s 0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

Max.

1min

Min.

1s

0.5s

Neutral pole (1+N only)

Neutral pole

18

36

18

36

54

54

17 44 70 max.

6

72

110 100

5 Characteristics and Dimensions

120 18

7

Rated ambient temp.

130 87

45

44.5

Ambient compensation

Current ratings (%)

Operating time

2min

2min

30s 20s

Operating Characteristics Type : BH-D10(Type B,C) Rated current : DC 0.5A-63A Amb.temp. : 30°C

1h 30min 20min

10min

2min

1s

2h

Operating Characteristics Type : BH-D6,BH-D10(Type D) Rated current : AC 0.5A-63A Amb.temp. : 30°C

1h

10min

1min

4h

4h

Operating Characteristics Type : BH-D6,BH-10(Type B,C) Rated current : AC 0.5A-63A Amb.temp. : 30°C

1h

Operating time

2h

90 Solderless terminal

80 –10

0

10

20

30

40

50

Ambient temperature (°C) 1P

2P

3P

4P

219

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

5

Miniature Circuit Breakers Residual Current Circuit Breakers

BH-DN

Model

BH-DN

Number of poles (P)

2 (1+N) (*1)

Instantaneous tripping

Type C

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

230

Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30˚C Rated shortIEC60898-1 circuit GB10963.1 capacity (Icn) (kA)

6, 10, 16, 20

AC

230V

4.5

Note *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).

BH-DN

Operating Characteristics 4h

Operating Characteristics Type : BH-DN Rated current : 6A-20A Amb.temp.:30°C

2h 1h 30min 20min 10min 6min 4min

Operating time

2min 1min

Max.

30s 20s 10s 5s

Min.

2s 1s 0.5s 0.2s 0.1s 0.05s 0.02s 0.01s

0.6 0.7

1 1.13 1.45

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15

20

30

 100% of rated current

Temperature Compensation Curve

Outline Drawing M4 screw

8.4 18

Ambient compensation Rated ambient temp.

N

N

7

130

Current ratings (%)

120

70 max. 17 44

5 Characteristics and Dimensions

45

100 90

6

80 –10 45 88

220

110

Solderless terminal

0

10

20

30

Ambient temperature (°C)

40

50

7 Characteristics and Dimensions 5 Miniature Circuit Breakers · Residual Current Circuit Breakers BH-DN · BV-D

BV-D

BV-D

Model Number of poles (P) Rated operational voltage Ue (VAC) Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30°C

2 (1+N) (*1)

4 (3+N) (*1) (*2)

230

230/400 25, 40, 63 30, 300

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

0.04

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) Pulsating current sensitivity

Type AC

Residual operation

Dependent on line voltage

Rated making and breaking capacity Im (A) Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc (kA)

500 (In 25, 40A) 630 (In63A) 6

Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm (A)

500 (In 25, 40A) 630 (In63A)

Rated conditional residual short-circuit current IΔc (kA)

6

Notes *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device). *2 For use to three phase 4-wire type. When using, it be sure to connect the neutral wire to the neutral phase. Not available for use to three phase 3-wire type.

BV-D

Operating Characteristics 4h 2h 1h 30min

Rated non-operating current

4min

Operating time

2min 1min 30s 10s 5s 2s 1s

Rated current sensitivity

10min

0.5s 0.2s 0.1s 0.04s 0.02s 0.01s 25 50 100

500

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

Outline Drawing Test button

Residual indicator

7

18 54 72

17

44

5 Characteristics and Dimensions

18 36

85

45

42.5

M5 screw

6

70 max.

Solderless terminal 2P

4P

221

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection Isolating Switches

5

BV-DN

BV-DN

Model

2 (1+N) (*1)

Number of poles (P) Rated operational voltage Ue (VAC)

230

Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30˚C

6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40

Instantaneous tripping

Type C 30, 100, 300

Rated current sensitivity IΔn (mA)

0.04

Max. operating time at 5IΔn (s) Pulsating current sensitivity

Type AC

Residual operation

Dependent on line voltage

Rated IEC61009-1 short-circuit GB16917.1 capacity (kA) (Icn)

AC

230V

4.5

Note *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).

BV-DN

Operating Characteristics 4h

4h

Operating Characteristics Type : BV-DN Rated current : 6A-40A Amb.temp.:30°C

2h 1h 30min 20min

2h 1h 30min

2min

Max.

30s 20s

Operating time

Operating time

1min

10s 5s

Min.

1min 30s 10s 5s 2s

2s 1s

1s

0.5s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

0.05s

0.04s 0.02s

0.02s 0.01s

Rated current sensitivity

4min

2min

Rated non-operating current

10min

10min 6min 4min

0.01s 0.6 0.7

1 1.13 1.45

2

3

4

5 6 7

10

15

20

 100% of rated current

25 50 100

30

500

Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)

Temperature Compensation Curve

Outline Drawing Test button M4 screw

Residual indicator

120 Current ratings (%)

N

N

8.4

36

7

Rated ambient temp.

130

70 max. 44 17

5 Characteristics and Dimensions

45

110 100 90 80 –10

0

10

20

30

6

Ambient temperature (°C) 45 88

222

Solderless terminal

40

50

7 Characteristics and Dimensions 5 Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent Protection · Isolating Switches BV-DN · KB-D

KB-D

Model

KB-D

Number of poles (P)

1

2

Utilization category

3

4 (3+N) (*1)

AC22A class

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

250

Rated voltage Ue (VAC) Rated current In (A) at ambient temperature 30˚C Short-time withstand current (A)

230

440 400 32, 63, 80 203In , 1sec

Short-time making current (A)

203In

Note *1 N pole is a switched neutral pole (without overcurrent release device).

KB-D

Outline Drawing M5 screw

45

87

44.5

Neutral pole

18

18

36

18

36

54

54

17

44

6

70 max.

72

Solderless terminal

2P

3P

4P

7 5 Characteristics and Dimensions

1P

223

Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Circuit Protectors

6

CP30-BA

Frame (A)

30

Model

CP30-BA

Number of poles

1

2

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)

0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30

Rated current (A) AC (V)

Rated voltage (V)

UL 1077 CSA C22.2 No.235

250

DC (V)

65

125

AC 2.5kA at 65V

2.5kA at 125V

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

−

250

AC

2.5kA at 230V

DC

2.5kA at 60V

2.5kA at 120V

Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)

EN 60947-2 IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)

−

2.5kA at 250V

DC Rated shortcircuit IEC 60934 capacity (kA) EN 60934

−

250

AC

2.5/2.5kA at 230V

DC

2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V

−



−

AC-DC common use

CP30-BA

3

2.5

Instantaneous type (I) Medium type (M),(MD) Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F) Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F):hydraulic-magnetic

Operating characteristics Mode of tripping

Operating Characteristics Instantaneous type (I)

Fast type (F)

1h 40min

DC

20min

AC

DC

1h 40min

DC

1h 40min

DC

20min

AC

20min

AC

20min

AC

10min 6min 4min

2min

2min

1min

1min

1min

1min

Operating time

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s 1s

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s 1s 0.5s

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s 1s

2s 1s 0.5s 0.2s

0.2s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.05s

0.05s

0.05s

0.01s 100 135 200 300 500 1000 125 400 700

5000 10000

2000

0.01s 100 135 200 300 500 1000 125 400 700

5000 10000

Terminal cover

Terminal cover

IEC 35mm rail

7

56 63

73

67 39

ON 54

ON

22.5

22.5

Terminal cover

1h 40min

1h 40min

20min

20min

10min 6min 4min

10min 6min 4min

2min

2min

1min

1min

30s 20s 10s 5s 2s 1s 0.5s

9.5 9.5

17.5

17.5

35

17.5

AXb 12

63 65

17.5

52.5 17.5

AXc 11

AXa 14

AXc 11

Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M3.5 (Plus minus self-up screw) (The figure shows auxiliary switch. Example: Auxiliary switch)

AXb 12

Main terminal (Plus minus self-up screw) M4·····20A max. M5·····20A over

AXa 14

5

AXa 14

1-pole

2-pole

3-pole

54

Mounting dimension

47 2-M4 tap Tightening torque 1-1.4 (N·m)

(3)

1s

0.2s 0.1s 0.05s 0.02s

0.01s 100 200 300 500 1000 125 400 700

2000

5000 10000

0.01s 100 200 300 500 1000 125 400 700

Current (% of rated current)

2000

5000 10000

Current (% of rated current)

3

Temperature Characteristics Curve 300 250 200 150

Rated ambient temperature

100 90 80 70 60 -10

29.5

1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 2-M tap 2-M tap

2s

Terminal block of internal accessaries (AL, AX, SHT)

17.5

AXb 12

31.5

5s

0.1s

Operating time variation (%)

9.5

9.5

10s

0.05s 0.02s

5.5 19

30s 20s

0.5s

0.2s

Mounting hole ø4.5

5000 10000

Slow type with inertial delay (SD) 2h

Operating time

35

47

2000

Current (% of rated current)

2h

Operating time

29.5

ON

0.01s 100 135 200 300 500 1000 400 700 125

5000 10000

Medium type with inertial delay (MD)

•CP30-BA Terminal cover

2000

Current (% of rated current)

Current (% of rated current)

Outline Drawing 12

0.02s

0.02s

0.02s 2000

Current (% of rated current)

224

5s

0.1s

0.01s 100 150 200 300 500 1000 125 180 400 700

12

10s

0.05s 0.02s

AXc 11

30s 20s

0.5s

0.2s

0.2s

Operating time

10min 6min 4min

2min

Operating time

10min 6min 4min

0.5s

6 Characteristics and Dimensions

Slow type (S) 2h

1h 40min

2min

10min 6min 4min

Operating time

Medium type (M) 2h

2h

2h

0

10

20

30

40

Ambient temperature (°C)

50

60

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers

7

(1) Dimensions of electrical operated circuit breakers The following concept is applied for the dimensions of the electrical operated circuit breaker. Please understand this before using this type of breaker. Connection method

Outline dimensions listing method Model NF125-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NF125-UV NF125-SEV/HEV/RV/ZEV NF250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF250-RV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-CV/SV/HV/SEV/HEV NF250-UV

Front connection (Rear connection)

Rear connection Plug-in

Listed page 229 (*1)

230

(*1)

Model NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW (3P) NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW (4P) NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/SDW NF800-UEW NV800-SEW/HEW

Listed page

230

231

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW NF1600-SEW/SDW

232

The drilling dimensions and connection related dimensions are the same as the dimensions for the breaker body. Refer to the dimension drawings of each model. Note that for the rear connection type, four mounting holes are required even for the 2-pole or 3-pole types.

(2) Front connection (Rear connection) NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV Front connection Operation circuit terminal Center line of electrical operation device cover mounting screw Operation circuit terminal board Operation circuit terminal cover (Standard supply) (M3 tapping) (M3.5 screw) Power supply module Breaker M8 screw 24 Manual handle P1 P2

S1 S2 S4

B

A

B

B

A

B

A

111

A

41 39

86

78 112 130

ON button

80

S1 S2 S4

45

P1 P2

Center line of electrical operation device

25

50

OFF lock plate

R1

Insulation barrier (removable)

Manual/automatic selection switch 60 86 90

OPEN (TRIP) button

3-pole

Electrically operated base 158 164

61

30

Neutral pole Front plate

90

Display hole (ON (green), OFF (red), TRIP (yellow))

86 90 120

4-pole

30

30

4-pole

3-pole

Front plate cut out

Drilling plan

Test button

88

M4  0.7 screw or f5

Remarks: 1. This cannot be mounted on the 2-pole breaker. 2. The test button is equipped only on the earth leakage circuit breaker.

NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF125-RV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV, NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV, NF250-RV NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV, NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV/RGV

P1 P2

S1 S2 S4

70 86 90 105

3-pole

35 86 90 105 140

4-pole

A

B

B

A

B

A

126

86 Manual handle

100

OPEN (TRIP) button

B

33 31

78 144 165 Manual/automatic selection switch

A

Electrically operated base Front plate

Neutral pole Test button

80

S1 S2 S4

ON button

32

P1 P2

Center line of electrical operation device

Breaker

R1

OFF lock plate

45

100

Insulation barrier (removable)

15.5

Operation circuit terminal Operation circuit terminal cover cover mounting screw (Standard supply) (M3 tapping) Operation circuit terminal board Power supply Hexagon socket M8 bolt (M3.5 screw) module 24

Center line of electrical operation device Display hole (ON (green), OFF (red), TRIP (yellow))

44 61 158 164

35

35

3-pole Drilling plan

4-pole

M4  0.7 screw or f5

88

Front plate cut out

Remarks: 1. The test button is equipped only on the earth leakage circuit breaker. 2. For details of external dimensions of breakers, please refer external dimension drawing of each model.

225

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

Front connection

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers

7

NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW, NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW Motor drive type Center line of electrical operation device

Breaker

194

257

8

Operation circuit terminal block (M3.5 screw)

110

Breaker

70

120

Max. conductor thickness 400A frame: t=8 600/630A frame: t=10 44

Center line of breaker

231

Insulating barrier

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker

277

Front connection

44

43

16 112 140 231

Trip button

22

f14 M12 bolt

28

44

M6 or f7

2- and 3-pole

195

56

4-pole

255

168 185 196

2- and 3-pole

44

44 94.5

Drilling plan

4-pole

Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.

NF400-UEW (3-pole) Motor drive type

43

127.5 78 8 Breaker f7

Center of breaker Center line of electrical operation device

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

Breaker Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

f12.5

Insulating barrier

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker

110

Front connection

234

44

44

16 43 110 28 112 140 231

Trip button

144 ø7

ø12.5

257

297

70 20

120

277

47

141 191.5 292 352

f14 M12 bolt

M6 screw or f7

Drilling plan

NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW, NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW Motor drive type 231

Insulating barrier

Center line of breaker

Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

110 257

70

120

Breaker

Breaker

44

16 43

7

8

Test button

44

Trip button

Max. conductor thickness 400A frame: t=8 600A frame: t=10 44

194

Center line of electrical operation device

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker

277

Front connection

112 140 231

22 56

f14 M12 bolt

94.5 195 255

28 168 185 196

3-pole

44

3-pole

Center line of breaker

Conductor thickness t=8 max. f14

143 97 6.5

Breaker f7

f14 M12 bolt

35 16 48 110 35 70 210 280 231

226

Neutral pole Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

290

112

ø7

f14

275

322

15

48

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

NF400-UEW (4-pole) Motor drive type Center line of electrical operation device

4-pole

Drilling plan

4-pole

Front connection

44

M6 screw or f7

140 6.5 141 191.5 292 352

M6 screw or f7

Drilling plan

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

7 Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers

NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW Motor drive type Front connection

Center line of electrical Center line of breaker operation device Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

Breaker

277

275

70

120

Breaker

46 8

Conductor thickness t=12 max.

110

Insulating barrier

243

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker

Trip button

35

140 210 231

40

70 210 280 231

2- and 3-pole

87

15 32 8

44 Neutral pole

70 46 94.5 195 255

f14 M12 bolt

2- and 3-pole

M6 screw or f7

70

4-pole

Drilling plan

4-pole Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.

NF800-UEW Motor drive type Front connection

Center line of electrical Center line of breaker operation device 40 Insulating barrier 14

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker

Breaker f7

f14

8 32

Breaker

87 110

15

Center line of breaker Center line of electrical operation device

143 64 8

Conductor thickness t=8 max.

Trip button

35 70

140 210 231

3-pole

f14 M12 bolt

210 280 231

70

8 143 191.5 292 352

Neutral pole Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

290

290

112

87

44

f7

f14

275

322

277

70 23.5

120

15

3-pole

M6 screw or f7

140

4-pole

Drilling plan

4-pole

NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW Motor drive type Front connection

7

Insulating barrier 14

Conductor thickness t=12 max.

46 8 Breaker

277 Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw 70

87

32

8

44

243

87 275

70

120

110

Breaker

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

Center line of electrical operation device and breaker

M6 screw or f7

Trip button 40 140 210 231

15

46 Test button

94.5 195 255

Drilling plan

f14 M12 bolt

227

7

Characteristics and Dimensions

Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers

7

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1250-SDW Motor drive type Front connection 280 (4-pole)

Center line of 4-pole breaker Insulating barrier

110

210 (4-pole) 70

Conductor thickness t=82 max.

55 15

Bolt max. M1250

Breaker

375

406 120 61

Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

44

Neutral pole 70

15 32

80

8

13

f13 M12 bolt

43 140 210 (3 -pole)

59 140 231 290

Center line of electrical operation device and 3-pole breaker

70

3-pole

M8 screw or f10

4-pole

Drilling plan Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole with the central pole conductor removed.

NF1600-SEW, NF1600-SDW Motor drive type Front connection

228

375

130

120 61

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

7

406

35 210 280

115

Center line of electrical operation device

55

Breaker

Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw 44 210

20

Bolt max. M1065

(185.5)

38

(185.5)

Conductor thickness t=6  width 75 max.

ø 11 15

60 38

203 263

101.5 304.5 364.5

3-pole

4-pole

69.5 140 231 290

Neutral pole

70

3-pole

70

4-pole Drilling plan

M8 screw or f10

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

7 Electrical Operated Circuit Breakers

NF1600-SEW (3-pole) Motor drive type Rear connection

Mounting angle Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

Connection allowance

Mounting angle

Breaker

15

160 or more 81.5

109

100 or less

38

273

f9.5

f17.5

406

120 61

20

18.5

269

Stud can be rotated 90° 15 Conductor thickness t=6  width 75 max.

231

140

125

290

210

38

15

36

38 60

44

f11 Bolt M1050

M8 screw or f10

70

212

200

Drilling plan

Bottom view

NF1600-SEW (4-pole) Motor drive type Stud can be Connection rotated 90° allowance Conductor thickness 15 t=6  width 75 max.

Breaker

100 or less

273

109 20 ø9.5

ø17.5

406

61

120

18.5

Mounting angle

38 60

231 Center line of electrical operation device

20

70 210

290

f11 Bolt M1050

125

15

54

38

18

44

269

35

Mounting angle

160 or more

Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

210

81.5

Rear connection

18 106

106

280

M8 screw or f10

70

318

Drilling plan

Bottom view

NF1600-SDW (3-pole) Motor-drive type Operation circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be turned 90º. M3.5 screw Connection allowance Conductor thickness t=6width 75 max.

Rear connection

Mounting angle

Breaker

160 or more

36

15

175 or more

233

109

20 406

120 61

38

f9.5

231

140

38 60

f17.5

44

290

210

125

38

15

f11 Bolt M1050

70

212

M8 screw or f10

200

Bottom view

375

15 18.5

7

Drilling plan

Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.

35

Operation circuit terminal block M3.5 screw

Mounting angle

233 231

70 210 280

290

125

38 60 f11 Bolt M1050

18 106

106 318

Bottom view

15

38

f9.5

f17.5

44

Center of electrical operation device

Breaker

Mounting angle

109 20 406

61

120

18.5

Stud in horizontal direction. Connection It cannot be turned 90°. allowance Conductor thickness 15 t=6width 75 max.

70

375

210

175 or more 160 or more

Rear connection

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

NF1600-SDW (4-pole) Motor-drive type

M8 screw or f10

Drilling plan

229

7 Characteristics and Dimensions

MEMO

7

230

8

Handling and Maintenance

1) Storage and Transportation… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2) Standard Working Conditions… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3) Mounting and Connections … ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4) Maintenance and Inspections… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5) Troubleshooting… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

232 232 232 234 236

231

8 Handling and Maintenance 1. Storage and Transportation (1) Precautions for storage Avoid corrosive gases

H 2S

Store in the OFF or tripped state

Avoid moisture

Store the breaker in the OFF state or tripped state.

Do not leave the breaker in a humid place for long periods of time.

Ammonia

Do not store the product in an atmosphere containing acidic gas or ammonia gas. H2S 0.01ppm or less SO2 0.05ppm or less NH3 0.25ppm or less

(2) Precautions for transportation Carefully pack and transport

Do not drop the package during transportation. When shipping the breaker, make sure to package it carefully.

Do not carry by holding the front and back of the flush plate

Do not carry by the lead wires

Do not carry the embedded type breaker by holding the front and back of the flush plate. The breaker could drop during transportation.

Do not carry the accessories by the lead wires. Excessive force will be applied on the accessories.

Do not transport upside down (when mounted on IEC 35mm rail)

Do not transport a panel containing parts mounted on an IEC 35mm rail in an upside down state.

2. Standard Working Conditions Working ambient temperature … -10°C to 40°C Relative humidity … 85% or less with no dew condensation. (Note that the 24-hour average value must not exceed 35°C) Altitude … 2000m or less working current reduction rate in ambient temperature exceeding 40°C. Atmosphere … Free of excessive moisture, oil vapors, 50°C… 0.9 fold smoke, dust, salt, corrosive substances, 60°C… 0.7 fold vibration or impact, etc.

Handling and Maintenance

3. Mounting and Connections

8

(1) Precautions for mounting Attention to dust and cutting chips!

Do not block ventilation ports

Make sure that the breaker does not come in contact with rain water, oil, dust or cutting chips. Special attention must be taken to conductive materials such as scraps from drilling steel plates.

Do not block the ventilation ports. The breaker performance could drop. Ensure the insulation distance for breaker mounting indicated on page 101.

Avoid direct sunlight

Make sure that the breaker is not subject to direct sunlight during use. An increase in temperature could cause malfunctions. Sunlight could also discolor the nameplate and molded case, etc.

Mounting style

• NF30-CS • CP30-BA

107%

93% ON

ON ON

ON

110%

90%

ON ON ON

ON

107%

93% 100%

Rate of change of rated current by mounting angle

232

Do not remove the rear cover from the back of the base.

Do not wipe with thinner, detergent or chemical cloth

100%

Pay attention to the mounting angle of the following models as the overcurrent tripping characteristics may vary according to the mounting stye. Use in a vertical direction is recommended.

Do not remove the rear cover

Do not use thinner, etc., to clean the surface of the breaker. Use compressed air or a dry cloth to clean.

8 Handling and Maintenance

(2) Precautions for Connections Connect conductors parallel to each pole

 Do not apply lubricant to the threads. Oil will decrease the friction at threads and cause the screws to loosen easily, and the unit to overheat. Excessive stress will be applied on the threads even with the standard tightening torque and can cause the screws to break.

Do not connect in reverse

 Connect each connection conductor so it is parallel to each pole.

Securely fix conductors

Distance between conductors Current cm target value kA(Pf)

Set power to ON side ···

Insulating support

Bar Connection d When directly connecting the conductor, refer to the outline drawings and drill the conductor. d When connecting the conductors to a bar terminal, pay attention to the insulating distance with the ground. A ground fault prevention barrier is available as an option.

 When connecting the conductors on the rear connection type, take care not to deform the studs when tightening.

Electromagnetic force applied per 1m conductor (During 3-phase short-circuit)

d A large electromagnetic force is applied on the connected conductor according to the accident current. Use the conditions on the right as guide and securely fix (tighten) the conductors.

d As a rule, do not connect the power and load in reverse. If necessary, refer to the specifications and select a model which can be connected in reverse. d An insulating barrier should be provided on both the power and load sides of the breakers when using a high voltage circuit where dew condenses easily or in a circuit which has a reverse connection in the circuit.

Do not deform studs

10

20 245

10

(0.4)

490

18

(0.3)

1860

930

25

(0.2)

4410

2205

35

(0.2)

8720

4360

42

(0.2)

12545

6270

50

(0.2)

17835

8920

65

(0.2)

30185

15090

85

(0.2)

51550

25775

100

(0.2)

71540

35770

125

(0.2)

111720

55860

ELCB (NV) connection d When using a single-phase 3-wire method, connect the neutral pole to the NC’s center pole.

100V 200V 100V

NV

Connection band

Wire retention type connection d When directly connecting to the terminal, insert the single strand or stranded wires in straight and then tighten. A commercially-available crimp terminal or bar can be connected directly. d When using stranded wires, split them and then tighten.

d When using a 3-pole ELCB with a single-phase 2-wire, connect to the left and right poles (poles at both sides) of ELCB.

1φ2W

NV

d Never connect the ELCB units in parallel as it will create a loop circuit, and could burn the magnetic device. d Never connect the MCCB and ELCB in parallel.

Solderless terminal connection d Untwist the connection wires, align the core wires and then tighten. The wires will loosen up during use, and must be tightened during periodic maintenance. d Do not solder or bind the end of the strands. d Make sure not to catch the insulating sheath of the wire when tightening.

Handling and Maintenance

Oiling of threads prohibited

8

233

8 Handling and Maintenance 4. Maintenance and Inspections (1) Initial inspections

After installing the MCCB and ELCB, inspect the following matters before powering the units. Model

Inspection items

Common

Remarks

Criterion

1. Are there any excessive screws, drilling scraps, wire scraps or any other conductive materials around the terminals?

All conductive material must be removed.

2. Are there any cracks or damage on the cover or base?

No cracks or breaks allowed.

3. Is there any dew condensation on the cover, base or terminals?

No dew condensation allowed. Refer to Precautions w for the ELCB.

4. Measure the insulation resistance with a 500V insulation resistance tester. 5MΩ or more

ELCB

5. Are the connector connections tightened securely?

Must be specified tightening torque.

6. Are the ELCB rated voltage and circuit voltage the same?

Voltages must be the same.

7. Apply voltage, press the test button and check the operation.

Must trip with an earth leak.

Precautions qWithstand voltage test A guide for the test is given on the following. Do not perform a withstand voltage test exceeding these levels. (Note) Test the operating circuit between the live section and ground. Main circuit

(Unit: V) Auxiliary circuit or control circuit

Test voltage Rated insulation Test voltage voltage of (effective value Rated insulation (effective value for alternating operating for alternating voltage current) circuit current)

(min. 1500)

Handling and Maintenance

1

long time, inspect the breaker one month after starting use and

2

periodically thereafter according to the environmental conditions.

3

Inspection items

8 NV

234

Clean and dry environment

OFF

(*1)

Once every 2 to 3 years

Environment with low levels of dust,

Once a year

corrosive gas, vapors, salt, etc. Places other than 1 or 2

Criterion No conductor must be loose.

2. Is any cover or base cracked? Is any handle damaged?

There must be no cracks, damage or breaks.

3. Has the breaker been submerged and infiltrated with water? Is the breaker heavily dirtied by mud or dust?

There must be no infiltration of water, heavy mud or dust.

4. Has the temperature risen abnormally?

(1) Visually inspect that none of the studs on the backs of the terminals, or the breaker’s tightened or molded sections are discolored from burning. (2) There must be no especially high temperature rise when the current at each phase is balanced. (Tolerable maximum value for terminal temperature rise: 60K) (3) There should be no difference on the left and right side of the base sides if the load current is balanced.

Common

Withstand voltage test

Inspection Interval Guide

To prevent trouble and ensure the breaker operates safely for a

1. Are any of the conductors loose?

Insulation resistance measurement

State of handle ON OFF ON Between live section of main circuit and ground Between left - middle, middle - right, left - right poles Between left - neutral pole, (*1) (*1) middle - neutral poles right - neutral poles Between left - middle, middle - right, left - right poles Between left - neutral poles, (*1) (*1) (*1) middle - neutral poles right - neutral poles Between power - load side terminals Between main circuit live sections - operating circuit live sections Between operating circuit live section - ground Note *1 Values in parentheses apply for measuring display unit breaker.

(2) Periodic inspections

Model

Test

Measurement position

Between different poles Load side Line side

(Application time: one minute)

wInsulation resistance measurement and withstand voltage test The restrictions a and b apply to the following models. Applicable models: Earth leakage circuit breaker, Measuring display unit breaker.

5. Can the handle be turned ON and OFF smoothly? Should operate smoothly. 6. Does pressing the TRIP button result in a trip? Must be resettable after tripping. 7. Test by pressing the TEST button. Must operate properly and close again.

Once every six months Remarks

If any conductor is loose, tighten again with the appropriate torque given in Tables 5-5 and 5-6 on pages 97 to 98.

If water has infiltrated the breaker, it must be replaced with a new part or overhauled by the Mitsubishi Service Center.

There may be a light temperature difference between the following terminals.  Between the power side terminal and load side terminal  Between the center pole terminal and left and right pole terminals.

Open and close a normally closed breaker periodically. This will clean the contact and prevent abnormal heating. Test the operation once a month.

8 Handling and Maintenance

(3) Inspection after Tripping Whether the circuit breaker can be reused or must be replaced after switching off a fault current depends on the intensity of the current which was switched off. Intensity of trip current, degree of MCCB and ELCB damage, and countermeasures Intensity of trip current

Degree of MCCB and ELCB damage

When it is clear that the circuit breaker operated

No abnormality such as contamination

within the time-delay trip range

around vent observed

(Overcurrent up to 10 times of rated current)

Countermeasures Reusable (The circuit breaker can function 50 times (100A or less) at overload current which is 6 times higher than rated current) Reusable

Soot and dust found near vent

Relatively low short-circuit current which causes instantaneous tripping Large short-circuit current close to rated breaking capacity

Soot and dust found near handle, remarkable contamination found near vent Molten metal found in circuit breaker Box of box type circuit breaker is severely deformed

Replace with a new part

If the intensity of the fault current cannot be estimated, remove the MCCB and ELCB, and measure the insulation resistance. If the specified value (5MΩ) has not been reached, perform a withstand voltage test. If the withstand voltage is within the specified value, the circuit breaker can be used temporarily but it should be replaced with a new part as soon as possible. If both the insulation resistance and withstand voltage are sufficient, the circuit breaker may be judged as reusable. However, it should be checked for abnormalities, such as an abnormal rise in temperature for a set period. d Measure the insulation resistance and perform the withstand voltage test with the procedures given in section 1 and 2 on page 238. d Check that the ELCB operates when the test button is pressed.

(4) Guide to service life Maintenance and inspection must be conducted according to the environment in which the circuit breaker is installed. The service life of the circuit breaker cannot be determined just by the number of service years. A reference to the service life is given below, but the circuit breaker must be diagnosed by a specialist for an accurate reading. Guide to service life

1

2

Environment

Example

Guide for replacement (years)

Place where air is always clean and dry

Dust-proof and air-conditioned electrical room

Indoors, where there is little dust and no corrosive gas

Circuit-breakers housed in distribution panels or boxes within an individual electric Approx. 7 to 15 room having no dust-proofing or air-conditioning Geothermal power house, sewage treatment plans, iron and steel works, paper and pulp plants, etc.

1

Place with gases such as sulfuric acid, hydrogen sulfide, salt and high levels of moisture, but low levels of dust

2

Place with high levels Chemical plants, of gas and dust which humans cannot endure quarries, mines, etc. for long periods of time

Approx. 10 to 20

Standard

Size of circuit breaker frame (A)

JIS C 8201-2-1 100 or less Ann.2 JIS C 8201-2-2 More than 100, 315 or less Ann.2 JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann.1 More than 315, 630 or less JIS C 8201-2-2 Ann.1 More than 630, 2500 or less IEC 60947-2 (*1) More than 2500

Number of operating cycles (times) No Energization energization Total 8500 10000 1500 1000

7000

8000

1000

4000

5000

500

2500

3000

500

1500

2000

Number of tripping times by shunt tripping device or undervoltage tripping device, or by trip button

10% of total operating cycles

Note *1 The number of trips by the ELCB test button is one-third the number of energizations.

Approx. 3 to 7

Approx. 1 to 3

The operating life shortens as the circuit breaker frame size increases. (Refer to above tables.) These values may seem low, but since this circuit breaker is a protective device, it basically differs from a switch intended for

Handling and Maintenance

Poor environment

Standard usage state

Degree

frequent opening and closing. For tripping by a shunt tripping device, the life is especially short and special consideration should be taken.

WARNING Continuing user of a circuit breaker which has reached its service life can result in the following q w e r

problems. Always update the circuit breakers accordingly. Insulation fault: Risk of burning, internal short-circuit, and electric shock. Energizing fault: Burning or unnecessary operations caused by overheating of the internal parts, etc. Operation fault: ON and OFF operation of the circuit may be disabled. Tripping fault: Protection of the load device or wiring, etc., may be disabled.

CAUTION When the operating endurance exceeds the specified value, the above faults could occur or the internal

conductor could break, overheat or burn.

235

8

8 Handling and Maintenance 5. Troubleshooting

(1) Troubleshooting for breaker unit (MCCB, ELCB) Fault state

Cause

Can’t close

Remove the foreign matter

Breaker hasn’t been reset

Reset again

Operation errors

Breaker can’t be reset Wear due to tripping endurance (*) Can’t reset

Countermeasures and Actions

Foreign matter in switching mechanism See below(*) End of service life

Replace with new part

Reset mechanism is faulty

Improper adjustment

Return for repairs

Undervoltage coil is not excited

Careless operation

Excite the coil Wait for bimetal to cool down

Resetting time has not elapsed

Can’t trip Can’t turn OFF

Broken handle

Switching spring is broken or

Breakage caused by initial trouble Return for repairs

fatigued

End of service life

Broken rated changeover screw

Replace with large capacity breaker

Insufficient lubricant (grease)

Return for repairs

Excessive power during operation

Replace handle

Positional relation of external operation handle and

Replace handle

breaker is poor

Correct positional relation Remove foreign matter (if cover is removable) Return for repairs (if cover is not removable)

Fusion at conductive section

Excessive interrupting current Replace with new part having large interruptive capacity

Excessive wear of contacts

Short-circuit current cut off End of service life Replace with new part

Excessive tightening torque (Tighten with 0.3 to 0.45N·m) Incorrect selection Ambient temperature is high

Operates under normal load

Replace with new part

Contact has fused because of excessive interruptive current

Foreign matter caught between contacts Poor energizing

See below

Excessive use of shunt trip operation Replace with new part. Change shunt trip to electric operation

Excessive temperature rise

(temperature compensation)

Return for repairs Change the selection

Panel is sealed

Ventilate

Loosening at terminal connections

Tighten

Load current contains high levels of high-frequency distortion

Insert a reactor and decrease distortion factor

Measuring instrument is reading small measurement values because of distorted current Correctly specify the rated values by using real meters with effective value

type

Overcurrent Rated current setting value is too low Rated current changeover screw was not tightened indicator LED is ON

Malfunctions when starting

Correctly tighten the rated current changeover screw Tightening torque 0.3 to 0.45N·m

Failure of rated current changeover section

Return for repairs

Heating caused by repeated starting current Incorrect selection

Replace with breaker having higher rating

Long starting time

Replace with breaker having higher rating

Incorrect selection

Starting current is too high

Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker having higher rating

Starting rush current is too high

Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker having higher rating

Excessive current during delta-star starting changeover

Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker

Momentarily functions

Excessive current due to reversible operation

having higher rating

when starting

Rush current during instantaneous restart

Change the instantaneous setting or replace with breaker having higher rating

Rare short-circuit of motor

Repair the motor

Bimetal reset incomplete after instantaneous tripping

Allow to properly reset

Operates during use Short-circuit on power side Terminal temperature is high

Antenna for transceiver (5W or higher) was seated against electronic type MCCB body during transmission

Does not electronic operate No operation type MCCB with tester

236

Use the transformer at least 1m away from the electronic type MCCB Remove the cause or replace with new part

Dust is accumulated Conductive matter has dropped into power side

Remove the cause or replace with new part

Improper tightening

Tighten

Improper maintenance

Complete electromagnetic type being used at a high frequency (400Hz, etc.)

Replace with breaker having suitable frequency

Load current contains high levels of high-frequency distortion

Insert a reactor and decrease distortion factor

Incorrect measurement resulting from touch

Measure with a measuring instrument

Studs are loose

Tighten

Heating at stud tightening

Contact fault between stud conductor and body terminal

Reassemble the stud

section

Groove to reduce overcurrent heating not grooved on rear connection

Mold side temperature is high

type’s steel mounting plate (400A frame and larger)

8

Correct the rated current setting

Abnormal current passed simultaneously with closing (short-circuit closing) Inspect the circuit and remove the cause

Temperature rise

Handling and Maintenance

Annoying operation

Electronic

Selected rated current is too high No tripping at overcurrent

Replace with a breaker having a lower current

Applied frequency is incorrect Backup breaker has tripped

Machine grooves to reduce overcurrent heating

Replace with breaker having suitable frequency Backup breaker’s instantaneous Lower the instantaneous electromagnetic setting tripping current is too low

Raise the electromagnetic setting for the backup breaker, or change the rating

Overcurrent indication LED does not turn ON, or turns ON and then Breaker tester’s battery is spent OFF before specified time

Replace the breaker tester’s battery

Overcurrent indication LED turns ON and then OFF after specified time, but does not trip

Return for repairs

Tripping mechanism is faulty

8 Handling and Maintenance

(2) Troubleshooting for leakage operation section Fault state

Cause

Operates simultaneously with closing Annoying operation

The leakage mechanism operates, such as the leakage indication button pops out

Countermeasures and Actions

The wiring is long creating a large ground electrostatic capacity, and causes a leakage current flow

Change the rated sensitivity current or install the ELCB near the load

ELCB units are being used in parallel, or is incorrectly connected with a neutral wire, etc.

Use the correct wiring

An excessive surge, such as inducted lightning, has infiltrated the unit

Install a surge absorber, etc., near the circuit

Induction noise from a nearby large current bus, etc., has infiltrated the unit

Avoid sources of noise

LED is faulty or is at end of service life

Replace with new part

The indicator button is improperly adjusted and does not protrude

Return for repairs

Electronic circuit section is faulty

Replace with new part

Voltage is not applied

Apply the specified voltage

Contact continuity is faulty

Remove the foreign matter from the contact

Operation errors

Leakage operation occurs when the test button is pressed, etc., but there is not indication

No operation

Operates during use

No operation takes place when the test button is pressed

Remarks: 1. When using a transceiver, use at least 1m away from the electronic MCCB and ELCB.

(3) Troubleshooting for accessories Cause

Fault state Operation power voltage has dropped

NFM NVM (Electric operation device) Continuous idling

One idle run when closing

UVT (Undervoltage tripping device)

Resistor or motor is burned

Operation circuit wire capacity is insufficient

Use a larger operation circuit wire

Operation power capacity is insufficient

Improve the operation power

Excessive continuous operation

Return for repairs (motor replacement)

Connection is incorrect

Use the correct wiring

Applied voltage is incorrect

Apply the correct operation voltage

ON and OFF circuits are operating simultaneously, operation is mistaken

Provide an interlock at the pushbutton

For the self-holding type, the auxiliary switch contact is used for automatic reset

Use the alarm switch contact for the automatic reset contact

Voltage ripping in the OFF state, or tripping caused by undervoltage Breaker itself has automatically cut-off and tripped

Turn OFF once to reset, and then turn ON again

Applied frequency or voltage is incorrect

Improve the power

Doesn’t attract

Improve the voltage

Handling and Maintenance

Operation disabled

Countermeasures and Actions

Closing disabled Doesn’t trip even when voltage is absent

voltage drop is large

Breaker’s tripping mechanism is faulty

Return for repairs

Operation voltage has dropped

Improve the power

Applied voltage is incorrect

Improve the power

Coil is continuously excited

Return for repairs (coil replacement, installation of burn prevention auxiliary coil)

Operation voltage has dropped causing continuous excitation

Return for repairs (coil replacement), improve power

Burn preventing auxiliary contact is faulty

Return for repairs (coil replacement, contact repair)

Abnormal voltage is applied

Return for repairs (coil replacement)

Insufficient voltage

SHT (Shunt tripping device)

Doesn’t trip Coil is burnt

Contact fault caused by overcurrent

AL (Alarm switch) AX (Auxiliary switch) EAL (Earth leakage alarm contact) TBM (Test button module) PAL (Pre-alarm)

8

Return for repairs

Incorrect connection

Connection mistaken during installation

Refer to nameplate and correct the wiring

Microload

Incorrect selection

Return for repairs (replacement with type for microloads)

Loose mounting screws

Insufficient tightening Vibration during transportation

Return for repairs (readjustment)

Malfunction

237

8 Handling and Maintenance (4) Cases of unnecessary ELCB operation Even if the ELCB is not faulty, there may be a problem in the circuit which causes frequent operation or instantaneous operation at closing. Refer to the following section and incorporate it as part of the circuit inspection and troubleshooting.

High voltage

Tr

M

1

2

Induced lightning

Effect of external magnetic field

3

Occurrence of switching surge

5

Large current at starting

4

Ground electrostatic capacity

Grounding

Grounding

The following five conditions are the most conceivable causes of trips in cases such as when the breaker trips immediately after the ELCB is closed, or when the breaker trips suddenly during use but inspection of circuit shows no ground fault accidents. Check each item and if any problems are found, correct them accordingly.

ig

Cause

1 Induction lightning

Countermeasures

All models incorporate a non-operating shock structure and should sufficiently withstand 7kV (JIS Standards), so unnecessary operation should not occur.

The ZCT is equipped with a magnetic shield, and is not affected easily. However, the breaker could operate if there are 2 External magnetic field

large current buses reaching several thousand amperes near the ELCB, or if there is a short-circuit fault in nearby circuit. Separate the ELCB from the large current bus wires by at least 10cm.

All models incorporate a non-operating shock structure and should not operate unnecessarily. However if there is a 3 Switching surge

time lag in the closing time of each pole in the magnetic switch, unnecessary operation could occur due to the

Handling and Maintenance

relation of the ground electrostatic capacity.

If the wires are stored in a metal conduit or metal duct wiring, the ground electrostatic capacity will increase compared to other wiring methods. This may cause the leakage current to constantly increase. If the magnetic switch chatters, etc., the leakage current may become temporarily unbalanced thus reaching a leakage current equivalent to the sensitivity current and causing unnecessary operation. 4 Effect of ground electrostatic capacity

Review the following matters in this case. 1) Shorten the load circuit line, or install the ELCB near the load (device) being used. (Install in a branch circuit.) 2) Lead the control circuit for the control device, etc., from the power on the ELCB side. 3) If the above measures are difficult or if they cause further unnecessary operation, reconsider the selected ELCB rated sensitivity current.

8

The ZCT is made of high-grade permalloy, a material with Ni as its main element and which has outstanding residual magnetic characteristics. The periphery of the ZCT is covered with material having outstanding magnetic 5 Equilibrium properties caused by large current at starting

characteristics, creating a complete magnetic shield. This suppresses the effect of residual currents to the minimum, and prevents the breaker from unnecessarily operating even near a current of several thousand amperes. In the relay, the characteristics change if the primary conductor is bent immediately after it is passed through the ZCT. Thus, when passing a primary conductor with current of 300A or more through the ZCT, keep the conductor straight for at least 30cm on either side.

238

Appendix

9

1) Handle Operation Angle Dimensions… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2) MCCB Trip Button, Instantaneous Adjustment Dial Drilling and Terminal Cover Mounting Hole Dimensions………………………… 3) ELCB Button and Switch Dimensions… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4) List of Product Weights… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5) Switching the Adjustable Items………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6) Breaker Mounting Screw Dimensions… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7) List of Mold Surface Temperature-rise Values… …………………………………………………………………………………………… 8) Ordering Information… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9) Melshort 2………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 10) Low-Voltage Products Website… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………

240 241 242 243 244 247 248 249 251 252

239

9 Appendix 1. Handle Operation Angle Dimensions (Line side)

(Line side)

ON Center of handle

Trip

C

c

H

D

a

cL

cL

OFF

G

F

b

d

Center of handle E

Reset

A B

Table of dimension variations Operation angle (° )

Class

Model MCCB, MCB

ELCB, RCCB, RCBO

NF50-SVFU

NV50-SVFU

NF32-SV

NV32-SV

NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV

NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV

NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV

NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV

NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU

NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU

ON OFF Trip Reset d c b a

Dimensions (mm) A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

12

20

4

27

55

90

13

–

8

5

5

14

15

19

5

21

40

90

2

–

12

7

7

17

15

19

5

21

40

92

2

–

12

7

7

19

NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV

C•S•H

NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV

NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV

NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV

NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV

NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV

NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU

NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU NF30-CS

–

21

29

1

31

47

67

10

–

8.5

4.5

6

13

NF225-CWU

–

12

18

2

21.5

38

92

7.5

–

13.5

7

8

18.5

16.5

10

6.5 14.5

49

134

6.5

–

32.5 14.5 15.5

25

16.5

10

6.5 14.5

49

155

6.5

–

32.5 13.5 15.5

46

16.5

10

6.5 14.5

49

155

6.5

–

32.5 13.5 15.5

46

–

18

12

6

17

84

190

–

4

41.5 13.5

NF125-RGV, NF250-RGV

–

15

19

5

21

40

92

2

–

12

NF125-UV

–

15

19

5

21

40

92

–

29

12

NF250-UV

–

15

19

5

21

40

92

–

35

12

NF400-UEW

–

16.5

10

6.5 14.5 146 252

–

NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW

–

16.5

10

6.5 14.5 146 252

–

BH

–

19

18

5

21

56

77.5

BH-P

–

19

18

–

41

36

21 –

57.5

BH-D6, BH-D10*1

5 –

–

42

48

–

–

41

48

–

NV400-CW

NF400-CW NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NF400-SWU/HWU NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NF630-SWU/HWU

NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW NV800-SEW/HEW

NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW

Appendix

R•U

BH BH-DN*1 KB-D*1

240

36.5

7

7

19

7

7

17

7

7

19

13.5 32.5 13.5 15.5

46

32.5 13.5 15.5

46

5

17 –

9.5

9.5

9.5

13

79

12

–

9.5

9.5

63

76

9

–

–

–

9.5 –

13 –

–

63

76

10

–

–

63

76

9

–

17 –

4 –

9.5 –

12 –

–

BV-D*1

42

40

–

–

61

76

10

–

14

4

–

–

–

BV-DN*1

42

48

–

–

63

76

10

–

17

4

–

–

Note *1 Trip is the same as the OFF position. Resetting is not required.

9

15

9 Appendix

2. MCCB Trip Button, Instantaneous Adjustment Dial Drilling and Terminal Cover Mounting Hole Dimensions fM Prepared hole for terminal cover mounting tapping screw

4-pole 3-pole

L

cL

H fD Trip button

J

G

A B C

F

A B C

G fE Instantaneous adjustment dial

N P

Fig. a

L

4-pole 3-pole K

fD Trip button

cL

fD Trip button

3-fE Instantaneous adjustment dial

H J

H

Fig. c

Fig. b

3-pole 2-pole cL

fM Prepared hole for terminal cover mounting tapping screw

B

Q

B

cL R

A

cL

F

cL

Rated current switch L

Rated current switch

fM Prepared hole for terminal cover mounting tapping screw

K cL

B

4-pole 3-pole K

T S

J H fE Instantaneous adjustment dial

H Rated current switch Tripping characteristics switch

Fig. e

Fig. d

Table of dimension variations Model NF50-SVFU NF32-SV, NF63-CV NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU, NF125-HVU NF125-UV NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU, NF250-UV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF125-RGV NF250-RGV

(mm) Number of poles

2, 3 2 3, 4 2 3, 4 2, 3, 4

Fig. e c a c a a

2, 3, 4 a

3, 4 2, 3 2, 3 2 NF30-CS 3 2, 3 NF225-CWU 2, 3 NF400-CW 2, 3 NF400-SW, NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU 4 3 NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW 4 3 NF400-UEW 4 2, 3 NF630-CW 2, 3 NF630-SW 4 3 NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW 4 3 NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW 4 2, 3 NF800-SDW, NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU 4 3 NF800-UEW 4 NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW 3 NF1600-SEW 4

a a a b a d d d d d d d d d d d

A – – – – – –

B 14 20 20 20 20 20

C – – – – – –

fD 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5

fE – – – – – –

F – – – – – –

G – – – – – –

H 4 21 29 21 37 37

J – – – – – –

K – – – – – –

L – – – – – –

fM – – – – – –

N – – – – – –

P – – – – – –

Q – – – – – –

R – – – – – –

S – – – – – –

T – – – – – –

–

20

–

6.5

–

–

–

44

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 74 74 – – – –

20 20 20 14.5 14.5 15.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 50.5 54 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 54 54 70 70

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

6.5 6.5 6.5 4 4 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6 6

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 10 10 – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

44 44 44 16 27.5 43 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 78.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 51.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 56.5 56.5

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 57 57 – – – –

– – – – – – 125 125 125 125 125 125 156 125 125 125 125 125 86 156 86 156 86 156 199 269

– – – – – – 110.5 110.5 110.5 110.5 110.5 130.5 152 110.5 110.5 110.5 110.5 110.5 128.5 128.5 128.5 128.5 152 152 178.5 178.5

– – – – – – 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – 53 53 53 76.5 – – – 53 53 53 53 – – 76.5 76.5 130 130

– – – – – – – – – 30 30 30 30 – – – 30 30 30 30 – – 30 30 30 30

– – – – – – – – – 74 74 74 74 – – – 74 74 74 74 – – 74 74 74 74

– – – – – – – – – 63.5 63.5 63.5 98.5 – – – 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 – – 98.5 98.5 89 89

Remarks: 1. The 4-pole part is available for the S and H Series 50A frame to 1600A frame (excluding NF400-REW, NF630-REW and NF800-REW). 2. The 2-pole part for NF250-CV and larger is the same as the 3-pole part. (Including NF125-HV.) 3. The terminal cover mounting hole shows the case for the screwed type. The breaker mounting hole is used to mount the one-touch terminal cover. Refer to the respective dimension drawings. 4. The K dimensions are divided down the breaker center.

241

Appendix

fD Trip button

9

9 Appendix 3. ELCB Button and Switch Dimensions K

E

Fig. a

F

fH Test button

D fJ Leakage indicator button

fW trip button

N G

fW trip button

Fig. b

fJ Leakage indicator button

fH Test button E

fH Test button

D F

Fig. d

Selector (time-delay type)

Fig. e

G

F

K

E

E G

Center of breaker handle

fH Test button

fJ Leakage indicator button

D

Fig. c

D

M

N

D

F

fJ Leakage indicator button

M

Y

Y D

fJ Leakage indicator button

N X G

L

Center of breaker

X G F

fH Test button fW trip button

X

fH Test button

Center of breaker

fU Sensitivity current selector fV Operation time selector (time-delay type) fJ Leakage indicator button

E

Sensitivity current selector F EK

M

U Center of breaker

Center of breaker handle

Center of breaker handle

Operation time selector (time-delay type)

Y

T Center of breaker L handle V

L L

Selector (sensitivity)

Fig. f

E

E

Y

F

D

M

fW trip button

D

F

F

E

Center of breaker

fH Test button

Y

Center of breaker handle fJ Leakage indicator button

Center of breaker handle fU Sensitivity current selector fJ Leakage indicator button fH Test button X M Center of breaker K

Center of breaker handle fH Test button fJ Leakage X G indicator button

D

G

fW trip button

Fig. g

G

Fig. i

Fig. h

Model Fixed type NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV Selector type Fixed type NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV Selector type Time-delay type Fixed type NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV Selector type Time-delay type NV400-CW (note2) Fixed type NV400-SW Selector type NV630-CW, NV630-SW Time-delay type NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW Fixed type NV400-REW (note2) Selector type NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW Time-delay type Selector type NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW Time-delay type

Reference drawing

Table of dimension variations Variable dimensions (mm) D Test Indicator button button

a a

3

4

a

E

F

G

H

J

13

8

26.5

9.5

4

13

8

26.5

9.5

4

13

8

34

9.5

4

c

3

3

(2.3)

14.6

43.5

9.5

5

c

3

3

(2.3)

14.6

43.5

9.5

5

c

3

3

(2.3)

14.6

54.1

9.5

5

Appendix

Note *1 Dimensions shown in parentheses apply to minus direction.

9 242

K

L

M

– 16 – 16 16 – 16 16 – 30.6 30.6 – 30.6 30.6 30.6 30.6

– – – – 17 – – 24

– 7 – 7 7 – 7 7 – – 22.6 – – 22.6 – 22.6

43.5

43.5 54.1

N 16 16

23.5

T

U

V

– 23.5 – 24 24 – 31 31

– 3 – 3 3 – 3 3 – 5.5 5.5 – 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5

– – – – 3 – – 3 – – 5.5 – – 5.5 – 5.5

43.5

–

43.5

–

54.1

–

W

X

Y

6

29

20

6

37

20

6

44

20

6.5

51.5

30.5

6.5

51.5

30.5

6.5

78.5

30.5

9 Appendix

4. List of Product Weights MCCB

(kg) Item

C•S•H•

Model NF32-SV NF63-CV (rated current 50A or less) NF63-CV (rated current 60A, 63A) NF63-SV, NF63-HV (rated current 50A or less) NF63-SV, NF63-HV (rated current 60A, 63A) NF125-CV NF125-SV NF125-HV NF125-SEV NF125-HEV NF250-CV NF250-SV NF250-HV NF250-SEV NF250-HEV NF125-SGV NF125-LGV NF125-HGV NF160-SGV NF160-LGV MB NF160-HGV NF250-SGV NF250-LGV NF250-HGV NF30-CS NF400-CW NF400-SW NF400-SEW/HEW NF400-REW NF630-CW NF630-SW NF630-SEW/HEW NF630-REW NF800-CEW NF800-SDW NF800-SEW/HEW NF800-REW NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW NF125-RGV NF250-RGV NF125-UV NF250-UV NF400-UEW NF800-UEW BH BH-P BH BH-D6, BH-D10 BH-DN KB-D NF50-SVFU NF100-CVFU NF125-SVU NF125-HVU UL NF250-SVU NF250-HVU NF225-CWU NF400-SWU/HWU NF630-SWU/HWU

Breaker body Rear connection type 1P 2P 3P 4P – 0.8 0.55 – – – 0.8 0.55 – – – 0.85 0.6 – – 1.1 0.85 0.6 –

Front connection type 2P 4P 3P 1P – 0.65 0.45 – –

0.45

0.65

–

–

0.5

0.7

–

R•U

–

0.5

0.7

0.9

–

0.55

0.75

1.0

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 0.15 0.13 0.15 – 0.09 – – – – – – – – –

0.6 0.7 0.6 – – 1.3 1.4 1.4 – – 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 0.25 4.4 4.6 – – 5.2 5.4 – – – 9 – – – – 1.5 1.5 1.35 2.5 – – 0.31 0.26 0.3 0.12 0.18 0.3 0.6 0.7 – – – – – –

1.0 0.95 1.0 1.7 1.7 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 0.35 5.0 5.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.2 6.5 6.5 10.9 – 10.9 10.9 23.5 34.5 1.8 1.8 1.5 2.7 16.2 27.6 0.47 0.38 0.45 – 0.27 0.45 0.85 0.95 1.0 1.7 1.7 1.5 5.7 9.6

– 1.3 1.2 2.2 2.2 – 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 – – 6.8 7.6 – – 8.0 8.3 – – – 14.2 – 30.7 41.2 – – 1.9 3.7 25.4 33.7 – – 0.55 – 0.36 – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

0.8

1.2

–

–

Accessories (weight of only accessories) Operation handle Boxed type S I W F type V type S type 0.6 0.45 0.4 10.2 5.0 1.5

0.8

1.2

–

–

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

0.85

1.25

–

–

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

Plug-in type (including plug-in frame) Electric operated 2P 3P 4P type

0.17

0.85

1.25

1.5

–

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

0.65

0.9

1.2

0.9

1.3

1.6

–

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

1.0 1.1 1.0 – – 1.7 1.8 1.8 – – 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 0.35 5.7 5.9 – – 6.5 6.7 – – – 10 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

1.5 1.5 1.5 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 0.5 7.0 7.3 8.1 8.5 7.9 8.1 8.4 8.4 12.1 – 12.1 12.1 23 30 – – – – 18.6 31.2 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– 2.0 1.9 2.9 2.9 – 3.0 3.0 3.2 3.2 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 – – 9.7 10.5 – – 10.6 10.9 – – – 15.8 – 30.8 40.7 – – – – 30.7 38.4 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

1.2 1.3 1.2 – – 3.1 3.2 3.2 – – 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 – 7.0 7.2 – – 7.6 7.8 – – – – – – – – 2.35 3.2 2.2 4.2 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

1.9 1.9 1.9 2.6 2.6 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.6 3.6 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 – 8.3 8.5 9.3 9.3 9.1 9.3 9.6 9.6 16.3 – 16.3 16.3 26.6 – 2.7 3.6 2.4 4.5 19.8 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– 2.4 2.3 3.3 3.3 – 4.5 4.5 4.7 4.7 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 – – 11.3 12.0 – – 12.0 12.3 – – – 21.4 – 35.5 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 –

1.8 1.8 1.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 – 6.8 – 6.8 – – 6.8 – – 6.8 – – 1.1 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

5.1 5.1 5.1 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 –

10.2 10.2 10.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 –

0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 –

0.45 0.45 0.45 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 –

0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 –

0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 –

19

30 2.0

–

9.0

10 10 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 9.0 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

–

–

33

30

–

–

48

70

– 48 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– 70 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

1.9

2.4

–

3.4 3.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 2.2 2.7 – – – – – 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 2.0 2.4

– – 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 – – – – – – – 0.35 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.55 – – –

2.0

0.45

0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

0.55 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17

1.9

0.45

– – – – – – – – – – – 0.6 1.9 1.9

– – – – – – – 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.45 0.45

ELCB

(kg)

Breaker body Rear connection type 4P 3P 2P − 0.95 −

−

1.35

−

−

Accessories (weight of only accessories) Boxed type Operation handle W I S F type V type S type 10.2 5.0 1.5 0.4 0.45 0.6

0.7

0.75

−

0.8

0.95

−

1.1

1.35

−

−

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

0.75

0.8

−

0.85

1.0

−

1.15

1.4

−

−

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

−

0.75

−

−

0.95

−

−

1.35

−

−

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

−

0.8

−

−

1.0

−

−

1.4

−

−

1.5

5.0

10.2

0.4

0.45

0.6

0.17

− − − − − − − − 0.4 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − 0.2 0.19

1.0 1.1 1.1 1.9 1.9 1.7 1.9 1.8 0.5 0.95 1.1 1.1 1.9 1.9 5.6 5.9 6.6 6.6 6.9 6.9 7.1 7.1 15.3 − −

− 1.4 1.4 2.5 2.5 − 2.5 − − − − − − − − − 8.2 − − − 8.9 − − 0.35 −

− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −

1.5 1.6 1.6 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 − − − − − − 7.7 8 8.7 8.7 8.8 8.8 9.0 9.0 16.5 − −

− 2.1 2.1 3.2 3.2 − 3.5 − − − − − − − − − 11.4 − − − 11.5 − − − −

− − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − − −

1.9 2.0 2.0 2.8 2.8 3.6 3.8 3.7 − − − − − − 8.9 9.2 9.9 9.9 10.0 10.0 10.2 10.2 20.7 − −

− 2.5 2.5 3.6 3.6 − 5.0 − − − − − − − − − 12.5 − − − 12.9 − − − −

1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 − − − − − −

1.8 1.8 1.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 − − − − − − − − − − − −

5.1 5.1 5.1 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 8.7 − − − − − −

10.2 10.2 10.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 − − − − − −

0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5

0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 − − − − − −

0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17 − − 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.17

19

30

2.0

−

−

2.0

0.45 0.45 0.45 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.35 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.55 0.55 − − − −

1.9

0.45

−

33

30

− − − −

48 − −

70 − −

− −

− −

Front connection type 4P 3P 2P − 0.75 −

Plug-in type (including plug-in frame) Electric operated 4P 3P 2P type

9.0

− − −

− 2.4

− −

− − − − −

Mechanical interlock (MI)

0.17

243

Appendix

Item Model NV32-SV NV63-CV, NV63-SV (rated current 50A or less) NV63-CV, NV63-SV (rated current 60A, 63A) NV63-HV (rated current 50A or less) NV63-HV (rated current 60A, 63A) NV125-CV NV125-SV NV125-HV NV125-SEV C NV125-HEV NV250-CV • S NV250-SV • NV250-HV H NV50-SVFU • U NV100-CVFU • NV125-SVU UL NV125-HVU NV250-SVU NV250-HVU NV400-CW NV400-SW NV400-SEW/HEW NV400-REW NV630-CW NV630-SW NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW/HEW BV-D BV-DN

Mechanical interlock (MI)

9

9 Appendix 5. Switching the Adjustable Items







Appendix 244

 (*1)  (*1)

 

 









 

 (*1)  (*1)





   

 (*2)  (*2)  (*2)  (*2) 



 



Rated voltage

 

PAL



Notes *1 Available only for models with pre-alarm module. *2 Use the OPERATION CHECK & SETUP UNIT Y-350. Consult Mitsubishi for details. Remarks: Unless otherwise specified, the electronic breaker is adjusted to the following settings as a default. (1) Rated current: maximum value (2) LTD tripping characteristics:maximum value (3) STD tripping characteristics (current, operating time):maximum value (4) Instantaneous tripping characteristics:maximum value (5) PAL:minimum value (6) Rated sensitivity current:maximum value (7) Leakage operation time (for time-delay type):maximum value

9

Rated Operating time (for time-delay type)

 (*2)  (*2)  (*2)  (*2)

Instantaneous tripping characteristics

 

Rated sensitivity

NF125-SEV/HEV NF250-SEV/HEV NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW MCCB NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1600-SEW NF800-SDW, NF630-SWU/HWU NF125-SGV/LGV/HGV NF160-SGV/LGV/HGV NF250-SGV/LGV/HGV NV125-SEV/HEV NV250-SEV/HEV NV400-SEW/HEW/REW NV630-SEW/HEW ELCB NV800-SEW/HEW NV32-SV, NV63-CV/SV/HV NV125-CV/SV/HV NV250-CV/SV/HV NV400-CW/SW, NV630-CW

STD tripping characteristics

Applicable model

LTD tripping characteristics

Adjustable item

Rated current

(1) Adjustable rated current and tripping characteristics items

9 Appendix

(2) Adjusting the rated current and tripping characteristics Item

Electronic type

Application

400 to 1600A frame

125 to 250A frame

Rated current label

Example of selector layout

Trip (PTT) button Replacement label OVER LED (red) 70% LED (green)

OVER LED (red)

Trip (PTT) button

PAL LED (yellow) 70% LED (green) Replacement label

Current setting label Clear cover

Trip characteristics selector

Trip characteristics selector

Overcurrent operation test/ Characteristics setting connector

Rated current (step type)

175 187.5

200 212.5

162.5 150 137.5 125

(A)

Ir

Current setting (step type)

6 225 237.5 5 250 4 3 2

8 10 12

(x250A)

250 300 .7 .8 350 225

14

Ii

Variable current setting (Co variable type)

14 (xIr)

Instantaneous tripping current (step type)

200 TEST

In(A)

3

.5

4 56

STD tripping current

76 8 4 10

8 10

12 14 16

12 Ir(×400A) Is(×In, Ir) Ii(×400A) .9 100 .1 .2 .8 60 150 .3 12 .7 1.0 TL(s) .06 Ts(s) IP(×In, Ir)

Instantaneous tripping current

Pre-alarm current

Turn the handle to OFF before starting the settings. q Set the arrow of each characteristic’s setting dial to the required scale position. Always set the dial arrow within the bold lines of the setting value. If stopped at the middle, the adjacent setting value may be applied. Use a 0.5mm thick flat-tip screwdriver with a 3mm or less tip width. Turn the screwdriver at 0.05N·m or less. w From the replacement labels, select the rated current label with the same value as the setting value. e Replace the rated current label. r Close the cover and tighten the screw.

In case of 125 to 250A frame

Setter and tester

(Application: Electronic (effective value detection) breaker) The following items can be set and tested using the breaker test and setter Y-350. ¡LTD and STD characteristics settings ¡Long-term operation test (variable signal) ¡Short-term operation test (fixed signal) *1 ¡Instantaneous operation test (fixed signal) ¡Pre-alarm operation test (variable signal) *2

*1. Fixed signal which is 1.5 times the STD trip current. *2. Only for models with pre-alarm module.

Turn the handle to OFF before starting the settings. q Open the clear cover. w Set the arrow of each characteristic’s setting dial to the required scale position. For values other than instantaneous tripping current and adjustable current settings, which can be adjusted at any time, always set the dial arrow within the bold lines of the setting value. If stopped at the middle, the adjacent setting value may be applied. Use a 0.6mm thick flat-tip screwdriver with a 4.5mm or less tip width. Turn the screwdriver at 0.05N·m or less. e From the replacement labels, select the rated current label with the same value as the setting value. r Replace the rated current label. t Close the clear cover.

In case of 400 to 1600A frame (Application: Electronic (effective value detection) breaker) The following items can be tested using the tester Y-250. ¡Long-term operation test (variable signal) ¡Short-term operation test (fixed signal) ¡Instantaneous operation test (fixed signal) ¡Pre-alarm operation test (variable signal)

Appendix

Example of making a selection

LTD STD operating time operating time

Y-250

9 245

9 Appendix (3) Selecting the rated voltage, rated sensitivity and operating time Model

Selector layout

Voltage selection

Sensitivity and operation time selection

Operating time selector (time-delay type) Sensitivity selector

Use for the circuit voltage within the rated voltage.

Turn the handle to OFF before changing the selection.

Use for the circuit voltage within the rated voltage.

Turn the handle to OFF before changing the selection.

3-step sensitivity ELCB selector type

Sensitivity selector Operating time selector (time-delay type)

Appendix

View of selection operation

9 246

9 Appendix

6. Breaker Mounting Screw Dimensions j MCCB • MCB Class

Model

C•S•H

NF50-SVFU NF32-SV, NF63-CV, NF63-SV, NF63-HV NF125-CV, NF125-SV, NF125-HV NF100-CVFU, NF125-SVU NF125-HVU NF125-SEV, NF125-HEV NF250-CV, NF250-SV, NF250-HV NF250-SEV, NF250-HEV NF250-SVU, NF250-HVU NF125-SGV, NF125-LGV, NF125-HGV NF160-SGV, NF160-LGV, NF160-HGV NF250-SGV, NF250-LGV, NF250-HGV NF30-CS NF225-CWU

R•U

NF400-CW, NF400-SW NF400-SWU, NF400-HWU NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW NF630-HEW, NF630-REW NF800-CEW, NF800-SEW NF800-HEW, NF800-REW NF630-SWU, NF630-HWU NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW NF125-RGV NF250-RGV NF125-UV, NF250-UV NF125-UV (4P), NF250-UV (4P) NF400-UEW (3P) NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW BH BH-P BH-D6 BH BH-DN KB-D BH-D10

Hole depth A 56

Wood screw Front Rear connection (round wood screw) type for front connection connection type – M4×0.7×65 (note) –

Plug-in type

Required quantity per unit

–

1P –

2P 2

3P 2

4P –

2

2

4

2

4

2 2

2

–

2

4

45

4.1×58

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

–

45

4.1×58

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×73

–

10

4.1×25

M4×0.7×20

M4×0.7×20

–

–

45

4.1×58

M4×0.7×55

–

–

–

47

–

M6×60

M6×72

M6×72

–

4

4

4

59

–

M6×72

M6×85

M6×85

–

4

4

4

15

–

M6×35

M6×40

M6×35

–

4

4

4

18.5 18.5

– –

M8×40 M8×40

M8×40 M8×40

M8×40 –

– –

4 4

4 4

4 4

45

–

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

–

2

2

–

45/61 45 47/156 15/112 – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

M4×0.7×55/73 M4×0.7×55 M6×65/174 M6×35/132 – – – – – –

M4×0.7×55/73 M4×0.7×55 M6×72/181 M6×40/137 – – – – – –

M4×0.7×55/73 M4×0.7×55 M6×72/181 M6×35/132 – – – – – –

– – – – – – – – – –

4 2 – – – – – – – –

4 2 4 4 – – – – – –

– 4 – 6 – – – – – –

2 For plug-in type 4

For plug-in type 4

Remarks: 1. The mounting shown in the sections are enclosed with the MCCB. The mounting screws for the plug-in connection are enclosed with the plug-in terminal block. All other mounting screws must be prepared by the user. 2. All mounting screws other than the hexagon socket bolts and hexagon bolts are P-type panhead screws. 3. For models with two types of mounting screws, the screw length differs on the supply side and load side. Hole depth 4. The plug-in type is not available for NF800-UEW. A Note For the P-type panhead screw, use a type with a spring washer and flat washer (small round) combination, or a P-type panhead screw with spring washer and flat washer.

j ELCB • RCCB • RCBO Model

NV50-SVFU NV32-SV, NV63-CV, NV63-SV, NV63-HV NV125-CV, NV125-SV, NV125-HV NV100-CVFU, NV125-SVU, NV125-HVU NV125-SEV, NV125-HEV NV250-CV, NV250-SV, NV250-HV NV NV250-SEV, NV250-HEV, NV250-SVU, NV250-HVU NV400-CW, NV400-SW NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW BV-D BV BV-DN

Hole depth A 56

Wood screw Screw for steel plates (P-type panhead screw) (round wood screw) for front connection Front connection type Rear connection type Plug-in type – – – M4×0.7×65 (note)

Required quantity per unit 2, 3P 4P 2 –

45

4.1×58

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

2

45

4.1×58

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55

M4×0.7×55 M4×0.7×73

For plug-in type 4

47

–

M6×60

M6×72

M6×72

4

4

59

–

M6×72

M6×85

M6×85

4

4

15 – –

– – –

M6×35 – –

M6×40 – –

M6×35 – –

4 – –

4 – –

2

4

4

Remarks: 1. The mounting shown in the sections are enclosed with the ELCB. Note For the P-type panhead screw, use a type with a spring washer and flat washer (small round) combination, or a P-type panhead screw with spring washer and flat washer.

Appendix

Class

9 247

9 Appendix 7. List of Mold Surface Temperature-rise Values C

B A

j MCCB

(K)

(K)

Measurement point

Model

Conducting current Cover surface Base side (A) (B)

Measurement point

Handle (C)

Line terminal

Load terminal

Model

Handle (C)

Line terminal

Load terminal

NF32-SV

32A

14

38

12

36

37

NF400-CW

400A

16

25

16

47

37

NF63-CV

63A

15

42

14

39

44

NF400-SW

400A

20

27

10

46

37

NF63-SV

63A

15

39

12

41

44

NF400-SEW

400A

14

22

9

35

31

NF63-HV

63A

15

42

12

41

49

NF400-HEW

400A

14

23

8

34

32

NF125-CV

125A

13

29

9

43

42

NF400-REW

400A

15

23

9

35

32

NF125-SV

125A

14

32

10

44

40

NF400-UEW

400A

19

28

13

42

33

NF125-HV

125A

16

33

11

49

42

NF630-CW

630A

23

32

15

52

52

NF250-CV

250A

19

35

13

46

45

NF630-SW

630A

23

33

16

54

52

NF250-SV

250A

20

36

13

47

45

NF630-SEW

630A

22

31

14

51

45

NF250-HV

250A

20

36

13

49

46

NF630-HEW

630A

20

31

13

50

44

NF30-CS

30A

18

15

5

23

33

NF630-REW

630A

21

31

13

51

44

NF125-SGV

125A

20

35

13

42

49

NF800-CEW

800A

21

30

13

45

40

NF250-SGV

250A

20

36

13

49

50

NF800-SDW

800A

18

28

12

46

44

NF160-SGV

160A

20

35

13

40

44

NF800-SEW

800A

21

30

12

45

41

NF800-HEW

800A

22

31

12

47

42

NF800-REW

800A

21

30

13

46

42

NF800-UEW

800A

25

35

16

51

46

j ELCB

(K)

(K)

Measurement point

Model

Appendix

Conducting current Cover surface Base side (A) (B)

Conducting current Cover surface Base side (A) (B)

Measurement point

Handle (C)

Line terminal

Load terminal

Model

Conducting current Cover surface Base side (A) (B)

Handle (C)

Line terminal

Load terminal

NV32-SV

32A

15

35

11

36

41

NV400-CW

400A

22

32

11

46

41

NV63-CV

63A

17

32

13

43

41

NV400-SW

400A

23

32

12

47

42

NV63-SV

63A

17

37

13

45

47

NV400-SEW

400A

16

23

10

36

34

NV63-HV

63A

17

35

13

43

43

NV400-HEW

400A

15

22

11

35

35

NV125-CV

125A

13

30

13

47

43

NV400-REW

400A

15

22

10

36

35

NV125-SV

125A

14

30

15

45

43

NV630-CW

630A

24

34

17

54

52

NV125-HV

125A

14

32

14

42

43

NV630-SW

630A

23

33

16

53

53

NV250-CV

250A

21

37

14

43

44

NV630-SEW

630A

23

34

17

54

53

NV250-SV

250A

21

39

18

47

43

NV630-HEW

630A

22

33

17

54

52

NV250-HV

250A

23

38

17

48

43

NV800-SEW

800A

29

40

13

53

46

Notes *1 The connected wire size follows JIS C 8201 Ann.2 Standards. The temperature rise value will vary according to the size of the connected wire. *2 This table shows the temperature-rise values. The ambient temperature must be added for the actual measurement value. *3 These are examples of the measurement values, and are not guaranteed values. Use these as reference data.

9 248

9 Appendix

8. Ordering Information  Molded Case Circuit Breakers Model

NF250-SV

NF

 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

C

Economy class

S

Standard class

H

High-performance class

U

Ultra current-limiting class

Model

NV250-SV

Number of poles

Number of poles 2P, 3P, 4P

3P

200A Motor protection

MB Rated voltage

Economy class

S

Standard class

H

High-performance class

U

Ultra current-limiting class

DSN-type switches

DSN

Rated current

NV

C

3P

Please specify the rated current even for rated current adjustable types

Please specify MB for Motor Protection Breakers

Please specify DC voltage for use in DC circuit

Rated current

200A Motor protection

MB

2P

NV

1ø2W

3P

NV

1ø2W 1ø3W 3ø3W

4P

NV

3ø4W

Please specify the rated current even for rated current adjustable types

Please specify MB for Motor Protection Breakers

Rated voltage AC

AC

100-440V 200-440V

Please specify applicable marine standard

Rated sensitivity current

100 / 200 / 500mA Connection method

B Built-in accessories

PAL Internal accessories

AL, SHT (110VAC) External accessories

Special-purpose breakers

Quantity

F

Front connection

SL

Solderless (box) terminal

B

Rear connection

PM

Plug-in

PAL

Pre-alarm (contact output)

AL

Alarm switch

AX

Auxiliary switch

SHT

Shunt trip (specify rated coil voltage)

UVT

Undervoltage trip (specify rated coil voltage)

SLT

Lead-wire terminal block

MD

Electrical operation device

F/S/ V

Operating handle

S/I/ W

Enclosure box

MI

Mechanical interlock

TC

Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)

LC / HL HL-S CH

10

Card holder

Mag Only

DC400V

DC use (specify 400, 440, 500, 550 or 600VDC)

400Hz

B

F

Front connection

SL

Solderless (box) terminal

B

Rear connection

PM

Plug-in

Type of residual current protection

Blank

High-speed type

Specify

Time-delay type

Built-in accessories

MG

Insulation switch

EAL

Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch

TBM

Test button module

PAL

Pre-alarm module

MG Internal accessories

AL

Alarm switch

AX

Auxiliary switch

AX, SLT, TBM

UVT

Undervoltage trip (specify rated coil voltage)

SLT

Lead-wire terminal block

MD

Electrical operation device

External accessories

F/S/ V

Handle lock device

Mag Only (specify AC or DC and rated current)

Low-inst

Connection method

30mA 100 / 200 / 500mA

Quantity

10

Operating handle

MI

Mechanical interlock

TC

Terminal cover (TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)

LC / HL HL-S CH

Appendix

Standard

Handle lock device Card holder

9

400Hz use Low-inst (specify AC or DC and Inst. %)

249

9 Appendix d Circuit Protector (CP30-BA) Model CP30-BA

Internal circuit 1

Number of poles 1P 1

1P

Operating characteristics M

Inline type

Inline type with auxiliary switch (general load) type with auxiliary 21 * Inline switch (microload) (Note 2)

2

2P 3P (Note 1)

6

Relay type shunt tripping

Inline type with alarm switch (general load) * Inline type with auxiliary 91 switch (microload) (Note 2)

9

I M MD S SD F

Rated current or rated operational voltage 3A

Instantaneous type Medium-speed type Medium-speed type with inertial delay (Note 1) Low-speed type Low-speed type with inertial delay (Note 1) High-speed type

Rated operational voltage (for shunt tripping) 100-200V 100-200VAC and 100VDC common 24-48V 24-48VDC common

0.1A 0.25A 0.3A 0.5A 1A

2A

3A

7A

10A

15A 20A

Connection method

No symbol Screw terminal

5A

T

Metal tab terminal

30A Shaded parts are standard inventory.

Notes *1 3-pole and inertial delay models are dedicated for AC. *2 If an auxiliary switch (AX) or alarm switch (AL) used for a 125VAC 0.5A or less circuit is required, select the microload type indicated with an asterisk*. *3 The relay type shunt trip is subject to CCC. This is a UL (cURus) and CE Marking As a standard, this product is a UL (cURus), compliant product. Example 1. CP30-BA 1P 1-M 3A (example of inline type, medium-speed, 1-pole part, 3A, screw CCC, CE Marking compliant product. terminal specifications)



Mandatory items are indicated with a bold box. Always specify these items.

Unless specified, all other items will be manufactured with standard Mitsubishi specifications.

d UL 489 Listed Molded Case Circuit Breakers Model

Number of poles

Rated current

Connection method

Internal accessories

Number of units

NF250-SVU

3P

200A

F

AL, SHT(AC100-240V)

10 units

2P 3P

F Crimp terminal SL Solderless terminal BAR Bar terminal

AL Alarm switch AX Auxiliary switch Shunt tripping device SHT (Designate rated voltage for coil) Undervoltage tripping device UVT (Designate rated voltage for coil) Vertical lead-wire SLT terminal block * When ordering two, designate as AL2 or AX2. For the microload type, designate AL-B or AX-B.

External accessories

F•V•S•C Operation handle MI Mechanical interlock Terminal cover TC (TC-L(*), TC-S) HL•HL-S Handle lock * For the 30 to 250A frame 2-pole or 3-pole TC-L, the specifications will be set according to the rated current.

d UL 489 Listed Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Model

Number of poles

Rated current

Rated voltage

Rated sensitivity current

Connection method

Internal accessories

Number of units

NV250-SVU

3P

200A

AC120-480V

100 • 300 • 500mA

F

AX, SLT

10 units

AC240V AC120-240V AC120-480V

30 50 100 100 • 200 • 500mA 100 • 300 • 500mA

F Crimp terminal SL Solderless terminal BAR Bar terminal

Appendix

2P 3P

9 250

AL Alarm switch AX Auxiliary switch Shunt tripping device SHT (Designate rated voltage for coil) Undervoltage tripping device UVT (Designate rated voltage for coil) Vertical lead-wire SLT terminal block * When ordering two, designate as AL2 or AX2. For the microload type, designate AL-B or AX-B.

External accessories

F•V•S•C Operation handle MI Mechanical interlock Terminal cover TC (TC-L (*), TC-S) HL•HL-S Handle lock * For the 30 to 250A frame 2-pole or 3-pole TC-L, the specifications will be set according to the rated current.

9 Appendix

9. Melshort 2 A Smarter, Easier Way to Select Breakers

This software program ensures the easy selection of low-voltage circuit breakers according to the required rated breaking capacity and related equipment.

Calculation and selection software for low-voltage circuit breakers

Preparation of single-line diagram

Coodination between high-voltage protection equipments

Short-circuit current calculation

Examination of cascade interruption combination

Examination of selective interraption

Advantages The program's menu allows not only short-circuit current calculations, but also the examination of various protection coordination. ●Preparation of single-line connection diagrams. ●Short-circuit calculations. ●Automatic selection of breaker type. ●Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination. ●Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination. ●Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection

equipment. coordination with motor start current.

●Selection Efficiency Improved Simple, accurate and fast operation is ensured as a result of being able to examine the coordination between various protection systems, and being able to select breakers interactively on the screen.

●Software Updates Users can download the latest software updates by accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page.

Appendix

●Contents

http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/lvs

●Protection

■Products Menu

■Computer Requirements

Low-voltage circuit breakers: MCCBs, ELCBs, ACBs, MCBs, Contactors, Thermal relays, High-voltage OCRs

Operating system: Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000/XP CPU : 166 MHz or faster RAM memory size: min 32 MB Free hard disk capacity: min 50 MB Display resolution: min 640 x 480 dots CD-ROM Drive:2x or higher

9 251

9 Appendix 10. Low Voltage Products Website

Appendix

WS-V Series Next-generation MCCB and ELCB, AE-SW Series ACB, DIN Series MCB

9 252

9 Appendix

Molded Case Earth Leakage

Appendix

UL 489 Listed Circuit Breakers

9 253

Low Voltage Circuit Breakers Corporation Name Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. PROGRESSIVE TRADING CORPORATION Bangladesh ELECTRO MECH AUTOMATION& ENGINEERING LTD. Belarus Tehnikon Belgium Koning & Hartman B.V. Cambodia DHINIMEX CO.,LTD Chile Rhona S.A. Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. BeiJing Branch Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. ShenZhen Branch China Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. GuangZhou Branch Mitsubishi Electric Automation (China) Ltd. ChengDu Branch Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Hong Kong) Ltd. Proelectrico Representaciones S.A. Colombia AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEMS S.R.O Czech Republic BEIJER ELECTRONICS A/S Denmark Cairo Electrical Group Egypt Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. France Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Germany KALAMARAKIS - SAPOUNAS S.A. Greece UTECO Meltrade Ltd. Hungary Mitsubishi Electric India Private Limited India P. T. Sahabat Indonesia Indonesia Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Ireland Gino Industries Ltd. Israel Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italy Kazpromavtomatika Kazakhstan Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd Korea Laos AROUNKIT CORPORATION IMPORT- EXPORT SOLE CO.,LTD Lebanon Comptoir d'Electricite Generale-Liban Lithuania Rifas UAB Malaysia Mittric Sdn Bhd Malta ALFATRADE LTD Maroco SCHIELE MAROC Myanmar Peace Myanmar Electric Co.,Ltd. Nepal Watt&Volt House Netherlands Imtech Marine & Offshore B.V. North America Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. Norway Scanelec AS Middle East Comptoir d'Electricite Generale-InternationalArab Countries & Cyprus S.A.L. Country / Region Australia

Pakistan Philippines Poland Republic of Moldova Romania Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore Slovakia Slovenia South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand Tunisia Turkey United Kingdom Uruguay Venezuela Vietnam

Prince Electric Co.

Address 348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia Haque Tower, 2nd floor, 610/11,Jubilee Road, Chittagong, Bangladesh Purana Paltan Lane, (VIP Road), Rokeya Mansion(6th floor), Room#702,Dhaka-1000, Bangladesh Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705, BY-220030 Minsk, Belarus Woluwelaan 31, BE-1800 Vilvoorde, Belgium #245, St. Tep Phan, Phnom Penh, Cambodia Vte. Agua Santa 4211 Casilla 30-D (P.O. Box) Vina del Mar, Chile Mitsubishi Electric Automation Building, No.1386 Hongqiao Road, Shanghai, 200336 9/F, Office Tower1 Henderson Centre 18 Jianguomennei Dajie DongCheng district BeiJing 100005 Room 2512--2516, Great China International Exchange Square, Jintian Rd.S., Futian District, Shenzhen, 518034 Room 1609, North Tower, The Hub Center, No.1068, Xing Gang East Road, Haizhu District, Guang Zhou, China 510335 Block B, Room 407-408, Shangri-La Center Offeice Builiding, No.9 BinJiang East Road, Chengdu, China 610021 20/F., Cityplaza One, 111 king's Road, Taikoo shing, Hong Kong Carrera 42 # 75-367 Bod 109 Itagui Colombia Technologická 374/6, CZ-708 00 Ostrava - Pustkovec LYKKEGARDSVEJ 17, DK-4000 ROSKILDE 9, Rostoum St. Garden City P.O. Box 165-11516 Maglis El-Shaab, Cairo - Egypt 25, Boulevard des Bouvets, F-92741 Nanterre Cedex Gothaer Str. 8, 40880 Ratingen , Germany IONIAS & NEROMILOU STR., CHAMOMILOS ACHARNES, ATHENS, 13678 Greece 5, MAVROGENOUS STR., 18542 PIRAEUS, Greece Fertö utca 14. HU-1107 Budapest, Hungary 2nd Floor, Tower A&B, Cyber Greens, DLF Cyber City, DLF Phase-III, Gurgaon - 122 022 Haryana, India P.O.Box 5045 Kawasan Industri Pergudangan, Jakarta, Indonesia Westgate Business Park, Ballymount, IRL-Dublin 24, Ireland 26, Ophir Street IL-32235 Haifa, Israel Viale Colleoni 7, I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI), Italy ul. Zhambyla 28, KAZ - 100017 Karaganda 9F Gangseo Hangang xi-tower, 401 Yangcheon-ro, Gangseo-gu, Seoul 07528 Korea SAPHANMO VILLAGE. SAYSETHA DISTRICT, VIENTIANE CAPITAL, LAOS Cebaco Center - Block A Autostrade Dora, P.O. Box 11-2597 Beirut - Lebanon Tinklu 29A, LT-5300 Panevezys, Lithuania No. 5 Jalan Pemberita U1/49, Temasya Industrial Park, Glenmarie 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia 99 PAOLA HILL, PAOLA PLA 1702, Malta KM 7,2 NOUVELLE ROUTE DE RABAT AIN SEBAA, 20600 Casablanca, Maroco NO137/139 Botahtaung Pagoda Road, Botahtaung Town Ship 11161, Yangon, Myanmar KHA 2-65, Volt House Dillibazar Post Box: 2108, Kathmandu, Nepal Sluisjesdijk 155, NL-3087 AG Rotterdam, Netherlands 500 Corporate Woods Parkway, Vernon Hills, IL 60061 USA Leirvikasen 43B, NO-5179 Godvik, Norway Cebaco Center - Block A Autostrade Dora P.O. Box 11-1314 Beirut - Lebanon 2-P, GULBERG II, LAHORE - 54660 PAKISTAN

AL-KAMAL GROUP Edison Electric Integrated, Inc. Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Polish Branch Intehsis SRL Sirius Trading & Services SRL Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Moscow Branch Center of Electrical Goods Mitsubishi Electric Asia Pte. Ltd. PROCONT, Presov SIMAP Inea RBT d.o.o. CBI-electric: low voltage Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Spanish Branch Euro Energy Components AB TriElec AG Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd United Trading & Import Co., Ltd. MOTRA Electric

Office No. 7 & 8, 1st Floor, Barkat Ali Khan Center, 101 Circular Road, Lahore. Pakistan 24th Fl. Galleria Corporate Center, Edsa Cr. Ortigas Ave., Quezon City Metro Manila, Philippines Krakowska 50, 32-083 Balice, Poland bld. Traian 23/1, MD-2060 Kishinev, Moldova RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya Nab. 115054, Moscow, Russia Al-Shuwayer St. Side way of Salahuddin Al-Ayoubi St. P.O. Box 15955 Riyadh 11454 - Saudi Arabia 307 Alexandra Road, Mitsubishi Electric Building, Singapore 159943 Kupelna 1/, SK - 08001 Presov, Slovakia Jana Derku 1671, SK - 91101 Trencin, Slovakia Stegne 11, SI-1000 Ljubljana, Slovenia Private Bag 2016, ZA-1600 Isando Gauteng, South Africa Carretera de Rubí 76-80, E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona), Spain Järnvägsgatan 36, S-434 24 Kungsbacka, Sweden Muehlentalstrasse 136, CH-8201 Schaffhausen 5th Fl., No.105, Wu Kung 3rd, Wu-Ku Hsiang, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. 77/12 Bamrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak Pomprab Bangkok Thailand 3, Résidence Imen, Avenue des Martyrs Mourouj III, 2074 - El Mourouj III Ben Arous, Tunisia Bayraktar Bulvarı Nutuk Sok. No:5, Posta Kutusu34384, GTS TR-34775 Yukan Dudullu-Uemraniye, Istanbul, Turkey Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Travellers Lane, UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB, United Kingdom Fierro Vignoli S.A. Avda. Uruguay 1274 Montevideo Uruguay Adesco S.A. Calle 7 La Urbina Edificio Los Robles Locales C y D Planta Baja, Caracas - Venezuela Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. Head Office Unit01-04, 10th Floor, Vincom Center, 72 Le Thanh Ton Street, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Mitsubishi Electric Vietnam Co., Ltd. Hanoi Branch 6th Floor, Detech Tower, 8 Ton That Thuyet Street, My Dinh 2 Ward, Nam Tu Liem District, Hanoi City, Vietnam

Telephone +61-2-9684-7777 +880-31-624-307 +880-28-321-791 +375(0)17/210 46 26 +32(0)2/2570240 +855-23-997-725 +56-32-2-320-600 +86-21-2322-3030 +86-10-6518-8830 +86-755-2399-8272 +86-20-8923-6730 +86-28-8446-8030 +852-2510-0555 +57-4-4441284 +420 595 691 150 +45(0)46/75 76 66 +20-2-27961337 +33(0)1/55 68 55 68 +49(0) 2102 486-0 +30-2102 406000 +30-211-1206-900 +36(0)1-431-9726 +91-124-4630300 +62-(0)21-6610651-9 +353(0)1-4198800 +972(0)4-867-0656 +39 039-60531 +7-7212-501000 +82-2-3660-9572 +856-20-415899 +961-1-240445 +370(0)45-582-728 +603-5569-3748 +356(0)21-697-816 +212 661 45 15 96 +95-(0)1-202589 +977-1-4411330 +31(0)10-487-19 11 +847-478-2100 +47(0)55-506000 +961-1-240430 +92-(0)42-35752323 +92-(0)42-35753373 +92-(0)42-37631632 +63-(0)2-634-8691 +48(0)12 630 47 00 +373(0)22-66-4242 +40-(0)21-430-40-06 +7 495 721-2070 +966-1-4770149 +65-6473-2308 +421(0)51-7580 611 + 421(0)32 743 04 72 +386(0)1-513-8116 +27-(0)11-9282000 +34(0)93-565-3131 +46(0)300-690040 +41-(0)52-6258425 +886-(0)2-2298-8889 +66-223-4220-3 +216-71 474 599 +90(0)216 526 3990 +44(0)1707-276100 +598-2-902-0808 +58-212-241-9952 +84-8-3910-5945 +84-4-3937-8075

For Safety : Please read the instruction manual carefully before using the products in this catalog.

Wiring and connection must be done by the person have a specialized knowledge of electric construction and wiring.

Y-0720C 1609 printed in Japan oIPp

Revised publication, effective Sep. 2016. Specifications are subject to change without notice. This pamphlet is made from recycled paper.